FIRST EDITION V1
22_DS_OM_EN_USC
©2021 FCA US LLC. All Rights Reserved. Tous droits réservés. Ram is a registered trademark of FCA US LLC.
Ram est une marque déposée de FCA US LLC. App Store is a registered trademark of Apple Inc. Google Play Store is a registered trademark of Google.
2022 RAM 1500 CLASSIC
OWNER’S MANUAL
2022 RAM 1500 CLASSIC
Whether it is providing information about specific product features, taking a tour through your vehicle’s heritage, knowing
what steps to take following an accident or scheduling your next appointment, we know you will find the app an important
extension of your Ram vehicle. Simply download the app, select your make and model and enjoy the ride. To get this app, go
directly to the App Store
®
or Google Play
®
Store and enter the search keyword “ram toolbox” (U.S. residents only).
DOWNLOAD THE MOST UP-TO-DATE OWNER’S MANUAL,
RADIO AND WARRANTY BOOKS
OWNERS.MOPAR.CA
CANADA
MOPAR.COM/OM
U.S.
The driver’s primary responsibility is the safe operation of the vehicle. Driving while distracted can result in loss of vehicle control, resulting in
an accident and personal injury. FCA US LLC strongly recommends that the driver use extreme caution when using any device or feature that
may take their attention off the road. Use of any electrical devices, such as cellular telephones, computers, portable radios, vehicle navigation
or other devices, by the driver while the vehicle is moving is dangerous and could lead to a serious accident. Texting while driving is also
dangerous and should never be done while the vehicle is moving. If you find yourself unable to devote your full attention to vehicle operation, pull
off the road to a safe location and stop your vehicle. Some states or provinces prohibit the use of cellular telephones or texting while driving. It
is always the driver’s responsibility to comply with all local laws.
This Owner’s Manual has been prepared to help you get acquainted with your new Ram brand vehicle and to provide a convenient reference
for common questions.
Not all features shown in this manual may apply to your vehicle. For additional information on accessories to help personalize your vehicle,
visit mopar.com/om (U.S.), owners.mopar.ca (Canada) or your local Ram brand dealer.
DRIVING AND ALCOHOL
Drunk driving is one of the most frequent causes of accidents. Your driving ability can be seriously impaired with blood alcohol levels far
below the legal minimum. If you are drinking, don’t drive. Ride with a designated non-drinking driver, call a cab, a friend or use public
transportation.
WARNING
Driving after drinking can lead to an accident. Your perceptions are less sharp, your reflexes are slower and your judgment is impaired when
you have been drinking. Never drink and then drive.
WARNING: Operating, servicing and maintaining a passenger vehicle or off-highway motor
vehicle can expose you to chemicals including engine exhaust, carbon monoxide, phthalates, and
lead, which are known to the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects or other reproductive
harm. To minimize exposure, avoid breathing exhaust, do not idle the engine except as necessary,
service your vehicle in a well-ventilated area and wear gloves or wash your hands frequently when
servicing your vehicle. For more information go to www.P65Warnings.ca.gov/passenger-vehicle.
This Owner’s Manual illustrates and describes the operation of features and equipment that are either standard or optional on this vehicle.
This manual may also include a description of features and equipment that are no longer available or were not ordered on this vehicle.
Please disregard any features and equipment described in this manual that are not on this vehicle. FCA US LLC reserves the right to make
changes in design and specifications, and/or make additions to or improvements to its products without imposing any obligation upon itself
to install them on products previously manufactured.
With respect to any vehicles sold in Canada, the name FCA US LLC shall be deemed to be deleted and the name FCA Canada Inc. used in
substitution therefore.
This Owner’s Manual is intended to familiarize you with the important features of your vehicle. Your most up-to-date Owner’s Manual,
Navigation/Uconnect manuals and Warranty Booklet can be found by visiting the website on the back cover.
U.S. Residents: If you are the first registered retail owner of your vehicle, you may obtain a complimentary printed copy of the Warranty
Booklet by calling 1-866-726-4636 or by contacting your dealer. Replacement kits can be purchased by visiting www.techauthority.com.
Canadian Residents: If you are the first registered retail owner of your vehicle, you may obtain a complimentary printed copy of the
Warranty Booklet or purchase a replacement kit by calling 1-800-387-1143 or by contacting your dealer.
TABLE OF CONTENTS
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
1 INTRODUCTION.............................................................................................................................. 8
2 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE ..................................................................................15
3 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL ....................................................... 90
4 STARTING AND OPERATING ................................................................................................. 111
5 MULTIMEDIA ...............................................................................................................................149
6 SAFETY .........................................................................................................................................214
7 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY ....................................................................................................264
8 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE ...................................................................................... 285
9 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS ............................................................................................343
10 CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE .....................................................................................................350
11 INDEX .............................................................................................................................................354
22_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 1
2
INTRODUCTION
SYMBOLS KEY...........................................................9
VAN CONVERSIONS/CAMPERS..............................9
CONSUMER INFORMATION — TRUCK-CAMPER
LOADING....................................................................9
VEHICLE MODIFICATIONS/ALTERATIONS.......... 11
SYMBOL GLOSSARY.............................................. 11
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
KEYS ........................................................................ 15
Key Fobs ...........................................................15
SENTRY KEY ........................................................... 18
IGNITION SWITCH .................................................. 19
Ignition Node Module (IGNM) — If Equipped ..19
Keyless Enter ‘n Go™ Ignition (If Equipped)...20
REMOTE START — IF EQUIPPED .......................... 21
How To Use Remote Start................................22
To Exit Remote Start Mode .............................22
Remote Start Front Defrost Activation —
If Equipped........................................................23
Remote Start Comfort Systems —
If Equipped........................................................23
Remote Start Windshield Wiper De–Icer
Activation — If Equipped ..................................24
Remote Start Abort Message ..........................24
VEHICLE SECURITY SYSTEM.................................24
To Arm The System ..........................................24
To Disarm The System.....................................24
Rearming Of The System .................................25
Security System Manual Override...................25
DOORS ....................................................................25
Manual Door Locks ..........................................25
Power Door Locks — If Equipped ....................26
Keyless Enter ‘n Go™ — Passive Entry
(If Equipped) ....................................................26
Automatic Doors Unlock — If Equipped ..........28
Automatic Door Locks — If Equipped..............28
Child-Protection Door Lock..............................28
STEERING WHEEL ..................................................29
Tilt Steering Column.........................................29
Heated Steering Wheel — If Equipped............29
UCONNECT VOICE RECOGNITION
QUICK TIPS..............................................................30
Introducing Voice Recognition.........................30
Basic Voice Commands ...................................30
Get Started .......................................................30
Additional Information .....................................31
SEATS...................................................................... 31
Manual Front Seat Adjustment.......................31
Manual Rear Seat Adjustment........................32
Power Driver Seat Adjustment —
If Equipped .......................................................33
Heated Seats — If Equipped............................34
Ventilated Seats — If Equipped .......................35
Plastic Grocery Bag Retainers
(Regular Cab Models) ......................................35
Head Restraints ...............................................35
DRIVER ADJUSTABLE PEDALS —
IF EQUIPPED .......................................................... 37
MIRRORS................................................................ 37
Inside Rearview Mirror.....................................37
Illuminated Vanity Mirror — If Equipped .........38
Outside Mirrors ................................................39
Driver's Outside Automatic Dimming
Mirror — If Equipped.........................................39
Power Mirrors — If Equipped ...........................40
Power Folding Outside Mirrors For
Standard — If Equipped ...................................40
Trailer Towing Mirrors — If Equipped .............41
Heated Mirrors — If Equipped .........................41
22_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 2
3
UNIVERSAL GARAGE DOOR OPENER
(HOMELINK®) — IF EQUIPPED............................. 41
Before You Begin Programming
HomeLink®.......................................................42
Erasing All The HomeLink® Channels ............42
Identifying Whether You Have A Rolling
Code Or Non-Rolling Code Device...................42
Programming HomeLink® To A Garage
Door Opener .....................................................42
Programming HomeLink® To A
Miscellaneous Device ......................................44
Reprogramming A Single HomeLink®
Button ...............................................................44
Canadian/Gate Operator Programming .........45
Security .............................................................45
Troubleshooting Tips........................................46
EXTERIOR LIGHTS ................................................. 46
Headlight Switch ..............................................46
Multifunction Lever ..........................................47
Daytime Running Lights (DRLs) —
If Equipped........................................................47
High/Low Beam Switch....................................48
Automatic High Beam Headlamp
Control — If Equipped.......................................48
Flash-To-Pass....................................................48
Automatic Headlights — If Equipped...............48
Parking Lights And Panel Lights......................49
Headlights On With Wipers..............................49
Headlight Delay ................................................49
Lights-On Reminder .........................................49
Fog Lights — If Equipped .................................49
Turn Signals ..................................................50
Lane Change Assist — If Equipped..................50
Cargo Light With Bed Lights — If Equipped ...50
Battery Saver....................................................51
INTERIOR LIGHTS ..................................................51
Courtesy Lights — If Equipped.........................51
Illuminated Approach.......................................52
WINDSHIELD WIPERS AND WASHERS...............53
Windshield Wiper Operation ...........................53
Rain Sensing Wipers — If Equipped ................54
CLIMATE CONTROLS .............................................54
Automatic Climate Control Descriptions
And Functions...................................................54
Manual Climate Control Descriptions And
Functions .........................................................57
Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) —
If Equipped .......................................................60
Climate Voice Recognition...............................60
Operating Tips .................................................61
INTERIOR STORAGE AND EQUIPMENT ...............62
Storage..............................................................62
USB/MP3 Control.............................................66
Electrical Power Outlets...................................67
Power Inverter — If Equipped ..........................69
WINDOWS .............................................................. 69
Power Windows — If Equipped ........................69
Automatic Window Features ...........................70
Reset Auto-Up ..................................................70
Window Lockout Switch
(Four Door Models Only)..................................71
Power Sliding Rear Window — If Equipped.....71
Manual Sliding Rear Window — If Equipped ..71
Wind Buffeting .................................................71
POWER SUNROOF — IF EQUIPPED ..................... 72
Opening And Closing The Sunroof ..................72
Pinch Protect Feature ......................................72
Venting Sunroof................................................72
Sunshade Operation........................................73
Ignition Off Operation.......................................73
Sunroof Maintenance ......................................73
HOOD....................................................................... 73
To Open The Hood............................................73
To Close The Hood ...........................................73
TAILGATE ................................................................ 74
Opening.............................................................74
Closing ..............................................................74
Tailgate Removal..............................................74
PICKUP BOX .......................................................... 76
Bed Rail Tie-Down System — If Equipped ......77
22_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 3
4
RAMBOX — IF EQUIPPED...................................... 78
Locking And Unlocking RamBox......................79
RamBox Cargo Storage Bins............................79
RamBox Safety Warning ..................................80
Bed Extender — If Equipped ............................81
TRI-FOLD TONNEAU COVER — IF EQUIPPED ...... 83
Tri-Fold Tonneau Cover Removal ....................84
Tri-Fold Tonneau Cover Installation ................86
Tri-Fold Tonneau Cover Cleaning ....................89
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR
INSTRUMENT PANEL
BASE INSTRUMENT CLUSTER .............................. 90
Base Instrument Cluster Descriptions............91
PREMIUM INSTRUMENT CLUSTER...................... 92
Premium Instrument Cluster Descriptions .....93
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DISPLAY ........................ 94
Instrument Cluster Display Controls ...............94
Oil Life Reset ....................................................95
Display Menu Items .........................................96
Battery Saver On/Battery Saver Mode
Message — Electrical Load Reduction
Actions — If Equipped.................................... 101
WARNING LIGHTS AND MESSAGES .................102
Red Warning Lights ....................................... 102
Yellow Warning Lights ................................... 104
Yellow Indicator Lights .................................. 107
Green Indicator Lights................................... 108
White Indicator Lights ................................... 109
Blue Indicator Lights ..................................... 109
ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM — OBD II...... 109
Onboard Diagnostic System (OBD II)
Cybersecurity ................................................. 109
EMISSIONS INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE
PROGRAMS ....................................................... 110
STARTING AND OPERATING
STARTING THE ENGINE ..................................... 111
Automatic Transmission ............................... 111
Tip Start Feature .......................................... 111
AutoPark ........................................................ 111
If Engine Fails To Start ................................. 113
Cold Weather Operation
(Below –22°F Or −30°C) ............................ 113
After Starting ................................................. 113
ENGINE BLOCK HEATER — IF EQUIPPED ......... 114
ENGINE BREAK-IN RECOMMENDATIONS ........ 114
PARKING BRAKE ................................................ 114
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION............................. 115
Key Ignition Park Interlock — If Equipped.... 116
Brake/Transmission Shift Interlock (BTSI)
System ........................................................... 116
8-Speed Automatic Transmission ................ 116
FOUR-WHEEL DRIVE OPERATION —
IF EQUIPPED ........................................................ 120
Four-Position Electronically-Shifted
Transfer Case ................................................ 120
LIMITED-SLIP DIFFERENTIAL ............................122
FUEL SAVER TECHNOLOGY — 5.7L ENGINES
ONLY (IF EQUIPPED)............................................122
ELECTRIC POWER STEERING ............................122
CRUISE CONTROL SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED.....123
Cruise Control................................................ 123
PARKSENSE REAR PARK ASSIST
SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED ....................................125
ParkSense Sensors....................................... 125
ParkSense Display ........................................ 125
ParkSense Warning Display ......................... 128
Enabling And Disabling ParkSense.............. 128
Operation With A Trailer................................ 128
Service The ParkSense Rear Park Assist
System ........................................................... 128
Cleaning The ParkSense System ................. 128
ParkSense System Usage Precautions........ 129
PARKVIEW REAR BACK UP CAMERA ...............130
REFUELING THE VEHICLE ..................................131
Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message ................... 132
VEHICLE LOADING...............................................132
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR) ......... 132
Payload .......................................................... 132
Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR)................ 132
Tire Size ......................................................... 132
Rim Size......................................................... 132
Inflation Pressure.......................................... 132
Curb Weight................................................... 133
Loading .......................................................... 133
22_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 4
5
TRAILER TOWING ................................................133
Common Towing Definitions......................... 133
Trailer Hitch Type and Maximum
Trailer Weight................................................. 136
Trailer Towing Weights
(Maximum Trailer Weight Ratings)............... 136
Trailer And Tongue Weight ........................... 136
Towing Requirements .................................. 137
Towing Tips ................................................... 141
SNOWPLOW ........................................................142
RECREATIONAL TOWING
(BEHIND MOTORHOME) .....................................143
Towing This Vehicle Behind Another
Vehicle............................................................ 143
Recreational Towing — Two-Wheel Drive
Models ........................................................... 143
Recreational Towing — Four-Wheel Drive
Models ........................................................... 144
DRIVING TIPS .......................................................146
Driving On Slippery Surfaces ....................... 146
Driving Through Water .................................. 146
Off-Road Driving Tips .................................... 147
MULTIMEDIA
UCONNECT SYSTEMS ........................................ 149
CYBERSECURITY ................................................ 149
UCONNECT SETTINGS......................................... 150
Customer Programmable Features.............. 150
UCONNECT INTRODUCTION ............................... 169
System Overview .......................................... 169
Safety And General Information................... 171
UCONNECT MODES............................................. 172
Steering Wheel Audio Controls ................. 172
Radio Mode .................................................. 173
Media Mode .................................................. 180
Phone Mode ................................................. 182
CONNECTED VEHICLE SERVICES —
IF EQUIPPED ....................................................... 192
Is My Vehicle Connected?............................. 192
Introduction To Connected Vehicle
Services ........................................................ 193
Getting Started With Connected Vehicle
Services ........................................................ 194
Using SiriusXM Guardian™ .......................... 196
Manage My SiriusXM Guardian™
Account .......................................................... 207
CONNECTED SERVICES FAQS ...........................207
Connected Services SOS FAQs —
If Equipped ................................................... 207
Connected Services Remote Door
Lock/Unlock FAQs ........................................ 207
Connected Services Roadside Assistance
FAQs .............................................................. 208
Connected Services Send & Go FAQs —
If Equipped ................................................... 208
Connected Services Vehicle Finder FAQs ... 208
Connected Services Stolen Vehicle
Assistance FAQs — If Equipped ................... 209
Connected Services Remote Vehicle
Start FAQs ..................................................... 209
Connected Services Remote Horn &
Lights FAQs.................................................... 210
Connected Services Account
FAQs — If Equipped ....................................... 210
Data Collection & Privacy ............................. 212
RADIO OPERATION AND MOBILE PHONES......213
Regulatory And Safety Information.............. 213
22_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 5
6
SAFETY
SAFETY FEATURES ..............................................214
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) ..................... 214
Electronic Brake Control (EBC) System ...... 215
AUXILIARY DRIVING SYSTEMS ..........................221
Tire Pressure Monitoring System
(TPMS)............................................................ 221
OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS.....................224
Occupant Restraint Systems Features ....... 224
Important Safety Precautions....................... 224
Seat Belt Systems ........................................ 225
Supplemental Restraint Systems (SRS) ...... 233
Child Restraints ........................................... 242
SAFETY TIPS ......................................................260
Transporting Passengers.............................. 260
Transporting Pets ....................................... 260
Connected Vehicles....................................... 260
Safety Checks You Should Make Inside
The Vehicle ................................................... 261
Periodic Safety Checks You Should
Make Outside The Vehicle............................ 262
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
HAZARD WARNING FLASHERS ........................ 264
ASSIST AND SOS MIRROR — IF EQUIPPED ..... 264
JACKING AND TIRE CHANGING......................... 268
Preparations For Jacking .............................. 268
Jack Location................................................. 269
Removal Of Jack And Tools .......................... 269
Removing The Spare Tire.............................. 270
Jacking Instructions ...................................... 272
To Stow The Flat Or Spare ............................ 274
Reinstalling The Jack And Tools................... 275
JUMP STARTING ................................................. 276
Preparations For Jump Start ........................ 277
Jump Starting Procedure .............................. 277
IF YOUR ENGINE OVERHEATS .......................... 279
MANUAL PARK RELEASE................................... 279
FREEING A STUCK VEHICLE .............................. 281
TOWING A DISABLED VEHICLE ........................ 282
Two-Wheel Drive Models .............................. 283
Four-Wheel Drive Models ............................. 283
Emergency Tow Hooks — If Equipped.......... 284
ENHANCED ACCIDENT RESPONSE SYSTEM
(EARS) .................................................................. 284
EVENT DATA RECORDER (EDR) ........................ 284
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
SCHEDULED SERVICING.....................................285
Maintenance Plan......................................... 286
ENGINE COMPARTMENT ....................................290
3.6L Engine ................................................... 290
5.7L Engine .................................................. 291
Checking Oil Level......................................... 292
Adding Washer Fluid .................................. 292
Maintenance-Free Battery ........................... 292
Pressure Washing ......................................... 293
VEHICLE MAINTENANCE ....................................293
Engine Oil ...................................................... 293
Engine Oil Filter ............................................. 294
Engine Air Cleaner Filter ............................... 294
Air Conditioner Maintenance........................ 295
Accessory Drive Belt Inspection................... 298
Body Lubrication ........................................... 299
Windshield Wiper Blades ............................. 299
Exhaust System .......................................... 301
Cooling System ............................................. 302
Brake System ............................................... 305
Automatic Transmission .............................. 306
Rear Axle And 4x4 Front Driving Axle
Fluid Level ..................................................... 307
Transfer Case ................................................ 307
Fuses.............................................................. 307
Bulb Replacement ....................................... 315
22_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 6
7
TIRES .....................................................................320
Tire Safety Information ................................. 320
Tires — General Information ......................... 328
Tire Types....................................................... 331
Spare Tires — If Equipped ............................ 332
Wheel And Wheel Trim Care......................... 334
Snow Traction Devices ................................. 336
Tire Rotation Recommendations ................. 337
DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION
UNIFORM TIRE QUALITY GRADES ....................337
Treadwear...................................................... 338
Traction Grades............................................. 338
Temperature Grades..................................... 338
STORING THE VEHICLE .......................................338
BODYWORK..........................................................339
Protection From Atmospheric Agents .......... 339
Body And Underbody Maintenance.............. 339
Preserving The Bodywork ............................. 339
INTERIORS ...........................................................341
Seats And Fabric Parts.................................. 341
Plastic And Coated Parts .............................. 342
Leather Surfaces........................................... 342
Glass Surfaces .............................................. 342
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER (VIN)........ 343
BRAKE SYSTEM .................................................. 343
WHEEL AND TIRE TORQUE
SPECIFICATIONS ................................................. 343
Torque Specifications ................................... 343
FUEL REQUIREMENTS ........................................ 344
3.6L Engine ................................................... 344
5.7L Engine ................................................... 344
Reformulated Gasoline................................. 344
Materials Added To Fuel............................... 345
Gasoline/Oxygenate Blends ........................ 345
Do Not Use E-85 In Non-Flex Fuel
Vehicles.......................................................... 345
CNG And LP Fuel System Modifications ...... 346
Methylcyclopentadienyl Manganese
Tricarbonyl (MMT) In Gasoline...................... 346
Fuel System Cautions ................................... 346
FLUID CAPACITIES ............................................. 347
ENGINE FLUIDS AND LUBRICANTS .................. 347
CHASSIS FLUIDS AND LUBRICANTS ............... 349
CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE
SUGGESTIONS FOR OBTAINING SERVICE
FOR YOUR VEHICLE ............................................350
Prepare For The Appointment ...................... 350
Prepare A List ................................................ 350
Be Reasonable With Requests..................... 350
IF YOU NEED ASSISTANCE .................................350
FCA US LLC Customer Center....................... 350
FCA Canada Inc. Customer Center .............. 350
Mexico............................................................ 351
Puerto Rico And US Virgin Islands ............... 351
Customer Assistance For The Hearing
Or Speech Impaired (TDD/TTY).................... 351
Service Contract ........................................... 351
WARRANTY INFORMATION................................352
MOPAR® PARTS .................................................352
REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS ..........................352
In The 50 United States And
Washington, D.C............................................ 352
In Canada ...................................................... 352
PUBLICATION ORDER FORMS ..........................353
GENERAL INFORMATION....................................353
22_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 7
8
INTRODUCTION
Dear Customer,
Congratulations on the purchase of your new Ram vehicle. Be assured that it represents precision workmanship, distinctive styling, and high quality.
This is a specialized utility vehicle. It can go places and perform tasks that are not intended for conventional passenger vehicles. It handles and maneuvers
differently from many passenger vehicles both on-road and off-road, so take time to become familiar with your vehicle. If equipped, the two-wheel drive version
of this vehicle was designed for on-road use only. It is not intended for off-road driving or use in other severe conditions suited for a four-wheel drive vehicle.
Before you start to drive this vehicle, read the Owner’s Manual. Be sure you are familiar with all vehicle controls, particularly those used for braking, steering,
transmission, and transfer case shifting. Learn how your vehicle handles on different road surfaces. Your driving skills will improve with experience. When driving
off-road, or working the vehicle, don’t overload the vehicle or expect the vehicle to overcome the natural laws of physics. Always observe federal, state, provincial
and local laws wherever you drive. As with other vehicles of this type, failure to operate this vehicle correctly may result in loss of control or a collision.
See Ú page 146 for further information.
This Owner's Manual has been prepared with the assistance of service and engineering specialists to acquaint you with the operation and maintenance of your
vehicle. It is supplemented by customer-oriented documents. Within this information, you will find a description of the services that FCA US LLC offers to its
customers as well as the details of the terms and conditions for maintaining its validity. Please take the time to read all of these publications carefully before
driving your vehicle for the first time. Following the instructions, recommendations, tips, and important warnings in this manual will help ensure safe and
enjoyable operation of your vehicle.
This Owner's Manual describes all versions of this vehicle. Options and equipment dedicated to specific markets or versions are not expressly indicated in the
text. Therefore, you should only consider the information that is related to the trim level, engine, and version that you have purchased. Any content introduced
throughout the Owner's Information, which may or may not be applicable to your vehicle, will be identified with the wording “If Equipped”. All data contained in
this publication are intended to help you use your vehicle in the best possible way. FCA US LLC aims at a constant improvement of the vehicles produced.
For this reason, it reserves the right to make changes to the model described for technical and/or commercial reasons. For further information, contact an
authorized dealer.
When it comes to service, remember that authorized dealers know your Ram vehicle best, have factory-trained technicians, genuine Mopar® parts, and care
about your satisfaction.
22_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 8
9
SYMBOLS KEY
If you do not read this entire Owner’s Manual, you may miss important
information. Observe all Cautions and Warnings.
VAN CONVERSIONS/CAMPERS
The New Vehicle Limited Warranty does not apply to body modifications or
special equipment installed by van conversion/camper manufacturers/body
builders. US residents refer to the Warranty Information, Section 2.1.C.
Canadian residents refer to the “What Is Not Covered” section of the Warranty
Information. Such equipment includes video monitors, DVD/Blu-Ray™,
heaters, stoves, refrigerators, etc. For warranty coverage and service on these
items, contact the applicable manufacturer.
CONSUMER INFORMATION — TRUCK-CAMPER LOADING
This information is provided in fulfillment of the requirement by the United
States Government, Department of Transportation, National Highway Traffic
Safety Administration, that “every manufacturer of trucks that are capable of
accommodating slide-in campers, manufactured on or after April 1, 1973 shall
provide... at the time of original purchase to the first person who purchases the
truck”... information on Truck Camper Loading.
A slide-in camper document is provided in your vehicle’s glove compartment
that contains your Vehicle Identification Number (VIN), truck model, cargo
weight rating, and the forward/rearward limit of a camper. To obtain additional
dimensional and technical specifications for your vehicle, please visit
https://www.ramtrucks.com.
Figure 1 illustrates the dimensions describing the forward and rearward limits
of the zone in which the Center of Gravity (CG) of a slide-in camper must be
located, to provide satisfactory vehicle handling and to prevent overload of the
front and rear axles.
Figure 2 illustrates a proper match between truck and camper.
WARNING!
These statements are against
operating procedures that could
result in a collision, bodily injury
and/or death.
CAUTION!
These statements are against
procedures that could result in
damage to your vehicle.
NOTE:
A suggestion which will improve
installation, operation, and reliability.
If not followed, may result in
damage.
TIP:
General ideas/solutions/
suggestions on easier use of the
product or functionality.
PAGE REFERENCE ARROW
Follow this reference for additional
information on a particular feature.
FOOTNOTE
Supplementary and relevant
information pertaining to the topic.
1
22_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 9
10
NOTE:
The camper Center of Gravity falls within the specified zone.
When the truck is used to carry a slide-in camper, the total cargo load of the truck consists of the manufacturer’s camper weight figure, the weight of installed
additional camper equipment not included in the manufacturer’s camper weight figure, the weight of camper cargo, and the weight of passengers in the camper.
The total cargo load should not exceed the truck’s cargo weight rating and the camper’s CG should fall within the truck’s recommended CG zone when installed.
A — Forward Limit of Camper CG
B — Rearward Limit of Camper CG
22_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 10
11
Secure loose items to prevent weight shifts that could affect the balance of
your vehicle. When the truck camper is loaded, drive to a scale and weigh the
front and rear wheels separately, to determine axle loads. Individual axle loads
should not exceed either of the Gross Axle Weight Ratings (GAWR). The total of
the axle loads should not exceed the Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR).
If weight ratings are exceeded, move or remove items to get the total weight
below the ratings.
NOTE:
These ratings are also provided on the vehicle certification label located on the
driver’s side B-pillar. See Ú page 132 for more information.
For any additional instructions, please contact your conversion/camper
manufacturer or an authorized dealer.
VEHICLE MODIFICATIONS/ALTERATIONS
SYMBOL GLOSSARY
Some car components have colored labels with symbols indicating
precautions to be observed when using this component. It is important to
follow all warnings when operating your vehicle. See below for the definition of
each symbol Ú page 102.
NOTE:
Warning and Indicator lights are different based upon equipment options and
current vehicle status. Some telltales are optional and may not appear.
WARNING!
Any modifications or alterations to this vehicle could seriously affect its
roadworthiness and safety and may lead to a collision resulting in serious
injury or death.
Red Warning Lights
Seat Belt Reminder Warning Light
Ú page 102
Air Bag Warning Light
Ú page 102
Brake Warning Light
Ú page 102
Vehicle Security Warning Light
Ú page 103
Engine Coolant Temperature Warning Light
Ú page 103
Battery Charge Warning Light
Ú page 103
Oil Pressure Warning Light
Ú page 104
1
22_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 11
12
Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) Warning Light
Ú page 104
Electric Power Steering (EPS) Fault Warning Light
Ú page 104
Trailer Brake Disconnected Warning Light
Ú page 104
Door Open Warning Light
Ú page 104
Oil Temperature Warning Light
Ú page 104
Red Warning Lights Yellow Warning Lights
Engine Check/Malfunction Indicator Warning Light (MIL)
Ú page 104
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) Active Warning Light
Ú page 105
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) OFF Warning Light
Ú page 105
Low Washer Fluid Warning Light
Ú page 105
Low Coolant Level Warning Light
Ú page 106
22_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 12
13
Loose Fuel Filler Cap Warning Light
Ú page 106
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Warning Light
Ú page 106
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) Warning Light
Ú page 107
Service 4WD Warning Light
Ú page 107
Transmission Temperature Warning Light
Ú page 107
Yellow Warning Lights Yellow Indicator Lights
Low Fuel Indicator Light
Ú page 107
TOW/HAUL Indicator Light
Ú page 107
Trailer Merge Assist Indicator Light
Ú page 107
Cargo Light
Ú page 107
4WD Lock Indicator Light
Ú page 108
1
22_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 13
14
4WD Low Indicator Light
Ú page 108
4WD Indicator Light
Ú page 108
NEUTRAL Indicator Light
Ú page 108
Green Indicator Lights
Parking/Headlights On Indicator Light
Ú page 108
Front Fog Indicator Light
Ú page 108
Turn Signal Indicator Lights
Ú page 108
Cruise Control SET Indicator Light
Ú page 108
Yellow Indicator Lights
4WD AUTO Indicator Light
Ú page 108
Stop/Start Active Indicator Light
Ú page 108
White Indicator Lights
Cruise Control Ready Indicator
Ú page 109
Cruise Control SET Indicator Light
Ú page 109
Blue Indicator Lights
High Beam Indicator Light
Ú page 109
Green Indicator Lights
22_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 14
15
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
KEYS
KEY FOBS
Your vehicle may be equipped with a standard
ignition key fob or a keyless ignition key fob.
The standard ignition key fob operates the ignition
switch. Insert the square end of the key fob into the
ignition switch located on the instrument panel
and rotate to the desired position. The key fob also
contains an emergency key, which is stored in the
rear of the key fob.
Key Fob For Standard Ignition
Your vehicle may be equipped with a key fob
which supports Passive Entry, Remote Keyless
Entry (RKE), Keyless Enter ‘n Go™ (if equipped),
and Remote Start (if equipped). The key fob allows
you to lock or unlock all doors, tailgate, and the
RamBox (if equipped) from distances up to
approximately 66 ft (20 m). The key fob does not
need to be pointed at the vehicle to activate the
system. The key fob also contains an emergency
key, which is stored in the rear of the key fob.
1 — PANIC Button
2 — Unlock Button
3 — Lock Button
4 — Remote Start Button
5 — Emergency Key Location
2
22_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 15
16 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE:
The key fob’s wireless signal may be blocked if
the key fob is located next to a mobile phone,
laptop, or other electronic device. This may
result in poor performance.
With the ignition in the ON position and the
vehicle moving at 2 mph (4 km/h), all RKE
commands are disabled.
Key Fob For Keyless Ignition
NOTE:
In case the ignition switch does not change with
the push of a button, the key fob may have a low
or fully depleted battery. A low key fob battery
can be verified by referring to the instrument
cluster, which will display directions to follow.
Inserting the key fob with integrated key into the
ignition switch disables the system from
responding to any button pushes from that key
fob. Driving at speeds 5 mph (8 km/h) and
above disables the system from responding to
all key fob buttons for all key fobs Ú page 353.
To Lock/Unlock The Doors And Tailgate
Push and release the unlock button on the key fob
once to unlock the driver’s door, or, twice within
five seconds to unlock all doors, the tailgate and
the RamBox (if equipped). To lock all the doors and
the tailgate, push the lock button once.
When the doors are unlocked, the turn signals will
flash and the illuminated entry system will be
activated. When the doors are locked, the turn
signals will flash and the horn will chirp.
All doors can be programmed to unlock on the first
push of the unlock button. The horn chirp when the
lock button is pushed can be programmed on/off
within Uconnect Settings Ú page 150.
Key Left Vehicle Feature
If a valid key fob is no longer detected inside the
vehicle while the vehicle’s ignition system is in the
ON/RUN or START position, the message “Key Fob
Has Left The Vehicle” will be shown in the
instrument cluster display along with an interior
chime. An exterior audible and visual alert will also
be activated to warn the driver.
The vehicle’s horn will rapidly chirp three
times along with a single flash of the vehicle’s
exterior lights.
1 — Unlock
2 — Lock
3 — Remote Start
4 — Panic Button
5 — Emergency Key
22_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 16
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 17
NOTE:
The doors have to be open and then closed in
order for the vehicle to check for the presence of
a key fob; the Key Left Vehicle feature will not
activate until all of the doors are closed.
These alerts will not be activated in situations
where the vehicle’s engine is left running with
the key fob inside.
Replacing The Battery In The Key Fob
The replacement battery is one CR2032 battery.
NOTE:
Customers are recommended to use a battery
obtained from Mopar®. Aftermarket coin
battery dimensions may not meet the original
OEM coin battery dimensions.
Perchlorate Material — special handling may
apply. See www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/
perchlorate for further information.
Do not touch the battery terminals that are on
the back housing or the printed circuit board.
1. Remove the emergency key by sliding the
emergency key release (1) on the front of the
standard ignition key fob, or on the back of
the keyless ignition key fob, sideways, and
pulling the emergency key (2) out with your
other hand.
Emergency Key Removal (Standard Ignition Key Fob)
Emergency Key Removal (Keyless Ignition Key Fob)
2. Gently pry the two halves of the key fob apart.
Make sure not to damage the seal during
removal.
1 — Emergency Key Release
2 — Emergency Key
1 — Emergency Key Release
2 — Emergency Key
2
22_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 17
18 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
3. Remove the battery by turning the back cover
over (battery facing downward) and tapping it
lightly on a solid surface such as a table or
similar, then replace the battery. When
replacing the battery, match the (+) sign on the
battery to the (+) sign on the inside of the
battery clip, located on the back cover. Avoid
touching the new battery with your fingers. Skin
oils may cause battery deterioration. If you
touch a battery, clean it with rubbing alcohol.
4. To assemble the key fob case, snap the two
halves together.
Programming And Requesting Additional
Key Fobs
Programming the key fob may be performed by an
authorized dealer.
NOTE:
Once a key fob is programmed to a vehicle, it
cannot be repurposed and reprogrammed to
another vehicle.
Only key fobs that are programmed to the
vehicle electronics can be used to start and
operate the vehicle. Once a key fob is
programmed to a vehicle, it cannot be
programmed to any other vehicle.
Duplication of key fobs may be performed at an
authorized dealer. This procedure consists of
programming a blank key fob to the vehicle
electronics. A blank key fob is one that has never
been programmed.
NOTE:
When having the Sentry Key Immobilizer system
serviced, bring all vehicle keys with you to an
authorized dealer.
Keys must be ordered to the correct key cut to
match the vehicle locks.
SENTRY KEY
The Sentry Key Immobilizer system prevents
unauthorized vehicle operation by disabling the
engine. The system does not need to be armed or
activated. Operation is automatic, regardless of
whether the vehicle is locked or unlocked.
The system uses a key fob, either a keyless push
button ignition or wireless ignition node system,
and a Radio Frequency (RF) receiver to prevent
unauthorized vehicle operation. Therefore, only
key fobs that are programmed to the vehicle can
be used to start and operate the vehicle. The
system cannot reprogram a key fob obtained from
another vehicle.
WARNING!
The integrated key fob contains a coin cell
battery. Do not ingest the battery; there is a
chemical burn hazard. If the coin cell battery is
swallowed, it can cause severe internal burns
in just two hours and can lead to death.
If you think a battery may have been swal-
lowed or placed inside any part of the body,
seek immediate medical attention.
Keep new and used batteries away from chil-
dren. If the battery compartment does not
close securely, stop using the product and
keep it away from children.
WARNING!
Always remove the key fobs from the vehicle
and lock all doors when leaving the vehicle
unattended.
For vehicles equipped with Keyless
Enter ‘n Go™ Ignition, always remember to
place the ignition in the OFF position.
22_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 18
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 19
(Continued)
After placing the ignition in the ON/RUN position,
the Vehicle Security Light will turn on for three
seconds for a bulb check. If the light remains on
after the bulb check, it indicates that there is a
problem with the electronics. In addition, if the light
begins to flash after the bulb check, it indicates
that someone attempted to start the engine with
an invalid key fob. In the event that a valid key fob
is used to start the engine but there is an issue
with the vehicle electronics, the engine will start
and shut off after two seconds.
If the Vehicle Security Light turns on during normal
vehicle operation (vehicle running for longer than
10 seconds), it indicates that there is a fault in the
electronics. Should this occur, have the vehicle
serviced as soon as possible by an authorized
dealer.
All of the key fobs provided with your new vehicle
have been programmed to the vehicle electronics
Ú page 353.
IGNITION SWITCH
IGNITION NODE MODULE (IGNM) —
I
F EQUIPPED
The Ignition Node Module (IGNM) operates similar
to an ignition switch. It has four operating
positions, three with detents and one that is
spring-loaded. The detent positions are OFF,
ACC, and ON/RUN. The START position is a
spring-loaded momentary contact position. When
released from the START position, the switch
automatically returns to the ON/RUN position.
Ignition Switch
CAUTION!
The Sentry Key Immobilizer system is not
compatible with some aftermarket remote
starting systems. Use of these systems may
result in vehicle starting problems and loss of
security protection.
1 — OFF
2 — ACC (Accessory)
3 — ON/RUN
4 — START
WARNING!
Before exiting a vehicle, always come to a
complete stop, then shift the automatic trans-
mission into PARK, apply the parking brake,
place the engine in the OFF position, remove
the key fob from the vehicle and lock your
vehicle. If equipped with Keyless Enter ‘n Go™,
always make sure the keyless ignition is in OFF
position, remove the key fob from the vehicle
and lock the vehicle.
Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle.
Allowing children to be in a vehicle unattended
is dangerous for a number of reasons. A child
or others could be seriously or fatally injured.
Children should be warned not to touch the
parking brake, brake pedal or the gear
selector.
2
22_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 19
20 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE:
For more information on normal starting, see
Ú page 111.
Keyed ignition systems will chime in the OFF or
ACC position when the driver door is open.
In addition to the chime, the message “Key In
Ignition” will display in the cluster.
KEYLESS ENTER ‘N GO™ IGNITION
(I
F EQUIPPED )
This feature allows the driver to operate the
ignition switch with the push of a button as long as
the key fob is in the passenger compartment.
The START/STOP ignition button has several
operating modes that are labeled and will
illuminate when in position. These modes are OFF,
ACC, ON/RUN, and START.
Keyless Push Button Ignition
The push button ignition can be placed in the
following modes:
OFF
The engine is stopped
Some electrical devices (e.g. central locking,
alarm, etc.) are still available
ACC
Engine is not started
Some electrical devices are available
(e.g. power sunroof, power windows, etc.)
ON/RUN
Driving position
All electrical devices are available
(e.g. climate controls, heated seats, etc.)
START
The engine will start (when foot is on the brake)
NOTE:
If the ignition switch does not change with the push
of a button, the key fob may have a low battery. In
this situation, a back up method can be used to
operate the ignition switch. Put the nose side (side
opposite of the emergency key) of the key fob
against the START/STOP ignition button and push
to operate the ignition switch.
Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle,
or in a location accessible to children, and do
not leave the ignition of a vehicle equipped
with Keyless Enter ‘n Go™ in the ON/RUN
position. A child could operate power
windows, other controls, or move the vehicle.
Do not leave children or animals inside parked
vehicles in hot weather. Interior heat buildup
may cause serious injury or death.
CAUTION!
An unlocked vehicle is an invitation for thieves.
Always remove key fob from the vehicle and lock
all doors when leaving the vehicle unattended.
WARNING!
1 — OFF
2 — ACC (Accessory)
3 — ON/RUN
22_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 20
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 21
(Continued)
Back Up Starting Method
NOTE:
For more information on normal starting, see
Ú page 111.
Keyed ignition systems will chime in OFF or ACC
when the driver door is open.
Keyless ignition systems will chime in the ACC or
ON/RUN position when the driver door is open.
In addition to the chime, the message “Key In
Ignition” will display in the cluster.
REMOTE START — IF EQUIPPED
This system uses the key fob to start the
engine conveniently from outside the
vehicle while still maintaining security.
The system has a range of approximately
300 ft (91 m).
Remote Start is used to defrost windows in cold
weather, and to reach a comfortable climate in all
ambient conditions before the driver enters the
vehicle.
WARNING!
Before exiting a vehicle, always come to a
complete stop, then shift the automatic trans-
mission into PARK, apply the parking brake,
place the engine in the OFF position, remove
the key fob from the vehicle and lock your
vehicle. If equipped with Keyless Enter ‘n Go™,
always make sure the keyless ignition is in OFF
position, remove the key fob from the vehicle
and lock the vehicle.
Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle.
Allowing children to be in a vehicle unattended
is dangerous for a number of reasons. A child
or others could be seriously or fatally injured.
Children should be warned not to touch the
parking brake, brake pedal or the gear
selector.
Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle,
or in a location accessible to children, and do
not leave the ignition of a vehicle equipped
with Keyless Enter ‘n Go™ in the ON/RUN
position. A child could operate power
windows, other controls, or move the vehicle.
Do not leave children or animals inside parked
vehicles in hot weather. Interior heat buildup
may cause serious injury or death.
CAUTION!
An unlocked vehicle is an invitation for thieves.
Always remove key fob from the vehicle and lock
all doors when leaving the vehicle unattended.
WARNING!
2
22_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 21
22 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE:
Obstructions between the vehicle and the key fob
may reduce this range Ú page 353.
HOW TO USE REMOTE START
Push and release the Remote Start button on the
key fob twice within five seconds. The vehicle
doors will lock, the parking lights will flash, and the
horn will chirp twice (if programmed). Then, the
engine will start, and the vehicle will remain in the
Remote Start mode for a 15 minute cycle.
Pushing the Remote Start button a third time shuts
the engine off.
NOTE:
With Remote Start, the engine will only run for
15 minutes.
Remote Start can only be used twice.
If an engine fault is present or fuel level is low,
the vehicle will start and then shut down in
10 seconds.
The parking lights will turn on and remain on
during Remote Start mode.
For security, power window and power sunroof
operation (if equipped) are disabled when the
vehicle is in the Remote Start mode.
The ignition must be placed in the ON/RUN
position before the Remote Start sequence can
be repeated for a third cycle.
All of the following conditions must be met before
the engine will Remote Start:
Gear selector in PARK
Doors closed
Hood closed
Hazard switch off
Brake switch inactive (brake pedal not pressed)
Battery at an acceptable charge level
PANIC button not pushed
Fuel meets minimum requirement
System not disabled from previous Remote
Start event
Vehicle Security system not active
Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) is not
illuminated
Ignition in OFF position
TO EXIT REMOTE START MODE
To drive the vehicle after starting the Remote Start
system, push and release the START/STOP ignition
button while pressing the brake pedal prior to the
end of the 15 minute cycle. If the vehicle is not
equipped with a START/STOP ignition button,
insert the key fob into the ignition switch and place
the ignition in the ON/RUN position.
WARNING!
Do not start or run an engine in a closed
garage or confined area. Exhaust gas contains
Carbon Monoxide (CO) which is odorless and
colorless. Carbon Monoxide is poisonous and
can cause serious injury or death when
inhaled.
Keep key fobs away from children. Operation
of the Remote Start system, windows, door
locks or other controls could cause serious
injury or death.
WARNING!
Do not start or run an engine in a closed
garage or confined area. Exhaust gas contains
Carbon Monoxide (CO) which is odorless and
colorless. Carbon Monoxide is poisonous and
can cause serious injury or death when
inhaled.
Keep key fobs away from children. Operation
of the Remote Start system, windows, door
locks or other controls could cause serious
injury or death.
22_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 22
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 23
The Remote Start system will turn the engine off if
the Remote Start button on the key fob is pushed
again, or if the engine is allowed to run for the
entire 15 minute cycle. Once the ignition is placed
in the ON/RUN position, the climate controls will
resume the previously set operations
(temperature, blower control, etc.).
NOTE:
To avoid unintentional shutdowns, the system
will disable for two seconds after receiving a
valid Remote Start request.
For vehicles equipped with the Keyless
Enter ‘n Go™ — Passive Entry feature, the
message “Remote Start Active — Push Start
Button” will display in the instrument cluster
display until you push the START/STOP ignition
button.
REMOTE START FRONT DEFROST
A
CTIVATION — IF EQUIPPED
When Remote Start is active, and the outside
ambient temperature is 40°F (4.5°C) or below, the
system will automatically activate front defrost for
15 minutes or less. The time is dependent on the
ambient temperature. Once the timer expires, the
system will automatically adjust the settings
depending on ambient conditions. See “Remote
Start Comfort Systems — If Equipped” in the next
section for detailed operation.
For vehicles equipped with the Keyless
Enter ‘n Go™ — Passive Entry feature, the message
“Remote Start Active — Push Start Button” will
display in the instrument cluster display until you
push the START/STOP ignition button.
REMOTE START COMFORT SYSTEMS —
I
F EQUIPPED
When Remote Start is activated, the front and rear
defrost will automatically turn on in cold weather.
The heated steering wheel and driver heated seat
feature will turn on if programmed in the comfort
menu screen within Uconnect Settings
Ú page 150. In warm weather, the driver vented
seat feature will automatically turn on when the
Remote Start is activated and is programmed in
the comfort menu screen. The vehicle will adjust
the climate control settings depending on the
outside ambient temperature.
Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) —
If Equipped
The climate controls automatically adjust to an
optimal temperature and mode, dependent on the
outside ambient temperature. When the ignition is
placed in the ON/RUN position, the climate
controls will resume their previous settings.
Manual Temperature Control (MTC) — If Equipped
In ambient temperatures of 40°F (4.5°C) or
below, the climate settings will default to
maximum heat, with fresh air entering the
cabin. If the front defrost timer expires, the
vehicle will enter Mix Mode.
In ambient temperatures from 40°F (4.5°C) to
78°F (26°C), the climate settings will be based
on the last settings selected by the driver.
In ambient temperatures of 78°F (26°C) or
above, the climate settings will default to
MAX A/C, Bi-Level mode, with Recirculation on.
For more information on ATC, MTC, and climate
control settings, see Ú page 54.
NOTE:
These features will stay on through the duration of
Remote Start, or until the ignition is placed in the
ON/RUN position. The climate control settings will
change, and exit the automatic defaults, if
manually adjusted by the driver while the vehicle is
in Remote Start mode. This includes turning the
climate controls off using the OFF button.
2
22_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 23
24 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
REMOTE START WINDSHIELD WIPER
D
E–ICER ACTIVATION — IF EQUIPPED
When Remote Start is active and the outside
ambient temperature is less than 33°F (0.6°C),
the Windshield Wiper De-Icer will activate. Exiting
Remote Start will resume its previous operation. If
the Windshield Wiper De-Icer was active, the timer
and operation will continue.
REMOTE START ABORT MESSAGE
The following messages will display in the
instrument cluster display if the vehicle fails to
remote start or exits Remote Start prematurely:
Remote Start Cancelled — Door Open
Remote Start Cancelled — Hood Open
Remote Start Cancelled — Fuel Low
Remote Start Cancelled — System Fault
Remote Start Disabled — Start Vehicle to Reset
The message will stay active until the ignition is
placed in the ON/RUN position.
VEHICLE SECURITY SYSTEM
The Vehicle Security system monitors the vehicle
doors, hood, tailgate, and the ignition for
unauthorized operation. While the Vehicle Security
system is armed, interior switches for door locks
are disabled. If something triggers the alarm, the
Vehicle Security system will provide the following
audible and visible signals:
The horn will pulse
The turn signals will flash
The Vehicle Security Light in the instrument
cluster will flash
TO ARM THE SYSTEM
Follow these steps to arm the Vehicle Security
system:
1. Make sure the vehicle’s ignition is placed in
the OFF position.
For vehicles equipped with Keyless Entry,
make sure the vehicle’s keyless ignition
system is OFF.
For vehicles not equipped with Keyless
Entry, make sure the vehicle ignition is OFF
and the key fob is physically removed from
the ignition.
2. Perform one of the following methods to lock
the vehicle:
Push the lock button on the interior power
door lock switch with the driver and/or
passenger door open.
Push the lock button on the exterior Passive
Entry door handle with a valid key fob avail-
able in the same exterior zone Ú page 26.
Push the lock button on the key fob.
3. If any doors are open, close them.
TO DISARM THE SYSTEM
The Vehicle Security system can be disarmed using
any of the following methods:
Push the unlock button on the key fob.
Grab the Passive Entry door handle to unlock
the door Ú page 26.
Cycle the ignition out of the OFF position to
disarm the system.
For vehicles equipped with Keyless
Enter ‘n Go™ — Ignition, push the
START/STOP ignition button (requires at
least one valid key fob in the vehicle).
For vehicles not equipped with Keyless
Enter ‘n Go™, insert a valid key fob into the
ignition switch and turn the key to the
ON/RUN position.
The Vehicle Security system is designed to protect
your vehicle. However, you can create conditions
where the system will give you a false alarm. If one
of the previously described arming sequences has
occurred, the Vehicle Security system will arm
regardless of whether you are in the vehicle or not.
If you remain in the vehicle and open a door, the
alarm will sound. If this occurs, disarm the Vehicle
Security system.
22_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 24
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 25
(Continued)
If the Vehicle Security system is armed and the
battery becomes disconnected, the Vehicle
Security system will remain armed when the
battery is reconnected; the exterior lights will flash,
and the horn will sound. If this occurs, disarm the
Vehicle Security system.
REARMING OF THE SYSTEM
The Vehicle Security system will rearm itself after
15 minutes if the system has not been disabled.
If the condition which initiated the alarm is still
present, the system will ignore that condition and
monitor the remaining doors and ignition.
SECURITY SYSTEM MANUAL OVERRIDE
The Vehicle Security system will not arm if you lock
the doors using the manual door lock.
DOORS
MANUAL DOOR LOCKS
The power door locks can be manually locked from
inside the vehicle by using the door lock knob. To
lock each door, push the door lock knob on each
door trim panel downward. To unlock the front
doors, pull the inside door handle to the first
detent. To unlock the rear doors, pull the door lock
knob on the door trim panel upward. If the lock
knob is down when the door is closed, the door will
lock. Therefore, make sure the key fob is not inside
the vehicle before closing the door.
NOTE:
Manually locking the vehicle will not arm the
Vehicle Security system.
Door Lock Knob
WARNING!
Do not leave children or animals inside parked
vehicles in hot weather. Interior heat buildup
may cause serious injury or death.
For personal security and safety in the event
of an collision, lock the vehicle doors as you
drive as well as when you park and leave the
vehicle.
Before exiting a vehicle, always shift the auto-
matic transmission into PARK or REVERSE,
apply the parking brake, place the ignition in
the OFF position, remove the key fobs from
vehicle, and lock all doors.
Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle. Leaving chil-
dren in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for
a number of reasons. A child or others could
be seriously or fatally injured. Children should
be warned not to touch the parking brake,
brake pedal or the gear selector.
Allowing children to be in a vehicle unattended
is dangerous for a number of reasons. A child
or others could be seriously or fatally injured.
Children should be warned not to touch the
parking brake, brake pedal or the gear
selector.
Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle,
or in a location accessible to children, and do
not leave the ignition of a vehicle equipped
with Keyless Enter ‘n Go™ in the ACC or ON/
RUN position. A child could operate power
windows, other controls, or move the vehicle.
WARNING!
2
22_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 25
26 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
POWER DOOR LOCKS — IF EQUIPPED
The power door lock switches are located on each
front door panel. Push the switch to lock or unlock
the doors.
Power Door Lock Switches
NOTE:
The key fob may not be detected by the vehicle
Keyless Enter ‘n Go™ system if it is located next to
a mobile phone, laptop or other electronic device;
these devices may block the key fob’s wireless
signal and prevent the Keyless Enter ‘n Go™
system from starting the vehicle.
If you push the power door lock switch while the
key fob is in the ignition, and any front door is open,
the power locks will not operate. This prevents you
from accidentally locking your key fob in the
vehicle. Removing the key fob or closing the door
will allow the locks to operate. A chime will sound if
the key fob is in the ignition switch and a door is
open, as a reminder to remove the key fob.
KEYLESS ENTER ‘N GO™ — PASSIVE
E
NTRY (IF EQUIPPED )
The Passive Entry system is an enhancement to
the vehicle’s key fob and a feature of Keyless
Enter ‘n Go™ — Passive Entry. This feature allows
you to lock and unlock the vehicle’s door(s) without
having to push the key fob lock or unlock buttons.
NOTE:
Passive Entry may be programmed on or off
within Uconnect Settings Ú page 150.
The key fob may not be detected by the vehicle
Passive Entry system if it is located next to a
mobile phone, laptop, or other electronic device;
these devices may block the key fob’s wireless
signal and prevent the Passive Entry system
from locking/unlocking the vehicle.
If wearing gloves, or if it has been raining/
snowing on the Passive Entry door handle, the
unlock sensitivity can be affected, resulting in a
slower response time.
If the vehicle is unlocked by Passive Entry and
no door is opened within 60 seconds, the
vehicle will relock and (if equipped) will arm the
Vehicle Security system.
The Vehicle Security system can be armed/
disarmed by pushing the Passive Entry key fob
lock/unlock buttons (if equipped).
To Unlock From The Driver Or Passenger Side:
With a valid Passive Entry key fob within 5 ft
(1.5 m) of the door handle, grab the handle to
unlock the vehicle. Grabbing the driver’s door
handle will unlock the driver door automatically.
Grabbing the passenger door handle will unlock all
doors and the tailgate automatically.
Grab The Door Handle To Unlock
NOTE:
Either the driver door only or all doors will unlock
when you grab hold of the front driver’s door
handle, depending on the selected setting in the
Uconnect system Ú page 150.
22_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 26
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 27
Frequency Operated Button Integrated Key
(FOBIK-Safe)
To minimize the possibility of unintentionally
locking a Passive Entry key fob inside your vehicle,
the Passive Entry system is equipped with an
automatic door unlock feature which will function if
the ignition is OFF.
There are three situations that trigger a
FOBIK-Safe search in any Passive Entry vehicle:
A lock request is made by a valid Passive Entry
key fob while a door is open.
A lock request is made by the Passive Entry door
handle while a door is open.
A lock request is made by the door panel switch
while the door is open.
When any of these situations occur, after all open
doors are shut, the FOBIK-Safe search will be
executed. If it detects a Passive Entry key fob
inside the vehicle, the vehicle will unlock and alert
the customer.
NOTE:
The vehicle will only unlock the doors when a valid
Passive Entry key fob is detected inside the
vehicle. The vehicle will not unlock the doors when
any of the following conditions are true:
The doors are manually locked using the door
lock knobs.
If a paired key fob is detected outside of the
vehicle, FOBIK-Safe will not activate.
Three attempts are made to lock the doors
using the door panel switch and then the doors
are closed.
To Lock The Vehicle’s Doors And Tailgate:
With one of the vehicle’s Passive Entry key fobs
within 5 ft (1.5 m) of either front door handle,
pushing the Passive Entry lock button will lock the
vehicle.
Push The Door Handle Button To Lock
Do NOT grab the door handle when pushing the
door handle lock button. This could unlock the
door(s).
Do NOT Grab The Door Handle When Locking
NOTE:
After pushing the door handle lock button, you
must wait two seconds before you can lock or
unlock the doors, using either Passive Entry
door handle. This is done to allow you to check
if the vehicle is locked by pulling the door
handle, without the vehicle unlocking.
The Passive Entry system will not operate if the
key fob battery is depleted.
The vehicle doors can also be locked by using the
key fob lock button or the lock button located on
the vehicle’s interior door panel Ú page 353.
2
22_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 27
28 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
AUTOMATIC DOORS UNLOCK —
I
F EQUIPPED
This feature unlocks all of the doors of the vehicle
when either front door is opened. This will occur
only after the vehicle has been shifted into the
PARK position after the vehicle has been driven
(shifted out of PARK and all doors closed).
The Automatic Doors Unlock feature can be
enabled or disabled within Uconnect Settings
Ú page 150.
NOTE:
Use the Auto Unlock Doors feature in accordance
with local laws.
AUTOMATIC DOOR LOCKS —
I
F EQUIPPED
The auto door lock feature default condition is
enabled. When enabled, the doors will lock
automatically when the vehicle's speed exceeds
15 mph (24 km/h). The auto door lock feature can
be enabled or disabled by an authorized dealer per
written request of the customer. Please see an
authorized dealer for service.
CHILD-PROTECTION DOOR LOCK
To provide a safer environment for small children
riding in the rear seats, the rear doors are
equipped with a Child-Protection Door Lock
system.
To use the system, open each rear door, use a flat
blade screwdriver, and rotate the dial to the lock or
unlock position. When the system on a door is
engaged, that door can only be opened by using
the outside door handle even if the inside door lock
is in the unlocked position.
Child-Protection Door Lock
NOTE:
When the Child-Protection Door Lock system is
engaged, the door can be opened only by using
the outside door handle even though the inside
door lock is in the unlocked position.
After disengaging the Child-Protection Door
Lock system, always test the door from the
inside to make certain it is in the unlocked posi-
tion.
After engaging the Child-Protection Door Lock
system, always test the door from the inside to
make certain it is in the locked position.
For emergency exit with the system engaged,
pull up on the door lock knob (unlocked posi-
tion), roll down the window, and open the door
with the outside door handle.
NOTE:
Always use this device when carrying children.
After engaging the child lock on both rear doors,
check for effective engagement by trying to open a
door with the internal handle. Once the
Child-Protection Door Lock system is engaged, it is
impossible to open the doors from inside the
vehicle. Before getting out of the vehicle, be sure to
check that there is no one left inside.
WARNING!
Avoid trapping anyone in a vehicle in a collision.
Remember that the rear doors can only be
opened from the outside with the
Child-Protection locks are engaged (locked).
22_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 28
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 29
STEERING WHEEL
TILT STEERING COLUMN
This feature allows you to tilt the steering column
upward or downward. The tilt lever is located on
the steering column, below the multifunction lever.
Pull the lever toward the steering wheel to unlock
the steering column. With one hand firmly on the
steering wheel, move the steering column up or
down, as desired. Release the lever to lock the
steering column firmly in place.
Tilt Steering Lever
HEATED STEERING WHEEL —
I
F EQUIPPED
The steering wheel contains a heating
element that helps warm your hands in
cold weather. The heated steering wheel
has only one temperature setting. Once
the heated steering wheel has been turned on, it
will stay on for an average of 80 minutes before
automatically shutting off. This time will vary based
on environmental temperatures. The heated
steering wheel can shut off early or may not turn on
when the steering wheel is already warm.
The heated steering wheel control button is
located on the center instrument panel below the
touchscreen, as well as within the climate or
controls screen of the touchscreen.
Press the heated steering wheel button once to
turn the heating element on.
Press the heated steering wheel button a
second time to turn the heating element off.
NOTE:
The engine must be running for the heated
steering wheel to operate.
For information on use with the Remote Start
system, see Ú page 23.
WARNING!
Do not adjust the steering column while driving.
Adjusting the steering column while driving or
driving with the steering column unlocked, could
cause the driver to lose control of the vehicle.
Failure to follow this warning may result in
serious injury or death.
WARNING!
Persons who are unable to feel pain to the
skin because of advanced age, chronic illness,
diabetes, spinal cord injury, medication,
alcohol use, exhaustion, or other physical
conditions must exercise care when using the
steering wheel heater. It may cause burns
even at low temperatures, especially if used
for long periods.
Do not place anything on the steering wheel
that insulates against heat, such as a blanket
or steering wheel covers of any type and mate-
rial. This may cause the steering wheel heater
to overheat.
2
22_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 29
30 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
UCONNECT VOICE RECOGNITION QUICK TIPS
INTRODUCING VOICE RECOGNITION
Start using Uconnect Voice Recognition with these
helpful quick tips. It provides the key Voice
Commands and tips you need to know to control
your vehicle’s Voice Recognition (VR) system.
Uconnect 3 With 5-inch Display
Uconnect 4C/4C NAV With 8.4-inch Display
BASIC VOICE COMMANDS
The basic Voice Commands below can be given at
any point while using your Uconnect system.
Push the VR button. After the beep, say:
“Cancel” to stop a current voice session.
“Help” to hear a list of suggested Voice
Commands.
“Repeat” to listen to the system prompts again.
Notice the visual cues that inform you of your Voice
Recognition system’s status.
NOTE:
On Uconnect 5 systems, the factory default Wake
Up word is set to “Hey Uconnect” and can be repro-
grammed through the Uconnect Settings.
GET STARTED
The VR button is used to activate/deactivate your
Voice Recognition system.
Helpful hints for using Voice Recognition:
Reduce background noise. Wind noise and
passenger conversations are examples of noise
that may impact recognition.
Speak clearly at a normal pace and volume
while facing straight ahead.
Each time you give a Voice Command, first push
the VR button, wait until after the beep, then say
your Voice Command.
You can interrupt the help message or system
prompts by pushing the VR button and saying a
Voice Command from the current category.
22_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 30
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 31
(Continued)
Uconnect Voice Command Buttons
ADDITIONAL INFORMATION
© 2021 FCA US LLC. All rights reserved. Mopar and
Uconnect are registered trademarks and Mopar
Owner Connect is a trademark of FCA US LLC.
SiriusXM® and all related marks and logos are
trademarks of SiriusXM® Radio Inc.
Uconnect System Support:
US residents visit www.DriveUconnect.com or
call: 1-877-855-8400 (24 hours a day 7 days a
week)
Canadian residents visit www.DriveUconnect.ca
or call: 1-800-465-2001 (English) or
1-800-387-9983 (French)
SiriusXM Guardian™ services support:
US residents visit www.driveuconnect.com/
sirius-xm-guardian or call: 1-844-796-4827
Canadian residents visit https://www.driveuco-
nnect.ca/en/sirius-xm-guardian or call:
1-877-324-9091
SEATS
Seats are a part of the Occupant Restraint system
of the vehicle.
MANUAL FRONT SEAT ADJUSTMENT
Manual Front Seat Forward/Rearward
Adjustment
Both front seats are adjustable forward or
rearward. The manual seat adjustment handle is
located under the seat cushion at the front edge of
each seat.
Manual Seat Adjustment Bar
1 — Push To Begin Radio Or Media Functions
2 — Push To Initiate, Answer, End A Phone Call, Or
Send/Receive A Text
WARNING!
It is dangerous to ride in a cargo area, inside
or outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people
riding in these areas are more likely to be
seriously injured or killed.
Do not allow people to ride in any area of your
vehicle that is not equipped with seats and
seat belts. In a collision, people riding in these
areas are more likely to be seriously injured or
killed.
Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat
and using a seat belt properly.
WARNING!
2
22_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 31
32 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
While sitting in the seat, pull up on the handle and
slide the seat forward or rearward. Release the bar
once you have reached the desired position. Then,
using body pressure, move forward and rearward
on the seat to be sure that the seat adjusters have
latched.
Manual Front Seat Recline Adjustment
The recline lever is located on the outboard side of
the seat. To recline the seat, lean forward slightly,
lift the lever, lean back to the desired position and
release the lever. To return the seatback to its
normal upright position, lean forward and lift the
lever. Release the lever once the seatback is in the
upright position.
Manual Recline Lever
Dump Feature (Manual Recline Seat Only) —
Standard Cab
Actuating the recliner handle will allow the
seatback to swing (dump) forward on manual
recliner seats. This “dump” feature allows access
to the storage bin behind the seat.
40-20-40 Front Bench Seat — If Equipped
The seat is divided into three segments. The
outboard seat portions are each 40% of the total
width of the seat. If equipped, the back of the
center portion (20%) easily folds down to provide
an armrest/center storage compartment.
MANUAL REAR SEAT ADJUSTMENT
Reclining Rear Seats — If Equipped
The recliner handle is located on the outside of the
seat cushion. To adjust the seatback, lift upward
on the handle, lean back on the seatback and
when you reach the desired position, release the
handle.
WARNING!
Adjusting a seat while driving may be
dangerous. Moving a seat while driving could
result in loss of control which could cause a
collision and serious injury or death.
Seats should be adjusted before fastening the
seat belts and while the vehicle is parked.
Serious injury or death could result from a
poorly adjusted seat belt.
WARNING!
Do not stand or lean in front of the seat while
actuating the handle. The seatback may swing
forward and hit you causing injury.
To avoid injury, place your hand on the seat-
back and actuate the handle, then position
the seatback in the desired position.
WARNING!
Do not pile luggage or cargo higher than the top
of the seatback. This could impair visibility or
become a dangerous projectile in a sudden stop
or collision.
22_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 32
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 33
Rear Seat Recliner Handle
POWER DRIVER SEAT ADJUSTMENT —
I
F EQUIPPED
Some models may be equipped with an eight-way
power driver's seat. The power seat switches are
located on the outboard side of the driver's seat
cushion. There are two power seat switches that
are used to control the movement of the seat
cushion and the seatback.
Power Seat Switches
Adjusting The Seat Forward Or Rearward
The seat can be adjusted both forward and
rearward by using the power seat switch. The seat
will move in the direction of the switch. Release the
switch when the desired position has been
reached.
Adjusting The Seat Up Or Down
The height of the seats can be adjusted up or down
by using the power seat switch. The seat will move
in the direction of the switch. Release the switch
when the desired position has been reached.
Tilting The Seat Up Or Down
The angle of the seat cushion can be adjusted up
or down using the power seat switch. The front of
the seat cushion will move in the direction of the
switch. Release the switch when the desired
position has been reached.
Reclining The Seatback
The angle of the seatback can be adjusted forward
or rearward by using the power seat switch.
The seat will move in the direction of the switch.
Release the switch when the desired position is
reached.
WARNING!
Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that
the shoulder belt is no longer resting against
your chest. In a collision you could slide under
the seat belt, which could result in serious injury
or death.
1 — Power Seat Switch
2 — Power Seatback Switch
WARNING!
Adjusting a seat while driving may be
dangerous. Moving a seat while driving could
result in loss of control which could cause a
collision and serious injury or death.
Seats should be adjusted before fastening the
seat belts and while the vehicle is parked.
Serious injury or death could result from a
poorly adjusted seat belt.
Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that
the shoulder belt is no longer resting against
your chest. In a collision you could slide under
the seat belt, which could result in serious
injury or death.
2
22_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 33
34 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Power Lumbar — If Equipped
Vehicles equipped with power driver or passenger
seats may also be equipped with power lumbar.
The power lumbar switch is located on the
outboard side of the power seat. Push the switch
forward to increase the lumbar support. Push the
switch rearward to decrease the lumbar support.
Lumbar Control Switch
HEATED SEATS — IF EQUIPPED
On some models, the front seats may be equipped
with heaters located in the seat cushions and
seatbacks.
Front Heated Seats
The front heated seats control buttons
are located on the center instrument
panel below the touchscreen, as well as
within the climate controls menu of the
touchscreen.
Press the heated seat button once to turn the
HI setting on.
Press the heated seat button a second time to
turn the LO setting on.
Press the heated seat button a third time to turn
the heating elements off.
When the HI-level setting is selected, the heater
will provide a boosted heat level during the first
four minutes of operation. Then, the heat output
will drop to the normal HI-level. If the HI-level
setting is selected, the system will automatically
switch to LO-level after approximately 60 minutes
of continuous operation. At that time, the display
will change from HI to LO, indicating the change.
The LO-level setting will turn off automatically after
approximately 45 minutes.
NOTE:
The engine must be running for the heated seats to
operate.
For information on use with the Remote Start
system, see Ú page 23.
CAUTION!
Do not place any article under a power seat or
impede its ability to move as it may cause
damage to the seat controls. Seat travel may
become limited if movement is stopped by an
obstruction in the seat’s path.
WARNING!
Persons who are unable to feel pain to the
skin because of advanced age, chronic illness,
diabetes, spinal cord injury, medication,
alcohol use, exhaustion or other physical
condition must exercise care when using the
seat heater. It may cause burns even at low
temperatures, especially if used for long
periods of time.
Do not place anything on the seat or seatback
that insulates against heat, such as a blanket
or cushion. This may cause the seat heater to
overheat. Sitting in a seat that has been over-
heated could cause serious burns due to the
increased surface temperature of the seat.
22_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 34
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 35
VENTILATED SEATS — IF EQUIPPED
Front Ventilated Seats
Located in the seat cushion are small
fans that draw the air from the passenger
compartment, and move air through fine
perforations in the seat cover to help
keep the driver and front passenger cooler in
higher ambient temperatures. The fans operate at
two speeds, HI and LO.
The front ventilated seats control buttons are
located on the center instrument panel below the
touchscreen, as well as within the climate controls
menu of the touchscreen.
Press the ventilated seat button once to
choose HI.
Press the ventilated seat button a second time
to choose LO.
Press the ventilated seat button a third time to
turn the ventilated seat off.
NOTE:
The engine must be running for the ventilated
seats to operate.
For information on use with the Remote Start
system, see Ú page 23.
PLASTIC GROCERY BAG RETAINERS
(R
EGULAR CAB MODELS)
Retainer hooks which will hold plastic grocery bag
handles are attached to the underside of the rear
seat cushion. To access these hooks, lift the rear
seat cushion upward.
HEAD RESTRAINTS
Head restraints are designed to reduce the risk of
injury by restricting head movement in the event of
a rear impact. Head restraints should be adjusted
so that the top of the head restraint is located
above the top of your ear.
Front Head Restraint Adjustment
To raise the head restraint, pull upward on the
head restraint. To lower the head restraint, push
the adjustment button, located at the base of head
restraint, and push downward on the head
restraint.
Head Restraint Adjustment Button Location
NOTE:
Do not reposition the head restraint 180 degrees
to the incorrect position in an attempt to gain addi-
tional clearance to the back of the head.
WARNING!
All occupants, including the driver, should not
operate a vehicle or sit in a vehicle’s seat until
the head restraints are placed in their proper
positions in order to minimize the risk of neck
injury in the event of a crash.
Head restraints should never be adjusted
while the vehicle is in motion. Driving a vehicle
with the head restraints improperly adjusted
or removed could cause serious injury or
death in the event of a collision.
2
22_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 35
36 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Rear Head Restraint Adjustment
The rear seats are equipped with adjustable and
removable head restraints. To raise the head
restraint, pull upward on the head restraint.
To lower the head restraint, push the adjustment
button located on the base of the head restraint
and push downward on the head restraint.
Release/Adjustment Buttons
NOTE:
The rear center head restraint (Crew Cab and
Quad Cab) has only one adjustment position
that is used to aid in the routing of a tether
Ú page 224.
Do not reposition the head restraint
180 degrees to the incorrect position in an
attempt to gain additional clearance to the back
of the head.
Front Head Restraint Removal
To remove the head restraint, raise it up as far as
it can go. Then, push the adjustment button and
the release button at the base of each post while
pulling the head restraint up. To reinstall the head
restraint, put the head restraint posts into the
holes. Then, adjust it to the appropriate height.
NOTE:
Do not reposition the head restraint 180 degrees
to the incorrect position in an attempt to gain addi-
tional clearance to the back of the head.
Rear Head Restraint Removal
To remove the head restraint, push the adjustment
button and the release button while pulling upward
on the whole assembly. To reinstall the head
restraint, put the head restraint posts into the
holes and adjust it to the appropriate height.
NOTE:
To remove outboard restraints, the rear seat
bottom must be folded up.
1 — Release Button
2 — Adjustment Button
WARNING!
A loose head restraint thrown forward in a colli-
sion or hard stop could cause serious injury or
death to occupants of the vehicle. Always
securely stow removed head restraints in a
location outside the occupant compartment.
ALL the head restraints MUST be reinstalled in
the vehicle to properly protect the occupants.
Follow the reinstallation instructions above
prior to operating the vehicle or occupying a
seat.
WARNING!
A loose head restraint thrown forward in a colli-
sion or hard stop could cause serious injury or
death to occupants of the vehicle. Always
securely stow removed head restraints in a
location outside the occupant compartment.
ALL the head restraints MUST be reinstalled in
the vehicle to properly protect the occupants.
Follow the reinstallation instructions above
prior to operating the vehicle or occupying a
seat.
22_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 36
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 37
DRIVER ADJUSTABLE PEDALS —
IF EQUIPPED
The adjustable pedals system is designed to allow
a greater range of driver comfort for steering wheel
tilt and seat position. This feature allows the brake
and accelerator pedals to move toward or away
from the driver to provide improved position with
the steering wheel.
The adjustable pedal switch is located to the left
side of the steering column.
Adjustable Pedals Switch
The pedals cannot be adjusted when the vehicle
is in REVERSE or when the Cruise Control
system is on. If there is an attempt to adjust the
pedals when the system is locked out, the
following messages will appear (on vehicles
equipped with an instrument cluster display):
Adjustable Pedal Disabled — Cruise Control
Engaged
Adjustable Pedal Disabled — Vehicle In
Reverse
NOTE:
Always adjust the pedals to a position that
allows full movement of the pedal.
Further small adjustments may be necessary to
find the best possible seat/pedal position.
MIRRORS
INSIDE REARVIEW MIRROR
Manual Mirror — If Equipped
The mirror head can be adjusted up, down, left,
and right. The mirror should be adjusted to center
on the view through the rear window.
WARNING!
Do not adjust the pedals while the vehicle is
moving. You could lose control and have an
accident. Always adjust the pedals while the
vehicle is parked.
CAUTION!
Do not place any article under the adjustable
pedals or impede its ability to move, as it may
cause damage to the pedal controls. Pedal
travel may become limited if movement is
stopped by an obstruction in the adjustable
pedal's path.
2
22_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 37
38 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Headlight glare from vehicles behind you can be
reduced by moving the small control under the
mirror to the night position (toward the rear of the
vehicle). The mirror should be adjusted while set in
the day position (toward the windshield).
Adjusting Manual Mirror
Automatic Dimming Mirror — If Equipped
The rearview mirror can be adjusted up, down, left,
and right. The mirror should be adjusted to center
on the view through the rear window.
This mirror automatically adjusts for headlight
glare from vehicles behind you.
NOTE:
The Automatic Dimming Mirror feature is disabled
when the vehicle is in REVERSE to improve the
driver’s rear view.
The Automatic Dimming feature can be turned on
or off through the touchscreen.
Automatic Dimming Mirror
ILLUMINATED VANITY MIRROR —
I
F EQUIPPED
To access an illuminated vanity mirror, flip down
one of the visors and lift the cover.
Illuminated Vanity Mirror
“Slide-On-Rod” Features Of Sun Visor —
If Equipped
The sun visor “Slide-On-Rod” feature allows for
additional flexibility in positioning the sun visor to
block out the sun.
1. Fold down the sun visor.
2. Unclip the visor from the corner clip.
3. Pivot the sun visor toward the side window.
CAUTION!
To avoid damage to the mirror during cleaning,
never spray any cleaning solution directly onto
the mirror. Apply the solution onto a clean cloth
and wipe the mirror clean.
22_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 38
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 39
4. Extend the sun visor for additional sun
blockage.
“Slide-On-Rod” Extender
NOTE:
The sun visor can also be extended while the sun
visor is against the windshield for additional sun
blockage through the front of the vehicle.
OUTSIDE MIRRORS
The outside mirror(s) can be adjusted to the center
of the adjacent lane of traffic to achieve the
optimal view.
NOTE:
If your vehicle is equipped with puddle lamps
under the outside mirrors, they can be turned off
through the Uconnect system Ú page 150.
Outside Mirrors Folding Feature
All outside mirrors are designed to be able to be
manually folded both forward and rearward to
prevent damage.
Folding Mirror
DRIVER'S OUTSIDE AUTOMATIC
D
IMMING MIRROR — IF EQUIPPED
The driver’s outside mirror will automatically adjust
for glare from vehicles behind you. This feature is
controlled by the inside Automatic Dimming mirror
and will automatically adjust for headlight glare
when the inside mirror adjusts.
WARNING!
Vehicles and other objects seen in the
passenger side convex mirror will look smaller
and farther away than they really are. Relying too
much on your passenger side convex mirror
could cause you to collide with another vehicle
or other object. Use your inside mirror when
judging the size or distance of a vehicle seen in
the passenger side convex mirror. Some vehicles
will not have a convex passenger side mirror.
CAUTION!
It is recommended to fold the mirrors into the
full rearward position to resist damage when
entering a car wash or a narrow location.
2
22_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 39
40 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
POWER MIRRORS — IF EQUIPPED
The controls for the power mirrors are located on
the driver's door trim panel.
Power Mirror Controls
The power mirror controls consist of mirror select
buttons and a four-way mirror control switch.
To adjust a mirror, push either the L (left) or
R (right) button to select the mirror that you want
to adjust.
Using the mirror control switch, push on any of the
four arrows for the direction that you want the
mirror to move.
Power Mirror Movement
POWER FOLDING OUTSIDE MIRRORS
F
OR STANDARD — IF EQUIPPED
The power folding mirrors can be folded rearward
and unfolded into the normal driving position.
The switch for the power folding mirrors is located
between the power mirror switches L (left) and
R (right). Push the switch once and the mirrors will
fold in, push the switch a second time and the
mirrors will return to the normal driving position.
If the mirror is manually folded after a powered
cycle, a potential extra button push is required to
get the mirrors back to the normal driving position.
If the mirror does not fold automatically, check for
ice or dirt buildup at the pivot area, which can
cause excessive drag.
Power Folding Mirror Switch
Resetting The Power Folding Outside Mirrors
You may need to reset the power folding mirrors if
the following occurs:
The mirrors are accidentally blocked while
folding.
The mirrors are accidentally manually
folded/unfolded (by hand or by pushing the
power folding mirror switch).
1 — Left Mirror Selection
2 — Mirror Direction Control
3 — Right Mirror Selection
22_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 40
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 41
The mirrors come out of the unfolded position.
The mirrors shake and vibrate at normal driving
speeds.
To reset the power folding mirrors: Fold and unfold
them by pushing the button (this may require
multiple attempts). This resets them to their
normal driving position.
TRAILER TOWING MIRRORS —
I
F EQUIPPED
These mirrors are designed with an adjustable
mirror head to provide a greater vision range when
towing extra-wide loads. To change position
inboard or outboard, the mirror head should be
rotated (flipped in or out).
Trailer Towing Position
NOTE:
Fold the trailer towing mirrors rearward prior to
entering an automated car wash.
A small blindspot mirror is located next to the main
mirror and can be adjusted manually.
Blindspot Mirror
HEATED MIRRORS — IF EQUIPPED
These mirrors are heated to melt frost or
ice. This feature will be activated
whenever you turn on the rear window
defroster (if equipped) Ú page 54.
UNIVERSAL GARAGE DOOR OPENER
(HOMELINK®) — IF EQUIPPED
HomeLink® Buttons
Use this QR code to access your
digital experience.
HomeLink® replaces up to
three hand-held transmitters
that operate devices such as
garage door openers, motorized
gates, lighting, or home security
systems. The HomeLink® unit is powered by your
vehicle’s 12 Volt battery.
The HomeLink® buttons that are located in the
overhead console or sunvisor designate the
three different HomeLink® channels.
2
22_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 41
42 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
To operate HomeLink®, push and release any
of the programmed HomeLink® buttons. These
buttons will activate the devices they are
programmed to with each press of the corre-
sponding HomeLink® button.
NOTE:
HomeLink® is disabled when the Vehicle Security
system is active Ú page 353.
BEFORE YOU BEGIN PROGRAMMING
H
OMELINK®
For efficient programming and accurate
transmission of the Radio Frequency (RF) signal, it
is recommended that a new battery be placed in
the hand-held transmitter of the device that is
being programmed to the HomeLink® system.
Make sure your hand-held transmitter is
programmed to activate the device you are trying
to program your HomeLink® button to.
Ensure that your vehicle is parked outside of the
garage before you begin programming.
It is recommended that you erase all the channels
of your HomeLink® before you use it for the first
time.
ERASING ALL THE HOMELINK®
C
HANNELS
To erase the channels, follow this procedure:
1. Place the ignition switch into the ON/RUN
position.
2. Push and hold the two outside HomeLink®
buttons (I and III) for up to 20 seconds.
The instrument cluster display will display
“CLEARING CHANNELS.” Release the buttons
when “CHANNELS CLEARED” appears on the
display.
NOTE:
Erasing all channels should only be performed
when programming HomeLink® for the first time.
Do not erase channels when programming addi-
tional buttons.
IDENTIFYING WHETHER YOU HAVE A
R
OLLING CODE OR NON-ROLLING CODE
D
EVICE
Before programming a device to one of your
HomeLink® buttons, you must determine whether
the device has a rolling code or non-rolling code.
Rolling Code Devices
To determine if your device has a rolling code, a
good indicator is its manufacturing date. Typically,
devices manufactured after 1995 have rolling
codes. A device with a rolling code will also have a
“LEARN” or “TRAIN” button located where the
antenna is attached to the device. The button may
not be immediately visible when looking at the
device. The name and color of the button may vary
slightly by manufacturer.
NOTE:
The “LEARN” or “TRAIN” button is not the button
you normally use to operate the device.
Non-rolling Code Devices
Most devices manufactured before 1995 will not
have a rolling code. These devices will also not
have a “LEARN” or “TRAIN” button.
PROGRAMMING HOMELINK® TO A
G
ARAGE DOOR OPENER
To program any of the HomeLink® buttons to
activate your garage door opener motor, follow
these steps:
22_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 42
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 43
NOTE:
All HomeLink® buttons are programmed using this
procedure. You do not need to erase all channels
when programming additional buttons.
1. Place the ignition switch into the ON/RUN
position.
2. Place the garage door opener transmitter
1 to 3 inches (3 to 8 cm) away from the
HomeLink® button you wish to program.
3. Push and hold the HomeLink® button you
want to program while you push and hold the
garage door opener transmitter button you are
trying to replicate.
4. Continue to hold both buttons until the
instrument cluster display changes from
“CHANNEL # TRAINING” to “CHANNEL #
TRAINED,” then release both buttons.
NOTE:
It may take up to 30 seconds or longer in some
cases for the channel to train.
If “DID NOT TRAIN” appears in the instrument
cluster display, repeat from Step 2.
Make sure the garage door opener motor is
plugged in before moving on to the rolling
code/non-rolling code final steps.
Rolling Code Garage Door Opener Final Steps
NOTE:
You have 30 seconds in which to initiate rolling
code final step 2, after completing rolling code
final step 1.
1. At the garage door opener motor (in the
garage), locate the “LEARN” or “TRAIN”
button. This can usually be found where the
hanging antenna wire is attached to the
garage door opener motor. Firmly push and
release the “LEARN” or “TRAIN” button.
2. Return to the vehicle and push the
programmed HomeLink® button three times
(holding the button for two seconds each
time). The instrument cluster display will show
“CHANNEL # TRANSMIT.” If the garage door
opener motor operates, programming is
complete.
NOTE:
If the garage door opener/device does not
activate, push the button a third time (for two
seconds) to complete the training.
To program the remaining two HomeLink®
buttons, repeat each step for each remaining
button. DO NOT erase the channels.
Non-Rolling Code Garage Door Opener Final Steps
1. Place the ignition switch in the ON/RUN
position.
2. Place the hand-held transmitter 1 to 3 inches
(3 to 8 cm) away from the HomeLink® button
you wish to program.
3. Push and hold the HomeLink® button you
want to program while you push and hold the
hand-held transmitter button.
4. Continue to hold both buttons until the
instrument cluster display changes from
“CHANNEL # TRAINING” to “CHANNEL #
TRAINED,” then release both buttons.
NOTE:
It may take up to 30 seconds or longer in
some cases for the channel to train.
If the instrument cluster display shows
“DID NOT TRAIN”, repeat from Step 2.
2
22_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 43
44 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
5. Push and hold the programmed HomeLink®
button. The instrument cluster display will
display “CHANNEL # TRANSMIT.” If the garage
door opener/device activates, programming is
complete.
To program the remaining two HomeLink®
buttons, repeat each step for each remaining
button. DO NOT erase the channels.
PROGRAMMING HOMELINK® TO A
M
ISCELLANEOUS DEVICE
The procedure on how to program HomeLink® to a
miscellaneous device follows the same procedure
as programming to a garage door opener
Ú page 42. Be sure to determine if the device has
a rolling code, or non-rolling code before beginning
the programming process.
NOTE:
Canadian Radio Frequency (RF) laws require trans-
mitter signals to time-out (or quit) after several
seconds of transmission, which may not be long
enough for HomeLink® to pick up the signal during
programming. Similar to this Canadian law, some
U.S. gate operators are designed to time-out in the
same manner. The procedure may need to be
performed multiple times to successfully pair the
device to your HomeLink® buttons.
REPROGRAMMING A SINGLE
H
OMELINK® BUTTON
To reprogram a single HomeLink® button that has
been previously trained, without erasing all the
channels, proceed as follows. Be sure to
determine whether the new device you want to
program the HomeLink® button to has a rolling
code, or non-rolling code.
1. Place the ignition in the ON/RUN position,
without starting the engine.
2. Push and hold the desired HomeLink® button
until the instrument cluster display shows
“CHANNEL # TRAINING” Do not release the
button.
3. Without releasing the button, proceed with
Step 2 in “Programming HomeLink® To A
Garage Door Opener” Ú page 42, and follow
all remaining steps.
WARNING!
Your motorized door or gate will open and
close while you are programming the universal
transmitter. Do not program the transmitter if
people or pets are in the path of the door or
gate.
Do not run your vehicle in a closed garage or
confined area while programming the trans-
mitter. Exhaust gas from your vehicle contains
Carbon Monoxide (CO) which is odorless and
colorless. Carbon Monoxide is poisonous
when inhaled and can cause you and others to
be severely injured or killed.
22_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 44
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 45
CANADIAN /GATE OPERATOR
P
ROGRAMMING
For programming transmitters in Canada/United
States that require the transmitter signals to
“time-out” after several seconds of transmission:
Canadian Radio Frequency (RF) laws require
transmitter signals to time-out (or quit) after
several seconds of transmission, which may not be
long enough for HomeLink® to pick up the signal
during programming. Similar to this Canadian law,
some U.S. gate operators are designed to time-out
in the same manner.
It may be helpful to unplug the device during the
cycling process to prevent possible overheating of
the garage door or gate motor.
1. Place the ignition in the ON/RUN position.
NOTE:
For vehicles equipped with Keyless Enter ‘n Go™,
place the ignition in the RUN position with the
engine on. Make sure while programming
HomeLink® with the engine on that your vehicle is
outside of your garage, or that the garage door
remains open at all times.
2. Place the hand-held transmitter 1 to 3 inches
(3 to 8 cm) away from the HomeLink® button
you wish to program.
3. Push and hold the HomeLink® button while
you push and release (cycle), your hand-held
transmitter every two seconds.
4. Continue to hold both buttons until the
instrument cluster display changes from
“CHANNEL # TRAINING” to “CHANNEL #
TRAINED,” then release both buttons.
NOTE:
It may take up to 30 seconds or longer in
some cases for the channel to train.
If the instrument cluster display shows
“DID NOT TRAIN”, repeat from Step 2.
5. Push and hold the programmed HomeLink®
button. The instrument cluster display will
display “CHANNEL # TRANSMIT.” If the device
is plugged in and activates, programming is
complete.
If you unplugged the garage door opener/device
for programming, plug it back in at this time.
Reprogramming A Single HomeLink® Button
(Canadian/Gate Operator)
To reprogram a channel that has been previously
trained, follow these steps:
1. Place the ignition in the ON/RUN position.
2. Push and hold the desired HomeLink® button
until the instrument cluster display shows
“CHANNEL # TRAINING”. Do not release the
button.
3. Without releasing the button, proceed with
“Canadian/Gate Operator Programming”
Step 2 and follow all remaining steps.
SECURITY
It is advised to erase all channels before you sell or
turn in your vehicle.
To erase the channels, press and hold the two
outside HomeLink® buttons (I and III) for up to
20 seconds. The instrument cluster display will
display “CLEARING CHANNELS.” Release the
buttons when the instrument cluster display shows
“CHANNELS CLEARED.”
The HomeLink® Universal Transceiver is disabled
when the Vehicle Security system is active.
2
22_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 45
46 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
(Continued)
TROUBLESHOOTING TIPS
If you are having trouble programming
HomeLink®, here are some of the most common
solutions:
Replace the battery in the garage door opener
hand-held transmitter.
Push the LEARN button on the garage door
opener to complete the training for a rolling
code.
Did you unplug the device for programming and
remember to plug it back in?
If you have any problems, or require assistance,
please call toll-free 1-800-355-3515 or, on the
Internet at HomeLink.com for information or
assistance.
EXTERIOR LIGHTS
HEADLIGHT SWITCH
The headlight switch is located on the left side of
the instrument panel. The headlight switch
controls the operation of the headlights, parking
lights, instrument panel lights, cargo lights and fog
lights (if equipped).
Headlight Switch
WARNING!
Vehicle exhaust contains carbon monoxide, a
dangerous gas. Do not run your vehicle in the
garage while programming the transceiver.
Exhaust gas can cause serious injury or death.
Your motorized door or gate will open and
close while you are programming the universal
transceiver. Do not program the transceiver if
people, pets or other objects are in the path of
the door or gate. Only use this transceiver with
a garage door opener that has a “stop and
reverse” feature as required by Federal safety
standards. This includes most garage door
opener models manufactured after 1982. Do
not use a garage door opener without these
safety features.
WARNING!
1 — Rotate Headlight Control
2 — Push Cargo Light Switch
3 — Push Fog Light Switch
4 — Dimmer Control
22_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 46
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 47
Headlight Switch (Vehicles Sold In Canada Only)
NOTE:
Vehicles sold in Canada are equipped with a head-
light switch with an AUTO and ON detent but
without an OFF detent. Headlights will be deacti-
vated when the headlight switch is placed in the
parking lights position. However, the Daytime
Running Lights (DRLs) will be activated along with
the front and rear marker lights. The DRLs may be
deactivated when the parking brake is engaged.
To turn on the headlights, rotate the headlight
switch clockwise to the headlight position. When
the headlight switch is on, the parking lights,
taillights, license plate light and instrument panel
lights are also turned on. To turn off the headlights,
rotate the headlight switch back to the O (off)
position.
For vehicles sold in Canada, rotate the headlight
switch clockwise from the AUTO position to the first
detent for parking lights and instrument panel
lights. Rotate to the second detent to turn on
headlights, parking lights, and instrument panel
lights.
NOTE:
Your vehicle is equipped with plastic headlight
and fog light (if equipped) lenses that are lighter
and less susceptible to stone breakage than
glass lights. Plastic is not as scratch resistant as
glass and therefore different lens cleaning
procedures must be followed.
To minimize the possibility of scratching the
lenses and reducing light output, avoid wiping
with a dry cloth. To remove road dirt, wash with
a mild soap solution followed by rinsing.
MULTIFUNCTION LEVER
The multifunction lever is located on the left side of
the steering column.
Multifunction Lever
DAYTIME RUNNING LIGHTS (DRLS) —
I
F EQUIPPED
The Daytime Running Lights (DRLs) come on
whenever the engine is running, and the low
beams are not on. The lights will remain on until
the ignition is placed in the OFF or ACC position, or
the parking brake is engaged.
1 — Rotate Headlight Control
2 — Push Cargo Light Switch
3 — Push Fog Light Switch
4 — Dimmer Control
CAUTION!
Do not use abrasive cleaning components,
solvents, steel wool or other abrasive materials
to clean the lenses.
2
22_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 47
48 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE:
For vehicles sold in Canada, the DRLs will auto-
matically deactivate when the front fog lights
are turned on.
If allowed by law in the country in which the
vehicle was purchased, the DRLs can be turned
on and off using the Uconnect system
Ú page 150.
On some vehicles, the Daytime Running Lights
may deactivate or reduce intensity on one side
of the vehicle (when a turn signal is activated on
that side), or on both sides of the vehicle (when
the hazard warning lights are activated).
HIGH/LOW BEAM SWITCH
Push the multifunction lever toward the instrument
panel to switch the headlights to high beams.
Pulling the multifunction lever back will turn the
low beams on.
AUTOMATIC HIGH BEAM HEADLAMP
C
ONTROL — IF EQUIPPED
The Automatic High Beam Headlamp Control
system provides increased forward lighting at night
by automating high beam control through the use
of a digital camera mounted on the inside rearview
mirror.
This camera detects vehicle specific light and
automatically switches from high beams to low
beams until the approaching vehicle is out of view.
NOTE:
The Automatic High Beam Headlamp Control
can be turned on or off by selecting “ON” under
“Auto Dim High Beams” within your Uconnect
Settings Ú page 150, as well as turning the
headlight switch to the AUTO position.
Broken, muddy, or obstructed headlights and
taillights of vehicles in the field of view will
cause headlights to remain on longer (closer to
the vehicle). Also, dirt, film, and other obstruc-
tions on the windshield or camera lens will
cause the system to function improperly.
If the windshield or Automatic High Beam Head-
lamp Control mirror is replaced, the mirror must
be re-aimed to ensure proper performance. See
a local authorized dealer.
To opt out of the Advanced Auto High Beam
Sensitivity Control (default) and enter Reduced
High Beam Sensitivity Control (not recom-
mended), toggle the high beam lever six full on/
off cycles within 10 seconds of placing the igni-
tion in the ON position. The system will return to
the default setting upon placing the ignition in
the OFF position.
FLASH-TO-PASS
You can signal another vehicle with your headlights
by lightly pulling the multifunction lever toward you.
This will cause the high beam headlights to turn on,
and remain on, until the lever is released.
AUTOMATIC HEADLIGHTS — IF EQUIPPED
This system automatically turns the headlights on
or off according to ambient light levels. To turn the
system on, rotate the headlight switch to the AUTO
position.
When the system is on, the Headlight Delay feature
is also on. This means the headlights will stay on
for up to 90 seconds after you place the ignition
into the OFF position. To turn the automatic
headlights off, turn the headlight switch out of the
AUTO position.
NOTE:
The engine must be running before the headlights
will turn on in the Automatic Mode.
22_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 48
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 49
PARKING LIGHTS AND PANEL LIGHTS
To turn on the parking lights and instrument panel
lights, rotate the headlight switch clockwise. To
turn off the parking lights, rotate the headlight
switch back to the O (off) position.
NOTE:
Vehicles sold in Canada are equipped with a
headlight switch with an AUTO and ON detent but
without an OFF detent. Headlights will be deacti-
vated when the headlight switch is placed in the
parking lights position. However, the Daytime
Running Lights (DRLs) will be activated along with
the front and rear marker lights. The DRLs may be
deactivated when the parking brake is engaged.
HEADLIGHTS ON WITH WIPERS
If your vehicle is equipped with Automatic
Headlights, it also has this customer-programmable
feature. When your headlights are in the automatic
mode and the engine is running, they will
automatically turn on when the wiper system is on.
This feature is programmable through the Uconnect
system
Ú
page 150.
NOTE:
When your headlights come on during the daytime,
the instrument panel lights will automatically dim
to the lower nighttime intensity.
HEADLIGHT DELAY
To assist when exiting the vehicle, the headlight
delay feature will leave the headlights on for up to
90 seconds. This delay is initiated when the ignition
is placed in the OFF position while the headlight
switch is on, and then the headlight switch is cycled
off. Headlight delay can be canceled by either
turning the headlight switch on then off, or by
placing the ignition in the ON position.
NOTE:
This feature can be programmed through the
Uconnect system Ú page 150.
The headlight delay feature is automatically
activated if the headlight switch is left in the
AUTO position when the ignition is placed in the
OFF position.
LIGHTS-ON REMINDER
If the headlights, parking lights, or cargo lights are
left on after the ignition is placed in the OFF
position, the vehicle will chime when the driver’s
door is opened.
FOG LIGHTS — IF EQUIPPED
The fog lights are turned on by rotating the
headlight switch to the parking light or headlight
position and pushing in the headlight rotary
control.
Fog Light Switch
Fog Light Switch (Vehicles Sold In Canada Only)
2
22_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 49
50 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
The fog lights will operate only when the parking
lights are on or when the vehicle headlights are on
low beam. An indicator light located in the
instrument cluster will illuminate when the fog
lights are on. The fog lights will turn off when the
switch is pushed a second time, when the
headlight switch is rotated to the off position, or
the high beam is selected.
TURN SIGNALS
Move the multifunction lever up or down to
activate the turn signals. The arrows on each side
of the instrument cluster flash to show proper
operation.
NOTE:
If either light remains on and does not flash, or
there is a very fast flash rate, check for a defective
outside light bulb.
LANE CHANGE ASSIST — IF EQUIPPED
Lightly push the multifunction lever up or down,
without moving beyond the detent, and the turn
signal will flash three times then automatically
turn off.
CARGO LIGHT WITH BED LIGHTS —
I
F EQUIPPED
The cargo light and bed lights (if equipped) are
turned on by pushing the cargo light button located
just below the headlight switch.
Cargo/Bed Light Button
Cargo/Bed Light Button (Vehicles Sold In Canada Only)
When the vehicle is stationary, these lights can
also be turned on using the switch located just
inside the pickup box. A telltale will illuminate in
the instrument cluster display when these lights
are on. Pushing the switch a second time will turn
the lights off.
Bed Light Switch Without RamBox
The cargo light and bed lights (if equipped) will turn
on for approximately 60 seconds when a key fob
unlock button is pushed, as part of the Illuminated
Entry feature.
22_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 50
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 51
NOTE:
The cargo light will automatically turn off if the
vehicle is shifted into NEUTRAL or DRIVE, and will
turn back on when the vehicle is shifted into PARK
or REVERSE. The bed lights are not affected by
gear selection.
BATTERY SAVER
Timers are set to both the interior and exterior
lights to protect the life of your vehicle’s battery.
After 10 minutes, if the ignition is OFF and any door
is left open or the dimmer control is rotated all the
way up to the dome light on position, the interior
lights will automatically turn off.
NOTE:
Battery saver mode is canceled if the ignition is ON.
If the headlights remain on while the ignition is
placed in the OFF position, the exterior lights will
automatically turn off after eight minutes. If the
headlights are turned on and left on for eight
minutes while the ignition is OFF, the exterior lights
will automatically turn off.
INTERIOR LIGHTS
COURTESY LIGHTS — IF EQUIPPED
Courtesy and dome lights are turned on when the
front doors are opened, when the dimmer control
is rotated to the right detent position. If your
vehicle is equipped with Remote Keyless Entry,
and the unlock button is pushed on the key fob, the
courtesy and dome lights will turn on.
Courtesy/Reading Lights
Both lights in the overhead console and rear
passenger compartment will illuminate as courtesy
lights when a door is opened, when the dimmer
control is rotated to the courtesy light position, or
when the unlock button is pushed on the key fob.
These lights are also operated individually as
reading lights by pushing on the corresponding lens.
Front Courtesy/Reading Lights
NOTE:
The courtesy/reading lights will remain on until the
switch is pushed a second time, so be sure they
have been turned off before exiting the vehicle.
If the interior lights are left on after the ignition is
placed in the OFF position, they will automatically
turn off after 15 minutes.
Ambient Light — If Equipped
The overhead console is equipped with an ambient
light feature. This light casts illumination for
improved visibility of the floor console area.
Ambient Light
2
22_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 51
52 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Dimmer Control
The dimmer control is located next to the headlight
switch located on the left side of the instrument
panel.
Dimmer Control
Dimmer Control (Vehicles Sold In Canada Only)
With the parking lights or headlights on, rotating
the instrument panel dimmer control to the right
will increase the brightness of the instrument
panel lights.
Rotate the instrument panel dimmer control to the
O (off) position, and the interior lights will remain
off when the doors are open.
Rotating the instrument panel dimmer control to
the far right, past the detent, will turn on the
interior lights. The interior lights will remain on
when the dimmer control is in this position.
Dimming Of The Uconnect Touchscreen
The brightness of the Uconnect touchscreen can be
dimmed using the instrument panel dimmer control
when the parking lights or headlights are on.
When Display Mode is set to Auto within the
Uconnect system, the brightness will automatically
adjust from daytime intensity to nighttime intensity
(and vice versa) based on ambient light levels
outside of the vehicle.
NOTE:
The brightness of the Uconnect touchscreen
cannot be adjusted when the instrument panel
dimmer control is rotated to the upper most
detent, even when Display Mode is set to
Auto within the Uconnect Settings.
When Display Mode is set to Manual, the
brightness of the Uconnect touchscreen will adjust
to the set brightness (1 - 6) when the headlights
are either on or off. For more information on these
Uconnect Settings, see Ú page 150.
ILLUMINATED APPROACH
The courtesy lights will turn on when you use the
key fob to unlock the doors or open any door.
This feature also turns on the approach lighting in
the outside mirrors (if equipped) Ú page 37.
The lights will fade off after approximately
30 seconds, or they will immediately fade off once
the ignition switch is changed to ON/RUN from the
OFF position.
The front courtesy overhead console and door
courtesy lights will not turn off if the dimmer
control is in the courtesy light position.
The illuminated entry system will not operate if the
dimmer control is in the O (off) position.
NOTE:
If your vehicle is equipped with illuminated
approach lights under the outside mirrors, they can
be turned off by moving the dimmer control into
the O (off) position.
22_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 52
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 53
WINDSHIELD WIPERS AND WASHERS
The windshield wiper/washer controls are located
on the multifunction lever on the left side of the
steering column. The front wipers are operated by
rotating a switch, located on the end of the lever.
Windshield Wiper/Washer Lever
WINDSHIELD WIPER OPERATION
Intermittent Wipers
The intermittent feature of this system was
designed for use when weather conditions make a
single wiping cycle, with a variable pause between
cycles, desirable. For maximum delay between
cycles, rotate the control knob upward to the
first detent.
The delay interval decreases as you rotate the
knob until it enters the low continual speed
position. The delay can be regulated from a
maximum of about 18 seconds between cycles, to
a cycle every one second. The delay intervals will
double in duration when the vehicle speed is
10 mph (16 km/h) or less.
Windshield Washers
To use the windshield washer, push the washer
knob, located on the end of the multifunction lever,
inward and hold. Washer fluid will be sprayed and
the wiper will operate for two to three cycles after
the washer knob is released.
If the washer knob pushed while in the delay range,
the wiper will operate for several seconds after the
washer knob is released. It will then resume the
intermittent interval previously selected. If the
washer knob is pushed while in the off position, the
wiper will turn on and cycle approximately three
times after the wash knob is released.
To prevent freeze-up of your windshield washer
system in cold weather, select a solution or mixture
that meets or exceeds the temperature range of
your climate. This rating information can be found
on most washer fluid containers.
Mist
When a single wipe to clear off road mist or spray
from a passing vehicle is needed, push the washer
knob, located on the end of the multifunction lever,
inward briefly and release. The wipers will cycle
one time and automatically shut off.
NOTE:
The mist feature does not activate the washer
pump; therefore, no washer fluid will be sprayed on
the windshield. The wash function must be used in
order to spray the windshield with washer fluid.
For information on wiper care and replacement,
see Ú page 299.
1 — Push End Inward (Hold For Washer Or
Short Press For Mist)
2 — Rotate For Front Wiper Operation
WARNING!
Sudden loss of visibility through the windshield
could lead to a collision. You might not see other
vehicles or other obstacles. To avoid sudden
icing of the windshield during freezing weather,
warm the windshield with the defroster before
and during windshield washer use.
2
22_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 53
54 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
RAIN SENSING WIPERS — IF EQUIPPED
This feature senses rain or snowfall on the
windshield and automatically activates the wipers.
Rotate the end of the multifunction lever to one of
four detent positions to activate this feature.
The sensitivity of the system can be adjusted with
the multifunction lever. Wiper delay position one is
the least sensitive, and wiper delay detent position
four is the most sensitive.
Wiper delay position three should be used for
normal rain conditions.
Positions one and two can be used if the driver
desires less wiper sensitivity. Position four can be
used if the driver desires more sensitivity. Place
the wiper switch in the O (off) position when not
using the system.
NOTE:
The Rain Sensing feature will not operate
when the wiper switch is in the low or
high-speed position.
The Rain Sensing feature may not function prop-
erly when ice, or dried salt water is present on
the windshield.
Use of Rain-X or products containing wax or sili-
cone may reduce Rain Sensing performance.
The Rain Sensing feature can be turned on and
off using the Uconnect system Ú page 150.
The Rain Sensing system has protection features
for the wiper blades and arms, and will not operate
under the following conditions:
Low Ambient Temperature — When the ignition
is first placed in the ON position, the Rain
Sensing system will not operate until the wiper
switch is moved, vehicle speed is greater than
3 mph (5 km/h), or the outside temperature is
greater than 32°F (0°C).
Transmission In NEUTRAL Position — When the
ignition is ON, and the automatic transmission
is in the NEUTRAL position, the Rain Sensing
system will not operate until the wiper switch is
moved, vehicle speed is greater than 3 mph
(5 km/h), or the gear selector is moved out of
the NEUTRAL position.
Remote Start Mode Inhibit — On vehicles
equipped with the Remote Start system, Rain
Sensing wipers are not operational when the
vehicle is in the Remote Start mode.
CLIMATE CONTROLS
The Climate Control system allows you to regulate
the temperature, air flow, and direction of air
circulating throughout the vehicle. The controls are
located on the touchscreen (if equipped) and on
the instrument panel below the radio.
AUTOMATIC CLIMATE CONTROL
D
ESCRIPTIONS AND FUNCTIONS
Uconnect 3 With 5–inch Display With
Automatic Temperature Controls
Uconnect 4C/4C NAV With
Automatic Temperature Controls
22_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 54
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 55
Uconnect 5 With 8.4–inch Display Automatic
Temperature Controls
NOTE:
Icons and descriptions can vary based upon
vehicle equipment.
MAX A/C Button
Press and release the MAX A/C button on
the touchscreen to change the current
setting to the coldest output of air.
The MAX A/C indicator illuminates when
MAX A/C is on. Pressing the button again will cause
the MAX A/C operation to exit.
NOTE:
The MAX A/C button is only available on the
touchscreen.
A/C Button
Press and release this button on the
touchscreen, or push the button on the
faceplate to change the current setting.
The A/C indicator illuminates when
A/C is on.
Recirculation Button
Press and release this button on the
touchscreen, or push the button on the
faceplate, to change the system between
Recirculation mode and outside air
mode. The Recirculation indicator and the A/C
indicator illuminate when the Recirculation button
is pressed. Recirculation can be used when
outside conditions, such as smoke, odors, dust, or
high humidity are present. Recirculation can be
used in all modes. Recirculation may be
unavailable (button on the touchscreen greyed
out) if conditions exist that could create fogging on
the inside of the windshield. The A/C can be
deselected manually without disturbing the mode
control selection. Continuous use of the
Recirculation mode may make the inside air stuffy
and window fogging may occur. Extended use of
this mode is not recommended. Recirculation
mode may automatically adjust to optimize
customer experience for warming, cooling,
dehumidification, etc.
Auto Button
Set your desired temperature and press
AUTO. AUTO will achieve and maintain
your desired temperature by
automatically adjusting the blower speed
and air distribution. Air Conditioning (A/C) may
be active during AUTO operation to improve
performance. AUTO mode is highly recommended
for efficiency.
You can turn AUTO on in one of two ways:
Press and release this button on the touch-
screen.
Push the button on the faceplate.
Toggling this function will cause the system to
switch between manual mode and automatic
mode Ú page 60.
Front Defrost Button
Press and release the Front Defrost
button on the touchscreen, or push and
release the button on the faceplate, to
change the current airflow setting to
Defrost mode. The Front Defrost indicator
illuminates when Front Defrost is on. Air comes
from the windshield and side window demist
outlets. When the defrost button is selected, the
blower level may increase.
2
22_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 55
56 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
(Continued)
Use Defrost mode with maximum temperature
settings for best windshield and side window
defrosting and defogging. When toggling the front
defrost mode button, the climate system will return
to the previous setting.
Rear Defrost Button
Press and release the Rear Defrost
button on the touchscreen, or push and
release the button on the faceplate, to
turn on the rear window defroster and the
heated outside mirrors (if equipped). The Rear
Defrost indicator illuminates when the rear window
defroster is on. The rear window defroster
automatically turns off after 15 minutes.
Driver And Passenger Temperature Up And
Down Buttons
These buttons provide the driver and passenger
with independent temperature control.
Push the red button on the faceplate or
touchscreen, or press and slide the
temperature bar towards the red arrow
button on the touchscreen for warmer
temperature settings.
Push the blue button on the faceplate or
touchscreen, or press and slide the
temperature bar towards the blue arrow
button on the touchscreen for cooler
temperature settings.
NOTE:
The numbers within the temperature display will
only appear if the system is equipped with an auto-
matic climate control system.
SYNC Button
Press the SYNC button on the
touchscreen to toggle the SYNC feature
on/off. The SYNC indicator illuminates
when SYNC is on. SYNC synchronizes the
passenger temperature setting with the driver
temperature setting. Changing the passenger’s
temperature setting while in SYNC will
automatically exit this feature.
NOTE:
The SYNC button is only available on the
touchscreen.
Blower Control
Blower Control regulates the amount of
air forced through the climate control
system. There are seven blower speeds
available. Adjusting the blower will cause
automatic mode to switch to manual operation.
The speeds can be selected using either the
blower control knob on the faceplate or the
buttons on the touchscreen.
Faceplate
The blower speed increases as you turn the blower
control knob clockwise from the lowest blower
setting. The blower speed decreases as you turn
the blower control knob counterclockwise.
CAUTION!
Failure to follow these cautions can cause
damage to the heating elements:
Use care when washing the inside of the rear
window. Do not use abrasive window cleaners
on the interior surface of the window. Use a
soft cloth and a mild washing solution, wiping
parallel to the heating elements. Labels can
be peeled off after soaking with warm water.
Do not use scrapers, sharp instruments, or
abrasive window cleaners on the interior
surface of the window.
Keep all objects a safe distance from the
window.
CAUTION!
22_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 56
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 57
Touchscreen
Use the small blower icon to reduce the blower
setting and the large blower icon to increase the
blower setting. Blower can also be selected by
pressing the blower bar area between the icons.
Mode Control
Select Mode by pressing one of the Mode
buttons on the touchscreen, or pushing
the Mode button on the faceplate, to
change the airflow distribution mode.
The airflow distribution mode can be adjusted so
air comes from the instrument panel outlets, floor
outlets, defrost outlets, and demist outlets.
Panel Mode
Air comes from the outlets in the
instrument panel. Each of these outlets
can be individually adjusted to direct the
flow of air. The air vanes of the center
outlets and outboard outlets can be moved up and
down or side to side to regulate airflow direction.
There is a shut-off wheel located below the air
vents to shut off or adjust the amount of airflow
from these outlets.
Bi-Level Mode
Air comes from the instrument panel
outlets and floor outlets. A slight amount
of air is directed through the defrost and
side window demister outlets.
NOTE:
Bi-Level mode is designed under comfort condi-
tions to provide cooler air out of the panel outlets
and warmer air from the floor outlets.
Floor Mode
Air comes from the floor outlets. A slight
amount of air is directed through the
defrost and side window demister
outlets.
Mix Mode
Air is directed through the floor, defrost,
and side window demister outlets. This
setting works best in cold or snowy
conditions that require extra heat to the
windshield. This setting is good for maintaining
comfort while reducing moisture on the
windshield.
Climate Control OFF Button
Press and release the OFF button on the
touchscreen, or push the OFF button on
the faceplate (if equipped) to turn the
Climate Control on/off.
MANUAL CLIMATE CONTROL
D
ESCRIPTIONS AND FUNCTIONS
Uconnect 3 With 5-inch Display With
Manual Temperature Controls
2
22_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 57
58 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
(Continued)
Uconnect 4C/4C NAV With Manual Temperature Controls
MAX A/C Button
Press and release the MAX A/C button on
the touchscreen to change the current
setting to the coldest output of air.
The MAX A/C indicator illuminates when
MAX A/C is on. Pressing the button again will cause
the MAX A/C operation to exit.
NOTE:
The MAX A/C button is only available on the
touchscreen.
A/C Button
Press and release this button on the
touchscreen, or push the button on the
faceplate to change the current setting.
The A/C indicator illuminates when
A/C is on.
Recirculation Button
Press and release this button on the
touchscreen, or push the button on the
faceplate, to change the system between
Recirculation mode and outside air
mode. The Recirculation indicator and the A/C
indicator illuminate when the Recirculation button
is pressed. Recirculation can be used when
outside conditions, such as smoke, odors, dust, or
high humidity are present. Recirculation can be
used in all modes. Recirculation may be
unavailable (button on the touchscreen greyed
out) if conditions exist that could create fogging on
the inside of the windshield. The A/C can be
deselected manually without disturbing the
mode control selection. Continuous use of the
Recirculation mode may make the inside air stuffy
and window fogging may occur. Extended use of
this mode is not recommended. Recirculation
mode may automatically adjust to optimize
customer experience for warming, cooling,
dehumidification, etc.
Front Defrost Button
Press and release the Front Defrost
button on the touchscreen, or push and
release the button on the faceplate, to
change the current airflow setting to
Defrost mode. The Front Defrost indicator
illuminates when Front Defrost is on. Air comes
from the windshield and side window demist
outlets. When the defrost button is selected, the
blower level may increase. Use Defrost mode with
maximum temperature settings for best
windshield and side window defrosting and
defogging. When toggling the front defrost mode
button, the climate system will return to the
previous setting.
Rear Defrost Button
Press and release the Rear Defrost
button on the touchscreen, or push and
release the button on the faceplate, to
turn on the rear window defroster and the
heated outside mirrors (if equipped). The Rear
Defrost indicator illuminates when the rear window
defroster is on. The rear window defroster
automatically turns off after 15 minutes.
CAUTION!
Failure to follow these cautions can cause
damage to the heating elements:
Use care when washing the inside of the rear
window. Do not use abrasive window cleaners
on the interior surface of the window. Use a
soft cloth and a mild washing solution, wiping
parallel to the heating elements. Labels can
be peeled off after soaking with warm water.
22_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 58
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 59
Temperature Control
These buttons provide the driver and passenger
with independent temperature control.
Push the red button on the faceplate or
touchscreen, or press and slide the
temperature bar towards the red arrow
button on the touchscreen for warmer
temperature settings.
Push the blue button on the faceplate or
touchscreen, or press and slide the
temperature bar towards the blue arrow
button on the touchscreen for cooler
temperature settings.
SYNC Button
Press the SYNC button on the
touchscreen to toggle the SYNC feature
on/off. The SYNC indicator illuminates
when SYNC is on. SYNC synchronizes the
passenger temperature setting with the driver
temperature setting. Changing the passenger’s
temperature setting while in SYNC will
automatically exit this feature.
NOTE:
The SYNC button is only available on the touch-
screen.
Blower Control
Blower Control regulates the amount of
air forced through the climate control
system. There are seven blower speeds
available. Adjusting the blower will cause
automatic mode to switch to manual operation.
The speeds can be selected using either the
blower control knob on the faceplate or the
buttons on the touchscreen.
Faceplate
The blower speed increases as you turn the blower
control knob clockwise from the lowest blower
setting. The blower speed decreases as you turn
the blower control knob counterclockwise.
Touchscreen
Use the small blower icon to reduce the blower
setting and the large blower icon to increase the
blower setting. Blower can also be selected by
pressing the blower bar area between the icons.
Mode Control
Select Mode by pressing one of the Mode
buttons on the touchscreen, or pushing
the Mode button on the faceplate, to
change the airflow distribution mode.
The airflow distribution mode can be adjusted so
air comes from the instrument panel outlets, floor
outlets, defrost outlets, and demist outlets.
Panel Mode
Air comes from the outlets in the
instrument panel. Each of these outlets
can be individually adjusted to direct the
flow of air. The air vanes of the center
outlets and outboard outlets can be moved up and
down or side to side to regulate airflow direction.
There is a shut-off wheel located below the air
vents to shut off or adjust the amount of airflow
from these outlets.
Bi-Level Mode
Air comes from the instrument panel
outlets and floor outlets. A slight amount
of air is directed through the defrost and
side window demister outlets.
NOTE:
Bi-Level mode is designed under comfort condi-
tions to provide cooler air out of the panel outlets
and warmer air from the floor outlets.
Do not use scrapers, sharp instruments, or
abrasive window cleaners on the interior
surface of the window.
Keep all objects a safe distance from the
window.
CAUTION!
2
22_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 59
60 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Floor Mode
Air comes from the floor outlets. A slight
amount of air is directed through the
defrost and side window demister
outlets.
Mix Mode
Air is directed through the floor, defrost,
and side window demister outlets. This
setting works best in cold or snowy
conditions that require extra heat to the
windshield. This setting is good for maintaining
comfort while reducing moisture on the
windshield.
Climate Control OFF Button
Press and release the OFF button on the
touchscreen, or push the OFF button on
the faceplate (if equipped) to turn the
Climate Control on/off.
AUTOMATIC TEMPERATURE CONTROL
(ATC) — I
F EQUIPPED
Automatic Operation
1. Push the AUTO button on the faceplate, or the
AUTO button on the touchscreen on the
Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) Panel.
2. Next, adjust the temperature you would like
the system to maintain by adjusting the driver
and passenger temperature control buttons.
Once the desired temperature is displayed, the
system will achieve and automatically
maintain that comfort level.
3. When the system is set up for your comfort
level, it is not necessary to change the
settings. You will experience the greatest
efficiency by simply allowing the system to
function automatically.
NOTE:
It is not necessary to move the temperature
settings for cold or hot vehicles. The system
automatically adjusts the temperature, mode,
and blower speed to provide comfort as quickly
as possible.
The temperature can be displayed in US or
Metric units by selecting the US/Metric
customer-programmable feature within Ucon-
nect Settings Ú page 150.
To provide you with maximum comfort in the
Automatic mode during cold start-ups, the blower
fan will remain on low until the engine warms up.
The blower will increase in speed and transition
into Auto mode.
Manual Operation Override
This system offers a full complement of manual
override features. The AUTO symbol in the front
ATC display will be turned off when the system is
being used in the manual mode.
CLIMATE VOICE RECOGNITION
Adjust vehicle temperatures hands-free and keep
everyone comfortable while you keep moving ahead.
Push the VR button on the steering wheel. After the
beep, say one of the following commands:
“Set driver temperature to 70 degrees”
“Set passenger temperature to 70 degrees”
Did you know: Voice Command for Climate may only
be used to adjust the interior temperature of your
vehicle. Voice Command will not work to adjust the
heated seats or steering wheel if equipped.
22_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 60
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 61
OPERATING TIPS
NOTE:
Refer to the chart at the end of this section for
suggested control settings for various weather
conditions.
Summer Operation
The engine cooling system must be protected with
a high-quality antifreeze coolant to provide proper
corrosion protection and to protect against engine
overheating. OAT coolant (conforming to
MS.90032) is recommended.
Winter Operation
To ensure the best possible heater and defroster
performance, make sure the engine cooling
system is functioning properly and the proper
amount, type, and concentration of coolant is
used. Use of the Air Recirculation mode during
Winter months is not recommended, because it
may cause window fogging.
Vacation/Storage
For information on maintaining the Climate Control
system when the vehicle is being stored for an
extended period of time, see Ú page 338.
Window Fogging
Vehicle windows tend to fog on the inside in mild,
rainy, and/or humid weather. To clear the
windows, select Defrost or Mix mode and increase
the front blower speed. Do not use the
Recirculation mode without A/C for long periods,
as fogging may occur.
Outside Air Intake
Make sure the air intake, located directly in front of
the windshield, is free of obstructions, such as
leaves. Leaves collected in the air intake may
reduce airflow, and if they enter the air distribution
box, they could plug the water drains. In Winter
months, make sure the air intake is clear of ice,
slush, and snow.
Cabin Air Filter
The Climate Control system filters out dust and
pollen from the air. Contact an authorized dealer to
service your cabin air filter, and to have it replaced
when needed.
Operating Tips Chart
WEATHER CONTROL SETTINGS
Hot Weather And
Vehicle Interior Is
Very Hot
Set the mode control to
(Panel Mode), (A/C) on,
and blower on high. Roll
down the windows for a
minute to flush out the hot
air. Adjust the controls as
needed to achieve comfort.
Warm Weather
Turn on (A/C) and set the
mode control to (Panel
Mode).
Cool Sunny
Operate in (Bi-Level
Mode).
Cool & Humid
Conditions
Set the mode control to
(Floor Mode) and turn on
(A/C) to keep windows clear.
Cold Weather
Set the mode control to
(Floor Mode). If windshield
fogging starts to occur, move
the control to (Mix Mode).
2
22_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 61
62 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
(Continued)
INTERIOR STORAGE AND EQUIPMENT
STORAGE
Glove Compartment
The glove compartment is located on the
passenger side of the instrument panel and
features both an upper and lower storage area.
Glove Compartment
To open the upper glove compartment, push
upward on the release handle.
To open the lower glove compartment, pull the
release handle.
NOTE:
Some vehicles may be equipped with an upper
storage area that is completely open and does not
have a cover.
Door Storage
Front Door Storage — If Equipped
Storage areas are located in the door trim panels.
Rear Door Storage — If Equipped
Storage compartments are located in both the
driver and passenger rear door trim panels.
Center Storage Compartment —
If Equipped
The center storage compartment is located
between the driver and passenger seats. The
storage compartment provides an armrest and
contains both an upper and lower storage area.
Center Storage Compartment
1 — Upper Glove Compartment
2 — Lower Glove Compartment
WARNING!
Do not operate this vehicle with a glove
compartment in the open position. Driving with
the glove compartment open may result in injury
in a collision.
WARNING!
This armrest is not a seat. Anyone seated on
the armrest could be seriously injured during
vehicle operation, or a collision. Only use the
center seating position when the armrest is
fully upright.
22_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 62
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 63
Pull on the upper handle on the front of the
armrest to raise the cover. The upper storage area
contains a USB power outlet that can be used to
power small electrical devices.
Upper Storage Compartment
With the upper lid closed, pull on the lower handle
to open the lower storage bin.
Lower Storage Bin
The center console is equipped with a front storage
bin located next to the cupholders. This storage bin
may be equipped with a manual sliding top door.
Front Storage Bin With Door (If Equipped)
Seatback Storage
Located in the back of both the driver and
passenger front seats are pockets that can be
used for storage.
Driver’s Side Seatback Storage
In a collision, the latch may open if the total
weight of the items stored exceeds about
10 lb (4.5 kg). These items could be thrown
about endangering occupants of the vehicle.
Items stored should not exceed a total of
10 lb (4.5 kg).
WARNING!
WARNING!
Do not operate this vehicle with a console
compartment lid in the open position. Driving
with the console compartment lid open may
result in injury in a collision.
2
22_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 63
64 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Second Row In-Floor Storage Bin —
If Equipped
In-floor storage bins are located in front of the
second row seats and can be used for extra
storage. The storage bins have removable liners
that can be easily removed for cleaning.
In-Floor Storage Bin And Latch
To open the in-floor storage bin, lift upward on the
handle of the latch and open the lid.
NOTE:
The front seat may have to be moved forward to
fully open the lid.
Opened Storage Bin
Storage Bin (Regular Cab)
The storage bin is located behind the front seats
and runs the length of the cab.
Storage Bin
Fold Flat Load Floor — If Equipped
Quad Cab and Crew Cab models with a 60/40 rear
seat may be equipped with a folding load floor.
Unfolding The Load Floor (Quad Cab)
1. Lift the 60/40 seat cushion(s) to the upward
position.
Unfolding The Load Floor
WARNING!
Do not operate the vehicle with loose items
stored on the load floor. While driving or in an
accident you may experience abrupt stopping,
rapid acceleration, or sharp turns. Loose objects
stored on the load floor may move around with
force and strike occupants, resulting in serious
or fatal injury.
22_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 64
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 65
2. Grab the knob on the load floor and lift until
the load floor unfolds into position.
Load Floor In Open Position
3. Reverse the procedure to store the load floor.
Unfolding The Load Floor (Crew Cab)
1. Lift the 60/40 seat cushion(s) to the upward
position.
Load Floor Legs In Stowed Position
2. Unfold both the legs using the straps.
Load Floor Legs In Opened Position
3. Lift the front panel until the load floor unfolds
into position.
Load Floor In Open Position
4. Reverse the procedure to store the load floor.
2
22_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 65
66 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Positioning The Load Floor For Storage Access
Under The Seat
1. Lift the 60/40 seat cushion(s) to the upward
position.
2. Unsnap the securing snap located at either
side of the load floor.
3. Lift the load floor up to access storage under
the load floor.
Load Floor Securing Straps (Crew Cab)
4. Reverse the procedure to put the load floor
back in the secured down position before you
operate the vehicle.
Below Rear Seat Storage
(Crew Cab/Quad Cab)
The Crew Cab and Quad Cab models provide
additional storage under the rear seats. Lift the
seats to access the storage compartment.
To open the storage compartments, unsnap the
securing snap located at either side of the load
floor and lift upward on the fold flat lid Ú page 64.
Crew Cab Storage
USB/MP3 C ONTROL
Located inside the center console upper lid, this
feature allows an external USB device to be
plugged into the USB port.
Plugging in a smartphone device to a USB port may
activate Android Auto™ or Apple CarPlay®
features, if equipped.
Center Console USB/AUX Media Hub
WARNING!
Do not drive with the load floor in the up
position. When stopping fast or in an accident,
the load floor could move to the down position
causing serious injury.
1 — USB Port #1
2 — Aux Jack
3 — USB Port #2
22_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 66
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 67
NOTE:
Charge unsupported devices with the Charge Only
USB ports. If an unsupported device is plugged into
a Media USB port, a message will display on the
touchscreen that the device is not supported by
the system.
Refer to the Uconnect Owner’s Manual
Supplement, the applicable radio section in this
manual, or visit UconnectPhone.com for further
information.
ELECTRICAL POWER OUTLETS
The auxiliary 12 Volt (13 Amp) power outlets can
provide power for in-cab accessories designed for
use with the standard “cigar lighter” style plug. The
12 Volt power outlets and USB port (charge only)
have a cap attached to the outlet with either a key,
battery, or USB symbol.
A key symbol indicates that the ignition must be in
the ON/RUN or ACC positions for the outlet to
provide power. The battery symbol indicates that
the outlet is connected to the battery, and can
provide power at all times.
The auxiliary power outlets can be found in the
following locations:
Lower left and lower right of the center stack
when equipped with a bench seat.
Center Stack Power Outlet
Center console when equipped with bucket
seats.
Power Outlet — Center Console
CAUTION!
Do not exceed the maximum power of
160 Watts (13 Amps) at 12 Volts. If the
160 Watts (13 Amps) power rating is
exceeded, the fuse protecting the system
will need to be replaced.
Power outlets are designed for accessory
plugs only. Do not insert any other object in
the power outlets as this will damage the
outlet and blow the fuse. Improper use of the
power outlet can cause damage not covered
by your New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
2
22_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 67
68 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
(Continued)
Rear of the center console storage compart-
ment — Quad Cab or Crew Cab.
Power Outlet — Rear Center Console
Power Outlet — Rear Center Console Fuse
Power Outlet Fuse Locations
When the vehicle is turned off, be sure to unplug
any equipment as to not drain the battery of the
vehicle. All accessories connected to the outlet(s)
should be removed or turned off when the vehicle
is not in use to protect the battery against
discharge.
1 — F104 Fuse 20 A Yellow Power Outlet Center
Console Bin / USB Port (Charge Only)
2 — Customer Selectable Fuse 20 A Yellow Power
Outlet Rear Console
(F90–Battery Fed/F91–Ignition Fed)
3 — F93 Fuse 20 A Yellow Cigar Lighter
Instrument Panel
WARNING!
To avoid serious injury or death:
Only devices designed for use in this type of
outlet should be inserted into any 12 Volt
outlet.
Do not touch with wet hands.
Close the lid when not in use and while driving
the vehicle.
If this outlet is mishandled, it may cause an
electric shock and failure.
CAUTION!
Many accessories that can be plugged in draw
power from the vehicle's battery, even when
not in use (i.e., cellular phones, etc.). Eventu-
ally, if plugged in long enough, the vehicle's
battery will discharge sufficiently to degrade
battery life and/or prevent the engine from
starting.
Accessories that draw higher power (i.e.,
coolers, vacuum cleaners, lights, etc.), will
discharge the battery even more quickly.
Only use these intermittently and with greater
caution.
22_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 68
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 69
(Continued)
POWER INVERTER — IF EQUIPPED
A 115 Volt (150 Watts maximum) outlet is located
on the center stack of the instrument panel, to the
right of the radio. This outlet can power cellular
phones, electronics and other low power devices
requiring power up to 150 Watts. Certain video
game consoles will exceed this power limit, as will
most power tools.
The power inverter is designed with built-in
overload protection. If the power rating of
150 Watts is exceeded, the power inverter shuts
down. Once the electrical device has been
removed from the outlet, the inverter should reset.
Power Inverter Outlet
To turn on the power outlet, simply plug in a device.
The outlet automatically turns off when the device
is unplugged.
NOTE:
The power inverter will only turn on if the ignition
is in the ACC or ON/RUN position.
Due to built-in overload protection, the power
inverter will shut down if the power rating is
exceeded.
WINDOWS
POWER WINDOWS — IF EQUIPPED
The window controls on the driver's door control all
the door windows.
Power Window Switches
After the use of high power draw accessories,
or long periods of the vehicle not being started
(with accessories still plugged in), the vehicle
must be driven a sufficient length of time to
allow the generator to recharge the vehicle's
battery.
CAUTION!
WARNING!
To avoid serious injury or death:
Do not insert any objects into the receptacles.
Do not touch with wet hands.
Close the lid when not in use.
If this outlet is mishandled, it may cause an
electric shock and failure.
WARNING!
2
22_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 69
70 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
The passenger door windows can also be operated
by using the single window controls on the
passenger door trim panel. The window controls
will operate only when the ignition is in the ACC or
ON/RUN position.
To open the window part way (manually), push the
window switch down briefly and release.
NOTE:
The power window switches will remain active for
up to 10 minutes after the ignition is placed in the
OFF position. Opening either front door will cancel
this feature.
AUTOMATIC WINDOW FEATURES
Auto-Down Feature
The driver and front passenger door power window
switches have an Auto-Down feature. Push the
window switch down for a short period of time,
then release, and the window will go down
automatically.
To stop the window from going all the way down
during the Auto-Down operation, pull up or push
down on the switch briefly.
Auto-Up Feature With Anti-Pinch Protection
Lift the window switch up for a short period of time
and release; the window will go up automatically.
To stop the window from going all the way up
during the Auto-Up operation, push down on the
switch briefly.
To close the window part way, lift the window
switch briefly and release it when you want the
window to stop.
If the window runs into any obstacle during
auto-closure, it will reverse direction and then go
back down. Remove the obstacle and use the
window switch again to close the window.
NOTE:
Any impact due to rough road conditions may
trigger the auto-reverse function unexpectedly
during auto-closure. If this happens, pull the switch
lightly and hold to close the window manually.
RESET AUTO-UP
Should the Auto-Up feature stop working, the
window probably needs to be reset. To reset
Auto-Up:
1. Pull the window switch up to close the window
completely and continue to hold the switch up
for an additional two seconds after the
window is closed.
2. Push the window switch down firmly to open
the window completely and continue to hold
the switch down for an additional two seconds
after the window is fully open.
WARNING!
Never leave children unattended in a vehicle.
Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle or
in a location accessible to children, and do not
leave the ignition of a vehicle equipped with
Keyless Enter ‘n Go™ in the ACC or ON/RUN
position. Occupants, particularly unattended
children, can become entrapped by the windows
while operating the power window switches.
Such entrapment may result in serious injury or
death.
WARNING!
There is no anti-pinch protection when the
window is almost closed. To avoid personal
injury be sure to clear your arms, hands, fingers
and all objects from the window path before
closing.
22_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 70
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 71
WINDOW LOCKOUT SWITCH
(F
OUR DOOR MODELS ONLY)
The window lockout switch on the driver's door trim
panel allows you to disable the window controls on
the rear passenger doors. To disable the window
controls, push and release the window lockout
button. To enable the window controls, push and
release the window lockout button again.
Window Lockout Switch
POWER SLIDING REAR WINDOW —
I
F EQUIPPED
The switch for the power sliding rear window is
located on the overhead console.
Rear Window Switch
Push the switch to the right to open the glass.
Pull the switch to the left to close the glass.
MANUAL SLIDING REAR WINDOW —
I
F EQUIPPED
A locking device in the center of the window helps
to prevent entry from the rear of the vehicle.
Squeeze the lock to release the window.
WIND BUFFETING
Wind buffeting can be described as the perception
of pressure on the ears or a helicopter-type sound
in the ears. Your vehicle may exhibit wind buffeting
with the windows down, or the sunroof (if
equipped) in certain open or partially open
positions. This is a normal occurrence and can be
minimized. If the buffeting occurs with the rear
windows open, open the front and rear windows
together to minimize the buffeting. If the buffeting
occurs with the sunroof open, adjust the sunroof
opening to minimize the buffeting or open any
window.
2
22_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 71
72 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
(Continued)
POWER SUNROOF — IF EQUIPPED
The power sunroof switch is located on the overhead
console between the courtesy/reading lights.
Power Sunroof Switch
OPENING AND CLOSING THE SUNROOF
Express Open/Close
Push the switch rearward and release it within
one-half second, the sunroof and sunshade will
open automatically and stop at the full open
position.
Push the switch forward and release it within
one-half second and the sunroof will close
automatically from any position.
During Express Open or Express Close operation,
any other movement of the sunroof switch will stop
the sunroof.
Manual Open/Close
To open the sunroof, push and hold the switch
rearward to full open.
To close the sunroof, push and hold the switch in
the forward position.
Any release of the switch during open or close
operation will stop the sunroof movement. The
sunroof will remain in a partially opened position
until the switch is operated and held again.
PINCH PROTECT FEATURE
This feature will detect an obstruction in the
closing of the sunroof during the Express Close
operation. If an obstruction in the path of the
sunroof is detected, the sunroof will automatically
retract. Remove the obstruction if this occurs.
NOTE:
If three consecutive sunroof close attempts result
in Pinch Protect reversals, Pinch Protect will
disable and the sunroof must be closed in Manual
mode.
VENTING SUNROOF
Push and release the Vent switch within one half
second and the sunroof will open to the vent
position. During Express Vent operation, any other
actuation of the sunroof switches will stop the
sunroof operation.
WARNING!
Never leave children unattended in a vehicle,
or with access to an unlocked vehicle. Never
leave the key fob in or near the vehicle, or in a
location accessible to children. Do not leave
the ignition of a vehicle equipped with Keyless
Enter ‘n Go™ in the ACC or ON/RUN position.
Occupants, particularly unattended children,
can become entrapped by the power sunroof
while operating the power sunroof switch.
Such entrapment may result in serious injury
or death.
In a collision, there is a greater risk of being
thrown from a vehicle with an open sunroof.
You could also be seriously injured or killed.
Always fasten your seat belt properly and
make sure all passengers are also properly
secured.
Do not allow small children to operate the
sunroof. Never allow your fingers, other body
parts, or any object, to project through the
sunroof opening. Injury may result.
WARNING!
22_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 72
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 73
SUNSHADE OPERATION
The sunshade can be opened manually. However,
the sunshade will open automatically as the
sunroof opens.
NOTE:
The sunshade cannot be closed if the sunroof is
open.
IGNITION OFF OPERATION
The power sunroof switch will remain active for up
to approximately 10 minutes after the ignition
switch is placed in the OFF position. Opening either
front door will cancel this feature.
NOTE:
Ignition Off time is programmable through the
Uconnect system Ú page 150.
SUNROOF MAINTENANCE
Use only a non-abrasive cleaner and a soft cloth to
clean the glass panel. Periodically check for and
clear out any debris that may have collected in the
tracks.
HOOD
TO OPEN THE HOOD
To open the hood, two latches must be released.
1. Pull the hood release lever located below the
steering wheel at the base of the instrument
panel.
Hood Release
2. Reach into the opening beneath the center of
the hood and push the safety latch lever to the
left to release it, before raising the hood.
Safety Latch Location
TO CLOSE THE HOOD
In one continuous motion, pull down on the front
edge of the hood with moderate force until the
angle is below the crossover point (where the gas
props are no longer resisting) and let the hood
continue to fall closed from its own inertia.
WARNING!
Be sure the hood is fully latched before driving
your vehicle. If the hood is not fully latched, it
could open when the vehicle is in motion and
block your vision. Failure to follow this warning
could result in serious injury or death.
2
22_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 73
74 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
TAILGATE
OPENING
To open the tailgate, lift up on the handle and pull
the tailgate down.
CLOSING
To close the tailgate, push it upward until both
sides are latched.
The tailgate can be locked using the key fob lock
button.
TAILGATE REMOVAL
NOTE:
Removing the tailgate will disable the rearview
camera function.
To remove the tailgate, follow the proceeding
instructions:
1. Disconnect the wiring harness for the rear
camera and or power locks (if equipped)
Ú
page 74.
2. Unlatch the tailgate and remove the support
cables by releasing the lock tang from the
pivot.
NOTE:
Make sure tailgate is supported when removing
support cables.
Locking Tang
3. Position the tailgate on a 45° angle.
4. Raise the right side of the tailgate until the
right side pivot clears the hanger bracket.
5. Slide the entire tailgate to the right to free the
left side pivot.
6. Remove the tailgate from the vehicle.
NOTE:
Do not carry the tailgate loose in the truck
pickup box.
Disconnecting The Rear Camera And
Remote Keyless Entry
1. Open the tailgate to access the rear camera
or Remote Keyless Entry connector bracket
located on the rear sill.
Connector Bracket
WARNING!
To avoid inhaling carbon monoxide, which is
deadly, the exhaust system on vehicles
equipped with “Cap or Slide-In Campers” should
extend beyond the overhanging camper
compartment and be free of leaks.
22_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 74
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 75
2. Remove the connector bracket from the sill by
pushing inward on the locking tab.
Locking Tab
3. Disconnect the chassis wiring harness,
ensuring the connector bracket does not fall
into the sill.
Disconnected Harness
4. Connect the chassis plug and bracket
(provided in the glove compartment) to the
chassis wiring harness and insert the bracket
back into the sill.
Chassis Wiring Harness
Chassis Plug
5. Connect the tailgate plug (provided in the
glove compartment) to the tailgate wiring
harness to ensure that the terminals do not
corrode.
Wire Harness Bracket
1 — Tailgate Plug Release
2 — Tailgate Plug
3 — Tailgate Harness
2
22_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 75
76 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
6. Tape the tailgate harness and bracket against
the forward-facing surface of the tailgate. This
will prevent damaging the connector and
bracket when storing or reinstalling the
tailgate.
Taped Tailgate Harness
PICKUP BOX
The pickup box has many features designed for
utility and convenience.
Pickup Box Features
NOTE:
If you are installing a Toolbox, Ladder Rack or
Headache Rack at the front of the pickup box, you
must use Mopar® Box Reinforcement Brackets
that are available from an authorized dealer.
You can carry wide building materials (sheets of
plywood, etc.) by building a raised load floor. Place
lumber across the box in the indentations provided
above the wheel housings and in the bulkhead
dividers to form the floor.
1 — Upper Load Floor Indents
2 — Bulk Head Dividers
3 — Cleats
WARNING!
The pickup box is intended for load carrying
purposes only, not for passengers, who should
sit in seats and use seat belts.
Care should always be exercised when oper-
ating a vehicle with unrestrained cargo.
Vehicle speeds may need to be reduced.
Severe turns or rough roads may cause
shifting or bouncing of the cargo that may
result in vehicle damage. If wide building
materials are to be frequently carried, the
installation of a support is recommended. This
will restrain the cargo and transfer the load to
the pickup box floor.
If you wish to carry more than 600 lb (272 kg)
of material suspended above the wheelhouse,
supports must be installed to transfer the
weight of the load to the pickup box floor or
vehicle damage may result. The use of proper
supports will permit loading up to the rated
payload.
Unrestrained cargo may be thrown forward in
an accident causing serious or fatal injury.
22_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 76
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 77
There are stampings in the sheet metal on the
inner side bulkheads of the box in front of and
behind both wheel housings. Place wooden boards
across the box from side to side to create separate
load compartments in the pickup box.
There are four tie-down cleats bolted to the lower
sides of the pickup box that can sustain loads up
to 1000 lb (450 kg) total.
BED RAIL TIE-DOWN SYSTEM —
I
F EQUIPPED
NOTE:
This feature is available for vehicles both
equipped, or not equipped, with a RamBox.
There are two adjustable cleats on each side of the
bed that can be used to assist in securing cargo.
Adjustable Cleats
Each cleat must be located and tightened down in
one of the detents, along either rail, in order to
keep cargo properly secure.
To move the cleat to any position on the rail, turn
the nut counterclockwise, approximately three
turns. Then pull out on the cleat and slide it to the
detent nearest the desired location. Make sure the
cleat is seated in the detent and tighten the nut.
Adjustable Cleat Assembly
CAUTION!
The maximum load per cleat should not exceed
250 lb (113 kg) and the angle of the load on
each cleat should not exceed 45 degrees above
horizontal, or damage to the cleat or cleat rail
may occur.
1 — Utility Rail Detent
2 — Cleat Retainer Nut
3 — Utility Rail Cleat
2
22_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 77
78 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Cleat Removal (Standard Box Rail)
To remove the cleats from the utility rail, slide the
cleat forward to access the cut out at the end of the
box rail, then remove the cleat.
Slide Cleat Forward To Remove
Cleat Removal (With Tonneau Cover)
To remove the cleats from the utility rail, remove
the end cap screw located in the center of the end
cap, using a #T30 Torx head driver. Remove the
end cap and slide the cleat off the end of the rail.
End Cap Screw Location If Equipped With Tonneau Cover
Cleat Removal (Without Tonneau Cover)
Remove the end cap by pushing upward on the
release button located beneath the end cap while
pulling the cap away from the rail. The cleat can
now be removed by sliding it off the end of the rail.
End Cap Release Button If Not Equipped With
Tonneau Cover
Pull End Cap Away From Rail
RAMBOX — IF EQUIPPED
The RamBox system is an integrated pickup box
storage and cargo management system consisting
of up to three features:
Integrated box side storage bins.
Cargo extender/divider (if equipped).
Bed rail tie-down system (if equipped)
Ú page 77.
22_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 78
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 79
LOCKING AND UNLOCKING RAMBOX
Push and release the lock or unlock button on the
key fob to lock and unlock all doors, the tailgate
and the RamBox Ú page 15. The RamBox storage
bins can be locked using the vehicle key. To lock
and unlock the storage bin, insert the key into the
keyhole on the push button and turn clockwise to
lock or counterclockwise to unlock. Always return
the key to the upright (vertical) position before
removing the key from the push button.
RAMBOX CARGO STORAGE BINS
Cargo storage bins are located on both sides of the
pickup box. The cargo storage bins provide
watertight, lockable, illuminated storage for up to
150 lb (68 kg) of evenly distributed cargo.
RamBox Cargo Storage Bin
To open a storage bin with the RamBox unlocked,
push and release the button located on the lid. The
RamBox lid will open upward to allow hand access.
Lift the lid to fully open.
NOTE:
RamBox will not open when the button is pushed if
the RamBox is locked.
RamBox Pushbutton And Lock
CAUTION!
Ensure cargo bin lids are closed and latched
before moving or driving the vehicle.
Loads applied to the top of the bin lid should
be minimized to prevent damage to the lid and
latching/hinging mechanisms.
Damage to the RamBox bin may occur due to
heavy/sharp objects placed in bin that shift
due to vehicle motion. In order to minimize
potential for damage, secure all cargo to
prevent movement and protect inside
surfaces of bin from heavy/sharp objects with
appropriate padding.
CAUTION!
Failure to follow the following items could cause
damage to the vehicle:
Assure that all cargo inside the storage bins is
properly secured.
Do not exceed cargo weight rating of 150 lb
(68 kg) per bin for 1500 series vehicles.
CAUTION!
Leaving the lid open for extended periods of time
could cause the vehicle battery to discharge.
If the lid is required to stay open for extended
periods of time, it is recommended that the bin
lights be turned off manually using the on/off
switch.
2
22_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 79
80 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
The interior of the RamBox will automatically
illuminate when the lid is opened. In addition to the
automatic illumination, there is a manual on/off
switch located at the rear of each storage bin.
Pushing the switch once will turn off the bin lights,
pushing the switch again will turn the lights back
on.
RamBox Light Switch
Cargo bins feature two removable drain plugs (to
allow water to drain from bins). To remove plug,
pull up on the edge. To install, push the plug
downward into drain hole.
RamBox Drain Plug Removal
NOTE:
Provisions are provided in the bins for cargo
dividers and shelf supports. These accessories
(in addition to other RamBox accessories) are
available from Mopar®.
RAMBOX SAFETY WARNING
Carefully follow these warnings to help prevent
personal injury or damage to your vehicle:
RamBox Emergency Release Lever
As a security measure, an Emergency Release
Lever is built into the storage bin cover latching
mechanism.
WARNING!
Always close the storage bin covers when your
vehicle is unattended.
Do not allow children to have access to the
storage bins. Once in the storage bin, young
children may not be able to escape. If trapped
in the storage bin, children can die from suffo-
cation or heat stroke.
In an accident, serious injury could result if the
storage bin covers are not properly latched.
Do not drive the vehicle with the storage bin
covers open.
Keep the storage bin covers closed and
latched while the vehicle is in motion.
Do not use a storage bin latch as a tie down.
22_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 80
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 81
In the event of an individual being locked inside
the storage bin, the storage bin cover can be
opened from inside of the bin by pulling on the
glow-in-the-dark lever attached to the storage bin
cover latching mechanism.
Emergency Release Lever
BED EXTENDER — IF EQUIPPED
The bed extender has three functional positions:
Storage Position.
Divider Position.
Extender Position.
Divider Position
The divider position is intended for managing your
cargo and assisting in keeping cargo from moving
around the bed. There are 11 divider slots along
the bed inner panels which allow for various
positions to assist in managing your cargo.
To install the bed extender into a divider position,
perform the following:
1. Make sure the center handle is unlocked
using the vehicle key and rotate the center
handle vertically to release the extender side
gates.
Center Handle And Lock
2. With the side gates open, position the
extender so the outboard ends align with the
intended slots in the sides of the bed.
Aligning Gate To Slots
3. Rotate the side gates closed so that the
outboard ends are secured into the intended
slots of the bed.
1 — Center Handle Lock
2 — Handle
3 — Unlocked Position
4 — Locked Position
2
22_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 81
82 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
4. Rotate the center handle horizontally to secure
the side gates in the closed position.
Side Gates Closed
5. Lock the center handle to secure the panel
into place.
Extender Position
The extender position allows you to load the bed of
the truck beyond the tailgate. The bed extender will
add an additional 15 inches (38 cm) in the back of
the truck when additional cargo room is needed.
The extender position utilizes a locating pin and
rotating handle located on both sides of the truck
bed near the tailgate.
Extender Position
To install the bed extender into the extender
position, perform the following:
1. Lower the tailgate.
2. Make sure the center handle is unlocked and
rotate the center handle vertically in order to
release the extender side gates.
3. Fit the end of the side gate ends onto the pin
and handle.
Extender Installation
4. Rotate the handles to the horizontal position to
secure into place.
Locking Tab
22_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 82
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 83
Storage Position
The storage position for the bed extender is at the
front of the truck bed which maximizes the bed
cargo area when not in use.
To install the bed divider into the storage position,
perform the same steps as you would for the
divider position, except position the divider fully
forward in the bed against the front panel.
Storage Position
The outboard ends should be positioned in front of
the cargo tie-down loops.
Cargo Tie Down Loop
TRI-FOLD TONNEAU COVER — IF EQUIPPED
The Tri-Fold Tonneau Cover can be installed on the
truck bed to protect your gear and cargo.
WARNING!
To reduce the risk of potential injury or property
damage:
Cargo must be secured.
Do not exceed cargo load rating of your
vehicle.
Secure all loads to truck utilizing cargo tie
downs.
Extender should not be used as cargo tie
down.
When vehicle is in motion do not exceed
150 lb (68 kg) load on the tailgate.
The bed extender is not intended for off road
use.
When not in use, the extender/divider should
be in stowed or divider position with the tail-
gate closed.
When in use all handles are to be in the locked
position.
2
22_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 83
84 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
TRI-FOLD TONNEAU COVER REMOVAL
To remove the Tonneau Cover, use the following
steps:
1. Open the tailgate to gain access to the rear
pair of Tonneau Cover clamps located on the
underside of the cover.
Location Of Rear Clamps
NOTE:
If clamp wire is damaged replace immediately.
2. Pull both clamp handles down to release the
Tonneau Cover’s rear panel.
Released Position
3. From the released position, send the clamps
to the Stowed Position by pushing from the
yellow bumper up.
Stowed Position
4. Fold the rear panel up onto the center panel
(intermediate position).
NOTE:
When folding the center and rear panels,
the sections MUST be held together to avoid
damage to the cover material.
Fold the panels gently. It is not recom-
mended to allow the panels to drop under
their own weight.
Folded Rear Panel (Intermediate Position)
CAUTION!
Make sure the Tonneau Cover clamp and clamp
wire are in the proper stowed position. If the
clamp and clamp wire are not properly stowed,
damage to the Tonneau Cover material will
result.
22_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 84
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 85
NOTE:
The vehicle cannot be driven when the Tonneau
Cover is in this position.
5. Fold the rear and center panels up onto the
front panel (Tri-Folded position).
Tri-Folded Position
Incorrect Folding — Will Cause Damage
Correct Folding — Hold Panels Together
6. Clip both stowage straps to prevent the
Tonneau Cover panels from unfolding.
NOTE:
Be sure the Tonneau Cover has been folded
completely, and the stowage straps are engaged,
before removing.
Stowage Strap
7. Once in the Tri-Folded position, pull both front
clamp handles down to the Released Position.
Released Position
CAUTION!
The folded Tonneau Cover must be latched by
both front latches and both front stowage straps
or damage to the Tonneau Cover or vehicle may
occur.
2
22_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 85
86 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
8. From the Released Position, send the clamps
to the Stowed Position by pushing from the
yellow bumper up. Listen for a “clicking” sound
to confirm the clamp has been properly
stowed.
Stowed Position
9. With two people, remove the Tonneau Cover.
TRI-FOLD TONNEAU COVER
I
NSTALLATION
To install the Tonneau Cover, use the following
steps:
1. Position the folded Tonneau Cover on the
pickup box and push the cover forward
against the front of the pickup box. The
Tonneau Cover centers itself when placed on
the vehicle.
NOTE:
Make sure to always push the Tonneau Cover all
the way forward on the pickup box. Failure to do so
might prevent proper clamp engagement, or
interfere with the tailgate auto drop function
(if equipped).
Location Of Front Clamps
2. Pull down on the first set of clamp handles to
release the clamps from the stowed position.
Stowed Position
22_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 86
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 87
3. Push clamp wires up and under the flange of
the box (or flange of the Ram Box rail, if
equipped) to the semi clamped position.
Semi Clamped Position
4. Push clamp handles upward to the clamped
position to properly engage the clamps.
Clamped Position
NOTE:
Once clamped, be sure the clamps are not
improperly attached to the truck bed flange.
Improper Clamp Position
5. Disengage the stowage straps.
6. Unfold the center and rear panels to the
intermediate position.
Intermediate Position (Vehicle Cannot Be Driven)
NOTE:
When folding the center and rear panels, the
sections MUST be held together to avoid damage
to the cover material.
2
22_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 87
88 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Incorrect Folding — Will Cause Damage
Correct Folding — Hold Panels Together
7. Completely unfold the Tonneau Cover.
Fully Unfolded Position
8. Pull the rear clamp handles down into the
released position.
Stowed Position
9. Push clamp wires up and under the flange of
box (or flange of Ram Box rail, if equipped) to
the semi clamped position.
Semi Clamped Position
22_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 88
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 89
10. Push clamp handles upward to the clamped
position to properly engage the clamps.
Clamped Position
Improper Clamp Position
NOTE:
Once clamped, be sure the clamps are not partially
clamped to the truck bed flange.
The Tonneau Cover clamps can be locked when in
the clamped position by placing a lock through the
locking hole.
Locking Hole
TRI-FOLD TONNEAU COVER CLEANING
For proper cleaning of the Tonneau Cover, use
Mopar® Whitewall & Vinyl Top Cleaner and
Mopar® Leather & Vinyl Conditioner/Protectant.
CAUTION!
It is the driver’s responsibility to ensure the
Tonneau Cover is properly installed on the
vehicle. Failure to follow this procedure can
result in detachment of the Tonneau Cover from
the vehicle and/or damage to the vehicle/
Tonneau Cover.
2
22_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 89
90
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
BASE INSTRUMENT CLUSTER
22_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 90
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 91
BASE INSTRUMENT CLUSTER
D
ESCRIPTIONS
1. Tachometer
Indicates the engine speed in revolutions
per minute (RPM x 1000).
2. Instrument Cluster Display
When the appropriate conditions exist, this
display shows the instrument cluster
display messages Ú page 94.
3. Speedometer
Indicates vehicle speed.
4. Temperature Gauge
The temperature gauge shows engine
coolant temperature. Any reading within the
normal range indicates that the engine
cooling system is operating satisfactorily.
The pointer will likely indicate a higher
temperature when driving in hot weather,
up mountain grades, or when towing a
trailer. It should not be allowed to exceed
the upper limits of the normal operating
range.
5. Fuel Gauge
The fuel gauge shows the level of fuel in the
fuel tank when the ignition is in the ON/RUN
position.
The fuel pump symbol points to
the side of the vehicle where the
fuel door is located.
WARNING!
A hot engine cooling system is dangerous. You or
others could be badly burned by steam or boiling
coolant. It is recommended to call an authorized
dealer for service if your vehicle overheats
Ú page 303.
CAUTION!
Driving with a hot engine cooling system could
damage your vehicle. If the temperature gauge
reads “H,” pull over and stop the vehicle. Idle the
vehicle with the air conditioner turned off until
the pointer drops back into the normal range.
If the pointer remains on the “H,” turn the
engine off immediately and call an authorized
dealer for service.
3
22_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 91
92 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
PREMIUM INSTRUMENT CLUSTER
22_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 92
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 93
PREMIUM INSTRUMENT CLUSTER
D
ESCRIPTIONS
1. Tachometer
Indicates the engine speed in revolutions
per minute (RPM x 1000).
2. Voltmeter
When the engine is running, the gauge indi-
cates the electrical system voltage. The
pointer should stay within the normal range
if the battery is charged. If the pointer
moves to either extreme left or right and
remains there during normal driving, the
electrical system should be serviced.
NOTE:
The voltmeter may show a gauge fluctuation at
various engine temperatures. This cycling oper-
ation is caused by the post-heat cycle of the intake
manifold heater system. The number of cycles and
the length of the cycling operation is controlled by
the engine control module. Post-heat operation
can run for several minutes, and then the electrical
system and voltmeter needle will stabilize.
3. Oil Pressure Gauge
The pointer should always indicate some oil
pressure when the engine is running. A
continuous high or low reading under
normal driving conditions may indicate a
lubrication system malfunction. Immediate
service should be obtained from an autho-
rized dealer.
4. Speedometer
Indicates vehicle speed.
5. Temperature Gauge
The temperature gauge shows engine
coolant temperature. Any reading within the
normal range indicates that the engine
cooling system is operating satisfactorily.
The pointer will likely indicate a higher
temperature when driving in hot weather,
up mountain grades, or when towing a
trailer. It should not be allowed to exceed
the upper limits of the normal operating
range.
6. Instrument Cluster Display
When the appropriate conditions exist, this
display shows the instrument cluster
display messages Ú page 94.
7. Fuel Gauge
The fuel gauge shows the level of fuel in the
fuel tank when the ignition is in the ON/RUN
position.
The fuel pump symbol points to
the side of the vehicle where the
fuel door is located.
WARNING!
A hot engine cooling system is dangerous. You or
others could be badly burned by steam or boiling
coolant. It is recommended to call an authorized
dealer for service if your vehicle overheats
Ú page 303.
CAUTION!
Driving with a hot engine cooling system could
damage your vehicle. If the temperature gauge
reads “H,” pull over and stop the vehicle. Idle the
vehicle with the air conditioner turned off until
the pointer drops back into the normal range.
If the pointer remains on the “H,” turn the
engine off immediately and call an authorized
dealer for service.
3
22_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 93
94 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DISPLAY
Your vehicle is equipped with an instrument cluster
display, which offers useful information to the
driver. With the ignition in the OFF mode, opening/
closing of a door will activate the display for
viewing, and display the total miles, or kilometers,
in the odometer. Your instrument cluster display is
designed to display important information about
your vehicle’s systems and features. Using a driver
interactive display located on the instrument
panel, your instrument cluster display can show
how the systems are working and give warnings
when they are not. The steering wheel mounted
controls allow you to scroll through the main
menus and submenus. You can access the specific
information you want and make selections and
adjustments.
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DISPLAY
C
ONTROLS
The instrument cluster display features a driver
interactive display that is located in the instrument
cluster.
Premium Instrument Cluster Display
The system allows the driver to select information
by pushing the following instrument cluster display
control buttons located on the left side of the
steering wheel:
Instrument Cluster Display Control Buttons
1 – Instrument Cluster Display Controls
2 – Instrument Cluster Display Screen
1 – Up Arrow Button
2 – Right Arrow Button
3 – Down Arrow Button
4 – Left Arrow Button
22_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 94
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 95
Up Arrow Button
Push and release the up arrow button to
scroll upward through the main menu items,
submenu screen, and vehicle settings.
Right Arrow Button
Push and release the right arrow button to
access/select the information screens or
submenu screens of a main menu item. Push
and hold the right arrow button for two
seconds to reset displayed/selected features
that can be reset.
Down Arrow Button
Push and release the down arrow button to
scroll downward through the main menu items,
submenu screen, and vehicle settings.
Left Arrow Button
Push and release the left arrow button to
access/select the information screens,
submenu screens of a main menu item, or to
return to the main menu.
OIL LIFE RESET
Your vehicle is equipped with an engine oil change
indicator system. The “Oil Change Required”
message will display in the instrument cluster
display after a single chime has sounded, to
indicate the next scheduled oil change interval.
The engine oil change indicator system is duty
cycle based, which means the engine oil change
interval may fluctuate, dependent upon your
personal driving style.
NOTE:
Use the steering wheel instrument cluster display
controls for the following procedure(s).
Vehicles Equipped With Passive Entry
1. Without pushing the brake pedal, push the
ENGINE START/STOP button and place the
ignition to the ON/RUN position (do not start
the engine).
2. Push and release the down arrow button to
scroll downward through the main menu to
“Vehicle Info.”
3. Push and release the right arrow button to
access the ”Vehicle Info” screen, then scroll up
or down to select “Oil Life.”
4. Push and hold the right arrow button to
select “Reset”.
5. Push and release the down arrow button to
select “Yes,” then push and release the
right arrow button to reset the Oil Life to
100%.
6. Push and release the up arrow button to
exit the instrument cluster display screen.
Vehicles Not Equipped With Passive Entry
1. Without pushing the brake pedal, cycle the
ignition to the ON/RUN position (do not start
the engine).
2. Push and release the down arrow button to
scroll downward through the main menu to
“Vehicle Info.”
3. Push and release the right arrow button to
access the “Vehicle Info” screen then scroll up
or down to select “Oil Life.”
4. Push and hold the right arrow button to
select “YES” by pushing the right arrow
then push and release the right arrow
button to select reset of the Oil Life to 100%.
5. Push and release the up arrow button to
exit the instrument cluster display screen.
NOTE:
If the indicator message illuminates when you start
the vehicle, the Oil Life indicator system did not
reset. If necessary, repeat this procedure.
3
22_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 95
96 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
DISPLAY MENU ITEMS
Push and release the up or down arrow
button until the desired selectable menu icon is
highlighted in the instrument cluster display.
Speedometer
Push and release the up or down arrow
button until the speedometer menu item is
highlighted in the instrument cluster display. Push
and release the right arrow button to cycle the
display between mph and km/h.
Vehicle Info
Push and release the up or down arrow
button until the Vehicle Info menu item is
highlighted in the instrument cluster display.
Push and release the right arrow button to
enter the submenus items of Vehicle Info. Follow
the directional prompts to access or reset any of
the following Vehicle Info submenu items:
Tire Pressure
Transmission Temperature
Oil Temperature
Oil Life
Fuel Filter Life — If Equipped
Battery Voltage — If Equipped
Gauge Summary — If Equipped
Engine Hours
Fuel Economy
Push and release the up or down arrow
button until the Fuel Economy menu item is
highlighted in the instrument cluster display. Push
and hold the right arrow button to reset Average
Fuel Economy.
Current Fuel Economy Gauge
Average Fuel Economy Value
Range To Empty
Trip A / Trip B
Push and release the up or down arrow
button until the Trip menu item is highlighted in the
instrument cluster display. Push and release the
right arrow button to enter the submenus of
Trip A and Trip B. The Trip A or Trip B information
will display the following:
Distance
Average MPG
Average MPH
Elapsed Time
Push and hold the right arrow button to reset all
information.
Trailer Tow
Push and release the up or down arrow
button until the Trailer Tow menu item is
highlighted in the instrument cluster display. Push
and release the right arrow button and the next
screen will display the following trailer trip
information:
Trip (trailer specific) Distance: Push and hold
the right arrow button to reset the distance.
Trailer Brake
Output
Type
Gain
Audio
Push and release the up or down arrow
button until the Audio display icon is highlighted in
the instrument cluster display. Push and release
the right arrow button to display the active
source.
Stored Messages
Push and release the up or down arrow
button until the Messages Menu item is
highlighted. This feature shows the number of
stored warning messages. Pushing the
right arrow button will allow you to see what the
stored messages are.
22_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 96
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 97
When no messages are present, the main menu
icon will be a closed envelope.
Screen Setup Menu Item
Push and release the up or down arrow
button until the Screen Setup menu item is
highlighted in the instrument cluster display.
Push and release the right arrow button to
enter the Screen Setup submenu. The Screen
Setup feature allows you to change what
information is displayed in the instrument cluster
as well as the location that information is
displayed.
Screen Setup Driver Selectable Items
Odometer
No Decimals
Decimals
Restore Defaults
Cancel
Ok
Settings — If Equipped
Personal Settings allows the driver to set and recall
features when the transmission is in PARK (P).
Push and release the up and down arrow
buttons until Settings displays in the instrument
cluster display.
Follow the prompts to display and set any of the
following Vehicle Settings.
NOTE:
Your vehicle may be equipped with the following
settings.
If equipped with a base radio (Non-Touch-
screen), the Vehicle Settings will be included in
the instrument cluster display.
If equipped with a Touchscreen radio, the
Vehicle Settings will be included in the radio
head unit.
Upper Left
None Current MPG
Trailer Brake
Gain
Outside Temp Trip A Distance Compass
Range To
Empty
Trip B Distance Time
Average MPG Trailer Trip
Upper Right
None Current MPG
Trailer Brake
Gain
Outside Temp Trip A Distance Compass
Range To
Empty
Trip B Distance Time
Average MPG Trailer Trip
Lower Left
None Compass Average MPG
Outside Temp Current MPG
Trailer Brake
Gain
Range To
Empty
Time
Lower Right
None Compass Average MPG
Outside Temp Current MPG
Trailer Brake
Gain
Range To
Empty
Time
Upper and Lower Gauge
None Oil Temp Current MPG
Trans Temp Oil Life Trailer Brake
Upper Right
3
22_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 97
98 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Setting Names
Setting Names Abbreviated
(Left Submenu Layer)
Submenus (Right Submenu Layer)
1 Language Select Language
English, Spanish, French, Italian, German, Dutch, Portuguese,
Arabic (If Equipped)
2 Units Units US.; Metric
3 ParkSense ParkSense
Notification — Sound Only; Sound & Display
Front Volume — Low; Medium; High
Rear Volume — Low; Medium; High
4 Tilt Mirror in Reverse Tilt Mirror in R On; Off
5 Rain Sensing Wipers Auto Wipers On; Off
6 Hill Start Assist Hill Start Assist On; Off
7 Headlights Off Delay Lights Off Delay 0 seconds; 30 seconds; 60 seconds; 90 seconds
8 Illuminated Approach Lights w/ Unlock 0 seconds; 30 seconds; 60 seconds; 90 seconds
9 Headlights On with Wipers Lights w/ Wipers On; Off
10 Automatic High Beams Auto High Beams On; Off
11 Flash Lights with Lock Lights w/ Lock On; Off
12 Auto Lock Doors Auto Lock Doors On; Off
13 Auto Unlock Doors Auto Unlock Doors On; Off
22_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 98
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 99
14 Sound Horn with Remote Start Horn w/ Remote Start On; Off
15 Sound Horn with Remote Lock Horn w/ Remote Lock Off; 1st Press; 2nd Press
16 Remote Unlock Sequence Remote Unlock Driver Door; All Doors
17 Key Fob Linked to Memory Key in Memory On; Off
18 Passive Entry Passive Entry On; Off
19 Remote Start Comfort System Remote Start Comfort Off; Remote Start; All starts
20 Easy Exit Seat Easy Exit Seat On; Off
21 Key-off Power Delay Power Off Delay Off; 45 seconds; 5 minutes; 10 minutes
22 Commercial Settings Commercial
Aux Switches
Power Take-Off
PIN Setup
NOTE:
If the vehicle’s PIN is forgotten or not known, see an authorized dealer to
have the PIN reset.
23 Trailer Select Trailer Select Trailer 1; Trailer 2; Trailer 3; Trailer 4
24 Brake Type Brake Type Light Electric; Heavy Electric; Light EOH; Heavy EOH
Setting Names
Setting Names Abbreviated
(Left Submenu Layer)
Submenus (Right Submenu Layer)
3
22_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 99
100 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
25 Trailer Name Trailer Name
Trailer # (# is equal to slot position)
Boat
Car
Cargo
Dump
Equipment
Flatbed
Gooseneck
Horse
Livestock
Motorcycle
Snowmobile
Travel
Utility
5th Wheel
26 Compass Variance Compass Var 1-15 increments of 1
27 Calibrate Compass Compass Cal Cancel; Calibrate
28 Fuel Saver Display Fuel Saver On; Off
29
Park Assist Front Chime
Volume
Park Assist Front Chime Volume On; Off
30 Park Assist Rear Chime Volume Park Assist Rear Chime Volume On; Off
Setting Names
Setting Names Abbreviated
(Left Submenu Layer)
Submenus (Right Submenu Layer)
22_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 100
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 101
Turn Menu Off — If Equipped
Push and release the right arrow button to exit
the main menu.
Push and release any instrument cluster display
control button to enter the instrument cluster
display main menu again.
BATTERY SAVER ON/BATTERY SAVER
M
ODE MESSAGE — ELECTRICAL LOAD
R
EDUCTION ACTIONS — IF EQUIPPED
This vehicle is equipped with an Intelligent Battery
Sensor (IBS) to perform additional monitoring of
the electrical system and status of the vehicle
battery.
In cases when the IBS detects charging system
failure, or the vehicle battery conditions are
deteriorating, electrical load reduction actions will
take place to extend the driving time and distance
of the vehicle. This is done by reducing power to or
turning off non-essential electrical loads.
Load reduction is only active when the engine is
running. It will display a message if there is a risk
of battery depletion to the point where the vehicle
may stall due to lack of electrical supply, or will not
restart after the current drive cycle.
When load reduction is activated, the message
“Battery Saver On” or “Battery Saver Mode” will
appear in the instrument cluster.
These messages indicate the vehicle battery has a
low state of charge and continues to lose electrical
charge at a rate that the charging system cannot
sustain.
NOTE:
The charging system is independent from load
reduction. The charging system performs a diag-
nostic on the charging system continuously.
If the Battery Charge Warning Light is on it may
indicate a problem with the charging system.
Refer to “Battery Charge Warning Light” in this
chapter for further information.
The electrical loads that may be switched off
(if equipped), and vehicle functions which can be
affected by load reduction:
Heated Seat/Vented Seats/Heated Wheel
Rear Defroster And Heated Mirrors
HVAC System
115 Volt AC Power Inverter System
Audio and Telematics System
Loss of the battery charge may indicate one or
more of the following conditions:
The charging system cannot deliver enough
electrical power to the vehicle system because
the electrical loads are larger than the capability
of the charging system. The charging system is
still functioning properly.
Turning on all possible vehicle electrical loads
(e.g. HVAC to max settings, exterior and interior
lights, overloaded power outlets +12 Volts,
115 Volts AC, USB ports) during certain driving
conditions (city driving, towing, frequent stop-
ping, etc.).
Installing options like additional lights, upfitter
electrical accessories, audio systems, alarms
and similar devices.
Unusual driving cycles (short trips separated by
long parking periods).
The vehicle was parked for an extended period
of time (weeks, months).
The battery was recently replaced and was not
charged completely.
The battery was discharged by an electrical load
left on when the vehicle was parked.
The battery was used for an extended period
with the engine not running to supply radio,
lights, chargers, +12 Volts portable appliances
like vacuum cleaners, game consoles and
similar devices.
3
22_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 101
102 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
What to do when an electrical load reduction
action message is present (“Battery Saver On” or
“Battery Saver Mode”)
During a trip:
Reduce power to unnecessary loads if possible:
Turn off redundant lights (interior or exte-
rior)
Check what may be plugged in to power
outlets +12 Volts, 115 Volts AC, USB ports
Check HVAC settings (blower, temperature)
Check the audio settings (volume)
After a trip:
Check if any aftermarket equipment was
installed (additional lights, upfitter electrical
accessories, audio systems, alarms) and review
specifications if any (load and Ignition Off Draw
currents).
Evaluate the latest driving cycles (distance,
driving time and parking time).
The vehicle should have service performed if
the message is still present during consecutive
trips, and if the evaluation and driving pattern of
the vehicle did not help to identify the cause.
WARNING LIGHTS AND MESSAGES
The warning/indicator lights will illuminate in the
instrument panel together with a dedicated
message and/or acoustic signal when applicable.
These indications are indicative and precautionary
and must not be considered as exhaustive and/or
alternative to the information contained in the
Owner’s Manual, which you are advised to read
carefully in all cases. Always refer to the
information in this chapter in the event of a failure
indication. All active telltales will display first if
applicable. The system check menu may appear
different based upon equipment options and
current vehicle status. Some telltales are optional
and may not appear.
RED WARNING LIGHTS
Seat Belt Reminder Warning Light
This warning light indicates when the
driver or passenger seat belt is
unbuckled. When the ignition is first
placed in the ON/RUN or ACC/ON/RUN
position and if the driver’s seat belt is unbuckled,
a chime will sound and the light will turn on. When
driving, if the driver or front passenger seat belt
remains unbuckled, the Seat Belt Reminder Light
will flash or remain on continuously and a chime
will sound Ú page 224.
Air Bag Warning Light
This warning light will illuminate to
indicate a fault with the air bag, and will
turn on for four to eight seconds as a bulb
check when the ignition is placed in the
ON/RUN or ACC/ON/RUN position. This light will
illuminate with a single chime when a fault with the
air bag has been detected, it will stay on until the
fault is cleared. If the light is either not on during
startup, stays on, or turns on while driving, have
the system inspected at an authorized dealer as
soon as possible.
Brake Warning Light
This warning light monitors various brake
functions, including brake fluid level and
parking brake application. If the brake
light turns on it may indicate that the
parking brake is applied, that the brake fluid level
is low, or that there is a problem with the Anti-Lock
Brake System reservoir.
If the light remains on when the parking brake has
been disengaged, and the fluid level is at the full
mark on the master cylinder reservoir, it indicates
a possible brake hydraulic system malfunction or
that a problem with the Brake Booster has been
detected by the Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) /
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) system.
22_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 102
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 103
In this case, the light will remain on until the
condition has been corrected. If the problem is
related to the brake booster, the ABS pump will run
when applying the brake, and a brake pedal
pulsation may be felt during each stop.
The dual brake system provides a reserve braking
capacity in the event of a failure to a portion of the
hydraulic system. A leak in either half of the dual
brake system is indicated by the Brake Warning
Light, which will turn on when the brake fluid level
in the master cylinder has dropped below a
specified level.
The light will remain on until the cause is corrected.
NOTE:
The light may flash momentarily during sharp
cornering maneuvers, which change fluid level
conditions. The vehicle should have service
performed, and the brake fluid level checked.
If brake failure is indicated, immediate repair is
necessary.
Vehicles equipped with the Anti-Lock Brake System
(ABS) are also equipped with Electronic Brake
Force Distribution (EBD). In the event of an EBD
failure, the Brake Warning Light will turn on along
with the ABS Light. Immediate repair to the ABS
system is required.
Operation of the Brake Warning Light can be
checked by turning the ignition switch from the
OFF position to the ON/RUN position. The light
should illuminate for approximately two seconds.
The light should then turn off unless the parking
brake is applied or a brake fault is detected. If the
light does not illuminate, have the light inspected
by an authorized dealer.
The light also will turn on when the parking brake
is applied with the ignition switch in the ON/RUN
position.
NOTE:
This light shows only that the parking brake is
applied. It does not show the degree of brake appli-
cation.
Vehicle Security Warning Light —
If Equipped
This light will flash at a fast rate for
approximately 15 seconds when the
Vehicle Security System is arming, and
then will flash slowly until the vehicle
is disarmed.
Engine Coolant Temperature Warning
Light
This warning light warns of an
overheated engine condition. If the
engine coolant temperature is too high,
this indicator will illuminate and a single
chime will sound. If the temperature reaches the
upper limit, a continuous chime will sound for four
minutes or until the engine is able to cool,
whichever comes first.
If the light turns on while driving, safely pull over
and stop the vehicle. If the Air Conditioning (A/C)
system is on, turn it off. Also, shift the transmission
into NEUTRAL (N) and idle the vehicle. If the
temperature reading does not return to normal,
turn the engine off immediately and call for service
Ú page 279.
Battery Charge Warning Light
This warning light will illuminate when the
battery is not charging properly. If it stays
on while the engine is running, there may
be a malfunction with the charging
system. Contact an authorized dealer as soon as
possible.
This indicates a possible problem with the
electrical system or a related component.
WARNING!
Driving a vehicle with the red brake light on is
dangerous. Part of the brake system may have
failed. It will take longer to stop the vehicle. You
could have a collision. Have the vehicle checked
immediately.
3
22_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 103
104 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Oil Pressure Warning Light
This warning light will illuminate to
indicate low engine oil pressure. If the
light turns on while driving, stop the
vehicle, shut off the engine as soon as
possible, and contact an authorized dealer.
A chime will sound when this light turns on.
Do not operate the vehicle until the cause is
corrected. This light does not indicate how much oil
is in the engine. The engine oil level must be
checked under the hood.
Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) Warning
Light
This warning light will illuminate to
indicate a problem with the ETC system.
If a problem is detected while the vehicle
is running, the light will either stay on or
flash depending on the nature of the problem.
Cycle the ignition when the vehicle is safely and
completely stopped and the transmission is placed
in the PARK (P) position. The light should turn off.
If the light remains on with the vehicle running,
your vehicle will usually be drivable; however, see
an authorized dealer for service as soon as
possible.
NOTE:
This light may turn on if the accelerator and brake
pedals are pressed at the same time.
If the light continues to flash when the vehicle is
running, immediate service is required and you
may experience reduced performance, an
elevated/rough idle, or engine stall and your
vehicle may require towing. The light will come on
when the ignition is placed in the ON/RUN or ACC/
ON/RUN position and remain on briefly as a bulb
check. If the light does not come on during starting,
have the system checked by an authorized dealer.
Electric Power Steering (EPS) Fault
Warning Light
This warning light will turn on when
there's a fault with the EPS system
Ú page 122.
Trailer Brake Disconnected Warning Light
This warning light will illuminate when the
Trailer Brake has been disconnected
Ú page 133.
Door Open Warning Light
This indicator will illuminate when a door
is ajar/open and not fully closed.
NOTE:
If the vehicle is moving there will also be a single
chime.
Oil Temperature Warning Light
This warning light will illuminate to
indicate the engine oil temperature is
high. If the light turns on while driving,
stop the vehicle and shut off the engine
as soon as possible. Wait for oil temperature to
return to normal levels.
YELLOW WARNING LIGHTS
Engine Check/Malfunction Indicator
Warning Light (MIL)
The Engine Check/Malfunction Indicator
Light (MIL) is a part of an Onboard
Diagnostic System called OBD II that
monitors engine and automatic
transmission control systems. This warning light
will illuminate when the ignition is in the ON/RUN
position before engine start. If the bulb does not
come on when turning the ignition switch from OFF
to ON/RUN, have the condition checked promptly.
WARNING!
Continued operation with reduced assist could
pose a safety risk to yourself and others. Service
should be obtained as soon as possible.
22_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 104
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 105
Certain conditions, such as a loose or missing gas
cap, poor quality fuel, etc., may illuminate the light
after engine start. The vehicle should be serviced if
the light stays on through several typical driving
styles. In most situations, the vehicle will drive
normally and will not require towing.
When the engine is running, the MIL may flash to
alert serious conditions that could lead to
immediate loss of power or severe catalytic
converter damage. The vehicle should be serviced
by an authorized dealer as soon as possible if this
occurs.
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) Active
Warning Light — If Equipped
This warning light will indicate when the
ESC system is Active. The ESC Indicator
Light in the instrument cluster will come
on when the ignition is placed in the ON/
RUN or ACC/ON/RUN position, and when ESC is
activated. It should go out with the engine running.
If the ESC Indicator Light comes on continuously
with the engine running, a malfunction has been
detected in the ESC system. If this warning light
remains on after several ignition cycles, and the
vehicle has been driven several miles (kilometers)
at speeds greater than 30 mph (48 km/h), see an
authorized dealer as soon as possible to have the
problem diagnosed and corrected.
The ESC OFF Indicator Light and the ESC Indi-
cator Light come on momentarily each time the
ignition is placed in the ON/RUN or ACC/ON/
RUN position.
The ESC system will make buzzing or clicking
sounds when it is active. This is normal; the
sounds will stop when ESC becomes inactive.
This light will come on when the vehicle is in an
ESC event.
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) OFF
Warning Light — If Equipped
This warning light indicates the ESC is off.
Each time the ignition is turned to ON/RUN or
ACC/ON/RUN, the ESC system will be on, even if it
was turned off previously.
Low Washer Fluid Warning Light —
If Equipped
This warning light will illuminate when the
windshield washer fluid is low
Ú page 292.
WARNING!
A malfunctioning catalytic converter, as
referenced above, can reach higher
temperatures than in normal operating
conditions. This can cause a fire if you drive
slowly or park over flammable substances such
as dry plants, wood, cardboard, etc. This could
result in death or serious injury to the driver,
occupants or others.
CAUTION!
Prolonged driving with the Malfunction Indicator
Light (MIL) on could cause damage to the
vehicle control system. It also could affect fuel
economy and driveability. If the MIL is flashing,
severe catalytic converter damage and power
loss will soon occur. Immediate service is
required.
3
22_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 105
106 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Low Coolant Level Warning Light
This light will turn on to indicate the
vehicle coolant level is low Ú page 302.
Loose Fuel Filler Cap Warning Light —
If Equipped
This warning light will illuminate when the
fuel filler cap is loose. Properly close the
filler cap to disengage the light. If the
light does not turn off, please see an
authorized dealer.
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)
Warning Light
The warning light switches on and a
message is displayed to indicate that
the tire pressure is lower than the
recommended value and/or that slow
pressure loss is occurring. In these cases, optimal
tire duration and fuel consumption may not be
guaranteed.
Should one or more tires be in the condition
mentioned above, the display will show the
indications corresponding to each tire.
Each tire, including the spare (if provided), should
be checked monthly when cold and inflated to the
inflation pressure recommended by the vehicle
manufacturer on the vehicle placard or tire
inflation pressure label. If your vehicle has tires of
a different size than the size indicated on the
vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label, you
should determine the proper tire inflation pressure
for those tires.
As an added safety feature, your vehicle has been
equipped with a TPMS that illuminates a low tire
pressure telltale when one or more of your tires is
significantly underinflated. Accordingly, when the
low tire pressure telltale illuminates, you should
stop and check your tires as soon as possible, and
inflate them to the proper pressure. Driving on a
significantly underinflated tire causes the tire to
overheat and can lead to tire failure. Underinflation
also reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life, and
may affect the vehicle’s handling and stopping
ability.
Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for
proper tire maintenance, and it is the driver’s
responsibility to maintain correct tire pressure,
even if underinflation has not reached the level to
trigger illumination of the TPMS low tire pressure
telltale.
Your vehicle has also been equipped with a TPMS
malfunction indicator to indicate when the system
is not operating properly. The TPMS malfunction
indicator is combined with the low tire pressure
telltale. When the system detects a malfunction,
the telltale will flash for approximately one minute
and then remain continuously illuminated. This
sequence will continue upon subsequent vehicle
start-ups as long as the malfunction exists. When
the malfunction indicator is illuminated, the
system may not be able to detect or signal low tire
pressure as intended. TPMS malfunctions may
occur for a variety of reasons, including the
installation of replacement or alternate tires or
wheels on the vehicle that prevent the TPMS from
functioning properly. Always check the TPMS
malfunction telltale after replacing one or more
tires or wheels on your vehicle to ensure that the
replacement or alternate tires and wheels allow
the TPMS to continue to function properly.
CAUTION!
Do not continue driving with one or more flat
tires as handling may be compromised. Stop the
vehicle, avoiding sharp braking and steering. If a
tire puncture occurs, repair immediately using
the dedicated tire repair kit and contact an
authorized dealer as soon as possible.
22_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 106
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 107
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) Warning
Light
This warning light monitors the ABS. The
light will turn on when the ignition is
placed in the ON/RUN or ACC/ON/RUN
position and may stay on for as long as
four seconds.
If the ABS light remains on or turns on while
driving, then the Anti-Lock portion of the brake
system is not functioning and service is required as
soon as possible. However, the conventional brake
system will continue to operate normally,
assuming the Brake Warning Light is not also on.
If the ABS light does not turn on when the ignition
is placed in the ON/RUN or ACC/ON/RUN position,
have the brake system inspected by an authorized
dealer.
Service 4WD Warning Light — If Equipped
This warning light will illuminate to signal
a fault with the 4WD system. If the light
stays on or comes on during driving, it
means that the 4WD system is not
functioning properly and that service is required.
We recommend you drive to the nearest service
center and have the vehicle serviced immediately.
Transmission Temperature Warning Light
This light indicates that the transmission
fluid temperature is running hot. This
may occur with severe usage, such as
trailer towing. If this light turns on, safely
pull over and stop the vehicle. Then, shift the
transmission into PARK (P) and run the engine at
idle or slightly higher until the light turns off.
YELLOW INDICATOR LIGHTS
Low Fuel Indicator Light
When the fuel level reaches
approximately 3.0 gal (11.0 L) this light
will turn on, and remain on until fuel is
added.
TOW/HAUL Indicator Light
This indicator light will illuminate when
TOW/HAUL mode is selected
Ú page 115.
Trailer Merge Assist Indicator Light —
If Equipped
This indicator light will illuminate to
indicate when Trailer Merge Assist has
been activated Ú page 133.
Cargo Light — If Equipped
This indicator light will illuminate when
the cargo light is activated by pushing the
cargo light button on the headlight
switch.
CAUTION!
The TPMS has been optimized for the original
equipment tires and wheels. TPMS pressures
and warning have been established for the tire
size equipped on your vehicle. Undesirable
system operation or sensor damage may result
when using replacement equipment that is not
of the same size, type, and/or style. Aftermarket
wheels can cause sensor damage. Using
aftermarket tire sealants may cause the Tire
Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) sensor to
become inoperable. After using an aftermarket
tire sealant it is recommended that you take
your vehicle to an authorized dealer to have your
sensor function checked.
WARNING!
If you continue operating the vehicle when the
Transmission Temperature Warning Light is
illuminated you could cause the fluid to boil over,
come in contact with hot engine or exhaust
components and cause a fire.
CAUTION!
Continuous driving with the Transmission
Temperature Warning Light illuminated will
eventually cause severe transmission damage
or transmission failure.
3
22_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 107
108 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
4WD Lock Indicator Light — If Equipped
This light alerts the driver that the
vehicle is in the 4WD LOCK mode.
The front and rear driveshafts are
mechanically locked together, forcing the
front and rear wheels to rotate at the same speed
Ú page 120.
4WD Low Indicator Light — If Equipped
This light alerts the driver that the vehicle
is in the 4WD Low mode. The front and
rear driveshafts are mechanically locked
together forcing the front and rear
wheels to rotate at the same speed. Low range
provides a greater gear reduction ratio to provide
increased torque at the wheels Ú page 120.
4WD Indicator Light — If Equipped
This light alerts the driver that the vehicle
is in the four-wheel drive mode, and the
front and rear driveshafts are
mechanically locked together forcing the
front and rear wheels to rotate at the same speed.
NEUTRAL Indicator Light — If Equipped
This light alerts the driver that the 4WD
power transfer case is in the NEUTRAL
mode and the front and rear driveshafts
are disengaged from the powertrain.
GREEN INDICATOR LIGHTS
Parking/Headlights On Indicator Light
This indicator light will illuminate when
the parking lights or headlights are
turned on Ú page 46.
Front Fog Indicator Light — If Equipped
This indicator light will illuminate when
the front fog lights are on Ú page 46.
Turn Signal Indicator Lights
When the left or right turn signal is
activated, the turn signal indicator will
flash independently and the
corresponding exterior turn signal lamps
will flash. Turn signals can be activated when the
multifunction lever is moved down (left) or
up (right).
NOTE:
A continuous chime will sound if the vehicle is
driven more than 1 mile (1.6 km) with either
turn signal on.
Check for an inoperative outside light bulb if
either indicator flashes at a rapid rate.
Cruise Control SET Indicator Light —
If Equipped With 7 Inch Instrument Cluster
Display
This light will turn on when the cruise
control is set Ú page 123.
4WD AUTO Indicator Light —
If Equipped
This light alerts the driver that the vehicle
is in the four-wheel drive auto mode, and
the front axle is engaged, but the
vehicle's power is sent to the rear wheels.
Four-wheel drive will be automatically engaged
when the vehicle senses a loss of traction
Ú page 120.
Stop/Start Active Indicator Light —
If Equipped
This indicator light will illuminate when
the Stop/Start function is in “Autostop”
mode.
22_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 108
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 109
WHITE INDICATOR LIGHTS
Cruise Control Ready Indicator
This indicator light will illuminate when
the Cruise Control is ready, but not set
Ú page 123.
Cruise Control SET Indicator Light —
If Equipped With 3.5 Inch Instrument
Cluster Display
This light will turn on when the cruise
control is set Ú page 123.
BLUE INDICATOR LIGHTS
High Beam Indicator Light
This indicator light will illuminate to
indicate that the high beam headlights
are on. With the low beams activated,
push the multifunction lever forward
(toward the front of the vehicle) to turn on the high
beams. Pull the multifunction lever rearward
(toward the rear of the vehicle) to turn off the high
beams. If the high beams are off, pull the lever
toward you for a temporary high beam on, "flash to
pass" scenario.
ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM — OBD II
Your vehicle is equipped with a sophisticated
Onboard Diagnostic system called OBD II.
This system monitors the performance of the
emissions, engine, and transmission control
systems. When these systems are operating
properly, your vehicle will provide excellent
performance and fuel economy, as well as engine
emissions well within current government
regulations.
If any of these systems require service, the OBD II
system will turn on the Malfunction Indicator Light
(MIL). It will also store diagnostic codes and other
information to assist your service technician in
making repairs. Although your vehicle will usually
be drivable and not need towing, see an authorized
dealer for service as soon as possible.
ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM (OBD II)
C
YBERSECURITY
Your vehicle is required to have OBD II and a
connection port to allow access to information
related to the performance of your emissions
controls. Authorized service technicians may need
to access this information to assist with the
diagnosis and service of your vehicle and
emissions system Ú page 149.
CAUTION!
Prolonged driving with the MIL on could cause
further damage to the emission control
system. It could also affect fuel economy and
driveability. The vehicle must be serviced
before any emissions tests can be performed.
If the MIL is flashing while the vehicle is
running, severe catalytic converter damage
and power loss will soon occur. Immediate
service is required.
WARNING!
ONLY an authorized service technician should
connect equipment to the OBD II connection
port in order to read the VIN, diagnose, or
service your vehicle.
If unauthorized equipment is connected to the
OBD II connection port, such as a
driver-behavior tracking device, it may:
Be possible that vehicle systems,
including safety related systems, could be
impaired or a loss of vehicle control could
occur that may result in an accident
involving serious injury or death.
Access, or allow others to access, infor-
mation stored in your vehicle systems,
including personal information.
3
22_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 109
110 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
EMISSIONS INSPECTION AND
MAINTENANCE PROGRAMS
In some localities, it may be a legal requirement to
pass an inspection of your vehicle's emissions
control system. Failure to pass could prevent
vehicle registration.
For states that require an Inspection and
Maintenance (I/M), this check verifies
the Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) is
functioning and is not on when the
engine is running, and that the OBD II system is
ready for testing.
Normally, the OBD II system will be ready. The OBD II
system may not be ready if your vehicle was recently
serviced, recently had a depleted battery or a battery
replacement. If the OBD II system should be
determined not ready for the I/M test, your vehicle
may fail the test.
Your vehicle has a simple ignition actuated test,
which you can use prior to going to the test station.
To check if your vehicle's OBD II system is ready,
you must do the following:
1. Cycle the ignition switch to the ON position,
but do not crank or start the engine.
2. As soon as you cycle the ignition switch to the
ON position, you will see the Malfunction
Indicator Light (MIL) symbol come on as part of
a normal bulb check.
3. Approximately 15 seconds later, one of two
things will happen:
The MIL will flash for about 10 seconds and
then return to being fully illuminated until
you turn OFF the ignition or start the engine.
This means that your vehicle's OBD II
system is not ready and you should not
proceed to the I/M station.
The MIL will not flash at all and will remain
fully illuminated until you place the ignition
in the off position or start the engine. This
means that your vehicle's OBD II system is
ready and you can proceed to the I/M
station.
If your OBD II system is not ready, you should see
an authorized dealer or repair facility. If your
vehicle was recently serviced or had a battery
failure or replacement, you may need to do nothing
more than drive your vehicle as you normally would
in order for your OBD II system to update. A
recheck with the above test routine may then
indicate that the system is now ready.
Regardless of whether your vehicle's OBD II system
is ready or not, if the MIL is illuminated during
normal vehicle operation you should have your
vehicle serviced before going to the I/M station.
The I/M station can fail your vehicle because the
MIL is on with the engine running.
22_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 110
111
(Continued)
STARTING AND OPERATING
STARTING THE ENGINE
Before starting your vehicle, adjust your seat,
adjust both inside and outside mirrors, and fasten
your seat belt.
The starter should not be operated for more than
10-second intervals. Waiting a 10 to 15 seconds
between such intervals will protect the starter from
overheating.
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION
Start the engine with the transmission in the PARK
position. Apply the brake before shifting into any
driving range.
NOTE:
This vehicle is equipped with a transmission
shift interlocking system. The brake pedal must
be pressed to shift out of PARK.
Starting the vehicle in NEUTRAL is not possible
unless the Manual Park Release has been acti-
vated Ú page 279.
TIP START FEATURE
Do not press the accelerator. Place the ignition
switch briefly to the START position and release it.
The starter motor will continue to run and will
automatically disengage when the engine is
running.
AUTOPARK
AutoPark is a supplemental feature to assist in
placing the vehicle in PARK should the situations
on the following pages occur. It is a back up system
and should not be relied upon as the primary
method by which the driver shifts the vehicle
into PARK.
The conditions under which AutoPark will engage
are outlined on the following pages.
WARNING!
When leaving the vehicle, always make sure
the keyless ignition node is in the OFF posi-
tion, remove the key fob from the vehicle and
lock the vehicle.
Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing chil-
dren to be in a vehicle unattended is
dangerous for a number of reasons. A child or
others could be seriously or fatally injured.
Children should be warned not to touch the
parking brake, brake pedal or the gear
selector.
Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle,
or in a location accessible to children, and do
not leave the ignition of a vehicle equipped
with Keyless Enter ‘n Go™ in the ACC or ON/
RUN position. A child could operate power
windows, other controls, or move the vehicle.
Do not leave children or animals inside parked
vehicles in hot weather. Interior heat build-up
may cause serious injury or death.
WARNING!
4
22_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 111
112 STARTING AND OPERATING
If the vehicle is not in PARK and the driver turns off
the engine, the vehicle may AutoPark.
AutoPark will engage when all of these conditions
are met:
Vehicle is equipped with a rotary gear selector
and an 8-speed transmission
Vehicle is not in PARK
Vehicle speed is 1.2 mph (1.9 km/h) or less
Ignition is switched from ON/RUN to ACC
NOTE:
For Keyless Enter ’n Go™ equipped vehicles, the
engine will turn off and the ignition switch will
change to ACC position. After 30 minutes the
ignition switches to OFF automatically, unless the
driver turns the ignition switch OFF.
If the vehicle is not in PARK and the driver exits the
vehicle with the engine running, the vehicle may
AutoPark.
AutoPark will engage when all of these conditions
are met:
Vehicle is equipped with a rotary gear selector
and an 8-speed transmission
Vehicle is not in PARK
Vehicle speed is 1.2 mph (1.9 km/h) or less
Driver’s seat belt is unbuckled
Driver’s door is ajar
Brake pedal is not pressed
The message “AutoPark Engaged Shift to P then
Shift to Gear” will display in the instrument cluster.
NOTE:
In some cases the ParkSense graphic will be
displayed in the instrument cluster, causing the
“AutoPark Engaged Shift to P then Shift to Gear” to
not be seen. In these cases, the gear selector must
be returned to “P” to select desired gear.
If the driver shifts into PARK while moving, the
vehicle may AutoPark.
AutoPark will engage ONLY when vehicle speed is
1.2 mph (1.9 km/h) or less.
The message “Vehicle Speed is Too High to Shift to
P” will be displayed in the instrument cluster if
vehicle speed is above 1.2 mph (1.9 km/h).
4WD LOW — If Equipped
AutoPark will be disabled when operating the
vehicle in 4WD LOW.
The message “AutoPark Disabled” will be
displayed in the instrument cluster.
Additional customer warnings will be given when
all of these conditions are met:
Vehicle is not in PARK
Driver’s door is ajar
Vehicle is in 4WD LOW range
WARNING!
Driver inattention could lead to failure to place
the vehicle in PARK. ALWAYS DO A VISUAL
CHECK that your vehicle is in PARK by verifying
that a solid (not blinking) “P” is indicated in
the instrument cluster display and near the
gear selector. If the "P" indicator is blinking,
your vehicle is not in PARK. As an added
precaution, always apply the parking brake
when exiting the vehicle.
AutoPark is a supplemental feature. It is not
designed to replace the need to shift your
vehicle into PARK. It is a back up system and
should not be relied upon as the primary
method by which the driver shifts the vehicle
into PARK.
WARNING!
If vehicle speed is above 1.2 mph (1.9 km/h), the
transmission will default to NEUTRAL until the
vehicle speed drops below 1.2 mph (1.9 km/h).
A vehicle left in the NEUTRAL position can roll. As
an added precaution, always apply the parking
brake when exiting the vehicle.
22_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 112
STARTING AND OPERATING 113
The message “AutoPark Not Engaged” will be
displayed in the instrument cluster. A warning
chime will continue until you shift the vehicle into
PARK or the driver’s door is closed.
ALWAYS DO A VISUAL CHECK
that your vehicle is in
PARK by looking for the "P" in the instrument
cluster display and near the gear selector. As an
added precaution, always apply the parking brake
when exiting the vehicle.
IF ENGINE FAILS TO START
If the engine fails to start after you have followed
the “Normal Starting” procedure and has not
experienced an extended parking condition (i.e.,
parked for more than 30 days), it may be flooded.
Push the accelerator pedal all the way to the floor
and hold it there while the engine is cranking. This
should clear any excess fuel in case the engine is
flooded.
The starter motor will engage automatically, run for
10 seconds, and then disengage. Once this occurs,
release the accelerator pedal and the brake pedal,
wait 10 to 15 seconds, then repeat the “Normal
Starting” procedure.
If the engine has been flooded, it may start to run,
but not have enough power to continue running
when the ignition key is released. If this occurs,
continue cranking with the accelerator pedal
pushed all the way to the floor. Release the
accelerator pedal and the ignition key once the
engine is running smoothly.
If the engine shows no sign of starting after a
10 second period of engine cranking with the
accelerator pedal held to the floor, wait 10 to
15 seconds, then repeat the “Normal Starting”
procedure.
COLD WEATHER OPERATION
(B
ELOW –22°F OR −30°C)
To ensure reliable starting at these temperatures,
the use of an externally powered electric engine
block heater (available from an authorized dealer)
is recommended.
AFTER STARTING
The idle speed is controlled automatically, and it
will decrease as the engine warms up.
WARNING!
Never pour fuel or other flammable liquid into
the throttle body air inlet opening in an
attempt to start the vehicle. This could result
in a flash fire causing serious personal injury.
Do not attempt to push or tow your vehicle to
get it started. Vehicles equipped with an auto-
matic transmission cannot be started this
way. Unburned fuel could enter the catalytic
converter and once the engine has started,
ignite and damage the converter and vehicle.
If the vehicle has a discharged battery,
booster cables may be used to obtain a start
from a booster battery or the battery in
another vehicle. This type of start can be
dangerous if done improperly Ú page 276.
CAUTION!
To prevent damage to the starter, do not crank
the engine for more than 10 seconds at a time.
Wait 10 to 15 seconds before trying again.
4
22_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 113
114 STARTING AND OPERATING
ENGINE BLOCK HEATER — IF EQUIPPED
The engine block heater warms the engine, and
permits quicker starts in cold weather. Connect the
cord to a standard 110-115 Volt AC electrical
outlet with a grounded, three-wire extension cord.
The engine block heater cord is routed under the
hood on the passenger side of the vehicle near the
right head lamp assembly. It is located between
the front grill and the radiator, but underneath the
black upper seal.
ENGINE BREAK-IN RECOMMENDATIONS
A long break-in period is not required for the engine
and drivetrain (transmission and axle) in your
vehicle.
Drive moderately during the first 300 miles
(500 km). After the initial 60 miles (100 km),
speeds up to 50 or 55 mph (80 or 90 km/h) are
desirable.
While cruising, brief full-throttle acceleration within
the limits of local traffic laws contributes to a good
break-in. Wide-open throttle acceleration in low
gear can be detrimental and should be avoided.
The engine oil installed in the engine at the factory
is a high-quality energy conserving type lubricant.
Oil changes should be consistent with anticipated
climate conditions under which vehicle operations
will occur. For the recommended viscosity and
quality grades Ú page 347.
NOTE:
A new engine may consume some oil during its first
few thousand miles (kilometers) of operation. This
should be considered a normal part of the break-in
and not interpreted as a problem. Please check
your oil level with the engine oil indicator often
during the break in period. Add oil as required.
PARKING BRAKE
Before leaving the vehicle, make sure that the
parking brake is fully applied. Also, be certain to
leave the transmission in PARK.
The foot-operated parking brake is located below
the lower left corner of the instrument panel. To
apply the parking brake, firmly push the parking
brake pedal fully. To release the parking brake, pull
the parking brake release handle.
Parking Brake Release
When the parking brake is applied with the ignition
switch ON, the Brake Warning Light in the
instrument cluster will illuminate.
NOTE:
When the parking brake is applied and the
transmission is placed in gear, the Brake
Warning Light will flash. If vehicle speed is
detected, a chime will sound to alert the driver.
Fully release the parking brake before
attempting to move the vehicle.
This light only shows that the parking brake is
applied. It does not show the degree of brake
application.
WARNING!
Remember to disconnect the engine block heater
cord before driving. Damage to the 110-115 Volt
electrical cord could cause electrocution.
CAUTION!
Never use Non-Detergent Oil or Straight Mineral
Oil in the engine or damage may result.
22_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 114
STARTING AND OPERATING 115
(Continued)
(Continued)
When parking on a hill, it is important to turn the
front wheels toward the curb on a downhill grade
and away from the curb on an uphill grade. Apply
the parking brake before placing the gear selector
in PARK, otherwise the load on the transmission
locking mechanism may make it difficult to move
the gear selector out of PARK. The parking brake
should always be applied whenever the driver is
not in the vehicle.
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION
NOTE:
You must press and hold the brake pedal while
shifting out of PARK.
WARNING!
Never use the PARK position as a substitute
for the parking brake. Always apply the
parking brake fully when parked to guard
against vehicle movement and possible injury
or damage.
Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle. Leaving unat-
tended children in a vehicle is dangerous for a
number of reasons. A child or others could be
seriously or fatally injured.
Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle,
or in a location accessible to children, and do
not leave a vehicle equipped with Keyless
Enter ’n Go™ in the ACC or ON/RUN position.
A child could operate power windows, other
controls, or move the vehicle.
Be sure the parking brake is fully disengaged
before driving; failure to do so can lead to
brake failure and a collision.
Always fully apply the parking brake when
leaving your vehicle or it may roll and cause
damage or injury. Also, be certain to leave the
transmission in PARK. Failure to do so may
cause the vehicle to roll and cause damage or
injury.
CAUTION!
If the Brake System Warning Light remains on
with the parking brake released, a brake system
malfunction is indicated. Have the brake system
serviced by an authorized dealer immediately.
WARNING!
WARNING!
It is dangerous to shift out of PARK or
NEUTRAL if the engine speed is higher than
idle speed. If your foot is not firmly pressing
the brake pedal, the vehicle could accelerate
quickly forward or in reverse. You could lose
control of the vehicle and hit someone or
something. Only shift into gear when the
engine is idling normally and your foot is firmly
pressing the brake pedal.
Unintended movement of a vehicle could
injure those in or near the vehicle. As with all
vehicles, you should never exit a vehicle while
the engine is running. Before exiting a vehicle,
always come to a complete stop, then apply
the parking brake, shift the transmission into
PARK, turn the engine off, and remove the key
fob. When the ignition is in the LOCK/OFF
(key removal) position, (or, with Keyless
Enter ’n Go™, when the ignition is in the
OFF position) the transmission is locked in
PARK, securing the vehicle against unwanted
movement.
When leaving the vehicle, always make sure
the ignition is in the OFF position, remove the
key fob from the vehicle, and lock the vehicle.
4
22_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 115
116 STARTING AND OPERATING
KEY IGNITION PARK INTERLOCK —
I
F EQUIPPED
This vehicle is equipped with a Key Ignition Park
Interlock which requires the transmission to be in
PARK before the ignition can be turned to the
LOCK/OFF (key removal) position. The key fob can
only be removed from the ignition when the ignition
is in the LOCK/OFF position, and the transmission
is locked in PARK whenever the ignition is in the
LOCK/OFF position.
NOTE:
If a malfunction occurs, the system will trap the key
fob in the ignition to warn you that this safety
feature is inoperable. The engine can be started
and stopped but the key fob cannot be removed
until you obtain service.
BRAKE/TRANSMISSION SHIFT
I
NTERLOCK (BTSI) S YSTEM
This vehicle is equipped with a BTSI system that
holds the transmission gear selector in PARK unless
the brakes are applied. To shift the transmission out
of PARK, the ignition must be turned to the ON/RUN
position (engine running, for vehicles with 8-speed
transmission) and the brake pedal must be pressed.
In 8-speed vehicles, the brake pedal must also be
pressed to shift from NEUTRAL into DRIVE or
REVERSE when the vehicle is stopped or moving at
low speeds.
8-SPEED AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION
The transmission is controlled using a rotary
electronic gear selector located on the instrument
panel. The transmission gear range (PRND) is
displayed both above the gear selector and in the
instrument cluster. To select a gear range, simply
rotate the gear selector. You must press the brake
pedal to shift the transmission out of PARK (or
NEUTRAL, when the vehicle is stopped or moving at
low speeds). To shift past multiple gear ranges at
once (such as PARK to DRIVE), simply rotate the
gear selector to the appropriate detent. Select the
DRIVE range for normal driving.
Never use the PARK position as a substitute
for the parking brake. Always apply the
parking brake fully when exiting the vehicle to
guard against vehicle movement and possible
injury or damage.
Your vehicle could move and injure you and
others if it is not in PARK. Check by trying to
move the gear selector out of PARK with the
brake pedal released. Make sure the trans-
mission is in PARK before exiting the vehicle.
Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing chil-
dren to be in a vehicle unattended is
dangerous for a number of reasons. A child or
others could be seriously or fatally injured.
Children should be warned not to touch the
parking brake, brake pedal or the transmis-
sion gear selector.
Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle
(or in a location accessible to children), and do
not leave the ignition (in a vehicle equipped
with Keyless Enter ’n Go™) in the ACC or ON/
RUN position. A child could operate power
windows, other controls, or move the vehicle.
WARNING!
CAUTION!
Damage to the transmission may occur if the
following precautions are not observed:
Shift into or out of PARK or REVERSE only after
the vehicle has come to a complete stop.
Do not shift between PARK, REVERSE,
NEUTRAL, or DRIVE when the engine is above
idle speed.
Before shifting into any gear, make sure your
foot is firmly pressing the brake pedal.
22_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 116
STARTING AND OPERATING 117
NOTE:
In the event of a mismatch between the gear
selector position and the actual transmission gear
(for example, driver selects PARK while driving),
the position indicator will blink continuously until
the selector is returned to the proper position, or
the requested shift can be completed.
The electronically controlled transmission adapts
its shift schedule based on driver inputs, along
with environmental and road conditions. The
transmission electronics are self-calibrating;
therefore, the first few shifts on a new vehicle may
be somewhat abrupt. This is a normal condition,
and precision shifts will develop within a few
hundred miles (kilometers).
Only shift from DRIVE to PARK or REVERSE when
the accelerator pedal is released and the vehicle is
stopped. Be sure to keep your foot on the brake
pedal when shifting between these gears.
The transmission gear selector has only PARK,
REVERSE, NEUTRAL, and DRIVE positions. Manual
downshifts can be made using the Electronic
Range Select (ERS) shift control. Pushing the
GEAR “-”/GEAR “+” switches (on the steering
wheel) while in the DRIVE position will select the
highest available transmission gear, and will
display that gear limit in the instrument cluster as
1, 2, 3, etc Ú page 119. Some models will display
both the selected gear limit, and the actual current
gear, while in ERS mode.
Electronic Transmission Gear Selector
Gear Ranges
Do not press the accelerator pedal when shifting
from PARK or NEUTRAL into another gear range.
NOTE:
After selecting any gear range, wait a moment to
allow the selected gear to engage before acceler-
ating. This is especially important when the engine
is cold.
PARK (P)
This range supplements the parking brake by
locking the transmission. The engine can be
started in this range. Never attempt to use PARK
while the vehicle is in motion. Apply the parking
brake when exiting the vehicle in this range.
When parking on a level surface, you may shift the
transmission into PARK first, and then apply the
parking brake.
When parking on a hill, apply the parking brake
before shifting the transmission to PARK. As an
added precaution, turn the front wheels toward the
curb on a downhill grade and away from the curb
on an uphill grade.
NOTE:
On four-wheel drive vehicles be sure that the
transfer case is in a drive position.
When exiting the vehicle, always:
Apply the parking brake.
Shift the transmission into PARK.
Turn the engine off.
Remove the key fob.
CAUTION!
DO NOT race the engine when shifting from
PARK or NEUTRAL into another gear range, as
this can damage the drivetrain.
Before moving the transmission gear selector
out of PARK, you must start the engine, and
also press the brake pedal. Otherwise,
damage to the gear selector could result.
4
22_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 117
118 STARTING AND OPERATING
The following indicators should be used to ensure
that you have properly engaged the transmission
into the PARK position:
Look at the transmission gear position display
and verify that it indicates the PARK position,
and is not blinking.
With the brake pedal released, verify that the
gear selector will not move out of PARK.
REVERSE (R)
This range is for moving the vehicle backward.
Shift into REVERSE only after the vehicle has come
to a complete stop.
NEUTRAL (N)
Use this range when the vehicle is standing for
prolonged periods with the engine running. Apply
the parking brake and shift the transmission into
PARK if you must exit the vehicle.
DRIVE (D)
This range should be used for most city and
highway driving. It provides the smoothest upshifts
and downshifts, and the best fuel economy. The
transmission automatically upshifts through all
forward gears. The DRIVE position provides
optimum driving characteristics under all normal
operating conditions.
When frequent transmission shifting occurs (such
as when operating the vehicle under heavy loading
conditions, in hilly terrain, traveling into strong
head winds, or while towing a heavy trailer), select
TOW/HAUL mode or use the Electronic Range
Select (ERS) shift control to select a lower gear
range Ú page 119. Under these conditions, using
a lower gear range will improve performance and
extend transmission life by reducing excessive
shifting and heat buildup.
During extremely cold temperatures
(-22°F [-30°C] or below), transmission operation
may be modified depending on engine and
transmission temperature as well as vehicle speed.
Normal operation will resume once the transmission
temperature has risen to a suitable level.
Transmission Limp Home Mode
Transmission function is monitored electronically for
abnormal conditions. If a condition is detected that
could result in transmission damage, Transmission
Limp Home mode is activated. In this mode, the
transmission may operate only in certain gears, or
may not shift at all. Vehicle performance may be
severely degraded and the engine may stall. In some
situations, the transmission may not re-engage if the
engine is turned off and restarted. The Malfunction
Indicator Light (MIL) may be illuminated. A message
in the instrument cluster will inform the driver of the
more serious conditions, and indicate what actions
may be necessary.
In the event of a momentary problem, the
transmission can be reset to regain all forward gears
by performing the following steps:
NOTE:
In cases where the instrument cluster message
indicates the transmission may not re-engage after
engine shutdown, perform this procedure only in
a desired location (preferably, at an authorized
dealer).
WARNING!
Do not coast in NEUTRAL and never turn off the
ignition to coast down a hill. These are unsafe
practices that limit your response to changing
traffic or road conditions. You might lose control
of the vehicle and have a collision.
CAUTION!
Towing the vehicle, coasting, or driving for any
other reason with the transmission in NEUTRAL
can cause severe transmission damage.
For Recreational Towing Ú page 143.
For Towing A Disabled Vehicle Ú page 282.
22_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 118
STARTING AND OPERATING 119
1. Stop the vehicle.
2. Shift the transmission into PARK, if possible.
If not, shift the transmission to NEUTRAL.
3. Turn the ignition to the OFF position.
On vehicles with Keyless Enter ’n Go™, push
and hold the ignition switch until the engine
turns OFF.
4. Wait approximately 30 seconds.
5. Restart the engine.
6. Shift into the desired gear range. If the
problem is no longer detected, the
transmission will return to normal operation.
NOTE:
Even if the transmission can be reset, we
recommend that you visit an authorized dealer at
your earliest possible convenience. An authorized
dealer has diagnostic equipment to assess the
condition of your transmission.
If the transmission cannot be reset, authorized
dealer service is required.
Electronic Range Select (ERS) Operation
The Electronic Range Select (ERS) shift control
allows the driver to limit the highest available gear
when the transmission is in DRIVE. For example, if
you set the transmission gear limit to 4 (FOURTH
gear), the transmission will not shift above
FOURTH gear, but will shift through the lower gears
normally.
You can switch between DRIVE and ERS mode at
any vehicle speed. When the transmission gear
selector is in DRIVE, the transmission will operate
automatically, shifting between all available gears.
Tapping the GEAR “-” switch (on the steering
wheel) will activate ERS mode, display the current
gear in the instrument cluster, and set that gear as
the top available gear. Once in ERS mode, tapping
the GEAR “-” or GEAR “+” switch will change the top
available gear.
Electronic Range Select (ERS)
To exit ERS mode, simply push and hold the
GEAR “+” switch until the gear limit display
disappears from the instrument cluster.
When to Use TOW/HAUL Mode
When driving in hilly areas, towing a trailer, carrying
a heavy load, etc., and frequent transmission
shifting occurs, push the TOW/HAUL switch to
activate TOW/HAUL mode. This will improve
performance and reduce the potential for
transmission overheating or failure due to
excessive shifting.
TOW/HAUL Switch
1 — GEAR “-” Switch
2 — GEAR “+” Switch
WARNING!
Do not downshift for additional engine braking
on a slippery surface. The drive wheels could
lose their grip and the vehicle could skid,
causing a collision or personal injury.
4
22_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 119
120 STARTING AND OPERATING
(Continued)
The TOW/HAUL Indicator Light will illuminate in the
instrument cluster and a light on the switch to
indicate that TOW/HAUL mode has been activated.
Pushing the switch a second time restores normal
operation. Normal operation is always the default
at engine start-up. If TOW/HAUL mode is desired,
the switch must be pushed each time the engine is
started.
FOUR-WHEEL DRIVE OPERATION —
IF EQUIPPED
FOUR-POSITION
E
LECTRONICALLY -SHIFTED TRANSFER
C
ASE
This is an electronically-shifted transfer case and is
operated by the 4WD Control Switch (Transfer
Case Switch), which is located on the instrument
panel.
Four-Position/On-Demand Transfer Case
This electronically-shifted transfer case provides
four positions:
Two-Wheel Drive High Range (2WD) — This
range is for normal street and highway driving
on dry hard surfaced roads. Driving the vehicle
in 2WD will have greater fuel economy benefits
as the front axle is not engaged in 2WD.
Four-Wheel Drive Lock High Range (4WD LOCK) —
This range provides torque to the front driveshaft
(engages four-wheel drive) which allows front and
rear wheels to spin at the same speed. This
provides additional traction for loose or slippery
road surfaces only.
Four-Wheel Drive Low Range (4WD LOW) —
This range provides low speed four-wheel drive.
It maximizes torque (increased torque over
4WD LOCK) to the front driveshaft; allowing
front and rear wheels to rotate at the same
speed. This range provides additional traction
and maximum pulling power for loose or slippery
road surfaces only. Do not exceed 25 mph
(40 km/h) in this range.
N (Neutral) — This range disengages both the
front and rear driveshafts from the powertrain.
To be used for flat towing behind another
vehicle Ú page 143.
WARNING!
Do not use the TOW/HAUL feature when driving
in icy or slippery conditions. The increased
engine braking can cause the rear wheels to
slide, and the vehicle to swing around with the
possible loss of vehicle control, which may
cause an accident possibly resulting in personal
injury or death.
WARNING!
You or others could be injured or killed if you
leave the vehicle unattended with the transfer
case in the N (Neutral) position without first
fully engaging the parking brake. The transfer
case N (Neutral) position disengages both the
front and rear drive shaft from the powertrain,
and will allow the vehicle to roll, even if the
transmission is in PARK. The parking brake
should always be applied when the driver is
not in the vehicle.
22_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 120
STARTING AND OPERATING 121
NOTE:
The 4WD LOCK and 4WD LOW positions are
designed for loose, slippery road surfaces only.
Driving in the 4WD LOCK and 4WD LOW posi-
tions on dry, hard surfaced roads may cause
increased tire wear and damage to the driveline
components.
The transfer case N (Neutral) button is located
in the center of the 4WD Control Switch and is
pushed by using a ballpoint pen or similar
object. The transfer case N (Neutral) position is
to be used for recreational towing only
Ú page 143.
Transfer Case Position Indicator Lights
The Transfer Case Position Indicator Lights (4WD
LOCK and 4WD LOW) are located in the instrument
cluster and indicate the current and desired
transfer case selection. When you select a
different transfer case position, the indicator lights
will do the following:
If all of the following shift conditions are met:
1. The current position indicator light will
turn off.
2. The selected position indicator light will flash
until the transfer case completes the shift.
3. When the shift is complete, the indicator light
for the selected position will stop flashing and
remain on.
If the transfer case does not shift into the desired
position, one or more of the following events may
occur:
1. The indicator light for the current position will
remain on.
2. The newly selected position indicator light will
continue to flash.
3. The transfer case will not shift.
NOTE:
Before retrying a selection, make certain that all
the necessary requirements for selecting a new
transfer case position have been met. To retry
the selection, push the current position, wait
five seconds, and retry selection.
The SERV 4WD Warning Light monitors the
electronically-shifted transfer case. If this light
remains on after engine start-up or illuminates
during driving, it means that the four-wheel drive
system is not functioning properly and that service
is required.
NOTE:
Do not attempt to make a shift while only the front
or rear wheels are spinning. This could cause
damage to driveline components.
When operating your vehicle in 4WD LOW, the
engine speed is approximately three times that of
the 2WD or 4WD LOCK positions at a given road
speed. Take care not to overspeed the engine and
do not exceed 25 mph (40 km/h).
The transmission may not engage PARK if the
vehicle is moving. Always bring the vehicle to a
complete stop before shifting to PARK, and
verify that the transmission gear position indi-
cator solidly indicates PARK (P) without
blinking. Ensure that the vehicle is completely
stopped, and the PARK position is properly
indicated, before exiting the vehicle.
WARNING!
WARNING!
Always engage the parking brake when powering
down the vehicle if the SERV 4WD Warning Light
is illuminated. Not engaging the parking brake
may allow the vehicle to roll which may cause
personal injury or death.
4
22_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 121
122 STARTING AND OPERATING
Proper operation of four-wheel drive vehicles
depends on tires of equal size, type and
circumference on each wheel. Any difference in
tire size can cause damage to the drivetrain.
Because four-wheel drive provides improved
traction, there is a tendency to exceed safe turning
and stopping speeds. Do not go faster than road
conditions permit.
Shifting Procedure
NOTE:
If any of the requirements to select a new
transfer case position have not been met, the
transfer case will not shift. The position indi-
cator light for the previous position will remain
on and the newly selected position indicator
light will continue to flash until all the require-
ments for the selected position have been met.
If all the requirements to select a new transfer
case position have been met, the current position
indicator light will turn off, the selected position
indicator light will flash until the transfer case
completes the shift. When the shift is complete,
the position indicator light for the selected posi-
tion will stop flashing and remain on.
LIMITED-SLIP DIFFERENTIAL
The limited-slip differential provides additional
traction on snow, ice, mud, sand and gravel,
particularly when there is a difference between the
traction characteristics of the surface under the
right and left rear wheels. During normal driving
and cornering, the limited-slip unit performs
similarly to a conventional differential. On slippery
surfaces, however, the differential delivers more of
the driving effort to the rear wheel having the
better traction.
The limited-slip differential is especially helpful
during slippery driving conditions. With both rear
wheels on a slippery surface, a slight application of
the accelerator will supply maximum traction.
When starting with only one rear wheel on an
excessively slippery surface, slight momentary
application of the parking brake may be necessary
to gain maximum traction.
Care should be taken to avoid sudden
accelerations when both rear wheels are on a
slippery surface. This could cause both rear wheels
to spin, and allow the vehicle to slide sideways on
the crowned surface of a road or in a turn.
FUEL SAVER TECHNOLOGY — 5.7L ENGINES
ONLY (IF EQUIPPED)
This feature offers improved fuel economy by
shutting off four of the engine's eight cylinders
during light load and cruise conditions. The system
is automatic with no driver inputs or additional
driving skills required.
NOTE:
This system may take some time to return to full
functionality after a battery disconnect.
ELECTRIC POWER STEERING
The electric power steering system will provide
increased vehicle response and ease of
maneuverability. The power steering system
adapts to different driving conditions.
If the steering icon is flashing, it indicates that the
vehicle needs to be taken to the dealer for service.
It is likely the vehicle has lost power steering
assistance.
WARNING!
On vehicles equipped with a limited-slip
differential never run the engine with one rear
wheel off the ground since the vehicle may drive
through the rear wheel remaining on the ground.
You could lose control of the vehicle.
22_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 122
STARTING AND OPERATING 123
If the steering icon is displayed and the “POWER
STEERING SYSTEM OVER TEMP” message is
displayed on the instrument cluster screen, this
indicates an over temperature condition in the
power steering system. Once driving conditions are
safe, pull over and let the vehicle idle for a few
moments until the icon and message turn off
Ú page 94.
If the steering icon is displayed and the “SERVICE
POWER STEERING – ASSIST OFF” message is
displayed the instrument cluster screen, this
indicates the vehicle needs to be taken to the
dealer for service Ú page 94.
NOTE:
Even if the power steering assistance is no
longer operational, it is still possible to steer the
vehicle. Under these conditions there will be a
substantial increase in steering effort, espe-
cially at low speeds and during parking maneu-
vers.
If the condition persists, see an authorized
dealer for service.
CRUISE CONTROL SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED
Your vehicle is equipped with the Cruise Control
system for cruising at a constant preset speed.
CRUISE CONTROL
When engaged, Cruise Control takes over
accelerator operations at speeds greater than
20 mph (32 km/h) or 25 mph (40 km/h),
depending on the powertrain.
The Cruise Control buttons are located on the right
side of the steering wheel.
Cruise Control Buttons
To Activate
Push the on/off button to activate Cruise Control.
The Cruise Indicator Light in the instrument cluster
display will illuminate. To turn the system off, push
the on/off button a second time. The Cruise
Indicator Light will turn off. The system should be
turned off when not in use.
1 — On/Off
2 — CANCEL
3 — RES (+)
4 — SET (-)
WARNING!
Cruise Control can be dangerous where the
system cannot maintain a constant speed. Your
vehicle could go too fast for the conditions, and
you could lose control and have an accident. Do
not use Cruise Control in heavy traffic or on
roads that are winding, icy, snow-covered or
slippery.
WARNING!
Leaving the Cruise Control system on when not
in use is dangerous. You could accidentally set
the system or cause it to go faster than you
want. You could lose control and have an
accident. Always leave the system off when you
are not using it.
4
22_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 123
124 STARTING AND OPERATING
To Set A Desired Speed
Turn the Cruise Control on.
NOTE:
The vehicle should be traveling at a steady speed
and on level ground before pushing the SET (-)
button.
When the vehicle has reached the desired speed,
push the SET (-) button and release. Release the
accelerator and the vehicle will operate at the
selected speed.
To Vary The Speed Setting
To Increase Or Decrease The Set Speed
When the Cruise Control is set, you can increase
speed by pushing the RES (+) button, or decrease
speed by pushing the SET (-) button.
U.S. Speed (mph)
Pushing the RES (+) or SET (-) button once will
result in a 1 mph speed adjustment. Each
subsequent tap of the button results in an
adjustment of 1 mph.
If the button is continually pushed, the set
speed will continue to adjust until the button
is released, then the new set speed will be
established.
Metric Speed (km/h)
Pushing the RES (+) or SET (-) button once will
result in a 1 km/h speed adjustment. Each
subsequent tap of the button results in an
adjustment of 1 km/h.
If the button is continually pushed, the set
speed will continue to adjust until the button is
released, then the new set speed will be estab-
lished.
To Accelerate For Passing
Press the accelerator as you would normally. When
the pedal is released, the vehicle will return to the
set speed.
USING CRUISE CONTROL ON HILLS
The transmission may downshift on hills to
maintain the vehicle set speed.
The Cruise Control system maintains speed up and
down hills. A slight speed change on moderate hills
is normal. On steep hills, a greater speed loss or
gain may occur so it may be preferable to drive
without Cruise Control.
To Resume Speed
To resume a previously set speed, push the RES (+)
button and release. Resume can be used at any
speed above 20 mph (32 km/h).
To Deactivate
A tap on the brake pedal, pushing the CANCEL
button, or normal brake pressure will deactivate
the Cruise Control system without erasing the set
speed from memory.
WARNING!
Cruise Control can be dangerous where the
system cannot maintain a constant speed. Your
vehicle could go too fast for the conditions, and
you could lose control and have an accident. Do
not use Cruise Control in heavy traffic or on
roads that are winding, icy, snow-covered or
slippery.
22_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 124
STARTING AND OPERATING 125
The following conditions will also deactivate the
Cruise Control without erasing the set speed from
memory:
Vehicle parking brake is applied
Stability event occurs
Gear selector is moved out of DRIVE
Engine overspeed occurs
Pushing the on/off button or placing the ignition in
the OFF position erases the set speed from
memory.
PARKSENSE REAR PARK ASSIST SYSTEM —
IF EQUIPPED
The ParkSense Rear Park Assist system provides
visual and audible indications of the distance
between the rear fascia and a detected obstacle
when backing up (e.g. during a parking maneuver).
For limitations of this system and
recommendations see Ú page 129.
ParkSense will retain the last system state
(enabled or disabled) from the last ignition cycle
when the ignition is cycled to ON/RUN.
ParkSense can be active only when the gear
selector is in REVERSE. If ParkSense is enabled at
this gear selector position, the system will remain
active until the vehicle speed is increased to
approximately 7 mph (11 km/h) or above. When in
REVERSE and above the system's operating speed,
a warning will appear within the instrument cluster
display indicating the vehicle speed is too fast.
The system will become active again if the vehicle
speed is decreased to speeds less than
approximately 6 mph (9 km/h).
PARKSENSE SENSORS
The four ParkSense sensors, located in the rear
fascia/bumper, monitor the area behind the
vehicle that is within the sensors’ field of view. The
sensors can detect obstacles from approximately
12 inches (30 cm) up to 79 inches (200 cm) from
the rear fascia/bumper in the horizontal direction,
depending on the location, type and orientation of
the obstacle.
PARKSENSE DISPLAY
When the vehicle is in REVERSE, the instrument
cluster display will show the park assist system
status.
The system will indicate a detected obstacle by
showing a single arc in one or more regions based
on the obstacle’s distance and location relative to
the vehicle.
If an obstacle is detected in the center rear region,
the display will show a single solid arc in the center
rear region. As the vehicle moves closer to the
obstacle, the display will show the single arc
moving closer to the vehicle and the audible chime
increases as the objects get close to the vehicle.
If an obstacle is detected in the left and/or right
rear region, the display will show a single arc in the
left and/or right rear region and the system will
produce a tone. As the vehicle moves closer to the
obstacle, the display will show the single arc
moving closer to the vehicle and the tone will
change from a single 1/2 second tone to slow, to
fast, to continuous.
4
22_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 125
126 STARTING AND OPERATING
Rear ParkSense Arcs
1 — Continuous Tone/Flashing Arc 4 — Slow Tone/Solid Arc
2 — Fast Tone/Flashing Arc 5 — Slow Tone/Solid Arc
3 — Fast Tone/Flashing Arc 6 — Single 1/2 Second Tone/Solid Arc
22_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 126
STARTING AND OPERATING 127
The vehicle is close to the obstacle when the warning display shows one flashing arc and sounds a continuous tone. The following chart shows the warning alert
operation when the system is detecting an obstacle:
NOTE:
ParkSense will reduce the volume of the radio, if on, when the system is sounding an audio tone.
Adjustable Chime Volume Settings
Rear chime volume settings can be selected from the Customer Programmable Features section of the Uconnect System Ú page 150.
The chime volume settings include low, medium, and high.
ParkSense will retain its last known configuration state through ignition cycles.
WARNING ALERTS
Rear Distance
(inches/cm)
Greater than
79 inches
(200 cm)
79-59 inches
(200-150 cm)
59-47 inches
(150-120 cm)
47-39 inches
(120-100 cm)
39-25 inches
(100-65 cm)
25-12 inches
(65-30 cm)
Less than
12 inches
(30 cm)
Audible Alert
Chime
None
Single 1/2
Second Tone
Slow Slow Fast Fast Continuous
Arcs-Left None None None None None 2nd Flashing 1st Flashing
Arcs-Center None 6th Solid 5th Solid 4th Solid 3rd Flashing 2nd Flashing 1st Flashing
Arcs-Right None None None None None 2nd Flashing 1st Flashing
Radio Volume
Reduced
No Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
4
22_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 127
128 STARTING AND OPERATING
PARKSENSE WARNING DISPLAY
The ParkSense Warning screen will only be
displayed if Sound and Display is selected from the
Customer Programmable Features section of the
Uconnect System Ú page 150.
The ParkSense Warning screen is located within
the instrument cluster display Ú page 94. It
provides visual warnings to indicate the distance
between the rear fascia/bumper and the detected
obstacle.
ENABLING AND DISABLING PARKSENSE
ParkSense can be enabled and disabled
with the ParkSense switch located below
the Uconnect display.
When the ParkSense switch is pushed to disable the
system, the instrument cluster will display the
“PARKSENSE OFF” message for approximately
five seconds. When the gear selector is moved to
REVERSE and the system is disabled, the instrument
cluster display will display the “PARKSENSE OFF”
message for as long as the vehicle is in REVERSE.
The ParkSense switch LED will be on when
ParkSense is disabled or requires service. The
ParkSense switch LED will be off when the system
is enabled. If the ParkSense switch is pushed, and
the system requires service, the ParkSense switch
LED will blink momentarily, and then the LED will
be on.
OPERATION WITH A TRAILER
For vehicles equipped with an Integrated Trailer
Brake Module (ITBM), the operation of the rear
sensors is automatically deactivated when the
trailer's electric plug is inserted in the vehicle's
tow hook socket. The instrument cluster will
display the message “ParkSense Off”.
The rear sensors are automatically reactivated
when the trailer's cable plug is removed, and the
instrument cluster will display the message
“ParkSense On”.
NOTE:
For more information on the Integrated Trailer
Brake Module, see Ú page 138.
SERVICE THE PARKSENSE REAR PARK
A
SSIST SYSTEM
During vehicle start up, when the ParkSense Rear
Park Assist System has detected a faulted
condition, the instrument cluster will actuate a
single chime, once per ignition cycle, and it will
display the “PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE WIPE
REAR SENSORS” or the “PARKSENSE
UNAVAILABLE SERVICE REQUIRED” message.
Refer to “Instrument Cluster Display”. When the
gear selector is moved to REVERSE and the system
has detected a faulted condition, the instrument
cluster display will display the "PARKSENSE
UNAVAILABLE WIPE REAR SENSORS" or
"PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE SERVICE REQUIRED"
message for as long as the vehicle is in REVERSE.
Under this condition, ParkSense will not operate.
If “PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE WIPE REAR
SENSORS” appears in the instrument cluster
display make sure the outer surface and the
underside of the rear fascia/bumper is clean and
clear of snow, ice, mud, dirt or other obstruction
and then cycle the ignition. If the message
continues to appear, see an authorized dealer.
If “PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE SERVICE
REQUIRED” appears in the instrument cluster
display, see an authorized dealer.
CLEANING THE PARKSENSE SYSTEM
Clean the ParkSense sensors with water, car wash
soap and a soft cloth. Do not use rough or hard
cloths. Do not scratch or poke the sensors.
Otherwise, you could damage the sensors.
22_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 128
STARTING AND OPERATING 129
(Continued)
PARKSENSE SYSTEM USAGE
P
RECAUTIONS
NOTE:
Ensure that the rear bumper is free of snow, ice,
mud, dirt and debris to keep the ParkSense
system operating properly.
Jackhammers, large trucks, and other
vibrations could affect the performance of
ParkSense.
When you turn ParkSense off, the instrument
cluster will display “PARKSENSE OFF.” Further-
more, once you turn ParkSense off, it remains
off until you turn it on again, even if you cycle the
ignition.
When you move the gear selector to the
REVERSE position and ParkSense is turned off,
the instrument cluster display will display
“PARKSENSE OFF” message for as long as the
vehicle is in REVERSE.
ParkSense, when on, will reduce the volume of
the radio when it is sounding a tone.
Clean the ParkSense sensors regularly, taking
care not to scratch or damage them. The
sensors must not be covered with ice, snow,
slush, mud, dirt or debris. Failure to do so can
result in the system not working properly. The
ParkSense system might not detect an obstacle
behind the fascia/bumper, or it could provide a
false indication that an obstacle is behind the
fascia/bumper.
Use the ParkSense switch to turn the ParkSense
system off if objects such as bicycle carriers,
trailer hitches, etc. are placed within 12 inches
(30 cm) of the rear fascia/bumper. Failure to do
so can result in the system misinterpreting a
close object as a sensor problem, causing the
“PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE SERVICE
REQUIRED” message to be displayed in the
instrument cluster display.
WARNING!
Drivers must be careful when backing up even
when using ParkSense. Always check carefully
behind your vehicle, look behind you, and be
sure to check for pedestrians, animals, other
vehicles, obstructions, and blind spots before
backing up. You are responsible for safety and
must continue to pay attention to your
surroundings. Failure to do so can result in
serious injury or death.
Before using ParkSense, it is strongly recom-
mended that the ball mount and hitch ball
assembly be disconnected from the vehicle
when the vehicle is not used for towing.
Failure to do so can result in injury or damage
to vehicles or obstacles because the hitch ball
will be much closer to the obstacle than the
rear fascia when the vehicle sounds the
continuous tone. Also, the sensors could
detect the ball mount and hitch ball assembly,
depending on its size and shape, giving a false
indication that an obstacle is behind the
vehicle.
CAUTION!
ParkSense is only a parking aid and it is
unable to recognize every obstacle, including
small obstacles. Parking curbs might be
temporarily detected or not detected at all.
Obstacles located above or below the sensors
will not be detected when they are in close
proximity.
The vehicle must be driven slowly when using
ParkSense in order to be able to stop in time
when an obstacle is detected. It is recom-
mended that the driver looks over his/her
shoulder when using ParkSense.
WARNING!
4
22_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 129
130 STARTING AND OPERATING
PARKVIEW REAR BACK UP CAMERA
The ParkView Rear Back Up Camera allows you to
see an on-screen image of the rear surroundings of
your vehicle whenever the gear selector is put into
REVERSE. The image will be displayed on the radio
screen along with a caution note to “Check Entire
Surroundings” across the top of the screen. After
five seconds this note will disappear. The ParkView
Camera is located in the center of the tailgate
handle.
NOTE:
Removing the tailgate will disable the rearview
camera function.
Manual Activation Of The Rear View
Camera:
1. Press the Apps or Controls (if equipped)
button located on the bottom of the Uconnect
display.
2. Press the Back Up Camera icon to turn the
Rear View Camera system on.
NOTE:
The ParkView Rear Back Up Camera has program-
mable modes of operation that may be selected
through the Uconnect system Ú page 150.
When the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE with
Camera delay turned off, the rear Camera mode is
exited and the navigation or audio screen appears
again.
When the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE with
Camera delay turned on, the rear Camera image
will be displayed for up to 10 seconds unless the
forward vehicle speed exceeds 8 mph (13 km/h),
the transmission is shifted into PARK, or the
ignition is placed in the OFF position.
Whenever the Rear View Camera image is
activated through the Back Up Camera button in
the Controls menu, a display timer for the image is
initiated. The image will continue to be displayed
until the display timer exceeds 10 seconds and the
vehicle speed is above 8 mph (13 km/h) or the
touchscreen button X to disable the display of the
Rear View Camera image is pressed.
A touchscreen button X to disable display of the
camera image is made available when the vehicle
is not in REVERSE gear.
When enabled, active guidelines are overlaid on
the image to illustrate the width of the vehicle and
its projected backup path based on the steering
wheel position. The active guidelines will show
separate zones that will help indicate the distance
to the rear of the vehicle.
The following table shows the approximate
distances for each zone:
Zones
Distance To The Rear
Of The Vehicle
Red 0 - 1 ft (0 - 30 cm)
Yellow
1 ft - 6.5 ft
(30 cm - 2m)
Green
6.5 ft or greater
(2 m or greater)
WARNING!
Drivers must be careful when backing up even
when using the ParkView Rear Back Up Camera.
Always check carefully behind your vehicle, and
be sure to check for pedestrians, animals, other
vehicles, obstructions, or blind spots before
backing up. You are responsible for the safety of
your surroundings and must continue to pay
attention while backing up. Failure to do so can
result in serious injury or death.
22_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 130
STARTING AND OPERATING 131
NOTE:
If snow, ice, mud, or any foreign substance builds
up on the camera lens, clean the lens, rinse with
water, and dry with a soft cloth. Do not cover the
lens.
REFUELING THE VEHICLE
The fuel filler cap (gas cap) is located behind the
fuel filler door, on the left side of the vehicle. If the
gas cap is lost or damaged, be sure to use the
correct replacement cap for this vehicle.
1. Open the fuel filler door.
2. Remove the fuel cap by rotating it counter-
clockwise.
Fuel Filler Cap
3. Fully insert the fuel nozzle into the filler pipe.
4. Fill the vehicle with fuel.
NOTE:
When the fuel nozzle “clicks” or shuts off,
the fuel tank is full.
Wait five seconds before removing the fuel
nozzle to allow excess fuel to drain from the
nozzle.
5. Remove the fuel nozzle, reinstall the fuel cap
and close fuel filler door.
NOTE:
When removing the fuel filler cap, lay the cap
tether in the hook, located on the fuel filler door.
CAUTION!
To avoid vehicle damage, ParkView should
only be used as a parking aid. The ParkView
camera is unable to view every obstacle or
object in your drive path.
To avoid vehicle damage, the vehicle must be
driven slowly when using ParkView to be able
to stop in time when an obstacle is seen. It is
recommended that the driver look frequently
over his/her shoulder when using ParkView.
WARNING!
Never have any smoking materials lit in or
near the vehicle when the gas cap is removed
or the tank is being filled.
Never add fuel to the vehicle when the engine
is running.
A fire may result if gasoline is pumped into a
portable container that is inside of a vehicle.
You could be burned. Always place gas
containers on the ground while filling.
CAUTION!
Damage to the fuel system or emissions
control system could result from using an
improper fuel tank filler tube cap.
A poorly fitting fuel filler cap could let impuri-
ties into the fuel system.
A poorly fitting fuel filler cap may cause the
Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) to turn on.
To avoid fuel spillage and overfilling, do not
“top off” the fuel tank after filling. When the
fuel nozzle “clicks” or shuts off, the fuel tank
is full.
4
22_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 131
132 STARTING AND OPERATING
NOTE:
When the fuel nozzle “clicks” or shuts off, the
fuel tank is full.
Tighten the gas cap until you hear a “clicking”
sound. This is an indication that the gas cap is
tightened properly. The MIL in the instrument
cluster may turn on if the gas cap is not secured
properly. Make sure that the gas cap is tight-
ened each time the vehicle is refueled.
LOOSE FUEL FILLER CAP MESSAGE
If the vehicle diagnostic system determines that
the fuel filler cap is loose, improperly installed, or
damaged, a loose gASCAP indicator will display in
the instrument cluster telltale display area
Ú page 94. Tighten the fuel filler cap properly and
push the Right arrow button on the steering wheel
to turn off the message. If the problem continues,
the message will appear the next time the vehicle
is started.
VEHICLE LOADING
GROSS VEHICLE WEIGHT RATING
(GVWR)
The GVWR is the total permissible weight of your
vehicle including driver, passengers, vehicle,
options and cargo. The label also specifies
maximum capacities of front and rear Gross Axle
Weight Rating (GAWR). Total load must be limited
so GVWR and front and rear GAWR are not
exceeded.
PAYLOAD
The payload of a vehicle is defined as the allowable
load weight a truck can carry, including the weight
of the driver, all passengers, options and cargo.
GROSS AXLE WEIGHT RATING (GAWR)
The GAWR is the maximum permissible load on the
front and rear axles. The load must be distributed
in the cargo area so that the GAWR of each axle is
not exceeded.
Each axle GAWR is determined by the components
in the system with the lowest load carrying capacity
(axle, springs, tires or wheels). Heavier axles or
suspension components sometimes specified by
purchasers for increased durability does not
necessarily increase the vehicle's GVWR.
TIRE SIZE
The tire size on the Vehicle Certification Label
represents the actual tire size on your vehicle.
Replacement tires must be equal to the load
capacity of this tire size.
RIM SIZE
This is the rim size that is appropriate for the tire
size listed.
INFLATION PRESSURE
This is the cold tire inflation pressure for your
vehicle for all loading conditions up to full GAWR.
WARNING!
Always place container on the ground before
filling.
Keep the pump nozzle in contact with the
container when you are filling it.
Use only approved containers for flammable
liquid.
Do not leave container unattended while
filling.
A static electric charge could cause a spark
and fire hazard.
22_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 132
STARTING AND OPERATING 133
CURB WEIGHT
The curb weight of a vehicle is defined as the total
weight of the vehicle with all fluids, including
vehicle fuel, at full capacity conditions, and with no
occupants or cargo loaded into the vehicle. The
front and rear curb weight values are determined
by weighing your vehicle on a commercial scale
before any occupants or cargo are added.
LOADING
The actual total weight and the weight of the front
and rear of your vehicle at the ground can best be
determined by weighing it when it is loaded and
ready for operation.
The entire vehicle should first be weighed on a
commercial scale to ensure that the GVWR has not
been exceeded. The weight on the front and rear of
the vehicle should then be determined separately
to be sure that the load is properly distributed over
the front and rear axle. Weighing the vehicle may
show that the GAWR of either the front or rear axles
has been exceeded but the total load is within the
specified GVWR. If so, weight must be shifted from
front to rear or rear to front as appropriate until the
specified weight limitations are met. Store the
heavier items down low and be sure that the
weight is distributed equally. Stow all loose items
securely before driving.
Improper weight distributions can have an adverse
effect on the way your vehicle steers and handles
and the way the brakes operate.
TRAILER TOWING
In this section you will find safety tips and
information on limits to the type of towing you can
reasonably do with your vehicle. Before towing a
trailer, carefully review this information to tow your
load as efficiently and safely as possible.
To maintain the New Vehicle Limited Warranty
coverage, follow the requirements and
recommendations in this manual concerning
vehicles used for trailer towing.
COMMON TOWING DEFINITIONS
The following trailer towing related definitions will
assist you in understanding the following
information:
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR)
The GVWR is the total allowable weight of your
vehicle. This includes driver, passengers, cargo
and tongue weight. The total load must be limited
so that you do not exceed the GVWR Ú page 132.
Gross Trailer Weight (GTW)
The GTW is the weight of the trailer plus the weight
of all cargo, consumables and equipment
(permanent or temporary) loaded in or on the
trailer in its “loaded and ready for operation”
condition.
The recommended way to measure GTW is to put
your fully loaded trailer on a vehicle scale. The
entire weight of the trailer must be supported by
the scale.
Gross Combination Weight Rating (GCWR)
The GCWR is the total allowable weight of your
vehicle and trailer when weighed in combination.
CAUTION!
Do not load your vehicle any heavier than the
GVWR or the maximum front and rear GAWR. If
you do, parts on your vehicle can break, or it can
change the way your vehicle handles. This could
cause you to lose control. Also overloading can
shorten the life of your vehicle.
WARNING!
If the gross trailer weight is 5,000 lb (2,267 kg)
or more, it is recommended to use a
weight-distributing hitch to ensure stable
handling of your vehicle. If you use a standard
weight-carrying hitch, you could lose control of
your vehicle and cause a collision.
4
22_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 133
134 STARTING AND OPERATING
Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR)
The GAWR is the maximum capacity of the front
and rear axles. Distribute the load over the front
and rear axles evenly. Make sure that you do not
exceed either front or rear GAWR Ú page 132.
Tongue Weight (TW)
The TW is the downward force exerted on the hitch
ball by the trailer. You must consider this as part of
the load on your vehicle.
Trailer Frontal Area
The frontal area is the maximum height multiplied
by the maximum width of the front of a trailer.
Trailer Sway Control (TSC)
The TSC can be a mechanical telescoping link that
can be installed between the hitch receiver and the
trailer tongue that typically provides adjustable
friction associated with the telescoping motion to
dampen any unwanted trailer swaying motions
while traveling.
If equipped, the electronic TSC recognizes a
swaying trailer and automatically applies individual
wheel brakes and/or reduces engine power to
attempt to eliminate the trailer sway.
Weight-Carrying Hitch
A weight-carrying hitch supports the trailer tongue
weight, just as if it were luggage located at a hitch
ball or some other connecting point of the vehicle.
These kinds of hitches are commonly used to tow
small and medium sized trailers.
Weight-Distributing Hitch
A weight-distributing system works by applying
leverage through spring (load) bars. They are
typically used for heavier loads to distribute trailer
tongue weight to the tow vehicle's front axle and
the trailer axle(s). When used in accordance with
the manufacturer's directions, it provides for a
more level ride, offering more consistent steering
and brake control, thereby enhancing towing
safety. The addition of a friction/hydraulic sway
control also dampens sway caused by traffic and
crosswinds and contributes positively to tow
vehicle and trailer stability. Trailer sway control and
a weight distributing (load equalizing) hitch are
recommended for heavier Tongue Weights (TW)
and may be required depending on vehicle and
trailer configuration/loading to comply with GAWR
requirements.
Without Weight-Distributing Hitch
(Incorrect)
WARNING!
It is important that you do not exceed the
maximum front or rear GAWR. A dangerous
driving condition can result if either rating is
exceeded. You could lose control of the vehicle
and have a collision.
WARNING!
An improperly adjusted weight distributing
hitch system may reduce handling, stability
and braking performance and could result in a
collision.
Weight distributing systems may not be
compatible with surge brake couplers. Consult
with your hitch and trailer manufacturer or a
reputable Recreational Vehicle dealer for
additional information.
22_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 134
STARTING AND OPERATING 135
With Weight-Distributing Hitch
(Correct)
Improper Adjustment Of Weight-Distributing Hitch
(Incorrect)
RECOMMENDED DISTRIBUTION HITCH
ADJUSTMENT
1. Position the truck to be ready to connect to
the trailer (do not connect the trailer).
2. Measure the height from the top of the front
wheel opening on the fender to the ground,
this is height H1.
Measuring Height (H)
3. Attach the trailer to the vehicle without the
weight distribution bars connected.
4. Measure the height from the top of the front
wheel opening on the fender to the ground,
this is height H2.
5. Install and adjust the tension in the weight
distributing bars per the manufacturers’
recommendations so that the height of the
front fender is approximately (H2-H1)/2+H1
(about 1/2 the difference between H2 and H1
above normal ride height [H1]).
6. Perform a visual inspection of the trailer and
weight distributing hitch to confirm manufac-
turers’ recommendations have been met.
NOTE:
For all towing conditions, we recommend towing
with TOW/HAUL mode engaged.
Measurement
Example
Example Height (mm)
H1 1030
H2 1058
H2-H1 28
(H2-H1)/2 14
(H2-H1)/2 + H1 1044
4
22_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 135
136 STARTING AND OPERATING
TRAILER HITCH TYPE AND MAXIMUM TRAILER WEIGHT
The following chart provides the maximum trailer weight a given factory equipped trailer hitch type can tow and should be used to assist you in selecting the
correct trailer hitch for your intended towing condition.
All trailer hitches should be professionally installed
on your vehicle.
TRAILER TOWING WEIGHTS (MAXIMUM
T
RAILER WEIGHT RATINGS )
NOTE:
For trailer towing information (maximum trailer
weight ratings) refer to the following website
addresses:
ramtrucks.com/en/towing_guide/
ramtruck.ca (Canada)
rambodybuilder.com
TRAILER AND TONGUE WEIGHT
Never exceed the maximum tongue weight
stamped on your bumper or trailer hitch.
Weight Distribution
Consider the following items when computing the
weight on the rear axle of the vehicle:
The tongue weight of the trailer.
The weight of any other type of cargo or equip-
ment put in or on your vehicle.
The weight of the driver and all passengers.
NOTE:
Remember that everything put into or on the trailer
adds to the load on your vehicle. Also, additional
factory-installed options or dealer-installed options
must be considered as part of the total load on
your vehicle. Refer to the “Tire And Loading Infor-
mation” placard for the maximum combined
weight of occupants and cargo for your vehicle.
Trailer Hitch Type and Maximum Trailer Weight
Hitch Type Max. Trailer Weight / Max. Tongue Weight
Class III Bumper Hitch 5,000 lb (2,268 kg) / 500 lb (226 kg)
Class IV 10,660 lb (4,835 kg) / 1,066 lb (483 kg)
Refer to the “Trailer Towing Weights (Maximum Trailer Weight Ratings)” for the Maximum Gross Trailer Weight (GTW) towable for your given drivetrain.
22_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 136
STARTING AND OPERATING 137
(Continued)
TOWING REQUIREMENTS
To promote proper break-in of your new vehicle
drivetrain components, the following guidelines
are recommended.
Perform the maintenance listed in Scheduled
Servicing, for the proper maintenance intervals
Ú page 285. When towing a trailer, never exceed
the GAWR or GCWR ratings.
CAUTION!
Do not tow a trailer at all during the first
500 miles (805 km) the new vehicle is driven.
The engine, axle or other parts could be
damaged.
Then, during the first 500 miles (805 km) that
a trailer is towed, do not drive over 50 mph
(80 km/h) and do not make starts at full
throttle. This helps the engine and other parts
of the vehicle wear in at the heavier loads.
WARNING!
Improper towing can lead to a collision. Follow
these guidelines to make your trailer towing as
safe as possible:
Make certain that the load is secured in the
trailer and will not shift during travel. When
trailering cargo that is not fully secured,
dynamic load shifts can occur that may be
difficult for the driver to control. You could lose
control of your vehicle and have a collision.
When hauling cargo or towing a trailer, do not
overload your vehicle or trailer. Overloading
can cause a loss of control, poor performance
or damage to brakes, axle, engine, transmis-
sion, steering, suspension, chassis structure
or tires.
Safety chains must always be used between
your vehicle and trailer. Always connect the
chains to the hook retainers of the vehicle
hitch. Cross the chains under the trailer
tongue and allow enough slack for turning
corners.
Vehicles with trailers should not be parked on
a grade. When parking, apply the parking
brake on the tow vehicle. Put the tow vehicle
transmission in PARK. For four-wheel drive
vehicles, make sure the transfer case is not in
NEUTRAL. Always block or "chock" the trailer
wheels.
GCWR must not be exceeded.
Total weight must be distributed between the
tow vehicle and the trailer such that the
following four ratings are not exceeded:
GVWR
GTW
GAWR
Tongue weight rating for the trailer hitch
utilized.
WARNING!
4
22_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 137
138 STARTING AND OPERATING
Towing Requirements — Tires
Do not attempt to tow a trailer while using a
compact spare tire.
Do not drive more than 50 mph (80 km/h) when
towing while using a full size spare tire.
Proper tire inflation pressures are essential to
the safe and satisfactory operation of your
vehicle.
Check the trailer tires for proper tire inflation
pressures before trailer usage.
Check for signs of tire wear or visible tire
damage before towing a trailer.
Replacing tires with a higher load carrying
capacity will not increase the vehicle's GVWR
and GAWR limits.
For further information Ú page 320.
Towing Requirements — Trailer Brakes
Do not interconnect the hydraulic brake system
or vacuum system of your vehicle with that of
the trailer. This could cause inadequate braking
and possible personal injury.
An electronically actuated trailer brake
controller is required when towing a trailer with
electronically actuated brakes. When towing a
trailer equipped with a hydraulic surge actuated
brake system, an electronic brake controller is
not required.
Trailer brakes are recommended for trailers
over 1,000 lb (453 kg) and required for trailers
in excess of 2,000 lb (907 kg).
Integrated Trailer Brake Module —
If Equipped
Your vehicle may have an Integrated Trailer Brake
Module (ITBM) for Electric and Electric Over
Hydraulic (EOH) trailer brakes.
NOTE:
This module has been designed and verified with
electric trailer brakes and new EOH systems. Some
previous EOH systems may not be compatible with
ITBM.
Integrated Trailer Brake Module (ITBM)
WARNING!
Do not connect trailer brakes to your vehicle's
hydraulic brake lines. It can overload your
brake system and cause it to fail. You might
not have brakes when you need them and
could have an accident.
Towing any trailer will increase your stopping
distance. When towing, you should allow for
additional space between your vehicle and the
vehicle in front of you. Failure to do so could
result in an accident.
CAUTION!
If the trailer weighs more than 1,000 lb (453 kg)
loaded, it should have its own brakes and they
should be of adequate capacity. Failure to do
this could lead to accelerated brake lining wear,
higher brake pedal effort, and longer stopping
distances.
1 — GAIN Adjustment Button
2 — GAIN Adjustment Button
3 — Manual Brake Control Lever
22_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 138
STARTING AND OPERATING 139
The user interface consists of the following:
GAIN Adjustment Buttons (+/-)
Pushing these buttons will adjust the brake control
power output to the trailer brakes in
0.5 increments. The GAIN setting can be increased
to a maximum of ten or decreased to a minimum of
zero (no trailer braking).
GAIN
The GAIN setting is used to set the trailer brake
control for the specific towing condition and should
be changed as towing conditions change. Changes
to towing conditions include trailer load, vehicle
load, road conditions and weather.
Manual Brake Control Lever
Slide the manual brake control lever to the left to
activate power to the trailer's electric brakes
independent of the tow vehicle's brakes. If the
manual brake control lever is activated while the
brake is also applied, the greater of the two inputs
determines the power sent to the trailer brakes.
The trailer and the vehicle's brake lamps will come
on when either vehicle braking or manual trailer
brakes are applied.
Trailer Brake Status Indicator Light
This light indicates the trailer electrical connection
status.
If no electrical connection is detected after the
ignition is turned on, pushing either the GAIN
adjustment button or sliding the manual brake
control lever will display the GAIN setting for
10 seconds and the Trailer Brake Status Indicator
Light will not be displayed.
If a fault is detected in the trailer wiring or the
Integrated Trailer Brake Module (ITBM), the Trailer
Brake Status Indicator Light will flash.
Adjusting GAIN
NOTE:
This should only be performed in a traffic free envi-
ronment at speeds of approximately 20–25 mph
(30–40 km/h).
1. Make sure the trailer brakes are in good
working condition, functioning normally and
properly adjusted. See your trailer dealer if
necessary.
2. Hook up the trailer and make the electrical
connections according to the trailer
manufacturer's instructions.
3. When a trailer with electric/EOH brakes is
plugged in, the trailer connected message
should appear in the instrument cluster
display (if the connection is not recognized by
the ITBM, braking functions will not be
available), the GAIN setting will illuminate and
the correct type of trailer must be selected
from the instrument cluster display options.
4. Push the Up or Down arrow buttons on the
steering wheel until “TRAILER TOW” appears
on the screen.
5. Push the Right arrow on the steering wheel to
enter “TRAILER TOW”.
6. Push the Up or Down arrow buttons until the
Trailer Brake Type appears on the screen.
7. Push the Right arrow and then push the Up or
Down arrow buttons until the proper Trailer
Brake Type appears on the screen.
8. In a traffic-free environment, tow the trailer on
a dry, level surface at a speed of 20–25 mph
(30–40 km/h) and squeeze the manual brake
control lever completely.
9. If the trailer wheels lockup (indicated by
squealing tires), reduce the GAIN setting; if the
trailer wheels turn freely, increase the GAIN
setting.
4
22_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 139
140 STARTING AND OPERATING
Repeat steps 8 and 9 until the GAIN setting is at a point just below trailer wheel lockup. If towing a heavier trailer, trailer wheel lockup may not be
attainable even with the maximum GAIN setting of 10.
*The suggested selection depends and may
change depending on the customer preferences
for braking performance. Condition of the trailer
brakes, driving and road state may also affect the
selection.
Display Messages
The trailer brake control interacts with the
instrument cluster display. Display messages,
along with a single chime, will be displayed when a
malfunction is determined in the trailer
connection, trailer brake control, or on the trailer
Ú page 94.
NOTE:
An aftermarket controller may be available
for use with trailers with air or elec-
tric-over-hydraulic trailer brake systems. To
determine the type of brakes on your trailer and
the availability of controllers, check with your
trailer manufacturer or dealer.
Removal of the ITBM will cause errors and it
may cause damage to the electrical system and
electronic modules of the vehicle. See an autho-
rized dealer if an aftermarket module is to be
installed.
Towing Requirements — Trailer Lights And
Wiring
Whenever you pull a trailer, regardless of the trailer
size, stoplights and turn signals on the trailer are
required for motoring safety.
The Trailer Tow Package may include a four- and
seven-pin wiring harness. Use a factory approved
trailer harness and connector.
NOTE:
Do not cut or splice wiring into the vehicle’s wiring
harness.
The electrical connections are all complete to the
vehicle but you must mate the harness to a trailer
connector. Refer to the following illustrations.
Light Electric Heavy Electric Light EOH Heavy EOH
Type of Trailer Brakes Electric Trailer Brakes Electric Trailer Brakes
Electric over Hydraulic
Trailer Brakes
Electric over Hydraulic
Trailer Brakes
Load *Under 10,000 lb (4,536 kg) *Above 10,000 lb (4,536 kg) *Under 10,000 lb (4,536 kg) *Above 10,000 lb (4,536 kg)
WARNING!
Connecting a trailer that is not compatible with
the ITBM system may result in reduced or
complete loss of trailer braking. There may be a
increase in stopping distance or trailer instability
which could result in personal injury.
CAUTION!
Connecting a trailer that is not compatible with
the ITBM system may result in reduced or
complete loss of trailer braking. There may be a
increase in stopping distance or trailer instability
which could result in damage to your vehicle,
trailer, or other property.
22_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 140
STARTING AND OPERATING 141
NOTE:
Disconnect trailer wiring connector from the
vehicle before launching a boat (or any other
device plugged into vehicle’s electrical connect)
into water.
Be sure to reconnect once clear from water
area.
Four-Pin Connector
Seven-Pin Connector
TOWING TIPS
Before setting out on a trip, practice turning,
stopping, and backing up the trailer in an area
located away from heavy traffic.
Automatic Transmission
The DRIVE range can be selected when towing. The
transmission controls include a drive strategy to
avoid frequent shifting when towing. However, if
frequent shifting does occur while in DRIVE, select
TOW/HAUL mode or select a lower gear range
(using the Electronic Range Select (ERS) shift
control).
NOTE:
Using TOW/HAUL mode or selecting a lower gear
range (using the ERS shift control) while operating
the vehicle under heavy loading conditions will
improve performance and extend transmission life
by reducing excessive shifting and heat build up.
This action will also provide better engine braking.
1 — Ground
2 — Park
3 — Left Stop/Turn
4 — Right Stop/Turn
1 — Backup Lamps
2 — Running Lamps
3 — Left Stop/Turn
4 — Ground
5 — Battery
6 — Right Stop/Turn
7 — Electric Brakes
4
22_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 141
142 STARTING AND OPERATING
Tow/Haul Mode
To reduce potential for automatic transmission
overheating, activate TOW/HAUL mode when
driving in hilly areas, or select a lower gear range
(using the (ERS) shift control) on more severe
grades.
Cruise Control — If Equipped
Do not use on hilly terrain or with heavy loads.
When using the Cruise Control, if you experience
speed drops greater than 10 mph (16 km/h),
disengage until you can get back to cruising
speed.
Use Cruise Control in flat terrain and with light
loads to maximize fuel efficiency.
SNOWPLOW
NOTE:
Do not use this model vehicle for snowplow
applications.
WARNING!
Snowplows and other aftermarket equipment
should not be added to the front end of your
vehicle. The airbag crash sensors may be
affected by the change in the front end
structure. The airbags could deploy
unexpectedly or could fail to deploy during a
collision resulting in serious injury or death.
WARNING!
Attaching a snowplow to this vehicle could
adversely affect performance of the airbag
system in a collision. Do not expect that the
airbag will perform as described earlier in this
manual.
CAUTION!
Using this vehicle for snowplow applications can
cause damage to the vehicle.
22_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 142
STARTING AND OPERATING 143
RECREATIONAL TOWING (BEHIND MOTORHOME)
TOWING THIS VEHICLE BEHIND ANOTHER VEHICLE
NOTE:
When towing your vehicle, always follow appli-
cable state and provincial laws. Contact state
and provincial Highway Safety offices for addi-
tional details.
RECREATIONAL TOWING — TWO-WHEEL
D
RIVE MODELS
DO NOT flat tow this vehicle. Damage to the
drivetrain will result.
Recreational towing (for two-wheel drive models) is
allowed ONLY if the rear wheels are OFF the
ground.
This may be accomplished using a tow dolly or
vehicle trailer. If using a tow dolly, follow this
procedure:
1. Properly secure the dolly to the tow vehicle,
following the dolly manufacturer's
instructions.
2. Drive the rear wheels onto the tow dolly.
3. Firmly apply the parking brake. Place
automatic transmission in PARK.
4. Properly secure the rear wheels to the dolly,
following the dolly manufacturer's instructions.
5. Turn the ignition OFF and remove the key fob.
6. Install a suitable clamping device, designed for
towing, to secure the front wheels in the
straight position.
Towing Condition
Wheels OFF The
Ground
Two-Wheel Drive
Models
Four-Wheel Drive Models
Flat Tow NONE NOT ALLOWED
See Instructions
Transmission in PARK
Transfer case in N (Neutral)
Tow in forward direction
Dolly Tow
Front NOT ALLOWED NOT ALLOWED
Rear OK NOT ALLOWED
On Trailer ALL OK OK
CAUTION!
Towing with the rear wheels on the ground will
cause severe transmission damage. Damage
from improper towing is not covered under the
New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Do not disconnect the driveshaft because
fluid may leak from the transmission, causing
damage to internal parts.
4
22_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 143
144 STARTING AND OPERATING
(Continued)
RECREATIONAL TOWING —
F
OUR-WHEEL DRIVE MODELS
NOTE:
The transfer case must be shifted into N (Neutral)
for recreational towing. The transmission must
be shifted into PARK for recreational towing.
Refer to the following for the proper transfer case
N (Neutral) shifting procedure for your vehicle.
Shifting Into N (Neutral)
Use the following procedure to prepare your
vehicle for recreational towing.
1. Bring the vehicle to a complete stop on level
ground, with the engine running. Firmly apply
the parking brake.
2. Shift the transmission to NEUTRAL.
3. Press and hold the brake pedal.
4. Shift the transfer case into N (Neutral):
Push and hold the transfer case N (Neutral)
button. Some models have a small,
recessed “N” button (at the center of the
transfer case switches) that must be
pushed using a ballpoint pen or similar
object. Other models have a rectangular
NEUTRAL switch, below the rotary transfer
case control knob. The N (Neutral) indicator
light will blink while the shift is in progress.
The light will stop blinking (stay on solid)
when the shift to N (Neutral) is complete.
After the shift is completed and the
N (Neutral) light stays on, release the
N (Neutral) button.
CAUTION!
DO NOT dolly tow any 4WD vehicle. Towing
with only one set of wheels on the ground
(front or rear) will cause severe transmission
and/or transfer case damage. Tow with all
four wheels either ON the ground, or OFF the
ground (using a vehicle trailer).
Tow only in the forward direction. Towing this
vehicle backwards can cause severe damage
to the transfer case.
Before recreational towing, the transfer case
must be in N (Neutral). To be certain the
transfer case is fully in N (Neutral), perform
the procedure outlined under “Shifting Into
N (Neutral)”. Internal transmission damage
will result, if the transfer case is not in
N (Neutral) during towing.
The transmission must be placed in PARK for
recreational towing.
Towing this vehicle in violation of the above
requirements can cause severe transmission
and/or transfer case damage. Damage from
improper towing is not covered under the New
Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Do not disconnect the rear driveshaft because
fluid will leak from the transfer case, causing
damage to internal parts.
Do not use a bumper-mounted clamp-on tow
bar on your vehicle. The bumper face bar will
be damaged.
WARNING!
You or others could be injured or killed if you
leave the vehicle unattended with the transfer
case in the N (Neutral) position without first fully
engaging the parking brake. The transfer case
N (Neutral) position disengages both the front
and rear driveshafts from the powertrain, and
will allow the vehicle to roll, even if the automatic
transmission is in PARK. The parking brake
should always be applied when the driver is not
in the vehicle.
CAUTION!
CAUTION!
It is necessary to follow these steps to be certain
that the transfer case is fully in N (Neutral)
before recreational towing to prevent damage to
internal parts.
22_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 144
STARTING AND OPERATING 145
5. Release the parking brake.
6. Shift the transmission into REVERSE.
7. Release the brake pedal for five seconds and
ensure that there is no vehicle movement.
8. Repeat steps six and seven with automatic
transmission in DRIVE.
9. Shift the transmission to NEUTRAL. Firmly
apply the parking brake. Turn off the engine.
For vehicles with Keyless Enter ’n Go™, push
and hold the ENGINE START/STOP button until
the engine shuts off.
10. Shift the transmission into PARK. On 8-speed
transmissions the gear selector will automat-
ically select PARK when the engine is turned
off.
11. Turn the ignition to the OFF position, then cycle
the ignition to the ON/RUN position and back
to the OFF position. Remove the key fob from
the ignition.
12. Attach the vehicle to the tow vehicle using a
suitable tow bar.
13. Release the parking brake.
NOTE:
With electronically shifted transfer case:
Steps 2 through 4 are requirements that must
be met before pushing the N (Neutral) button,
and must continue to be met until the shift has
been completed. If any of these requirements
are not met before pushing the N (Neutral)
button or are no longer met during the shift, the
N (Neutral) indicator light will flash continuously
until all requirements are met or until the
N (Neutral) button is released.
The ignition must be in the ON/RUN position for
a shift to take place and for the position indi-
cator lights to be operable. If the ignition is not
in the ON/RUN position, the shift will not take
place and no position indicator lights will be on
or flashing.
A flashing N (Neutral) position indicator light
indicates that shift requirements have not been
met.
Shifting Out Of N (Neutral)
Use the following procedure to prepare your
vehicle for normal usage:
1. Bring the vehicle to a complete stop, leaving
it connected to the tow vehicle.
2. Firmly apply the parking brake.
3. Press and hold the brake pedal.
4. Start the engine. Shift the transmission into
NEUTRAL.
With manual shift transfer case, shift the
transfer case lever to the desired position.
With electronically shifted transfer case
with rotary selector switch, push and hold
the transfer case N (Neutral) button until
the N (Neutral) indicator light turns off. After
the N (Neutral) indicator light turns off,
release the N (Neutral) button. After the
N (Neutral) button has been released, the
transfer case will shift to the position indi-
cated by the selector switch.
With electronically shifted transfer case
with push-button selector switch, push and
hold the switch for the desired transfer case
position, until the N (Neutral) indicator light
turns off and the desired position indicator
light turns on.
NOTE:
When shifting out of transfer case N (Neutral),
turning the engine off is not required, but may be
helpful to avoid gear clash. With the 8-speed auto-
matic transmission, the engine must remain
running, since turning the engine off will shift the
transmission to PARK (and the transmission must
be in NEUTRAL for the transfer case to shift out of
Neutral).
4
22_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 145
146 STARTING AND OPERATING
5. Turn the engine off. Shift automatic
transmission into PARK. On 8-speed
transmissions the gear selector will automat-
ically select PARK when the engine is turned
off.
6. Release the brake pedal.
7. Disconnect vehicle from the tow vehicle.
8. Start the engine.
9. Press and hold the brake pedal.
10. Release the parking brake.
11. Shift the transmission into gear, release the
brake pedal, and check that the vehicle
operates normally.
NOTE:
With electronically shifted transfer case:
Steps 3 and 4 are requirements that must be
met before pushing the button to shift out of
N (Neutral), and must continue to be met until
the shift has been completed. If any of these
requirements are not met before pushing the
button or are no longer met during the shift, the
N (Neutral) indicator light will flash continuously
until all requirements are met or until the button
is released.
The ignition must be in the ON/RUN position for
a shift to take place and for the position indi-
cator lights to be operable. If the ignition is not
in the ON/RUN position, the shift will not take
place and no position indicator lights will be on
or flashing.
A flashing N (Neutral) position indicator light
indicates that shift requirements have not been
met.
DRIVING TIPS
DRIVING ON SLIPPERY SURFACES
Acceleration
Rapid acceleration on snow covered, wet, or other
slippery surfaces may cause the driving wheels to
pull erratically to the right or left. This phenomenon
occurs when there is a difference in the surface
traction under the rear (driving) wheels.
DRIVING THROUGH WATER
Driving through water more than a few inches/
centimeters deep will require extra caution to
ensure safety and prevent damage to your vehicle.
Flowing/Rising Water
WARNING!
Rapid acceleration on slippery surfaces is
dangerous. Unequal traction can cause sudden
pulling of the rear wheels. You could lose control
of the vehicle and possibly have a collision.
Accelerate slowly and carefully whenever there
is likely to be poor traction (ice, snow, wet, mud,
loose sand, etc.).
WARNING!
Do not drive on or across a road or path where
water is flowing and/or rising (as in storm
run-off). Flowing water can wear away the road
or path's surface and cause your vehicle to sink
into deeper water. Furthermore, flowing and/or
rising water can carry your vehicle away swiftly.
Failure to follow this warning may result in
injuries that are serious or fatal to you, your
passengers, and others around you.
22_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 146
STARTING AND OPERATING 147
(Continued)
Shallow Standing Water
Although your vehicle is capable of driving through
shallow standing water, consider the following
Warnings and Cautions before doing so.
OFF-ROAD DRIVING TIPS
Care should be taken when attempting to climb
steep hills or driving diagonally across a hill or
slope. If natural obstacles force you to travel
diagonally up or down a hill, choose a mild angle
and keep as little side tilt as possible. Keep the
vehicle moving and make turns slowly and
cautiously.
If you must back down a hill, back straight down
using REVERSE gear. Never back down in
NEUTRAL or diagonally across the hill.
When driving over sand, mud, and other soft
terrain, shift to low gear and drive steadily. Apply
the accelerator slowly to avoid spinning the
wheels.
Do not reduce the tire pressures for this type of
driving.
WARNING!
Driving through standing water limits your
vehicle’s traction capabilities. Do not exceed
5 mph (8 km/h) when driving through
standing water.
Driving through standing water limits your
vehicle’s braking capabilities, which increases
stopping distances. Therefore, after driving
through standing water, drive slowly and
lightly press on the brake pedal several times
to dry the brakes.
Failure to follow these warnings may result in
injuries that are serious or fatal to you, your
passengers, and others around you.
CAUTION!
Always check the depth of the standing water
before driving through it. Never drive through
standing water that is deeper than the bottom
of the tire rims mounted on the vehicle.
Determine the condition of the road or the
path that is under water and if there are any
obstacles in the way before driving through
the standing water.
Do not exceed 5 mph (8 km/h) when driving
through standing water. This will minimize
wave effects.
Driving through standing water may cause
damage to your vehicle’s drivetrain compo-
nents. Always inspect your vehicle’s fluids
(i.e., engine oil, transmission, axle, etc.) for
signs of contamination (i.e., fluid that is milky
or foamy in appearance) after driving through
standing water. Do not continue to operate
the vehicle if any fluid appears contaminated,
as this may result in further damage. Such
damage is not covered by the New Vehicle
Limited Warranty.
Getting water inside your vehicle’s engine can
cause it to lock up and stall out, and cause
serious internal damage to the engine. Such
damage is not covered by the New Vehicle
Limited Warranty.
CAUTION!
4
22_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 147
148 STARTING AND OPERATING
After Driving Off-Road
Off-road operation puts more stress on your
vehicle than does most on-road driving. After going
off-road, it is always a good idea to check for
damage. That way you can get any problems taken
care of right away and have your vehicle ready
when you need it.
Completely inspect the underbody of your
vehicle. Check tires, body structure, steering,
suspension, and exhaust system for damage.
Inspect the radiator for mud and debris and
clean as required.
Check threaded fasteners for looseness, partic-
ularly on the chassis, drivetrain components,
steering, and suspension. Retighten them, if
required, and torque to the values specified in
the Service Manual.
Check for accumulations of plants or brush.
These things could be a fire hazard. They might
hide damage to fuel lines, brake hoses, axle
pinion seals, and propeller shafts.
After extended operation in mud, sand, water, or
similar dirty conditions, have the radiator, fan,
brake rotors, wheels, brake linings, and axle
yokes inspected and cleaned as soon as
possible.
If you experience unusual vibration after driving
in mud, slush or similar conditions, check the
wheels for impacted material. Impacted mate-
rial can cause a wheel imbalance and freeing
the wheels of it will correct the situation.
WARNING!
Abrasive material in any part of the brakes may
cause excessive wear or unpredictable braking.
You might not have full braking power when you
need it to prevent a collision. If you have been
operating your vehicle in dirty conditions, get
your brakes checked and cleaned as necessary.
22_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 148
149
MULTIMEDIA
UCONNECT SYSTEMS
For detailed information about your Uconnect 4C
NAV With 8.4-inch Display system or your Uconnect
5 With 8.4-inch Display, refer to your Uconnect
Owner’s Manual Supplement.
NOTE:
Uconnect screen images are for illustration
purposes only and may not reflect exact software
for your vehicle.
CYBERSECURITY
Your vehicle may be a connected vehicle and may
be equipped with both wired and wireless
networks. These networks allow your vehicle to
send and receive information. This information
allows systems and features in your vehicle to
function properly.
Your vehicle may be equipped with certain security
features to reduce the risk of unauthorized and
unlawful access to vehicle systems and wireless
communications. Vehicle software technology
continues to evolve over time and FCA US LLC,
working with its suppliers, evaluates and takes
appropriate steps as needed.
The risk of unauthorized and unlawful access to
your vehicle systems may still exist, even if the
most recent version of vehicle software (such as
Uconnect software) is installed.
NOTE:
To help further improve user experience,
features, stability, etc., and minimize the poten-
tial risk of a security breach, vehicle owners
should:
Routinely check www.driveuconnect.com
(US Residents) or www.driveuconnect.ca
(Canadian Residents) to learn about avail-
able Uconnect software updates.
Only connect and use trusted media
devices (e.g. personal mobile phones,
USBs, CDs).
WARNING!
ONLY insert trusted devices/components into
your vehicle. Media of unknown origin could
possibly contain malicious software, and if
installed in your vehicle, it may increase the
possibility for vehicle systems to be breached.
As always, if you experience unusual vehicle
behavior, take your vehicle to your nearest
authorized dealer immediately.
5
22_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 149
150 MULTIMEDIA
UCONNECT SETTINGS
The Uconnect system uses a combination of
buttons on the touchscreen and buttons on the
faceplate located on the center of the instrument
panel. These buttons allow you to access and
change the Customer Programmable Features.
Many features can vary by vehicle.
Buttons on the faceplate are located below and/or
beside the Uconnect system in the center of the
instrument panel. In addition, there is a SCROLL/
ENTER control knob located on the right side. Turn
the control knob to scroll through menus and
change settings. Push the center of the control
knob one or more times to select or change a
setting.
Your Uconnect system may also have SCREEN OFF
and MUTE buttons on the faceplate.
Push the SCREEN OFF button on the faceplate to
turn off the Uconnect screen. Push the button
again or tap the screen to turn the screen on.
Press the Back Arrow button to exit out of a Menu
or certain option on the Uconnect system.
For the Uconnect 5 system, push and hold the
Power button on the radio’s faceplate for a
minimum of 15 seconds to reset the radio.
CUSTOMER PROGRAMMABLE FEATURES
Uconnect 4/4C/4C NAV With 8.4-inch Display
Touchscreen And Faceplate Buttons
For the Uconnect 3 With 5-inch Display, the
Uconnect 4C NAV With 8.4-inch Display, and the
Uconnect 5 With 8.4-inch Display
For the Uconnect 3, push the SETTINGS button on
the side of the faceplate to display the menu
setting screen. In this mode, the Uconnect system
allows you to access programmable features.
For the Uconnect 4C NAV, press the Apps
button, then press the Settings button on the
touchscreen to display the menu setting screen. In
this mode, the Uconnect system allows you to
access programmable features.
For Uconnect 5, press the Vehicle button on the
touchscreen, then press the Settings tab at the top
of the touchscreen. In this menu, the Uconnect
system allows you to access all of the available
programmable features.
NOTE:
Depending on the vehicle’s options, feature
settings may vary.
All settings should be changed with the ignition
in the ON/RUN position.
When making a selection, only press one button at
a time to enter the desired menu. Once in the
desired menu, press and release the preferred
setting option until a check mark appears next to
the setting, showing that setting has been
selected. Once the setting is complete, press the X
button on the touchscreen to close out of the
settings screen. Pressing the Up or Down Arrow
button on the right side of the screen will allow you
to toggle up or down through the available settings.
1 — Uconnect Buttons On The Touchscreen
2 — Uconnect Buttons On The Faceplate
22_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 150
MULTIMEDIA 151
My Profile
When the My Profile button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays options related to the vehicle’s profiles.
NOTE:
Depending on the vehicle’s options, feature settings may vary.
Setting Name Description
Language
This setting will change the language of the Uconnect system and Instrument
Cluster Display. The available languages are English, Français, and Español.
Display Mode
This setting will adjust the display for the radio to “Auto” or “Manual”.
“Manual” allows for more customization with the radio display.
Display Brightness Headlights On
This setting will allow you to set the brightness when the headlights are on. To
access this setting, Display Mode must be set to “Manual”. The “+” setting will
increase the brightness; the “-” will decrease the brightness.
Display Brightness Headlights Off
This setting will allow you to set the brightness when the headlights are off. To
access this setting, Display Mode must be set to “Manual”. The “+” setting will
increase the brightness; the “-” will decrease the brightness.
Set Theme This setting will allow you to change the display theme.
Units
The available options are the “Speed” (MPH or km/h), “Distance” (mi or km),
“Fuel Consumption” (MPG [US], MPG [UK], L/100 km, or km/L), “Pressure”
(psi, kPa, or bar), “Temperature” (°C or °F), and “Capacity” (Gal [US], Gal
[UK], or L) units of measurement independently.
Theme Mode
This setting will allow you to adjust the brightness of your theme. Setting
options are “Light”, “Dark” and “Auto”. Select to show Themes in Light or Dark
mode. “Auto” changes the theme with the headlights.
5
22_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 151
152 MULTIMEDIA
Touchscreen Beep This setting will allow you to turn the touchscreen beep on or off.
Show Main Category Bar Labels This setting will allow the main category bar labels to be shown on or off.
Phone Pop-ups Displayed In Cluster
This setting will display smartphone notifications and messages in the
Instrument Cluster Display.
Time Format
This setting will allow you to set the time format (AM/PM). Sync Time With GPS
must be “Off” for this setting to be available. The “12 hrs” setting will set the
time to a 12-hour format. The “24 hrs” setting will set the time to a 24-hour
format.
Auto-On Driver Heated/Ventilated Seat & Heated Steering Wheel
This setting will activate the vehicle’s comfort system and heated seats or
heated steering wheel when the vehicle is remote started or ignition is
started. The “Off” setting will not activate the comfort systems. The “Remote
Start” setting will only activate the comfort systems when using Remote Start.
The “All Start” setting will activate the comfort systems whenever the vehicle
is started.
Radio Power Off
This setting will keep certain electrical features running after the engine is
turned off. When any door is opened, the electronics will deactivate. The
available settings are “0 sec”, “45 sec”, “5 min”, and “10 min”.
Audio Settings
This setting will open the submenu, containing the audio settings
Ú page 165.
App Drawer Favoriting Pop-ups
This setting will allow you to favorite app drawer pop-ups with “On” and “Off”
options.
Setting Name Description
22_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 152
MULTIMEDIA 153
Language
App Drawer Unfavoritings Pop-ups
This setting will allow you to unfavorite app drawer pop-ups with “On” and
“Off” options.
Missed Calls Message
This setting will allow you to have pop-up notifications for missed calls. Setting
options are “On” and “Off”.
Reset App Drawer to Default Order This setting will reset the app drawer to its factory default layout.
Restore Settings to Default
This setting will return all the previously changed settings to their factory
default.
More Profile Options This setting will give access to more profile options.
Setting Name Description
When the Language button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays the different language options. Once an option is selected, the system will
display in the chosen language. The available setting is:
NOTE:
Depending on the vehicle’s options, feature settings may vary.
Setting Name Description
Language
This setting will change the language of the Uconnect system and Instrument
Cluster Display. The available languages are English, Français, and Español.
5
22_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 153
154 MULTIMEDIA
Display
When the Display button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system will display the options related to the theme (if equipped), brightness, and color of the
touchscreen. The available settings are:
NOTE:
Depending on the vehicle’s options, feature settings may vary.
Setting Name Description
Language
This setting will change the language of the Uconnect system and Instrument
Cluster Display. The available languages are English, Français, and Español.
Display Mode
This setting will allow you to set the brightness manually or have the system
set it automatically. The “Auto” setting has the system automatically adjust
the display brightness. The “Manual” setting will allow the user to adjust the
brightness of the display.
Display Brightness With Headlights ON/Brightness
This setting will allow you to set the brightness when the headlights are on. To
access this setting, Display Mode must be set to Manual. The “+” setting will
increase the brightness; the “-” will decrease the brightness.
Display Brightness With Headlights OFF/Brightness
This setting will allow you to set the brightness when the headlights are off. To
access this setting, Display Mode must be set to Manual. The “+” setting will
increase the brightness; the “-” will decrease the brightness.
Units
The available options are the “Speed” (MPH or km/h), “Distance” (mi or km),
“Fuel Consumption” (MPG [US], MPG [UK], L/100 km, or km/L), “Pressure”
(psi, kPa, or bar), “Temperature” (°C or °F), and “Capacity” (Gal [US], Gal
[UK], or L) units of measurement independently.
22_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 154
MULTIMEDIA 155
Set Theme This setting will allow you to change the display theme.
Keyboard
This setting will change the keyboard type on the display. The selectable
keyboards are “ABCDEF Keyboard”, “QWERTY Keyboard”, and “AZERTY
Keyboard”.
Theme Mode
This setting will allow you to adjust the brightness of your theme. Setting
options are “Light”, “Dark” and “Auto”. Select to show Themes in Light or Dark
mode. “Auto” changes the theme with the headlights.
Touchscreen Beep This setting will allow you to turn the touchscreen beep on or off.
Control Screen Timeout
This setting allows you to set the Control Screen to turn off automatically after
five seconds or stay open until manually closed.
Navigation Turn-By-Turn in Cluster This setting will display navigation prompts in the Instrument Cluster Display.
Phone Pop-ups Displayed In Cluster
This setting will display smartphone notifications and messages in the
Instrument Cluster Display.
Fuel Saver Display This setting will enable fuel saver mode in the Instrument Cluster Display.
SiriusXM® Travel Link Weather Alerts This setting will turn the weather alerts on or off.
Setting Name Description
5
22_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 155
156 MULTIMEDIA
Units
When the Units button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays the different measurement options. The selected unit of measurement will display in
the instrument cluster display and Navigation system (if equipped). The available settings are:
NOTE:
Depending on the vehicle’s options, feature settings may vary.
Setting Name Description
US This setting will change the unit of measurement on the display to US.
Metric This setting will change the unit of measurement on the display to Metric.
Custom
This setting changes the “Speed” (MPH or km/h), “Distance” (mi or km), “Fuel
Consumption” (MPG [US], MPG [UK], L/100 km, or km/L), “Pressure” (psi,
kPa, or bar), “Temperature” (°C or °F), and “Capacity” (Gal [US], Gal [UK],
or L) units of measurement independently.
22_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 156
MULTIMEDIA 157
Safety/Driving Assistance
When the Safety/Driving Assistance button is selected on the touchscreen, the system displays the options related to the vehicle’s safety settings. These
options will differ depending on the features equipped on the vehicle. The settings may display in list form or within subfolders on the screen. To access a
subfolder, select the desired folder; the available options related to that feature will then display on the screen.
NOTE:
Depending on the vehicle’s options, feature settings may vary.
Setting Name Description
ParkSense
This setting will change the type of ParkSense alert when a close object is
detected and provide both an audible chime and a visual display.
Front ParkSense Volume
This setting adjusts the volume of the Front ParkSense system. The available
settings are “Low”, “Medium”, and “High”.
Rear ParkSense Volume
This setting adjusts the volume of the Rear ParkSense system. The available
settings are “Low”, “Medium”, and “High”.
Tilt Mirrors In Reverse This setting will turn the Tilt Mirrors in Reverse on or off.
Hill Start Assist This setting will turn the Hill Start Assist system on or off.
ParkView Backup Camera Delay
This setting will add a timed delay to the ParkView Backup Camera when
shifting out of REVERSE.
ParkView Backup Camera Active Guidelines This setting will turn the ParkView Backup Camera Active Guidelines on or off.
ParkView Backup Camera Fixed Guidelines This setting will turn the ParkView Backup Camera Fixed Guidelines on or off.
Rain Sensing Auto Wipers This setting will turn the Rain Sensing Auto Wipers on or off.
5
22_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 157
158 MULTIMEDIA
Clock
When the Clock button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays the different options related to the vehicle’s internal clock.
NOTE:
Depending on the vehicle’s options, feature settings may vary.
Setting Name Description
Set Time And Format/Time Format
This setting will allow you to set the time format (AM/PM). Sync Time With GPS
must be off for this setting to be available. The “12 hrs” setting will set the
time to a 12-hour format. The “24 hrs” setting will set the time to a 24-hour
format.
Set Time Hours
This setting will allow you to set the hours. Sync Time With GPS must be off for
this setting to be available. The “+” setting will increase the hours. The “-”
setting will decrease the hours.
Set Time Minutes
This setting will allow you to set the minutes. Sync Time With GPS must be off
for this setting to be available. The “+” setting will increase the minutes. The
“-” setting will decrease the minutes.
Show Time in Status Bar This setting will place the time in the radio’s status bar.
22_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 158
MULTIMEDIA 159
Phone/Bluetooth®
When the Phone/Bluetooth® button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays the options related to Bluetooth® connectivity from an external audio
device or smartphone. The list of paired audio devices or smartphones can be accessed from this menu.
NOTE:
Depending on the vehicle’s options, feature settings may vary.
Setting Name Description
Device Manager This setting will open the Device Manager main screen.
Do Not Disturb All
This setting will open the Do Not Disturb All settings menu. The available
options are “On” and “Off”.
Enable Two Active Phones
This setting will enable or disable two active phones within the vehicle. The
setting options are “On” and “Off”.
Phone Pop-Ups Displayed In Cluster
This setting will activate phone message pop-ups in the Instrument Cluster
Display.
Paired Phones This setting will show the list of paired phones.
Paired Audio Sources This setting will show the list of paired audio sources.
Paired Phones And Audio Devices This setting will show the list of paired phones and audio devices.
Projection Manager
This setting will activate your smartphone to project on the vehicle’s
touchscreen.
5
22_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 159
160 MULTIMEDIA
Voice
Trailer Brake/Trailer
When the Voice button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays the options related to the vehicle’s Voice Recognition feature.
NOTE:
Depending on the vehicle’s options, feature settings may vary.
Setting Name Description
Voice Response Length
This setting will change the response length for the Voice Recognition system.
The “Brief” setting provides a shortened audio description from the system.
The “Detailed” setting provides the full audio description from the system.
Show Command List
This setting will allow you to turn the Command List on or off. The “Always”
setting will always show the Command List. The “With Help” setting will show
the Command List and provide a brief description of what the command does.
The “Never” setting will turn the Command List off.
When the Trailer Brake/Trailer button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system will display settings related to trailer towing.
NOTE:
Depending on the vehicle’s options, feature settings may vary.
Setting Name Description
Trailer Select
Select from “Trailer 1”, “Trailer 2”, “Trailer 3”, and “Trailer 4”. These trailer
designations can be used to save different trailer settings.
Trailer Brake Type
This setting will set the system to a specific trailer type. The available options
are “Light Electric”, “Heavy Electric”, “Light Electric Over Hydraulic”, and
“Heavy Electric Over Hydraulic”.
22_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 160
MULTIMEDIA 161
Camera
Mirrors & Wipers
When the Camera button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays the options related to the vehicle’s camera features.
NOTE:
Depending on the vehicle’s options, feature settings may vary.
Setting Name Description
ParkView Backup Camera Delay
This setting will add a timed delay to the ParkView Backup Camera when
shifting out of REVERSE.
ParkView Backup Camera Active Guidelines This setting will turn the ParkView Backup Camera Active Guidelines on or off.
ParkView Backup Camera Fixed Guidelines This setting will turn the ParkView Backup Camera Fixed Guidelines on or off.
When the Mirrors & Wipers button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays the options related to the vehicle’s mirrors and wipers.
NOTE:
Depending on the vehicle’s options, feature settings may vary.
Setting Name Description
Tilt Side Mirrors In Reverse
This setting will tilt the outside side-view mirrors when the ignition is in the
ON/RUN position and the transmission gear selector is in the REVERSE
position. The mirrors will move back to their previous position when the
transmission is shifted out of REVERSE. The available settings are “On”
and “Off”.
Rain Sensing Auto Wipers This setting will turn the Rain Sensing Auto Wipers on or off.
Headlights With Wipers This setting will turn the headlights on when the wipers are activated.
5
22_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 161
162 MULTIMEDIA
Lights
When the Lights button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays the options related to the vehicle’s exterior and interior lights.
NOTE:
When the “Daytime Running Lights” feature is selected, the daytime running lights can be turned on or off. This feature is only allowed by law in the country
of the vehicle purchased.
Depending on the vehicle’s options, feature settings may vary.
Setting Name Description
Headlight Off Delay
This setting will allow you to set the amount of time it takes for the headlights
to shut off after the vehicle is turned off. The available settings are “0 sec”,
“30 sec”, “60 sec”, and “90 sec”.
Headlight Illumination On Approach
This setting will allow you to set the amount of time it takes for the headlights
to shut off after the vehicle is unlocked. The available settings are “0 sec”,
“30 sec”, “60 sec”, and “90 sec”.
Headlights with Wipers This setting will turn the headlights on when the wipers are activated.
Daytime Running Lights This setting will allow you to turn the Daytime Running Lights on or off.
Flash Lights With Lock
This setting will allow you to turn the flashing of the lights when the Lock
button is pushed on the key fob on or off.
Auto Dim High Beams This setting will allow you to turn the Auto Dim High Beams on or off.
22_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 162
MULTIMEDIA 163
Doors & Locks
When the Doors & Locks button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays the options related to locking and unlocking the vehicle’s doors.
NOTE:
Depending on the vehicle’s options, feature settings may vary.
Setting Name Description
Auto Door Locks
This setting will allow you to change if the doors lock automatically when the
vehicle reaches 12 mph (19 km/h).
Auto Unlock On Exit
This setting will unlock the doors when any of the doors are opened from the
inside.
Flash Lights With Lock
This setting will allow you to turn the flashing of the lights when the Lock
button is pushed on the key fob on or off.
Sound Horn With Lock
This setting will sound the horn when the Lock button is pushed on the key
fob. The “Off” setting will not sound the horn when the Lock button is pushed.
The “1st Press” setting will sound the horn when the Lock button is pushed
once. The “2nd Press” setting will sound the horn when the Lock button is
pushed twice.
Sound Horn With Remote Start
This setting will sound the horn when the remote start is activated from the
key fob.
5
22_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 163
164 MULTIMEDIA
Auto-On Comfort Systems/Seats &
Comfort
Remote Door Unlock, Door Lock/1st Press Of Key Fob Unlocks
This setting will change how many pushes of the Unlock button on the key fob
are needed to unlock all the doors. The “Driver Door” setting will only unlock
the driver door on the first push on the Unlock button. The “All Doors” setting
will unlock all doors with only one push of the Unlock button.
Passive Entry
This setting will allow you to turn the Passive Entry feature
(Keyless Enter ‘n Go™) on or off.
Personal Settings Linked To Key Fob
This setting will recall preset radio stations and driver seat position that have
been linked to the key fob.
Setting Name Description
After pressing the Auto-On Comfort Systems/Seats & Comfort button on the touchscreen, the following setting will be available:
NOTE:
Depending on the vehicle’s options, feature settings may vary.
Setting Name Description
Auto-On Driver Heated/Ventilated Seat & Heated Steering Wheel With Vehicle
Start
This setting will activate the vehicle’s comfort systems and heated seats or
heated steering wheel when the vehicle is remote started or ignition is
started. The “Off” setting will not activate the comfort systems. The “Remote
Start” setting will only activate the comfort systems when using Remote Start.
The “All Start” setting will activate the comfort systems whenever the vehicle
is started.
22_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 164
MULTIMEDIA 165
Key Off Options/Engine Off Options
Audio
When the Key Off Options/Engine Off Options button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays the options related to vehicle shutoff. These settings
will only activate when the ignition is set to OFF.
NOTE:
Depending on the vehicle’s options, feature settings may vary.
Setting Name Description
Easy Exit Seat This setting adjusts the seats to make exiting the vehicle easier.
Key Off/Engine Off Power Delay
This setting will keep certain electrical features running after the engine is
turned off. When any door is opened, the electronics will deactivate. The
available settings are “0 sec”, “45 sec”, “5 min”, and “10 min”.
Headlight Off Delay
This setting will allow you to set the amount of time the headlights remain on
after the vehicle has been turned off. The “+” will increase the amount of
time. The “-” will decrease the amount of time.
When the Audio button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays options related to the vehicle’s sound system. These settings can change the audio
location within the vehicle, adjust the bass or treble levels, and auto-play settings from an audio device or smartphone.
NOTE:
Depending on the vehicle’s options, feature settings may vary.
Setting Name Description
Balance/Fade
This setting will adjust audio levels from specific speakers in the front/back
and left/right of the vehicle. The Speaker icon can be moved to set audio
location.
Equalizer This setting will adjust the “Bass”, “Mid”, and “Treble” ranges of the audio.
5
22_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 165
166 MULTIMEDIA
Notifications
Speed Adjusted Volume
This setting will adjust audio volume as speeds increase. At a higher setting,
the volume will increase more as the vehicle speeds up. The available settings
are “Off”, “1”, “2”, and “3”.
Surround Sound This setting will turn the Surround Sound system on or off.
AUX Volume Offset
This setting will tune the audio levels from a device connected through the
AUX port. The available settings are “+” and “-”.
Auto Play This setting will automatically begin playing audio from a connected device.
Loudness This setting will improve audio quality at lower volumes.
Setting Name Description
When the Notifications button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays the options related to Notifications for the system.
NOTE:
Depending on the vehicle’s options, feature settings may vary.
Setting Name Description
Notification Sounds
This setting will turn off the Notification chime that plays when a new
notification is sent. The options are “On” and “Off”.
App Drawer Favoriting Pop-Ups This setting turns the App Favorited pop-up on or off.
App Drawer Unfavoriting Pop-Ups This setting turns the App Unfavorited pop-up on or off.
New Text Message Pop-Ups
This setting turns receiving/storing a pop-up for new text messages of any
connected phone on or off.
Missed Calls Message
This setting turns receiving/storing a pop-up for missed calls of any connected
phone on or off.
Navigation Pop-Ups This setting turns receiving/storing predictive Navigation Pop-Ups on or off.
22_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 166
MULTIMEDIA 167
SiriusXM® Setup
Software Updates — If Equipped
When the SiriusXM® Setup button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays options related to SiriusXM® satellite radio. These settings can be used
to skip specific radio channels and restart favorite songs from the beginning.
NOTE:
A subscription to SiriusXM® satellite radio is required for these settings to be functional.
Depending on the vehicle’s options, feature settings may vary.
Setting Name Description
Tune Start
This setting will play the current song from the beginning when you tune to a
music channel using one of the 12 presets.
Channel Skip
This setting allows you to set channels that you wish to skip. A channel list will
display of the skipped channels.
Subscription Information
This menu provides SiriusXM® subscription information. SiriusXM® Travel
Link is a separate subscription.
When the Software Updates button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system will display the setting related to updating the Uconnect software.
NOTE:
Depending on the vehicle’s options, feature settings may vary.
Setting Name Description
Software Downloads over Wi-Fi
This setting will allow software updates to happen over Wi-Fi. Selectable
options for the setting are “On” and “Off”.
5
22_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 167
168 MULTIMEDIA
Reset
When the Reset button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays the options related to resetting the Uconnect system back to its default settings.
These settings can clear personal data and reset selected settings from other menus.
NOTE:
Depending on the vehicle’s options, feature settings may vary.
Setting Name
Description
Restart Radio This setting will reboot the radio.
Reset Apps Drawer To Default Order
This setting will return the apps drawer to the default order. The available
options are “Yes” and “Cancel”. The X button can also be pressed to cancel
the screen.
Restore Settings to Default
This setting will return all the previously changed settings to their factory
default.
Clear Personal Data
This setting will display a pop-up that gives you the option to clear all personal
data from the system, including Bluetooth® devices and presets.
Reset Wi-Fi Password For Projection
This setting will allow you to reset the vehicle’s Wi-Fi password for smartphone
projection. The available options are “Yes” and “Cancel”. The X button can
also be pressed to cancel the screen.
Factory Reset This setting will restore the radio to its factory default settings.
22_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 168
MULTIMEDIA 169
UCONNECT INTRODUCTION
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
Uconnect 3 With 5-inch Display
1 — RADIO Button 6 — COMPASS Button
2 — MEDIA Button 7 — SETTINGS Button
3 — PHONE Button 8 — MORE Button
4 — VOLUME & On/Off Button 9 — ENTER/BROWSE & TUNE/SCROLL Knob
5 — MUTE Button 10 — SCREEN OFF Button
5
22_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 169
170 MULTIMEDIA
NOTE:
Uconnect screen images are for illustration purposes only and may not reflect exact software for your vehicle.
Feature Description
Radio/Media
Press the Radio button or Media button to enter Radio Mode/Media Mode
and access the radio functions and external audio sources Ú page 172.
Phone
Press the Phone button to enter Phone Mode and access the hands-free
phone system Ú page 182.
Settings Press the Settings button to access the Uconnect Settings Ú page 150.
Push the ENTER/BROWSE button on the faceplate to accept a highlighted
selection on the screen. Rotate the TUNE/SCROLL rotary knob to scroll
through a list or tune a radio station.
Push the SCREEN OFF button on the faceplate to turn the screen on or off.
Push the MUTE button on the faceplate to turn the audio of the radio system
off. Push it again to turn the audio back on.
Rotate the rotary knob to adjust the volume. Push the Volume & ON/OFF
button on the faceplate to turn the system on or off.
Compass Press the Compass button to access the vehicle’s compass.
More Press the More button to access additional options.
22_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 170
MULTIMEDIA 171
SAFETY AND GENERAL INFORMATION
Safety Guidelines
Please read this manual carefully before using the
system. It contains instructions on how to use the
system in a safe and effective manner.
Do NOT attach any object to the touchscreen.
Doing so can result in damage to the touchscreen.
Please read and follow these safety precautions.
Failure to do so may result in injury or property
damage.
Glance at the screen only when safe to do so. If
prolonged viewing of the screen is required,
park in a safe location and set the parking
brake.
Stop use immediately if a problem occurs.
Failure to do so may cause injury or damage to
the product. See an authorized dealer for repair.
Ensure the volume level of the system is set to a
level that still allows you to hear outside traffic
and emergency vehicles.
Safe Usage Of The Uconnect System
The Uconnect system is a sophisticated elec-
tronic device. Do not let young children use the
system.
Permanent hearing loss may occur if you play
your music or sound system at loud volumes.
Exercise caution when setting the volume on the
system.
Keep drinks, rain and other sources of moisture
away from the system. Besides damage to the
system, moisture can cause electric shocks as
with any electronic device.
NOTE:
Many features of this system are speed
dependent. For your own safety, it is not possible to
use some of the touchscreen features while the
vehicle is in motion.
Care And Maintenance
Do not press the touchscreen with any hard or
sharp objects (pen, USB stick, jewelry, etc.),
which could scratch the surface.
Do not spray any liquid or chemicals directly on
the screen! Use a clean and dry microfiber lens
cleaning cloth in order to clean the touchscreen.
If necessary, use a lint-free cloth dampened
with a cleaning solution, such as isopropyl
alcohol or an isopropyl alcohol and water solu-
tion ratio of 50:50. Be sure to follow the solvent
manufacturer's precautions and directions
Ú page 353.
WARNING!
ALWAYS drive safely with your hands on the
steering wheel. You have full responsibility and
assume all risks related to the use of the
Uconnect features and applications in this
vehicle. Only use Uconnect when it is safe to do
so. Failure to do so may result in an accident
involving serious injury or death.
5
22_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 171
172 MULTIMEDIA
UCONNECT MODES
STEERING WHEEL AUDIO CONTROLS
The remote sound system controls are located on
the rear surface of the steering wheel at the three
and nine o’clock positions.
Remote Sound System Controls
The right-hand control is a rocker-type switch with
a push button in the center and controls the
volume and mode of the sound system. Pushing
the top of the rocker switch will increase the
volume, and pushing the bottom of the rocker
switch will decrease the volume.
Pushing the center button will make the radio
switch between the various modes available
(AM/FM/SXM or Media, etc.).
The left-hand control is a rocker-type switch with a
push button in the center. The function of the
left-hand control is different depending on which
mode you are in.
The following describes the left-hand control
operation in each mode:
Radio Operation
Pushing the top of the switch will Seek Up for the
next available station and pushing the bottom of
the switch will Seek Down for the next available
station.
The button located in the center of the left-hand
control will tune to the next preset station that you
have programmed in the radio presets.
Media Mode
Pushing the top of the switch skips to the next
track on the selected media (AUX/USB/
Bluetooth®). Pushing the switch up twice will go
forward two tracks. Pushing the bottom switch
goes to the beginning of the current track, or the
beginning of the previous track if it is within eight
seconds after the current track begins to play.
Double pressing the bottom button switch will skip
to the previous track if it is after eight seconds into
the current track.
22_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 172
MULTIMEDIA 173
RADIO MODE
Radio Controls
Uconnect 3 With 5-inch Display
The radio is equipped with the following modes:
AM
FM
SiriusXM® Satellite Radio (if equipped)
Press the Radio button on the touchscreen to enter
the Radio Mode. The different tuner modes, AM,
FM, and SXM, can then be selected by pressing the
corresponding button in Radio Mode.
Volume & On/Off Control
Push the VOLUME & On/Off control knob to turn on
and off the Uconnect system.
The electronic volume control turns continuously
(360 degrees) in either direction, without stopping.
Turning the VOUME & On/Off control knob
clockwise increases the volume, and
counterclockwise decreases it.
When the audio system is turned on, the sound will
be set at the same volume level as last played.
Mute Button
Push the MUTE button to mute or unmute the
system.
Tune/Scroll Control
Turn the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob
clockwise to increase or counterclockwise to
decrease the radio station frequency. Push the
ENTER/BROWSE button to choose a selection.
Seek
The Seek Up and Down functions are activated by
pressing the double arrow buttons on the
touchscreen to the right and left of the radio
station display or by pushing the left steering wheel
audio control button up or down.
Seek Up and Seek Down
Press and release the Seek Up or Seek
Down button to tune the radio to the next
available station or channel. During a Seek Up/
Down function, if the radio reaches the starting
station after passing through the entire band two
times, the radio will stop at the station where it
began.
Fast Seek Up and Fast Seek Down
Press and hold, and then release the Seek
Up or Seek Down button to advance the
radio through the available stations or channels at
a faster rate. The radio stops at the next available
station or channel when the button on the
touchscreen is released.
NOTE:
Pressing and holding either the Seek Up or
Seek Down button will scan the different
frequency bands at a slower rate.
1 — Preset Radio Stations
2 — All Preset Radio Stations
3 — Seek Down
4 — Radio Band (AM/FM)
5 — Tune
6 — Station Info
7 — Audio Settings
8 — Seek Up
5
22_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 173
174 MULTIMEDIA
Info — If Equipped
Press the Info button to display information related
to the currently playing song and radio station.
Direct Tune
Press the Tune button located at the bottom of the
radio screen to directly tune to a desired radio
station or channel.
Press the available number button on the
touchscreen to begin selecting a desired station.
Once a number has been entered, any numbers
that are no longer possible (stations that cannot be
reached) will become deactivated/grayed out.
Undo
You can backspace an entry by pressing the
Back button on the touchscreen.
GO
Once the last digit of a station has been entered,
press “Ok”. The Direct Tune screen will close, and
the system will automatically tune to that station.
RADIO VOICE COMMANDS
Use your voice to quickly get to the AM, FM, or
SiriusXM® Satellite Radio stations you would like
to hear. (Subscription or included SiriusXM®
Satellite Radio trial required.)
Push the VR button on the steering wheel and
wait for the beep to say a command. See an
example:
“Tune to ninety-five-point-five FM”
“Tune to Satellite Channel Hits 1”
Did You Know: At any time, if you are not sure of
what to say or want to learn a Voice Command,
push the VR button and say “Help”. The system
provides you with a list of commands.
SiriusXM® Satellite Radio Mode —
If Equipped
Uconnect 3 With 5-inch Display Changing To SiriusXM®
SiriusXM® Satellite Radio uses direct
satellite-to-receiver broadcasting technology to
provide clear, coast-to-coast radio content.
SiriusXM® is a subscription-based service.
Visit siriusxm.com/getallaccess or review your
SiriusXM® Radio pamphlet in your Owner’s
Manual kit for more information.
SiriusXM® services require subscriptions, sold
separately after the trial included with the new
vehicle purchase. If you decide to continue your
service at the end of your trial subscription, the
plan you choose will automatically renew and bill at
then-current rates until you call SiriusXM® at
866-635-2349 to cancel. See SiriusXM®
Customer Agreement for complete terms at
www.siriusxm.com (US) or www.siriusxm.ca
(Canada).
All fees and programming subject to change.
SiriusXM® satellite service is available only to
those at least 18 and older in the 48 contiguous
US and D.C. Our SiriusXM® satellite service is also
available in Canada and Puerto Rico (with
coverage limitations). SiriusXM® Internet radio
service is available throughout their satellite
service area and in AK. © 2021 SiriusXM® Radio
Inc. SiriusXM® and all related marks and logos are
trademarks of SiriusXM® Radio Inc.
This functionality is only available for radios
equipped with a Satellite receiver. In order to
receive satellite radio, the vehicle needs to be
outside with a clear view to the sky.
22_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 174
MULTIMEDIA 175
If the screen shows “Acquiring Signal”, you might
have to change the vehicle’s position in order to
receive a signal. In most cases, the satellite radio
does not receive a signal in underground parking
garages or tunnels.
No Subscription
Radios equipped with a Satellite receiver require a
subscription to the SiriusXM® Service. When the
radio does not have the necessary subscription,
the radio is able to receive the Preview channel
only.
Acquiring SiriusXM® Subscription
To activate the SiriusXM® Satellite Radio
subscription, US residents visit http://
www.siriusxm.com/getallaccess or call:
1-800-643-2112
Canadian residents visit https://www.siriusxm.ca/
or call: 1-888-539-7474.
NOTE:
You will need to provide the SiriusXM® ID (RID)
located at the bottom of the Channel 0 screen.
The Satellite Mode is activated by a press of the
SXM button on the touchscreen.
When in Satellite Mode:
The SXM button on the touchscreen is high-
lighted.
The SiriusXM® Presets are displayed at the top
of the screen.
The SiriusXM® Channel Number is displayed in
the center.
The Program Information is displayed at the
bottom of the Channel Number.
The SiriusXM® function buttons are displayed
below the Program Information.
Tuning is done by operating the Tune Knob or by
Direct Tune, similar to other Radio Bands.
In addition to the tuning operation functions
common to all radio modes, the Replay, Traffic/
Weather button, and Favorite button functions are
available in SiriusXM® Mode.
Uconnect 3 With 5-inch Display SiriusXM® Satellite Radio
1 — Browse
2 — Radio Bands
3 — Direct Tune
4 — Info Button
5 — Next Button
5
22_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 175
176 MULTIMEDIA
REPLAY
Replay provides a means to store and replay up to 22 minutes of music audio and 48 minutes of talk radio. Once the channel is switched, content in replay
memory is lost.
Press the Replay button on the touchscreen. The Play/Pause, Rewind/Forward and Live buttons will display at the top of the screen, along with the replay time.
You can exit by pressing the Replay button on the touchscreen any time during the Replay Mode.
Play/Pause
Press the Pause/Play button on the touchscreen to
pause the playing of live or rewound content at any
time. Play can be resumed by pressing the Pause/
Play button again on the touchscreen.
Rewind
Press the Rewind button on the touchscreen to
rewind the content in steps of five seconds.
Pressing the Rewind button on the touchscreen for
more than two seconds rewinds the content. The
radio begins playing the content at the point at
which the press is released.
Forward
Each press of the Forward button on the
touchscreen forwards the content in steps of five
seconds. Forwarding of the content can only be
done when the content is previously rewound, and
therefore, cannot be done for live content. A
continuous press of the Forward button on the
touchscreen also forwards the content. The radio
begins playing the content at the point at which the
press is released.
Live
Press the Live button on the touchscreen to
resume the playing of live content.
22_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 176
MULTIMEDIA 177
FAVORITES
Press the Favorites button on the touchscreen to
activate the favorites menu, which will time out
within 20 seconds in absence of user interaction.
You can exit the Favorites Menu by a press of the X
button.
The Favorites feature enables you to set a favorite
artist or song that is currently playing. The radio
then uses this information to alert you when either
the favorite artist or song is being played at any
time by any of the SiriusXM® Channels.
The maximum number of favorites that can be
stored in the Radio is 50.
Favorite Artist: While the song is playing, to set a
favorite artist, press the Favorites button on the
touchscreen and then the Favorite Artist button on
the touchscreen.
Favorite Song: While the song is playing, to set a
favorite song, press the Favorites button on the
touchscreen and then the Favorite Song button on
the touchscreen.
BROWSE IN SXM
Press the Browse button on the touchscreen to
edit Presets, Favorites, Game Zone, and Jump
settings, along with providing the SiriusXM®
Channel List.
This Screen contains many submenus. You can
exit submenus to return to a parent menu by
pressing the Back arrow.
All
Press the All button on the Browse Screen. When
pressing the All button, the following categories
become available:
Channel List: Press the Channel List to display
all the SiriusXM® Channel Numbers. You can
scroll the Channel List by pressing the Up and
Down arrows, located on the right side of the
screen. Scrolling can also be done by operating
the TUNE/SCROLL knob.
Genre List: Press the Genre button on the touch-
screen to display a list of Genres. You can select
any desired Genre by pressing the Genre List.
The radio tunes to a channel with the content in
the selected Genre.
Favorites
Press the Favorites button on the Browse screen.
The Favorites menu provides a means to edit the
Favorites list and to configure the Alert Settings,
along with providing a list of Channels currently
airing any of the items in the Favorites list.
You can scroll the Favorites list by pressing the Up
and Down arrows located at the right side of the
screen. Scrolling can also be done by operating the
TUNE/SCROLL knob as well.
Remove Favorites
Press the Remove Favorites tab at the top of the
screen. Press the Delete All button on the
touchscreen to delete all of the Favorites or press
the Trash Can icon next to the Favorite to be
deleted.
Alert Settings
Press the Alert Settings tab at the top of the
Favorites screen. The Alert Settings menu allows
you to choose from a visual alert or audible and
visual alert when one of your favorites is airing on
any of the SiriusXM® channels.
Game Zone
Press the Game Zone button, located at the left of
the Browse screen. This feature provides you with
the ability to select teams, edit the selection, and
set alerts.
On-Air
Press the On-Air tab at the top of the screen. The
On-Air list provides a list of Channels currently
airing any of the items in the Selections list, and
pressing any of the items in the list tunes the radio
to that channel.
5
22_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 177
178 MULTIMEDIA
Add/Delete — If Equipped
Press the Add/Delete button on the touchscreen to
activate the League Scroll list. Press the chosen
league and a scroll list of all teams within the
league will appear, then you can select a team by
pressing the corresponding box. A check mark
appears for all teams that are chosen.
Remove Selection/Trash Can Icon
Press the Remove Selection tab at the top of the
screen. Press the Delete All button on the
touchscreen to delete all of the selections or press
the Trash Can icon next to the selection to be
deleted.
Alert Settings
Press the Alert Setting tab at the top of the screen.
The Alert Settings menu allows you to choose from
“Alert me to on-air games upon start” or “Alert
upon score update” or both when one or more of
your selections is airing on any of the SiriusXM®
channels.
Tune Start
Tune Start begins playing the current song from
the beginning when you tune to a music channel
using one of the 12 presets. This feature occurs
the first time the preset is selected during that
current song.
Setting Presets
Uconnect 3 With 5-inch Display Radio Presets
The Presets are available for all Radio Modes, and
are activated by pressing any of the Preset
buttons, located at the top of the screen.
When you are on a station that you wish to save as
a preset, press and hold the numbered button on
the touchscreen for more than two seconds.
The Radio stores up to 12 presets in each of the
Radio Modes.
For the Uconnect 3 With 5-inch Display
A set of four presets will appear on the screen.
Press the All button to view all saved presets. To
remove a saved preset, a new preset must be
saved over the old one.
Audio Settings
Press the Audio button within the settings main
menu to activate the Audio Settings screen.
Uconnect 3 With 5-inch Display
22_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 178
MULTIMEDIA 179
Audio Setting Description
Balance/Fade
Press the Balance/Fade button on the touchscreen to balance audio between
the front speakers or fade the audio between the rear and front speakers.
Press the Front, Rear, Left or Right button or press and drag the red Speaker
icon to adjust the Balance/Fade.
Equalizer
Press the + or – button or press and drag the level bar to increase or decrease
each of the equalizer bands. The level value, which spans between plus or
minus nine, is displayed at the top of each of the bands.
Speed Adjusted Volume
The Speed Adjusted Volume is adjusted by selecting from “Off”, “1”, “2”, and
“3”. This alters the automatic adjustment of the audio volume with variation
to vehicle speed. Volume increases automatically as speed increases to
compensate for normal road noise.
Surround Sound — If Equipped
When Surround Sound is on, you can hear audio coming from every direction
as in a movie theatre or home theatre system.
Loudness — If Equipped When Loudness is on, the sound quality at lower volumes improves.
AUX Volume Offset
The AUX Volume Offset is adjusted by pressing + and – buttons. This alters the
AUX input audio volume. The level value, which spans between plus or minus
three, is displayed above the adjustment bar.
Auto Play — If Equipped
The Auto Play feature begins playing music as soon as a USB Media device is
connected to one of the vehicle’s Media USB ports, when it is turned on. Press
“Off” to turn the setting off.
Radio Off With Door — If Equipped
The Radio Off With Door feature, when activated, keeps the radio on until the
driver or passenger door is opened or until the Radio Off Delay selected time
has expired.
5
22_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 179
180 MULTIMEDIA
MEDIA MODE
Operating Media Mode
Uconnect 3 With 5-inch Display Operating Media Mode
Media Mode is entered by pushing the MEDIA
button located on the faceplate.
Audio Source Selection
Once in Media Mode, press the Source or Source
Select button on the touchscreen and the desired
mode button on the touchscreen. USB, AUX, and
Bluetooth® are the Media sources available.
When available, you can select the Browse button
on the touchscreen to be given these options:
Now Playing
Artists
Albums
Genres
Songs
Playlists
Folders
For the Uconnect 3 With 5-inch Display, Media
Mode is entered by pushing the MEDIA button
located on the faceplate.
Types of Media Modes
USB MODE
Overview
USB Mode is entered by inserting a USB device into
the USB port, or by pushing the MEDIA button on
the faceplate and then selecting the USB button.
On the Uconnect 3 With 5-inch Display, if you insert
a USB device with the ignition in ON/RUN, the unit
will switch to USB Mode and begin to play. The
display will show the track number and index time
in minutes and seconds. Play will begin at the start
of track 1.
BLUETOOTH® MODE
Overview
Bluetooth® Streaming Audio or Bluetooth® Mode
is entered by pairing a Bluetooth® device,
containing music, to the Uconnect system.
Before proceeding, the Bluetooth® device must be
paired to the Uconnect Phone to communicate
with the Uconnect system.
On the Uconnect 3 With 5-inch Display, push the
MEDIA button located on the faceplate. Once in
Media Mode, press the Source button on the
touchscreen and select the Bluetooth® button
Ú page 182.
To access Bluetooth® Mode, press the Bluetooth®
button on the left side of the touchscreen or
under the Source Select/Select Source button
(if equipped).
1 — Seek Down
2 — Browse
3 — Source
4 — Pause/Play
5 — Info
6 — More Options
7 — Seek Up
22_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 180
MULTIMEDIA 181
AUX MODE
Overview
Auxiliary Mode (AUX) is entered by inserting an AUX
device using a cable with a 3.5 mm audio jack into
the AUX port, or by pushing the MEDIA button on
the faceplate, selecting the Source button and
then the AUX button.
To insert an Auxiliary device, gently insert the
Auxiliary device cable into the AUX port. If you
insert an Auxiliary device with the ignition and the
radio on, the unit will switch to AUX Mode and
begin to play.
Controlling The Auxiliary Device
The control of the Auxiliary device (e.g., selecting
playlists, play, fast forward, etc.) cannot be
provided by the radio; use the device controls
instead. Adjust the volume with the Volume button,
Volume/Mute rotary knob, or the On/Off rotary
knob, or with the volume of the attached device.
NOTE:
The radio unit is acting as the amplifier for audio
output from the Auxiliary device. Therefore, if the
volume control on the Auxiliary device is set too
low, there will be insufficient audio signal for the
radio unit to play the music on the device.
Seek Up /Seek Down
In USB Mode, press the Seek Up button on the
touchscreen for the next selection on the USB
device. Press and release the Seek Down button
on the touchscreen to return to the beginning of
the current selection, or to return to the beginning
of the previous selection if the USB device is within
the first three seconds of the current selection.
In Bluetooth® Mode, press and release the Seek
Up button on the touchscreen for the next
selection on the Bluetooth® device. Press and
release the Seek Down button on the touchscreen
to return to the beginning of the current selection,
or return to the beginning of the previous selection
if the Bluetooth® device is within the first second
of the current selection.
Browse
In USB Mode, press the Browse button on the
touchscreen to display the browse window. In USB
Mode, the left side of the browse window displays
a list of ways you can browse through the contents
of the USB device. If supported by the device, you
can browse by Folder, Artist, Playlist, Album, Song,
etc. Press the desired button on the touchscreen
on the left side of the screen. The center of the
browse window shows items and their
sub-functions, which can be scrolled through by
pressing the Up and Down buttons to the right. The
TUNE/SCROLL knob can also be used to scroll.
On the Uconnect 3 With 5-inch Display, rotate the
BROWSE button on the faceplate or press the
Browse button on the touchscreen to scroll
through and select a desired track on the device.
Press the Exit button on the touchscreen if you
wish to cancel the Browse function.
Media Mode
In USB Mode, press the Media button on the
touchscreen to select the desired audio source:
USB.
In Bluetooth® Mode, press the Media button on
the touchscreen to select the desired audio
source: Bluetooth®.
In AUX Mode, press the Media button on the
touchscreen to select the desired audio source:
AUX.
Repeat
In USB Mode, press the Repeat button on the
touchscreen to toggle the repeat functionality. The
Repeat button on the touchscreen is highlighted
when active. The Radio will continue to play the
current track, repeatedly, as long as the repeat is
active. Press the Repeat button again to enter
Repeat All. The radio will continue to play all the
current tracks, repeatedly, as long as the repeat
function is active. To cancel Repeat, press the
Repeat button a third time.
5
22_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 181
182 MULTIMEDIA
Shuffle
In USB Mode, press the Shuffle button on the
touchscreen to play the selections on the USB
device in random order to provide an interesting
change of pace. Press the Shuffle button on the
touchscreen a second time to turn this feature off.
Audio
Audio settings can be accessed by pressing the
Audio button Ú page 173.
Info
In USB Mode, press the Info button on the
touchscreen to display the current track
information. Press the Info or X button on the
touchscreen a second time to cancel this feature.
Tracks
In USB Mode, press the Tracks button on the
touchscreen to display a pop-up with the Song List.
The song currently playing is indicated by an arrow
and lines above and below the song title. When in
the Tracks List screen you can rotate the TUNE/
SCROLL knob to highlight a track (indicated by the
line above and below the track name) and then
push the ENTER/BROWSE knob to start playing
that track.
In Bluetooth® Mode, if the Bluetooth® device
supports this feature, press the Tracks button on
the touchscreen to display a pop-up with the Song
List. The currently playing song is indicated by a red
arrow and lines above and below the song title.
Pressing the Tracks button on the touchscreen
while the pop-up is displayed will close the pop-up.
MEDIA VOICE COMMANDS
Uconnect offers connections via USB, Bluetooth®,
and auxiliary (AUX) ports. Voice operation is only
available for connected USB and AUX devices.
Push the VR button located on the steering
wheel. After the beep, say one of the following
commands and follow the prompts to switch your
media source or choose an artist:
“Change source to Bluetooth®”
“Change source to AUX”
“Change source to USB”
“Play artist Beethoven”; “Play album Greatest
Hits”; “Play song Moonlight Sonata”; “Play genre
Classical”
Did You Know: Press the Browse button on the
touchscreen to see all of the music on your USB
device. Your Voice Command must match exactly
how the artist, album, song, and genre information
is displayed.
PHONE MODE
Overview
Uconnect Phone is a voice-activated, hands-free,
in-vehicle communications system. It allows you to
dial a phone number with your mobile phone.
The feature supports the following:
Voice Activated Features
Hands-Free dialing via Voice (“Call John Smith
Mobile” or “Dial 248-555-1212”).
Hands-Free text-to-speech listening of your
incoming SMS messages.
Hands-Free Text Message Replying: Forward
one of 18 predefined SMS messages to
incoming calls/text messages.
Redialing last dialed numbers (“Redial”).
Calling Back the last incoming call number
(“Call Back”).
Viewing call logs on screen (“Show Incoming
Calls,” “Show Outgoing Calls,” “Show Missed
Calls,” or “Show Recent Calls”).
Searching Contacts phone number (“Search for
John Smith Mobile”).
22_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 182
MULTIMEDIA 183
Screen Activated Features
Dialing via Keypad using touchscreen.
Viewing and Calling contacts from Phonebooks
displayed on the touchscreen.
Setting Favorite Contact phone numbers so they
are easily accessible on the Main Phone screen.
Viewing and Calling contacts from Recent Call
logs.
Reviewing your recent Incoming SMS
Messages.
Pairing up to 10 phones/audio devices for easy
access to connect to them quickly.
NOTE:
Your phone must be capable of SMS messaging via
Bluetooth® for messaging features to work
properly.
Your mobile phone’s audio is transmitted through
your vehicle’s audio system; the system will
automatically mute your radio when using the
Uconnect Phone.
For Uconnect customer support:
US visit UconnectPhone.com or call
877-855-8400
Canada visit UconnectPhone.com or call
800-465-2001 (English) or (French) call
800-387-9983
Uconnect Phone allows you to transfer calls
between the system and your mobile phone as you
enter or exit your vehicle and enables you to mute
the system's microphone for private conversation.
The Phone feature is driven through your
Bluetooth® “Hands-Free Profile” mobile phone.
Uconnect features Bluetooth® technology — the
global standard that enables different electronic
devices to connect to each other without wires or a
docking station. Ensure you phone is turned on
with Bluetooth® active and has been paired to the
Uconnect system. Up to 10 mobile phones or audio
devices are allowed to be linked to the system.
Only one linked (or paired) mobile phone and one
audio device can be used with the system at a
time.
Phone Button
The Phone button on your steering wheel
is used to get into the Phone Mode and
make calls, show recent, incoming or
outgoing calls, view phonebook, etc.
When you push the button you will hear a BEEP.
The BEEP is your signal to give a command.
Voice Command Button
The Voice Command button on your
steering wheel is only used for “barge in”
and when you are already in a call or
want to make another call.
The button on your steering wheel is also used to
access the Voice Commands for the Uconnect
Voice Command features if your vehicle is
equipped.
Phone Operation
OPERATION
Voice commands can be used to operate the
Uconnect Phone and to navigate its menu
structure. Voice commands are required after
most Uconnect Phone prompts. There are two
general methods for how Voice Command works:
1. Say compound commands like “Call John
Smith mobile”.
2. Say the individual commands and allow the
system to guide you to complete the task.
WARNING!
ALWAYS drive safely with your hands on the
steering wheel. You have full responsibility and
assume all risks related to the use of the
Uconnect features and applications in this
vehicle. Only use Uconnect when it is safe to do
so. Failure to do so may result in an accident
involving serious injury or death.
5
22_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 183
184 MULTIMEDIA
You will be prompted for a specific command and
then guided through the available options.
Prior to giving a voice command, one must wait
for the beep, which follows the “Listen” prompt
or another prompt.
For certain operations, compound commands
can be used. For example, instead of saying
“Call” and then “John Smith” and then “mobile”,
the following compound command can be said:
“Call John Smith mobile.”
For each feature explanation in this section,
only the compound command form of the voice
command is given. You can also break the
commands into parts and say each part of the
command when you are asked for it. For
example, you can use the compound command
form voice command “Search for John Smith,”
or you can break the compound command form
into two voice commands: “Search Contacts”
and when asked, “John Smith.” Please
remember, the Uconnect Phone works best
when you talk in a normal conversational tone,
as if speaking to someone sitting a few feet/
meters away from you.
NATURAL SPEECH
Your Uconnect Phone Voice system uses a Natural
Language Voice Recognition (VR) engine.
Natural speech allows the user to speak
commands in phrases or complete sentences. The
system filters out certain non-word utterances and
sounds such as “ah” and “eh.” The system handles
fill-in words such as “I would like to”.
The system handles multiple inputs in the same
phrase or sentence such as “make a phone call”
and “to Kelly Smith”. For multiple inputs in the
same phrase or sentence, the system identifies
the topic or context and provides the associated
follow-up prompt such as “Who do you want to
call?” in the case where a phone call was
requested but the specific name was not
recognized.
The system utilizes continuous dialog. When the
system requires more information from the user, it
will ask a question to which the user can respond
without pushing the Voice Command button on the
steering wheel.
HELP COMMAND
If you need assistance at any prompt, or if you want
to know your options at any prompt, say “Help”
following the beep.
To activate the Uconnect Phone from idle, simply
push the Phone button (if active) on your steering
wheel and say a command or say “Help”. All Phone
sessions begin with a push of the VR button or the
Phone button.
CANCEL COMMAND
At any prompt, after the beep, you can say “Cancel”
and you will be returned to the main menu.
You can also push the VR button or Phone button
on your steering wheel when the system is listening
for a command and be returned to the main or
previous menu.
22_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 184
MULTIMEDIA 185
PAIR (LINK) UCONNECT PHONE TO A MOBILE
PHONE
Use this QR code to access your
digital experience.
To begin using your Uconnect
Phone, you must pair your
compatible Bluetooth®-enabled
mobile phone. Mobile phone
pairing is the process of
establishing a wireless connection between a
cellular phone and the Uconnect system.
To complete the pairing process, you will need to
reference your mobile phone’s manual. Please
visit UconnectPhone.com for complete mobile
phone compatibility information.
Uconnect 3 With 5-inch Display
NOTE:
You must have Bluetooth® enabled on your
phone to complete this procedure.
The vehicle must be in PARK or at a standstill.
Follow these steps to pair your phone:
1. Place the ignition in the ACC or ON/RUN
position.
2. Press the Phone button.
NOTE:
If there are no phones currently connected
with the system, a pop-up will appear asking
if you would like to pair a mobile phone.
This pop-up only appears when the user
enters Phone Mode and no other device(s)
have previously been paired. If the system
has a phone previously paired, even if no
phone is currently connected with the
system, this pop-up will not appear.
3. Select “Yes” to begin the pairing process.
4. Search for available devices on your
Bluetooth®-enabled mobile phone.
Press the Settings button on your mobile
phone.
Select “Bluetooth®” and ensure it is
enabled. Once enabled, the mobile phone
will begin to search for Bluetooth®
connections.
NOTE:
During the pairing procedure, you may receive a
pop-up on your touchscreen asking you to make
sure the PIN on the touchscreen matches the PIN
from the pop-up on your mobile phone.
5. If “No” is selected, and you still would like to
pair a mobile phone, press the Phone Pairing
or Settings button from the Uconnect Phone
main screen.
Press the Paired Phones button or the Add
Device button.
Search for available devices on your
Bluetooth®-enabled mobile phone (see
below). When prompted on the phone,
select “Uconnect” and accept the connec-
tion request.
6. Uconnect Phone will display an in-progress
screen while the system is connecting.
7. When your mobile phone finds the Uconnect
system, select “Uconnect.”
8. When prompted on the mobile phone, accept
the connection request from Uconnect.
5
22_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 185
186 MULTIMEDIA
9. When the pairing process has successfully
completed, the system will prompt you to
choose whether or not this is your favorite
phone. Selecting “Yes” will make this phone
the highest priority. This phone will take
precedence over other paired phones within
range and will connect to the Uconnect system
automatically when entering the vehicle. Only
one mobile phone and/or one Bluetooth®
audio device can be connected to the
Uconnect system at a time. If “No” is selected,
simply select “Uconnect” from the mobile
phone/audio device Bluetooth® screen, and
the Uconnect system will reconnect to the
Bluetooth® device.
NOTE:
For phones which are not made a favorite, the
phone priority is determined by the order in which
it was paired. The most recent phone paired will
have the higher priority.
NOTE:
During the pairing procedure, you may receive a
pop-up on your mobile phone for the Uconnect
system to access your “messages” and “contacts”.
Selecting “Ok” or “Allow” will sync your contacts
with the Uconnect system.
You can also use the following VR command to
bring up the Paired Phone screen from any screen
on the radio:
“Show Paired Phones”
NOTE:
Software updates on your phone or the Uconnect
system may interfere with the Bluetooth®
connection. If this happens, simply repeat the
pairing process. However, first make sure to delete
the device from the list of phones on your
Uconnect system. Next, be sure to remove
Uconnect from the list of devices in your phone’s
Bluetooth® settings.
CONNECTING TO A PARTICULAR MOBILE
PHONE OR AUDIO DEVICE AFTER PAIRING
Uconnect Phone will automatically connect to the
highest priority paired phone and/or Audio Device
within range. If you need to choose a particular
phone or audio device follow these steps:
1. Press the
Settings
button on the touchscreen.
2. Press the Paired Phones or Audio Sources
button.
3. Press to select the particular phone or the
particular audio device. A pop-up menu will
appear; press “Connect Phone”.
4. Press the X to exit out of the Settings screen.
DISCONNECTING OR DELETING A PHONE OR
AUDIO DEVICE
Uconnect 3 With 5-inch Display
1. Press the Uconnect Phone Pairing or Settings
button.
2. Press the Paired Phones or Audio Sources
button.
3. Press the Settings button located to the right
of the device name for a different phone or
audio device than the currently connected
device or press the preferred Connected
Phone from the list.
4. The option’s pop-up will be displayed.
5. Press the Disconnect Device or the Delete
Device button on the touchscreen.
6. Press the X to exit out of the Settings screen.
22_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 186
MULTIMEDIA 187
MAKING A PHONE OR AUDIO DEVICE A
FAVORITE
1. On the Paired Phone/Audio Sources screen,
press the Settings button located to the right
of the device name for a different phone or
audio device than the currently connected
device or press the preferred “Connected
Phone” from the list.
2. The option’s pop-up will be displayed.
3. Press the Make Favorite button on the
touchscreen; you will see the chosen device
move to the top of the list.
4. Press the X to exit out of the Settings screen.
PHONEBOOK DOWNLOAD (AUTOMATIC
PHONEBOOK TRANSFER FROM MOBILE
PHONE) — IF EQUIPPED
If supported by your phone, Uconnect Phone has
the ability to download contact names and number
entries from the mobile phone’s phonebook.
Specific Bluetooth® Phones with Phonebook
Access Profile may support this feature. Your
mobile phone may receive a pop-up asking for
permission for the Uconnect system to access your
messages and contacts. Selecting “Ok” or “Allow”
will sync your contacts with the Uconnect system.
See the Uconnect website, UconnectPhone.com,
for supported phones.
To call a name from a downloaded mobile
phonebook, Ú page 191.
Automatic download and update of a phone-
book, if supported, begins as soon as the
Bluetooth® wireless phone connection is made
to the Uconnect Phone, for example, after you
start the vehicle.
A maximum of 5,000 contact names with four
numbers per contact will be downloaded and
updated every time a phone is connected to the
Uconnect Phone.
Depending on the maximum number of entries
downloaded, there may be a short delay before
the latest downloaded names can be used. Until
then, if available, the previously downloaded
phonebook is available for use.
Only the phonebook of the currently connected
mobile phone is accessible.
This downloaded phonebook cannot be edited
or deleted on the Uconnect Phone. These can
only be edited on the mobile phone. The
changes are transferred and updated to
Uconnect Phone on the next phone connection.
MANAGING YOUR FAVORITES — IF EQUIPPED
There are two ways you can add an entry to your
favorites:
1. After loading the mobile phonebook, press
the Favorites button on the touchscreen, and
then press one of the +Add Favorite Contact
buttons that appears on the list.
2. After loading the mobile phonebook, select
“Contacts” from the Phone main screen, and
then select the appropriate number. Press the
Down Arrow button or the Settings Gear button
next to the selected number to display the
option’s pop-up. In the pop-up, select “Add to
Favorites”.
NOTE:
If the Favorites list is full, you will be asked to
remove an existing favorite.
TO REMOVE A FAVORITE — IF EQUIPPED
1. To remove a Favorite, select “Favorites” from
the Phone main screen.
2. Next, select the Down Arrow icon or the
Settings Gear icon next to the contact you want
to remove from your favorites. This will bring
up the options for that Favorite contact.
3. Deselect the Star icon to delete the Favorite.
5
22_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 187
188 MULTIMEDIA
Phone Call Features
The following features can be accessed through
the Uconnect Phone if the feature(s) are available
and supported by Bluetooth® on your mobile
service plan. For example, if your mobile service
plan provides three-way calling, this feature can be
accessed through the Uconnect Phone. Check with
your mobile service provider for the features that
you have.
These are the phone options with Uconnect:
Redial
Dial by pressing in the number
Voice Commands (Dial by Saying a Name, Call
by Saying a Phonebook Name, Redial or Call
Back)
Favorites
Mobile Phonebook
Recent Call Log
SMS Message Viewer
CALL CONTROLS
The touchscreen allows you to control the following
call features:
Uconnect 3 With 5-inch Display
Other phone call features include:
End Call
Hold/Unhold/Resume
Swap two active calls
KEY PAD NUMBER ENTRY
1. Press the Phone button.
2. Press the Dial/Keypad button on the
touchscreen.
3. The Touch-Tone screen will be displayed.
4. Use the numbered buttons on the
touchscreens to enter the number and press
“Dial/Call”.
RECENT CALLS — IF EQUIPPED
You may browse a list of the most recent of each of
the following call types:
All Calls
Incoming Calls or Calls Received
Outgoing Calls or Calls Made
Missed Calls
These can be accessed by pressing the Recent
Calls button on the phone main screen.
You can also push the VR button on your steering
wheel and perform the above operation. For
example, say “Show my incoming calls”.
1 — Answer
2 — Mute/Unmute
3 — Ignore
4 — Transfer
22_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 188
MULTIMEDIA 189
ANSWER OR IGNORE AN INCOMING CALL —
NO CALL CURRENTLY IN PROGRESS
When you receive a call on your mobile phone, the
Uconnect Phone will interrupt the vehicle audio
system. Push the Phone button on the steering
wheel, press the Answer button on the
touchscreen.
Uconnect 3 With 5-inch Display
ANSWER OR IGNORE AN INCOMING CALL —
CALL CURRENTLY IN PROGRESS
If a call is currently in progress and you have
another incoming call, you will hear the same
network tones for call waiting that you normally
hear when using your mobile phone. Push the
Phone button on the steering wheel, press the
Answer button on the touchscreen, or press the
Caller ID box to place the current call on hold and
answer the incoming call.
NOTE:
Phones that are compatible with the Uconnect
system in the market today do not support
rejecting an incoming call when another call is in
progress. Therefore, the user can only answer an
incoming call or ignore it.
DO NOT DISTURB
With Do Not Disturb, you can disable notifications
from incoming calls and texts, allowing you to keep
your eyes on the road and hands on the wheel. For
your convenience, there is a counter display to
keep track of your missed calls and text messages
while Do Not Disturb is active.
Do Not Disturb can automatically reply with a text
message, a call, or both when declining an
incoming call and send it to voicemail.
Automatic reply messages can be:
“I am driving right now, I will get back to you
shortly”.
Create a custom auto reply message up to
160 characters.
NOTE:
Only the first 25 characters can be seen on the
touchscreen while typing a custom message.
While in Do Not Disturb, “Conference Call” can be
selected so you can still place a second call
without being interrupted by incoming calls.
NOTE:
Reply with text message is not compatible with
iPhone® devices.
Auto reply with text message is only available on
phones that support Bluetooth® Message
Access Profile (MAP).
PLACE/RETRIEVE A CALL FROM HOLD
During an active call, press the Hold or Call On Hold
button on the Phone main screen.
1 — Answer Button
2 — Caller ID Box
5
22_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 189
190 MULTIMEDIA
MAKING A SECOND CALL WHILE CURRENT
CALL IS IN PROGRESS
You can place a call on hold by pressing the Hold
button on the Phone main screen, then dial a
number from the keypad (if supported by your
mobile phone), recent calls, SMS Inbox or from the
phonebooks.
TOGGLING BETWEEN CALLS
Uconnect 3 With 5-inch Display
If two calls are in progress (one active and one on
hold), press the Swap Calls button on the phone
main screen. Only one call can be placed on hold
at a time.
You can also push the Phone button to toggle
between the active and held phone call.
JOIN CALLS
When two calls are in progress (one active and one
on hold), press the Join/Merge Calls button on the
Phone main screen to combine all calls into a
conference call.
CALL TERMINATION
To end a call in progress, momentarily press the
End Call button on the touchscreen or the Phone
End button on the steering wheel. Only the active
call(s) will be terminated and if there is a call on
hold, it will become the new active call.
REDIAL
Push the VR button and after the
“Listening” prompt and the following
beep, say “Redial.”
The Uconnect Phone will call the last number that
was dialed from your mobile phone.
CALL CONTINUATION
Call continuation is the progression of a phone call
on the Uconnect Phone after the vehicle ignition
has been switched to OFF.
NOTE:
The call will remain within the vehicle audio system
until the phone becomes out of range for the
Bluetooth® connection.
It is recommended to press the Transfer button on
the touchscreen when leaving the vehicle.
Advanced Phone Connectivity
TRANSFER CALL TO AND FROM MOBILE
PHONE
The Uconnect Phone allows ongoing calls to be
transferred from your mobile phone without
terminating the call. To transfer an ongoing call
from your connected mobile phone to the
Uconnect Phone or vice versa, press the Transfer
button on the Phone main screen.
Things You Should Know About Uconnect
Phone
VOICE COMMAND
For the best performance:
Always wait for the beep before speaking
Speak normally, without pausing, just as you
would speak to a person sitting a few feet/
meters away from you
Ensure that no one other than you is speaking
during a voice command period
Low-To-Medium Blower Setting
22_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 190
MULTIMEDIA 191
Low-To-Medium Vehicle Speed
Low Road Noise
Smooth Road Surface
Fully Closed Windows
Dry Weather Conditions
Even though the system is designed for many
languages and accents, the system may not always
work for some.
NOTE:
It is recommended that you do not store names in
your Favorites phonebook while the vehicle is in
motion.
Number and name recognition rate is optimized
when the entries are not similar. You can say “O”
(letter “O”) for “0” (zero).
Even though international dialing for most number
combinations is supported, some shortcut dialing
number combinations may not be supported.
Audio Performance
Audio quality is maximized under:
Low-To-Medium Blower Setting
Low-To-Medium Vehicle Speed
Low Road Noise
Smooth Road Surface
Fully Closed Windows
Dry Weather Conditions
Operation From The Driver's Seat
Performance such as audio clarity, echo, and
loudness to a large degree rely on the phone and
network, and not the Uconnect Phone.
Echo at the far end can sometimes be reduced by
lowering the in-vehicle audio volume.
PHONE VOICE COMMANDS
Making and answering hands-free phone calls is
easy with Uconnect. When the Phonebook button
is illuminated on your touchscreen, your system is
ready. Check UconnectPhone.com for mobile
phone compatibility and pairing instructions.
Push the Phone button and wait for the beep to
say a command. See some examples below:
“Call John Smith”
“Dial 123 456 7890”
“Redial” (call previous outgoing phone number)
“Call back” (call previously answered incoming
phone number)
Did You Know: When providing a Voice Command,
push the Phone button and say “Call”, then
pronounce the name exactly as it appears in your
phonebook. When a contact has multiple phone
numbers, you can say “Call John Smith work”.
VOICE TEXT REPLY — IF EQUIPPED
Uconnect can announce incoming text messages.
Push the VR button or Phone button and
say:
1. “
Listen
” to have the system read an incoming
text message. (Must have compatible mobile
phone paired to Uconnect system.)
2. “Reply” after an incoming text message has
been read.
Listen to the Uconnect prompts. After the
beep, repeat one of the predefined messages
and follow the system prompts.
WARNING!
ALWAYS drive safely with your hands on the
wheel. You have full responsibility and assume
all risks related to the use of the Uconnect
features and applications in this vehicle. Only
use Uconnect when it is safe to do so. Failure to
do so may result in an accident involving serious
injury or death.
5
22_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 191
192 MULTIMEDIA
NOTE:
Only use the numbering listed in the provided
table. Otherwise, the system will not transpose the
message.
Did You Know: Your mobile phone must have the
full implementation of the Message Access Profile
(MAP) to take advantage of this feature. For details
about MAP, visit UconnectPhone.com.
Apple® iPhone® iOS 5 or later supports reading
incoming text messages only. For further
information on how to enable this feature on your
Apple® iPhone®, refer to your iPhone® “User
Manual”.
Did You Know: Voice Text Reply is not compatible
with iPhone®, but if your vehicle is equipped with
Siri® Eyes Free, you can use your voice to send a
text message.
SIRI® EYES FREE — IF EQUIPPED
When used with your Apple® iPhone® connected
to your vehicle via Bluetooth®, Siri lets you use
your voice to send text messages, select media,
place phone calls and much more. Siri uses your
natural language to understand what you mean
and responds back to confirm your requests. The
system is designed to keep your eyes on the road
and your hands on the wheel by letting Siri help you
perform useful tasks.
To enable Siri, push and hold, then release the
Uconnect Voice Recognition (VR) button on the
steering wheel. After you hear a double beep, you
can ask Siri to play podcasts and music, get
directions, read text messages, and many other
useful requests.
BLUETOOTH® COMMUNICATION LINK
Mobile phones may lose connection to the
Uconnect Phone. When this happens, the
connection can generally be re-established by
restarting the mobile phone. Your mobile phone is
recommended to remain in Bluetooth® ON mode.
POWER-UP
After switching the ignition key from OFF to either
the ON/RUN or ACC position, or after a language
change, you must wait at least 15 seconds prior to
using the system Ú page 353.
CONNECTED VEHICLE SERVICES —
IF EQUIPPED
IS MY VEHICLE CONNECTED ?
If equipped, vehicles with an ASSIST and an SOS
button are connected vehicles. These buttons will
be located on either the rearview mirror or
overhead console, depending on the vehicle. If
these buttons are present in your vehicle, you have
a connected radio and can take advantage of the
many connected vehicle features.
For further information about the ASSIST and SOS
buttons Ú page 264.
PRE-DEFINED VOICE TEXT REPLY
RESPONSES
Yes.
Stuck in
traffic.
See you later.
No.
Start without
me.
I’ll be late.
Okay.
Where are
you?
I will be 5 <or
10, 15, 20,
25, 30, 45,
60> minutes
late.
Call me.
Are you there
yet?
I’ll call you
later.
I need
directions.
See you in 5
<or 10, 15,
20, 25, 30,
45, 60>
minutes.
I’m on my way.
Can’t talk right
now.
I’m lost. Thanks.
22_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 192
MULTIMEDIA 193
INTRODUCTION TO CONNECTED VEHICLE
S
ERVICES
One of the many benefits of your vehicle’s
Uconnect system is that you can now take
advantage of SiriusXM Guardian™ connected
services. To unlock the full potential of SiriusXM
Guardian™ in your vehicle, you first need to
activate SiriusXM Guardian™ connected services.
NOTE:
SiriusXM Guardian™ involves the collection, trans-
mission and use of data from your vehicle
Ú page 212.
SiriusXM Guardian™ Contact Information
SiriusXM Guardian™/Care
US residents visit: https://www.driveucon-
nect.com/sirius-xm-guardian.html or call
1-844-796-4827
Canadian residents visit: https://www.driveuco-
nnect.ca/en/sirius-xm-guardian or call
1-877-324-9091
What Is SiriusXM Guardian™?
SiriusXM Guardian™ uses an embedded device in
the Uconnect system installed in your vehicle,
which receives GPS signals and communicates
with the SiriusXM Guardian™ Customer Care
center via wireless and landline communications
networks. Depending on the type of device in your
vehicle, some SiriusXM Guardian™ connected
services require an operable LTE (voice/data) or
3G or 4G (data) network compatible with your
device. SiriusXM Guardian™ is available only on
equipped vehicles purchased within the
continental United States, Alaska, Hawaii, Puerto
Rico and Canada.
NOTE:
Certain SiriusXM Guardian™ connected
services are dependent upon an operative
telematics device, a cellular connection, naviga-
tion map data, and GPS satellite signal recep-
tion, which can limit the ability to reach the
response center or reach emergency support.
Not all features of SiriusXM Guardian™ are
available everywhere at all times, particularly in
remote or enclosed areas.
Other factors outside the control of SiriusXM
Guardian™ that may limit or prevent service
delivery are hills, structures, buildings, tunnels,
weather, damage to the electrical system or
other important parts of your vehicle, network
congestion, civil disturbances, actions of third
parties or the government, Internet failure, and/
or the physical location of your vehicle, such as
in an underground parking structure or under a
bridge.
WARNING!
ALWAYS obey traffic laws and pay attention to
the road. ALWAYS drive safely with your hands on
the steering wheel. You have full responsibility
and assume all risks related to the use of the
features and applications in this vehicle. Only
use the features and applications when it is safe
to do so. Failure to comply may result in an
accident involving serious injury or death.
5
22_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 193
194 MULTIMEDIA
Not all SiriusXM Guardian™ features are available
for all models.
SiriusXM Guardian™ provides:
The ability to remotely lock/unlock and remote
start your vehicle from virtually anywhere by
using the Mobile App or your computer.
If equipped — Send & Go capability with the
Mobile App. Use the Mobile App to easily search,
map and send your locations directly to your
Uconnect Navigation.
The ability to locate your vehicle, when you
forget where you parked, using the Vehicle
Finder function of the Mobile App.
Before you drive, familiarize yourself with the
easy-to-use Uconnect system and SiriusXM
Guardian™ connected services.
The ASSIST and SOS Call Buttons On Your
Rearview Mirror Or Overhead Console
If equipped, the ASSIST Button is used for
contacting Roadside Assistance, Vehicle Care,
Uconnect Care, and SiriusXM Guardian™
Customer Care. The SOS Call button connects you
directly to SiriusXM Guardian™ Customer Care for
assistance in an emergency.
Activation — If Equipped
To unlock the full potential of SiriusXM Guardian™
in your vehicle, you must activate your SiriusXM
Guardian™ connected services.
1. Press the Apps icon on the bottom of your
in-vehicle touchscreen.
2. Select the Activate Services icon from your list
of apps.
3. For customers in the United States, select
“Customer Care” to speak with a SiriusXM
Guardian™ Customer Care agent who will
activate services in your vehicle, or select
“Enter Email” to activate on the web.
For customers in Canada, enter your email ad-
dress to activate services in your vehicle.
Included Trial Period For New Vehicles
Your new vehicle may come with an included trial*
period for use of SiriusXM Guardian™ connected
services starting on the date of vehicle purchase.
To get started with your trial, enrollment in
SiriusXM Guardian™ is required.
* Included trial applies to new vehicles only.
Features And Packages
After the trial period, you must purchase a
subscription to continue your services by calling a
SiriusXM Guardian™ Customer Care agent.
GETTING STARTED WITH CONNECTED
V
EHICLE SERVICES
Download The Mobile App
Once you have activated your services, you’re only
a few steps away from using connected services.
Download the Mobile App to your mobile device.
Use your Owner Account login and password to
open the app and then set up a PIN.
22_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 194
MULTIMEDIA 195
For customers in the United States, visit
www.mopar.com, and click the Sign In/Register
button in the upper right-hand corner to register
your account online.
a. Click the Register button.
b. Select the correct country and email
address then click “Register”.
c. You will then receive an email notification to
confirm/verify your newly created account.
d. After clicking the email link, it will take you
to a website and prompt you to assign your
account with a password.
e. Once you have added a password, the
website will direct you to your homepage
where you can add in your VIN.
For customers in Canada, register your account
via your vehicle.
a. Press the Apps button in the bottom menu
bar.
b. Press the Activate Services button from the
apps list.
c. Enter your email and press “OK”. A confir-
mation email will be sent to the provided
email address.
d. Press “Continue Activation” from the confir-
mation email. It may take a short time
before remote services will be available, but
you will be able to log into the Mobile App
and the Owner’s Site.
Once on the Remote screen and you have set up
your four-digit PIN, you can begin using Remote
Door Lock/Unlock, Remote Vehicle Start, and
activate your horn and lights remotely, if
equipped.
Press the Location button on the bottom menu
bar of the app to bring up a map to locate your
vehicle or send a location to your Mobile Naviga-
tion, if equipped.
Press the Settings side menu in the upper left
corner of the app to bring up app settings and
access the Assist Call Centers.
Using Your Owner’s Site
Your Owner’s Site website https://
www.mopar.com/en-us.html (US Residents), or
www.mopar.ca (Canadian Residents) provides you
with all the information you need, all in one place.
You can track your service history, find
recommended accessories for your vehicle, watch
videos about your vehicle's features, and easily
access your manuals. It is also where you can
manage your SiriusXM Guardian™ account.
This section will familiarize you with the key
elements of the website that will help you get the
most of your SiriusXM Guardian™ connected
services.
For customers in the United States, press the Sign
In/Register button and enter your email address
and password.
For customers in Canada, press the My Vehicle
button. Select from “Dashboard”, “Vehicle Health
Report”, and “Recalls”. The website will then
prompt you to log in using your email address and
password.
Edit/Edit Profile:
To manage the details of your SiriusXM
Guardian™ account, such as your contact infor-
mation, password and SiriusXM Guardian™ PIN,
click on the Edit/Edit Profile button to access
the details of your account.
Connected Services Status:
This statement will indicate your SiriusXM
Guardian™-equipped vehicle.
Remote Commands:
For vehicles with an active SiriusXM Guardian™
subscription, press one of these icons and enter
your four-digit SiriusXM Guardian™ Security PIN
to remotely start (if equipped), lock/unlock
doors or sound the horn and flash the lights.
5
22_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 195
196 MULTIMEDIA
Editing Your Notifications
Notifications are an important element of your
SiriusXM Guardian™ account. For example, any
time you use your remote services (such as
Remote Door Unlock), you can elect to receive a
text message, push notification, and/or E-mail to
notify you of the event. To set up the notifications,
please follow these instructions:
1. Log on to your Owner’s Account at
https://
www.mopar.com/en-us.html (US Residents)
and select “Dashboard”, or www.mopar.ca
(Canadian Residents), select “My Vehicle”
and then “Dashboard”.
2. Click the Edit/Edit Profile button.
3. Once there, select “SiriusXM Guardian™”
where you can edit Notification Preferences.
4. You can enter a mobile phone and/or email
address to notify you, and you can customize
the types of messages.
USING SIRIUSXM GUARDIAN ™
SOS Call — If Equipped
Access To Emergency Services At The Push Of A
Button
SiriusXM Guardian™ In-Vehicle Assistance
Features
With SiriusXM Guardian™, your vehicle has
onboard assistance features located on the
rearview mirror or overhead console designed to
enhance your driving experience if you should ever
need assistance or support.
Description
SOS Call offers a convenient way to get in contact
with a SiriusXM Guardian™ Customer Care agent
in the event of an emergency. When the
connection between the vehicle and the live agent
is made, your vehicle will automatically transmit
location information. In the event of a minor
collision, medical or any other emergency, press
the SOS button to be connected to a call center
agent who can send emergency assistance to your
vehicle’s location.
NOTE:
Certain SiriusXM Guardian™ connected services
are dependent on an operational Uconnect
system, cellular network availability that is
compatible with the device in your vehicle, and
GPS network availability. Not all features of
SiriusXM Guardian™ are available everywhere at
all times, particularly in remote or enclosed areas.
WARNING!
Some SiriusXM Guardian™ connected services,
including SOS Call and Roadside Assistance
Call, will NOT work without a network connection
compatible with your device.
Center Light Status Description
Off No call activated
Green Active call in progress
Red System error
22_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 196
MULTIMEDIA 197
How It Works
1. Push the SOS Call button; the indicator light
will turn green indicating a call has been
placed.
NOTE:
In case the SOS Call button is accidentally
pushed, there is a 10-second delay before
the SOS call is placed. The system will
verbally alert you that a call is about to be
made. To cancel the SOS Call connection,
push the SOS Call button on the rearview
mirror or overhead console or press the
Cancel button on the touchscreen within 10
seconds.
During an SOS Call, the Bluetooth®-paired
phone is disconnected so incoming or
outgoing calls will go through your mobile
device versus the hands-free system which
is not available due to the SOS Call.
2. Once a connection between the vehicle and a
SiriusXM Guardian™ Customer Care agent is
made, the agent will stay on the line with you.
NOTE:
Calls between the vehicle occupants and the
SiriusXM Guardian™ Customer Care center may be
recorded or monitored for quality assurance
purposes. Through your enrollment in and use of
the SiriusXM Guardian™ connected services, you
consent to being recorded.
SOS Call System Limitations
Vehicles that have been purchased in the US and
that travel into Mexico and Canada may have
limited services. In particular, responses to SOS
calls or other emergency services may be
unavailable or very limited. Vehicles purchased
outside the United States and Canada are unable
to receive SiriusXM Guardian™ connected
services.
If the SOS Call system detects a malfunction, any
of the following may occur at the time the
malfunction is detected:
The light will continuously be illuminated red.
The screen will display the following message
“Vehicle phone requires service. Please contact
your dealer.”
An in-vehicle audio message will state “Vehicle
phone requires service. Please contact your
dealer.”
Even if the SOS Call system is fully functional,
factors beyond FCA US LLC’s control may prevent
or stop SOS Call system operation. These include,
but are not limited to, the following factors:
The ignition key is in OFF position.
The vehicle’s electrical systems are not intact.
The vehicle battery loses power or becomes
disconnected during a vehicle crash.
The SOS Call system software and/or hardware
is damaged during a vehicle crash.
LTE (voice/data) or 3G or 4G (data) coverage
and/or GPS signals are unavailable or
obstructed.
Network congestion.
Weather conditions.
Buildings, structures, geographic terrain, or
tunnels.
If your vehicle loses battery power for any reason
(including during or after an accident), the SOS Call
system, among other vehicle systems, will not
operate.
Requirements
This feature is available only on vehicles sold in
the US or Canada.
Vehicle must be properly equipped with the Siri-
usXM Guardian™ connected services. Vehicle
must be registered with SiriusXM Guardian™
and have an active subscription that includes
the applicable feature.
Vehicle must have an operable LTE (voice/data)
or 3G or 4G (data) network connection compat-
ible with your device.
Vehicle must be powered in the ON/RUN or ACC
(Accessory) position with a properly functioning
electrical system.
5
22_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 197
198 MULTIMEDIA
(Continued)
Automatic SOS — If Equipped
Automatic SOS is a hands-free safety service that
can immediately connect you with help in the event
that your vehicle’s airbags deploy. After an
accident, a live agent will contact you through the
Uconnect system and alert emergency services.
NOTE:
An active SiriusXM Guardian™ subscription is
required for this feature to function.
After a crash where the airbags deploy:
1. Automatic SOS will initiate a call with an
agent.
2. An agent will receive the call and confirm the
location of the emergency.
3. If needed, the agent will request the
assistance of emergency services.
4. First responders will arrive on scene. The
agent will remain on the call until emergency
services arrive.
WARNING!
Never place anything on or near the vehicle’s
LTE (voice/data) or 3G or 4G (data) and GPS
antennas. You could prevent LTE (voice/data)
or 4G (data) and GPS signal reception, which
can prevent your vehicle from placing an
emergency call.
Do not add any aftermarket electrical equip-
ment to the vehicle’s electrical system. This
may prevent your vehicle from sending a
signal to initiate an emergency call. To avoid
interference that can cause the SOS Call
system to fail, never add aftermarket equip-
ment (e.g., two-way mobile radio, CB radio,
data recorder, etc.) to your vehicle’s electrical
system or modify the antennas on your
vehicle. IF YOUR VEHICLE LOSES POWER FOR
ANY REASON (INCLUDING DURING OR AFTER
AN ACCIDENT), NEITHER THE MOBILE APPS
NOR THE SIRIUSXM GUARDIAN™ CONNECTED
SERVICES WILL OPERATE.
The Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) turns
on the Air Bag Warning Light on the instru-
ment panel if a malfunction in any part of the
air bag system is detected. If the Air Bag
Warning Light is illuminated, the air bag
system may not be working properly and the
SOS Call system may not be able to send a
signal to the SiriusXM Guardian™ Customer
Care center. If the Air Bag Warning Light is illu-
minated, have an authorized dealer service
your vehicle immediately.
Ignoring the Rearview Mirror Light could mean
you will not have SOS Call services if needed.
If the Rearview Mirror Light is illuminated,
have an authorized dealer service the SOS
Call system immediately.
If anyone in the vehicle could be in danger
(e.g., fire or smoke is visible, dangerous road
conditions or location), do not wait for voice
contact from a SiriusXM Guardian™ Customer
Care agent. All occupants should exit the
vehicle immediately and move to a safe loca-
tion.
Failure to perform scheduled maintenance
and regular inspection of your vehicle may
result in vehicle damage, accident or injury.
WARNING!
22_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 198
MULTIMEDIA 199
NOTE:
Agents are available 24/7 to assist you in the
case of an emergency.
On your behalf, agents are able to notify family
members about the collision.
Agents can brief first responders of the situation
before they arrive on scene.
In the event vehicle occupants are unable to
speak, emergency services will be dispatched
based on the last known GPS coordinates.
SiriusXM Guardian™ connected services are
dependent upon an operative telematics
device, a cellular connection, navigation map
data, and GPS satellite reception, which can
limit the ability to reach the response center or
reach emergency support.
Terms of service of the Uconnect and the Siri-
usXM Guardian™ subscriber agreement apply.
See terms of services for complete service
limitation.
Remote Commands
On the Remote Commands screen, you have
access to several vehicle features that can be
controlled remotely from your mobile device. These
features include locking/unlocking, remote
starting, and activating the horn and lights of the
vehicle.
Remote Commands lets you send a request to your
vehicle in one of three ways:
Anywhere using your mobile device and Mobile
App
From your computer on the Owner’s Site (not
available on all functions)
Contacting SiriusXM Guardian™ Customer Care
(not available on all functions)
Using A Remote Command Through Your Mobile
Device And The Mobile App
1. Press the desired Remote Command icon on
your mobile device.
2. A pop-up screen will appear asking for your
SiriusXM Guardian™ Security PIN (this is the
same four-digit code established when you
activated your SiriusXM Guardian™ connected
services). Enter the SiriusXM Guardian™
Security PIN on the keypad.
3. It may take 30 seconds or more for the
command to go through to your vehicle.
4. A message will let you know if the command
was received by your vehicle.
Using A Remote Command Through Your Owner’s
Site
1. Log on to your Owner’s Site using the
username and password you used when
activating your SiriusXM Guardian™
connected services in your vehicle.
NOTE:
If you forgot your username or password, links are
provided on the website to help you retrieve them.
2. If you have more than one vehicle registered
into your Owner’s Site, select the vehicle you
want to send the command to by clicking on its
image along the top.
Lock
Press this button to
lock your vehicle.
Vehicle Start
Press this button to
start your vehicle.
Horn & Lights
Press this button to
sound the horn and
activate your lights.
Unlock
Press this button to
unlock your vehicle.
Cancel Vehicle Start
Press this button to
cancel remote start.
5
22_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 199
200 MULTIMEDIA
3. On your dashboard, you will see remote
commands. Press the desired icon to activate
that feature.
4. You will then be asked to enter your SiriusXM
Guardian™ Security PIN (this is the same
four-digit code established when you activated
your SiriusXM Guardian™ connected services).
Please enter your SiriusXM Guardian™
Security PIN.
5. A message will appear on the screen to let you
know if the command was received by your
vehicle.
Contacting SiriusXM Guardian™ Customer Care
(for example, in case of an accidental lock-out):
1. Contact SiriusXM Guardian™ Customer Care
if you are unable to lock your vehicle through
the Mobile App or your key fob.
2. For security purposes, the SiriusXM
Guardian™ Customer Care agent will verify
your identity by asking for your four-digit
SiriusXM Guardian™ Security PIN.
3. After providing your SiriusXM Guardian™
Security PIN, you can ask them to perform a
remote command.
NOTE:
Anyone with access to your PIN may request
Remote Door Lock/Unlock. It is your responsibility
to protect your PIN appropriately.
Remote Door Lock/Unlock
Description
The Remote Door Lock/Unlock feature provides
you the ability to lock or unlock the door on your
vehicle without the keys and from virtually any
distance.
Working Vehicle Conditions
The vehicle must in PARK or at a standstill.
The vehicle must be in an open area with cell
tower reception.
Your mobile device must have a cellular or Wi-Fi
connection.
Requirements
Vehicle must be properly equipped with Siri-
usXM Guardian™.
Vehicle must have an operable LTE (voice/data)
or 3G or 4G (data) network connection. If using
the Mobile App to command your vehicle, your
device must be compatible and be connected to
an operable LTE (voice/data) or 3G or 4G (data)
network connection.
Vehicle must be registered with SiriusXM
Guardian™ and have an active subscription that
includes the applicable feature.
An ignition cycle is required for some remote
commands, such as Remote Vehicle Start and
Remote Door Lock/Unlock if following a Remote
Horn & Lights activation.
Your Remote Door Lock/Unlock request will not
be processed if the vehicle is in motion, the igni-
tion key is on or during an emergency call.
NOTE:
All other remote services should be performed via
your Owner’s Site or through the Mobile App on
your compatible device.
Remote Vehicle Start
Description
The Remote Vehicle Start feature provides you with
the ability to start the engine on your vehicle
without the keys and from virtually any distance.
Once started, the preset climate controls in your
vehicle can warm up or cool down the interior.
You can also send a command to turn off an
engine that has been started using Remote Vehicle
Start. After 15 minutes, if you have not entered
your vehicle with the key, the engine will shut off
automatically.
This remote function requires your vehicle to be
equipped with a factory-installed Remote Start
system.
You can set up push notifications every time a
command is sent to activate or cancel Remote
Start.
22_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 200
MULTIMEDIA 201
Working Vehicle Conditions
The vehicle must be off or in ACC mode.
The vehicle has been started with the key fob
within the last 14 days.
The vehicle must be in PARK or at a standstill.
The vehicle’s security system has been armed
and not triggered since the last vehicle start.
The doors, hood, and trunk/liftgate are closed.
The vehicle’s check engine light must be off.
The vehicle must have at least a quarter tank of
fuel, along with oil and battery power.
The vehicle’s hazard lights must be off.
If equipped, the vehicle must have an automatic
transmission.
The vehicle must be in an open area with cell
tower reception.
Your mobile device must have a cellular or Wi-Fi
connection.
If the Panic button has been pressed, the
vehicle must be started at least once after
alarming the system.
NOTE:
The SiriusXM Guardian™ Customer Care agents
are not authorized for Remote Vehicle Start
services. Contact the Uconnect Care Team for
assistance.
Remote Horn & Lights
Description
It is easy to locate a vehicle in a dark, crowded or
noisy parking area by activating the horn and
lights. It may also help if you need to draw attention
to your vehicle for any reason.
If you want, you can set up push notifications every
time a command is sent to turn on the horn and
lights.
Working Vehicle Conditions
The vehicle must in PARK or at a standstill.
The vehicle must be in an open area with cell
tower reception.
Your mobile device must have a cellular or Wi-Fi
connection.
NOTE:
The Remote Horn & Lights feature is designed to
be loud and get noticed. Please keep in mind the
surroundings when using this feature. You are
responsible for compliance with local laws, rules
and ordinances in the location of your vehicle
when using Remote Horn & Lights.
Assist — If Equipped
Description
Vehicles equipped with the SiriusXM Guardian™
connected services feature may contain an ASSIST
button in the vehicle. Once your SiriusXM
Guardian™ connected services have been
activated, the ASSIST button can connect you
directly to the Customer Care call center (if
equipped). You will be directed to one of the four
services below:
Roadside Assistance — If you get a flat tire or
need a tow, you’ll be connected to someone
who can help anytime.
Connected Services — Contact the SiriusXM
Guardian™ Customer Care call center to acti-
vate your services, renew after your trial has
expired, for in-vehicle support for your SiriusXM
Guardian™ connected services, or help
answering any general questions surrounding
your connected services.
Uconnect Care — In-vehicle support for all
non-connected Uconnect system features, such
as radio and Bluetooth® connections.
Vehicle Care — Total support for your vehicle.
5
22_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 201
202 MULTIMEDIA
SiriusXM Guardian™ In-Vehicle Assistance
Features — If Equipped
With SiriusXM Guardian™, your vehicle has
onboard assistance features located on the
rearview mirror or overhead console designed to
enhance your driving experience if you should ever
need assistance or support.
How It Works
Simply push the ASSIST button in the vehicle and
you will be presented with your ASSIST options on
the touchscreen. Make your selection by pressing
the touchscreen.
Requirements
This feature is available only on vehicles sold in
the US and Canada.
Vehicle must be properly equipped with the Siri-
usXM Guardian™ connected services.
Vehicle must have an operable LTE (voice/data)
or 3G or 4G (data) network connection.
Vehicle must be registered with SiriusXM
Guardian™ and have an active subscription that
includes the applicable feature.
Vehicle must be powered in the ON/RUN or ACC
(Accessory) position with a properly functioning
electrical system.
Disclaimers
If Roadside Assistance Call is provided to your
vehicle, you agree to be responsible for any
additional roadside assistance service costs that
you may incur. In order to provide SiriusXM
Guardian™ connected services to you, we may
record and monitor your conversations with
Roadside Assistance Call, Vehicle Care, Uconnect
Care, or SiriusXM Guardian™ Customer Care,
whether such conversations are initiated through
the SiriusXM Guardian™ connected services in
your vehicle, or via a landline or mobile device, and
may share information obtained through such
recording and monitoring in accordance with
regulatory requirements. You acknowledge, agree
and consent to any recording, monitoring or
sharing of information obtained through any such
call recordings.
Send & Go — If Equipped
Description
The Send & Go feature allows you to search for a
destination on your mobile device, and then send
the route to your vehicle’s Navigation system.
How It Works
1. There are multiple ways to find a destination.
After selecting the Location tab at the bottom
of the App, browse through one of the
categories provided, or type the name or
keyword in the search box. You can also
select categories such as “Favorites” or
“Contact List”.
2. Select your destination from the list that
appears. Location information will then be
displayed on the map.
From this screen, you will be able to:
View the location on a map.
See the distance from your current location.
Send the destination to the vehicle
(Send & Go).
3. Send the destination to the Uconnect
Navigation in your vehicle. You can also call
the destination by pressing the Call button.
4. Confirm your destination in the vehicle through
a notification or in the Navigation system.
Requirements
Vehicle must have an operable LTE (voice/data)
or 3G or 4G (data) network connection compat-
ible with your device.
Vehicle must have an active subscription that
includes the applicable feature.
22_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 202
MULTIMEDIA 203
Vehicle Finder
Description
The Vehicle Finder feature allows you to find the
location of your vehicle.
You can also sound the horn and flash the lights to
make finding your vehicle even easier.
How It Works
Select the Vehicle Finder function within the
Mobile App and select the Location tab at the
bottom of the App. Then, press the Vehicle icon to
find your vehicle.
Requirements
Vehicle must be properly equipped with the
Uconnect system.
Vehicle must have an operable LTE (voice/data)
or 3G or 4G (data) network connection compat-
ible with your device.
Vehicle must have an active subscription that
includes the applicable feature.
Vehicle ignition must have been turned on
within 14 days.
4G Wi-Fi Hotspot — If Equipped
Description
4G Wi-Fi Hotspot is an in-vehicle service that
connects your device to an LTE (voice/data) or 4G
(data) network that is ready to go wherever you are.
After you've made your purchase, turn on your
device’s Wi-Fi and connect your devices.
Enables all your passengers to be simultane-
ously connected to the web.
Connect several devices at one time.
Any Wi-Fi-enabled device — such as a laptop or
any other portable-enabled media — can
connect over your private in-vehicle network.
A high-speed, secured connection lets anyone
on your private network access the Web — great
for working and relaxing.
Create A 4G Wi-Fi Hotspot For Use In Your Vehicle
How It Works
The 4G Wi-Fi Hotspot feature provides
the vehicle passengers with an internet
access hotspot in the vehicle, using the
radio as an access point. The hotspot will
allow Wi-Fi-enabled in-vehicle devices (such as a
laptop or any other portable-enabled media
device) to wirelessly connect to the internet.
Uconnect offers a complimentary 3-month trial
period that includes 1GB of total data. The trial can
be activated any time within the first year of new
vehicle ownership.
Use one of these three ways to purchase a
subscription to the 4G Wi-Fi Hotspot:
1. From your vehicle’s touchscreen, select the
4G Wi-Fi Hotspot App, and press the How To
Purchase button and follow the instructions.
2. Log onto your Owner’s Site and click the link to
the AT&T portal to get set up.
3. For existing Connected Car customers: Push
the ASSIST button to be routed to an AT&T
Customer Care agent who will assist you.
WARNING!
The driver should NEVER use the 4G Wi-Fi
Hotspot while driving the vehicle as doing so
may result in an accident involving serious injury
or death.
5
22_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 203
204 MULTIMEDIA
Once the 4G Wi-Fi Hotspot is purchased, you can
change its name and the password by selecting the
Wi-Fi Hotspot App and pressing the Setup Wi-Fi
Hotspot button. You can also view the connected
devices from the app screen by pressing the View
Connected Devices button.
NOTE:
A SiriusXM Guardian™ subscription is not required
in order to purchase and use the 4G Wi-Fi Hotspot.
Stolen Vehicle Assistance — If Equipped
Description
If your vehicle is stolen, the SiriusXM Guardian™
Customer Care agent may be able to locate the
stolen vehicle and work with law enforcement to
help recover it.
How It Works
1. If your vehicle is stolen, contact local law
enforcement as soon as possible. They will
work with you to file a stolen vehicle report.
2. Next, inform SiriusXM Guardian™ Customer
Care that your vehicle has been stolen.
The SiriusXM Guardian™ Customer Care Agent
will ask for the stolen vehicle report number
(as issued by your local law enforcement). If
you have downloaded the Mobile App, you can
push the Settings menu button on your device,
select “Help”, and then select “SiriusXM
Guardian™ Customer Care” to make the call.
3. SiriusXM Guardian™ Customer Care will
authenticate that you are the owner of the
vehicle and contact the law enforcement with
whom you filed the stolen vehicle report.
4. SiriusXM Guardian™ Customer Care will work
with your local law enforcement to locate the
vehicle. You will be contacted by law
enforcement if your vehicle is recovered. While
the investigation is ongoing, you should also
contact your insurance company to inform it of
the situation.
Requirements
Vehicle must be properly equipped with the
Uconnect system.
Vehicle must have an operable LTE (voice/data)
or 3G or 4G (data) network connection compat-
ible with your device.
Vehicle must be registered with SiriusXM
Guardian™ and have an active subscription that
includes the applicable feature.
NOTE:
Not all features of SiriusXM Guardian™ are
available everywhere at all times, particularly in
remote or enclosed areas.
Monthly Vehicle Health Report —
If Equipped
Description
Monthly Vehicle Health Report is a Uconnect
service through which a summary of the
performance of your vehicle’s key systems will be
sent to you every month so you can stay on top of
your vehicle’s maintenance needs. This is provided
as a convenience to you and does not substitute
for regular maintenance to your vehicle.
WARNING!
Always drive safely with your hands on the
steering wheel and obey all applicable laws. You
have full responsibility and assume all risks
related to the use of the features and
applications in this vehicle. Only use the
features and applications in this vehicle when it
is safe to do so. Failure to comply may result in
an accident involving in serious injury or death.
22_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 204
MULTIMEDIA 205
In order to provide the Monthly Vehicle Health
Report, the Uconnect system in your vehicle may
collect and transmit vehicle data to SiriusXM
Guardian™ and to FCA, such as your vehicle’s
health and performance, your vehicle’s location,
your utilization of the features in your vehicle, and
other data.
This data collection and transmission begins when
you enroll in SiriusXM Guardian™ and will continue
even if you cancel your SiriusXM Guardian™
subscription unless you call SiriusXM Guardian™
Customer Care and tell them to deactivate your
Uconnect Services.
Please see the Uconnect Privacy Policy for more
information, located at www.driveuconnect.com/
connectedservices/privacy.html (US Residents) or
www.driveuconnect.ca (Canadian Residents).
For more information on SiriusXM Guardian™
private policy, see https://siriusxmcvs.com/
privacy-policy.
Vehicle Health Alert —If Equipped
Description
Your vehicle will send you an email alert if it senses
a problem with one of your vehicle’s key systems.
For further information, go to your Owner’s
website.
NOTE:
Vehicle Health Alert emails require you to register
and activate services. During this process you will
be asked to provide an email address to which the
reports will be sent.
In-Vehicle Notifications — If Equipped
Description
Your vehicle will send you notifications to remind
you when services are needed, or to alert you of
other important information, such as recall
notices. When you receive a notification through
your touchscreen, press OK to dismiss the
message, or press Call Care to speak with a
SiriusXM Guardian™ Customer Care agent.
NOTE:
Pressing “OK” or the X button on the pop-up screen
will dismiss or close the pop-up, and the In-Vehicle
Messages mailbox will display. In the Mailbox, you
can reopen messages or delete messages.
Amazon Alexa Skill — If Equipped
Enjoy the convenience of using your voice to
command your vehicle with Amazon Alexa!
With Amazon Alexa, you can connect to your
vehicle and remotely access key services and
features.
If your vehicle is equipped with Uconnect
Navigation, you can send a destination directly to
your vehicle using Alexa.
If you need assistance, you can always ask Alexa
for help, or complete a list of commands by saying:
“Alexa, ask <brand name> for help with my car.”
Here are a few of the many questions you can ask
Alexa:
“Alexa, ask <vehicle brand> to start my <vehicle
name> with your Voice Code .”
“Alexa, ask <vehicle brand> to lock my <vehicle
name> with your Voice Code.”
“Alexa, ask <vehicle brand> to send 1000
Chrysler Drive, Auburn Hills, Michigan to my
<vehicle name>.”
“Alexa, ask <vehicle brand> what is the fuel
level of my <vehicle name>.”
An active subscription to SiriusXM Guardian™ is
required. To use Amazon Alexa, first, register for
SiriusXM Guardian™ Ú page 194.
Next, link the Uconnect system on your vehicle to
Amazon Alexa:
1. Download the Amazon Alexa app on your
mobile device (Apple® or Android™).
2. Once in the app, tap MENU and go to SKILLS.
3. Search for <vehicle brand> skill, then tap
Enable.
4. Tap SAVE SETTINGS when prompted.
5. Link the vehicle brand name to the <vehicle
brand> Skill by tapping LINK ACCOUNT.
5
22_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 205
206 MULTIMEDIA
6. Log in using your Owner Account credentials.
This will be the same user name and password
you used when registering for SiriusXM
Guardian™ connected services. There will be
additional settings to confirm on the following
screen.
7. AUTHORIZE the account to return to the
<vehicle brand> Skill.
You can now begin using the <vehicle brand> Skill
on Alexa!
Google Assistant — If Equipped
With the Google Assistant, you can get help and
keep tabs on your car. Google Assistant is available
across your devices, including Android™ phones,
iPhone® devices, or voice-activated speakers, like
Google Home. If you need assistance, ask Google
for help, or for a complete list of commands by
saying: “Hey Google, ask <brand name> for help
with my car.”
Here are a few examples of commands:
“Hey Google, ask <vehicle brand> to start my
<vehicle name> with your Voice Code.”
“Hey Google, ask <vehicle brand> to lock my
<vehicle name> with your Voice Code.”
“Hey Google, ask <vehicle brand> to send 1000
Chrysler Drive, Auburn Hills, Michigan to my
<vehicle name>.”
“Hey Google, ask <vehicle brand> what is the
fuel level of my <vehicle name>.”
To link your Uconnect account with Google
Assistant, follow these steps:
1. Download and install the Google Assistant
app on your smart phone from the App
Store® or Google Play.
2. After installation, log in to the Google Assistant
app with your Gmail ID. Verify your account by
pressing the icon in the upper right-hand
corner.
3. Press the Discover button in the bottom left
corner of the screen. Enter the vehicle brand
name.
4. A prompt will appear to link your Uconnect
account. Press “Link Uconnect to Google”.
5. Press “Sign In” and enter the email address
and password you created when you activated
SiriusXM Guardian™. There will be additional
settings to confirm on the following screen.
6. Lastly, press “Authorize” to complete the
linking process.
Now, you can ask Google Assistant to help you:
Remotely start the engine, or cancel a remote
start
Send a destination to your vehicle’s built-in
Uconnect Navigation system
Monitor vehicle vitals, such as tire pressure, fuel
level and oil life
And more!
Family Drive Alerts — If Equipped
Description
Family Drive Alerts help promote safer driving and
give you peace of mind when your loved ones are
out on the road. You can set boundary limits,
monitor driving speed, and pinpoint your vehicle’s
location any time, any place. Use the Mobile App to
set alerts:
Boundary Alert
Receive a notification the moment your vehicle
is driven either out of or into a geographic
boundary that you set.
Curfew Alert
Receive a notification when your car is being
driven outside of the curfew time.
Speed Alert
Receive a notification whenever your car
exceeds a speed limit you set.
Valet Alert
Receive a notification if and when your vehicle is
driven outside a quarter-mile radius of a valet
drop-off zone.
22_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 206
MULTIMEDIA 207
SmartWatch Integration — If Equipped
Description
SmartWatch Integration puts the Mobile App right
on your Apple® Watch or Android™ Wear. To get
started, follow these steps:
1. Download the Mobile App from the App
Store® or Google Play.
2. Log onto the app from your smartphone using
the username and password you created when
you first set up your account.
3. Make sure your watch and smartphone are
connected through Bluetooth®.
4. The Mobile App should appear on your
SmartWatch.
Once the app is downloaded on your SmartWatch,
you can enjoy these features:
Lock or unlock your vehicle by tapping the
remote lock button in the app and entering your
security PIN.
Remote start or stop your vehicle.
View important vehicle stats, such as fuel level,
vehicle location, tire pressure warning, and
more.
For help, refer to the Uconnect YouTube channel
for SmartWatch Integration.
MANAGE MY SIRIUSXM GUARDIAN ™
A
CCOUNT
To manage your SiriusXM Guardian™ account,
press the ASSIST button in your vehicle, or call
SiriusXM Guardian™ Customer Care.
NOTE:
It is recommended, when selling your vehicle, or
turning in your lease, to call SiriusXM Guardian™
Care to remove your personal data.
CONNECTED SERVICES FAQS
For additional information about SiriusXM
Guardian™, active subscribers can push the
ASSIST button (if equipped) and then select
SiriusXM Guardian™ Call on your in-vehicle
touchscreen to contact SiriusXM Guardian™. Your
call will be directed to a SiriusXM Guardian™ agent
or held in a queue until an agent is available. If you
do not have an active subscription, push the
ASSIST button and press the Activate button on the
touchscreen to activate services.
CONNECTED SERVICES SOS FAQS —
I
F EQUIPPED
1.
What happens if I accidentally push the SOS
Call button on the mirror or overhead console?
You have 10 seconds after pushing the SOS
Call button to cancel the call. To cancel the
call, either push the SOS Call button again, or
press the Cancel button on the in-vehicle
touchscreen.
2. What type of information is sent when I use the
SOS Call button from my vehicle? Certain
vehicle information, such as make and model,
is transmitted along with the last known GPS
location.
3. When could I use the SOS Call button? You can
use the SOS Call button to make a call if you or
someone else needs emergency assistance.
CONNECTED SERVICES REMOTE DOOR
L
OCK/UNLOCK FAQS
1.
How long does it take to unlock or lock the
door?
Depending on various conditions, it can
take up to three minutes or more for the
request to get to your vehicle.
5
22_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 207
208 MULTIMEDIA
2. Which is faster, my key fob or the Mobile App?
Your key fob will lock/unlock the door more
quickly, however its range is limited and your
Mobile App comes in handy for these and
other situations.
3. Will my vehicle be safe if I lose my device?
People sometimes lose their mobile devices,
which is why security measures have been
engineered into the Mobile App. Asking for
your username, password and SiriusXM
Guardian™ Security PIN are required for the
activation of Remote services through your
mobile device. It is your responsibility to
protect your passwords and PINs.
4. Why can’t all mobile devices use the Mobile
App? The Mobile App is compatible with most
devices with the Apple® and Android™
operating systems. The capabilities of these
devices allow us to remotely command your
vehicle. Other operating systems may be
supported in the future.
5. Why is the Mobile App running slow? The
Mobile App relies on a mobile network
connection from your device to send
commands to your vehicle which must have an
operable LTE (voice/data) or 3G, 4G (data), or
5G (data) network connection. If either your
device or your vehicle is in an area with below
average coverage, it may take longer to log in
and send commands.
CONNECTED SERVICES ROADSIDE
A
SSISTANCE FAQS
1.
What is the phone number for roadside
assistance call? The phone number is:
US: 1-800-521-2779
Canada: 1-800-363-4869
2. If I am subscribed to SiriusXM Guardian™,
does it cover towing or other expenses
incurred by using roadside assistance? No,
however your new vehicle may include
Roadside Assistance Call services.
CONNECTED SERVICES SEND & GO
FAQ
S — IF EQUIPPED
1.
How long does it take to send the route and
destination to my vehicle?
Depending on
various conditions, it can take up to three
minutes for the request to get through to your
vehicle.
2. Can I cancel a route I sent to my vehicle? Yes,
once you enter your vehicle, and start the
engine, the pop-up message stating that you
have a new route will appear. There is an exit
button on the pop-up that will cancel the route
if selected.
3. Can I select a different route than the most
recent one I sent to my vehicle? Yes, once you
enter the vehicle, and start the engine, the
pop-up message offers a “Locations” option.
Once “Locations” is selected, you can choose
from a list of recently sent destinations.
CONNECTED SERVICES VEHICLE FINDER
FAQ
S
1.
Can someone else locate my vehicle?
Your
vehicle may be located by anyone who has
your PIN and access to your account. It is your
responsibility to guard your PIN accordingly.
See the Uconnect and SiriusXM Guardian™
terms of service for more information.
2. How long does it take to sound my horn and
flash the lights? Depending on various
conditions, it can take three minutes or more
for the request to get through to your vehicle.
3. How do I turn off the horn and lights after I turn
them on? If you are close enough to the
vehicle, you can use the key fob to turn off the
horn and lights by pushing the red Panic
button.
22_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 208
MULTIMEDIA 209
CONNECTED SERVICES STOLEN VEHICLE
A
SSISTANCE FAQS — IF EQUIPPED
1.
Can someone locate my vehicle?
To enhance
your privacy, and the privacy of others using
your vehicle, a stolen vehicle police report is
required for you to activate this service. You
must involve local law enforcement to have
SiriusXM Guardian™ locate your vehicle. We
may also locate the vehicle for other law
enforcement or government agencies,
subject to a valid court order telling SiriusXM
Guardian™ to do so. We will also provide the
service for FCA entities to locate a vehicle that
you have purchased through them.
2. How will I know if my vehicle is recovered?
After you provide the SiriusXM Guardian™
Customer Care agent with the stolen vehicle
report, the agent will work together with law
enforcement to try to locate your vehicle. If
your vehicle is recovered, you will be contacted
by law enforcement.
3. Can SiriusXM Guardian™ lower my insurance
rates? Some insurance providers offer lower
rates on vehicles equipped with systems that
can deter auto theft. When shopping for
insurance, be sure to inform the insurance
provider of your SiriusXM Guardian™
connected services subscription to find out if
the insurance provider can offer you a lower
rate.
NOTE:
Neither FCA nor SiriusXM® are insurance
companies, and SiriusXM Guardian™ is not an
insurance product. You are responsible for
obtaining insurance coverage for your vehicle and
yourself.
CONNECTED SERVICES REMOTE VEHICLE
S
TART FAQS
1.
How long does it take to remotely start my
vehicle?
Depending on various conditions, it
can take three minutes or more for the
request to get through to your vehicle.
2. Which is faster, my key fob or the Mobile App?
Your key fob will remote start your vehicle
more quickly. However its range is limited. For
example, when you are leaving the stadium
after the game, you can use the Mobile App to
remote start your vehicle and have the inside
of your vehicle comfortable by the time you get
to it.
3. Will my vehicle be safe if I lose my wireless
device? People sometimes lose their wireless
devices, which is why security measures have
been engineered into the Mobile App. Asking
for your username, password and SiriusXM
Guardian™ Security PIN help to ensure that
nobody can start your vehicle if they happen to
find your device.
4. Can someone drive off with my vehicle using
the App? No. Driving your vehicle still requires
the keys to be in the vehicle. The Remote Start
feature simply starts the engine to warm up or
cool down the interior before you arrive.
5. Can I stop a vehicle that is being driven with
the cancel Remote Vehicle Start command?
No. If the vehicle is in motion, the cancel
Remote Vehicle Start button will not stop the
vehicle.
5
22_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 209
210 MULTIMEDIA
6. Why can’t all mobile devices use the Mobile
App? The Mobile App has been designed to
work on most devices with the Apple® and
Android™ operating systems. The capabilities
of these devices allow us to remotely
command your vehicle. Other operating
systems may be supported in the future.
CONNECTED SERVICES REMOTE HORN
& L
IGHTS FAQS
1.
How long does it take to sound my horn and
flash the lights?
Depending on various
conditions, it can take three minutes or more
for the request to get through to your vehicle.
2. Which is faster, my key fob or the Mobile App?
Your key fob will sound the horn and flash the
lights quicker; however, its range is limited.
3. How do I turn off the horn and lights after I turn
them on? If you are close enough to the
vehicle, you can use the key fob to turn off the
horn and lights by pressing the red Panic
button. Otherwise, Remote Horn & Lights will
continue for a maximum of three minutes.
4. Why can’t all mobile devices use the Mobile
App? The Mobile App has been designed to
work on most devices with the Apple® and
Android™ operating systems. The capabilities
of these devices allow us to remotely
command your vehicle. Other operating
systems may be supported in the future.
CONNECTED SERVICES ACCOUNT
FAQ
S — IF EQUIPPED
1.
How do I register for my SiriusXM Guardian™
account? There are three ways that you can
register your SiriusXM Guardian™ Account:
Push the ASSIST button. A call will be placed
to an agent who can assist in registering
your new account.
Press the Activate Services icon in the Apps
menu. Select the button to speak with an
agent, who can assist in registering your
new account.
Press the Activate Services icon in the Apps
menu. Enter your email on the touchscreen
and then follow the prompts from the
provided email. You will receive an email
with an activation link that will be good for
72 hours. Once you click the activation link,
you will be prompted to fill out your informa-
tion and accept Terms and Conditions.
Then, you will be directed to the SiriusXM
Guardian™ home page to complete your
profile and demo the remote services.
2. Why do I need an email address? Without an
email address, customers cannot register for
SiriusXM Guardian™. Customers need to
register so they can subscribe to receive
additional services and create a SiriusXM
Guardian™ Security PIN for remote command
requests.
3. How do I create a SiriusXM Guardian™ security
PIN? Set up your SiriusXM Guardian™ Security
PIN during the registration process. The
SiriusXM Guardian™ Security PIN will be
required to authenticate you when accessing
your account via SiriusXM Guardian™ Call or
performing any remote services, such as
Remote Door Lock/Unlock, Remote Horn &
Lights, or Remote Vehicle Start.
22_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 210
MULTIMEDIA 211
4. What if I forgot my SiriusXM Guardian™
security PIN? If you’ve already activated
services and forgot your SiriusXM Guardian™
Security PIN, you can reset the PIN by selecting
Edit Profile on your Owner’s Site.
5. How do I update my SiriusXM Guardian™
payment account address? Your SiriusXM
Guardian™ Payment Account address can be
updated online, or by calling SiriusXM
Guardian™ Customer Care from ASSIST in your
vehicle. To update online: login to your Owner’s
Site, and select Edit Profile > SiriusXM
Guardian™ Payment Account.
6. How do I update my SiriusXM Guardian™
profile? Your name, home address, phone
number, email address and SiriusXM
Guardian™ Security PIN can be updated online
on your Owner’s Site. Log in to your Owner’s
Site then select Edit Profile to edit your
personal information. Make your edits and
click Save.
7. Can I try features or packages before I buy
them? Your new vehicle purchase may have
come with an included trial period for certain
Apps and services.
8. Can I access every App and service while
driving? No, some applications and services
are not available while driving. For your own
safety, it is not possible to use some of the
touchscreen features while the vehicle is in
motion (e.g. key pad).
9. What happens when my subscription comes
up for renewal? If you have added a credit card
to your account information, your subscription
will be automatically renewed for a term length
in accordance with the service plan that you
have selected at the then current subscription
rate and on every renewal date thereafter,
unless you cancel your subscription by calling
SiriusXM Guardian™ Care. If you have not
added a credit card to your account, SiriusXM
Guardian™ will send you an email or letter in
advance of your expiration date to remind you
that your subscription is ending soon.
10. How do I manage my SiriusXM Guardian™
notification preferences? Contact SiriusXM
Guardian™ Customer Care, or go to your
Owner’s Site and then update your
preferences on the SiriusXM Guardian™
customer web portal.
11. How do I purchase a subscription? Contact
SiriusXM Guardian™ Customer Care by
pushing the ASSIST button on your rearview
mirror or overhead console.
12. How do I update my credit card information?
Login to your Owner’s Site, and select Edit
Profile, then select SiriusXM Guardian™
Payment Account.
13. How do I find out how much longer I have on
my subscription? Contact SiriusXM Guardian™
Customer Care.
You also can visit your Owner’s Site and
choose a subscription to view its expiration
date. When your subscription is about to
expire, you will receive an email or letter of
notification.
5
22_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 211
212 MULTIMEDIA
14. Can I get a refund if I have not used the entire
subscription? Prorated refunds are provided
from the date of cancellation for annual plans
or longer. Please see the Uconnect and
SiriusXM Guardian™ Terms & Conditions for
refunds related to billing plans of other lengths
and other circumstances.
15. Can I cancel a subscription before it expires?
Yes. If you have an annual subscription, your
subscription will be canceled the day you
cancel. If you have a monthly subscription,
your subscription will be canceled on the last
day of the month in which you choose to
cancel.
16. What should I do if I want to sell my vehicle?
Before your vehicle is sold to a new owner,
you’ll want to remove your account
information. This process removes all personal
information, returns the Uconnect system to
its original factory settings, removes all
SiriusXM Guardian™ connected services and
account information. To remove your account
information from the Uconnect system,
contact SiriusXM Guardian™ Customer Care.
17. What if I forgot to remove my account
information before I returned my lease vehicle
or sold it? Contact SiriusXM Guardian™
Customer Care.
18. What will happen if an operable LTE (voice/
data), 4G (data), or 5G (data) network
connection compatible with my device is
temporarily unavailable? The SOS Call and
ASSIST buttons will NOT function if you are not
connected to an operable LTE (voice/data) or
3G, 4G (data), 5G (data) network. Services that
required your smartphone only direct calls to
Roadside Assistance Call may be functioning if
you have an operable network.
DATA COLLECTION & PRIVACY
The Uconnect system collects and transmits data
which may include information about your vehicle,
your vehicle’s health and performance, your
vehicle’s location, your utilization of the features in
your vehicle, and other data. The collection, use
and sharing of this information is required to
provide the SiriusXM Guardian™ connected
services and is further described by the Uconnect
Privacy Policy, which can be found at
www.driveuconnect.com/connectedservices/
privacy.html (US Residents) or
www.driveuconnect.ca (Canadian Residents).
This information may be collected by SiriusXM®
Connected Vehicle Services Inc. and shared with
FCA US LLC for the purposes stated in the
Uconnect Privacy Policy. Vehicle health and
diagnostic information including location data may
be used by Uconnect to provide a Vehicle Health
Report to you.
Even if you cancel your SiriusXM Guardian™
subscription, this vehicle diagnostic health
information, including location data, may still be
transmitted from your vehicle and you may still
have a Vehicle Health Report sent to you.
Use of any of the Connected Services including
SiriusXM Guardian™ is deemed to be your consent
to the collection, use and disclosure of this
information in accordance with the Uconnect
Privacy Policy. If you do not want this information to
be collected, used, or shared, you must cancel your
Uconnect services in their entirety by contacting us
as referenced in the Uconnect Privacy Policy.
22_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 212
MULTIMEDIA 213
RADIO OPERATION AND MOBILE PHONES
Under certain conditions, the mobile phone being
on in your vehicle can cause erratic or noisy
performance from your radio. This condition may
be lessened or eliminated by repositioning the
mobile phone within the vehicle. This condition is
not harmful to the radio. If your radio performance
does not satisfactorily improve from repositioning
the mobile phone, it is recommended that the
volume be turned down or off during mobile phone
operation when not using the Uconnect system.
REGULATORY AND SAFETY
I
NFORMATION
US/CANADA
Exposure to Radio Frequency Radiation
The radiated output power of the internal wireless
radio is far below the FCC and IC radio frequency
exposure limits. Nevertheless, the wireless radio
will be used in such a manner that the radio is 8 in
(20 cm) or further from the human body.
The internal wireless radio operates within
guidelines found in radio frequency safety
standards and recommendations, which reflect
the consensus of the scientific community.
The radio manufacturer believes the internal
wireless radio is safe for use by consumers. The
level of energy emitted is far less than the
electromagnetic energy emitted by wireless
devices such as mobile phones. However, the use
of wireless radios may be restricted in some
situations or environments, such as aboard
airplanes. If you are unsure of restrictions, you are
encouraged to ask for authorization before turning
on the wireless radio Ú page 353.
5
22_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 213
214
(Continued)
SAFETY
SAFETY FEATURES
ANTI-LOCK BRAKE SYSTEM (ABS)
The ABS provides increased vehicle stability and
brake performance under most braking conditions.
The system automatically prevents wheel lock and
enhances vehicle control during braking.
The ABS performs a self-check cycle to ensure that
the ABS is working properly each time the vehicle
is started and driven. During this self-check, you
may hear a slight clicking sound as well as some
related motor noises.
The ABS is activated during braking when the
system detects one or more wheels are beginning
to lock. Road conditions such as ice, snow, gravel,
bumps, railroad tracks, loose debris, or panic stops
may increase the likelihood of ABS activation(s).
You also may experience the following normal
characteristics when the ABS activates:
ABS motor noise or clicking sounds (you may
continue to hear for a short time after the stop)
Brake pedal pulsations
A slight drop of the brake pedal at the end of the
stop
NOTE:
The ABS is designed to function with the Original
Equipment Manufacturer (OEM) tires. Modification
may result in degraded ABS performance.
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) Warning
Light
The yellow ABS Warning Light will turn on when the
ignition is placed in the ON/RUN mode and may
stay on for as long as four seconds.
If the ABS Warning Light remains on or comes on
while driving, it indicates that the anti-lock portion
of the brake system is not functioning and that
service is required. However, the conventional
brake system will continue to operate normally if
the ABS Warning Light is on.
WARNING!
The ABS contains sophisticated electronic
equipment that may be susceptible to interfer-
ence caused by improperly installed or high
output radio transmitting equipment. This
interference can cause possible loss of
anti-lock braking capability. Installation of
such equipment should be performed by qual-
ified professionals.
Pumping of the Anti-Lock Brakes will diminish
their effectiveness and may lead to a collision.
Pumping makes the stopping distance longer.
Just press firmly on your brake pedal when you
need to slow down or stop.
The ABS cannot prevent the natural laws of
physics from acting on the vehicle, nor can it
increase braking or steering efficiency beyond
that afforded by the condition of the vehicle
brakes and tires or the traction afforded.
The ABS cannot prevent collisions, including
those resulting from excessive speed in turns,
following another vehicle too closely, or hydro-
planing.
The capabilities of an ABS equipped vehicle
must never be exploited in a reckless or
dangerous manner that could jeopardize the
user’s safety or the safety of others.
WARNING!
22_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 214
SAFETY 215
If the ABS Warning Light is on, the brake system
should be serviced as soon as possible to restore
the benefits of anti-lock brakes. If the ABS Warning
Light does not come on when the ignition is placed
in the ON/RUN mode, have the light repaired as
soon as possible.
ELECTRONIC BRAKE CONTROL (EBC)
S
YSTEM
Your vehicle is equipped with an advanced
Electronic Brake Control (EBC) system. This system
includes the Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS), Brake
Assist System (BAS), Electronic Brake Force
Distribution (EBD), Electronic Stability Control
(ESC), Electronic Roll Mitigation (ERM), Hill Start
Assist (HSA) and Traction Control System (TCS).
These systems work together to enhance both
vehicle stability and control in various driving
conditions.
Your vehicle may also be equipped with Hill
Descent Control (HDC) and Trailer Sway Control
(TSC).
Brake System Warning Light
The red Brake System Warning Light will turn on
when the ignition is placed in the ON/RUN mode
and may stay on for as long as four seconds.
If the Brake System Warning Light remains on or
comes on while driving, it indicates that the brake
system is not functioning properly and that
immediate service is required. If the Brake System
Warning Light does not come on when the ignition
is placed in the ON/RUN mode, have the light
repaired as soon as possible.
Brake Assist System (BAS)
The BAS is designed to optimize the vehicle’s
braking capability during emergency braking
maneuvers. The system detects an emergency
braking situation by sensing the rate and amount
of brake application and then applies optimum
pressure to the brakes. This can help reduce
braking distances. The BAS complements the
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS). Applying the brakes
very quickly results in the best BAS assistance. To
receive the benefit of the system, you must apply
continuous braking pressure during the stopping
sequence (do not “pump” the brakes). Do not
reduce brake pedal pressure unless braking is no
longer desired. Once the brake pedal is released,
the BAS is deactivated.
Electronic Brake Force Distribution (EBD)
The EBD function manages the distribution of the
braking torque between the front and rear axles by
limiting braking pressure to the rear axle. This is
done to prevent overslip of the rear wheels to avoid
vehicle instability, and to prevent the rear axle from
entering the Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) before
the front axle.
WARNING!
The Brake Assist System (BAS) cannot prevent
the natural laws of physics from acting on the
vehicle, nor can it increase the traction afforded
by prevailing road conditions. BAS cannot
prevent collisions, including those resulting from
excessive speed in turns, driving on very slippery
surfaces, or hydroplaning. The capabilities of a
BAS-equipped vehicle must never be exploited in
a reckless or dangerous manner, which could
jeopardize the user's safety or the safety of
others.
6
22_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 215
216 SAFETY
Electronic Roll Mitigation (ERM)
ERM anticipates the potential for wheel lift by
monitoring the driver’s steering wheel input and
the speed of the vehicle. When ERM determines
that the rate of change of the steering wheel angle
and vehicle’s speed are sufficient to potentially
cause wheel lift, it then applies the appropriate
brake and may also reduce engine power to lessen
the chance that wheel lift will occur. ERM can only
reduce the chance of wheel lift occurring during
severe or evasive driving maneuvers; it cannot
prevent wheel lift due to other factors, such as
road conditions, leaving the roadway, or striking
objects or other vehicles.
NOTE:
ERM is disabled any time the ESC is in “Full Off”
mode (if equipped). Refer to Ú page 216 for a
complete explanation of the available ESC modes.
Electronic Stability Control (ESC)
The ESC system enhances directional control and
stability of the vehicle under various driving
conditions. ESC corrects for oversteering or
understeering of the vehicle by applying the brake
of the appropriate wheel(s) to assist in
counteracting the oversteer or understeer
condition. Engine power may also be reduced to
help the vehicle maintain the desired path.
Oversteer — when the vehicle is turning more
than appropriate for the steering wheel position.
Understeer — when the vehicle is turning less
than appropriate for the steering wheel position.
ESC uses sensors in the vehicle to determine the
vehicle path intended by the driver and compares
it to the actual path of the vehicle. When the actual
path does not match the intended path, ESC
applies the brake of the appropriate wheel to
assist in counteracting the above conditions.
The ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light
located in the instrument cluster will start to flash
as soon as the ESC system becomes active. The
ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light also
flashes when the Trailer Sway Control (TSC) is
active. If the ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator
Light begins to flash during acceleration, ease up
on the accelerator and apply as little throttle as
possible. Be sure to adapt your speed and driving
to the prevailing road conditions.
WARNING!
Many factors, such as vehicle loading, road
conditions and driving conditions, influence the
chance that wheel lift or rollover may occur. ERM
cannot prevent all wheel lift or rollovers,
especially those that involve leaving the roadway
or striking objects or other vehicles. The
capabilities of an ERM-equipped vehicle must
never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous
manner which could jeopardize the user's safety
or the safety of others.
22_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 216
SAFETY 217
(Continued)
ESC Operating Modes
Depending upon model and mode of operation, the
ESC system may have multiple operating modes.
ESC On
This is the normal operating mode for the ESC.
Whenever the vehicle is started, the ESC system
will be in this mode. This mode should be used for
most driving conditions. Alternate ESC modes
should only be used for specific reasons as noted
in the following paragraphs.
Partial Off
This mode may be useful if the vehicle becomes
stuck. This mode may modify TCS and ESC
thresholds for activation, which allows for more
wheel spin than normally allowed.
To enter the “Partial Off” mode, momentarily push
the ESC OFF switch and the ESC OFF Indicator
Light will illuminate. To turn the ESC on again,
momentarily push the ESC OFF switch and the ESC
OFF Indicator Light will turn off.
NOTE:
For vehicles with multiple partial ESC modes, the
push and release of the button will toggle the ESC
modes. Multiple attempts may be required to
return to "ESC On" mode.
WARNING!
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) cannot
prevent the natural laws of physics from
acting on the vehicle, nor can it increase the
traction afforded by prevailing road condi-
tions. ESC cannot prevent accidents, including
those resulting from excessive speed in turns,
driving on very slippery surfaces, or hydro-
planing. ESC also cannot prevent accidents
resulting from loss of vehicle control due to
inappropriate driver input for the conditions.
Only a safe, attentive, and skillful driver can
prevent accidents. The capabilities of an ESC
equipped vehicle must never be exploited in a
reckless or dangerous manner which could
jeopardize the user’s safety or the safety of
others.
Vehicle modifications, or failure to properly
maintain your vehicle, may change the
handling characteristics of your vehicle, and
may negatively affect the performance of the
ESC system. Changes to the steering system,
suspension, braking system, tire type and size
or wheel size may adversely affect ESC perfor-
mance. Improperly inflated and unevenly worn
tires may also degrade ESC performance. Any
vehicle modification or poor vehicle mainte-
nance that reduces the effectiveness of the
ESC system can increase the risk of loss of
vehicle control, vehicle rollover, personal
injury and death.
WARNING!
6
22_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 217
218 SAFETY
(Continued)
Full Off — If Equipped
This mode is intended for off-highway or off-road
use only and should not be used on any public
roadways. In this mode, TCS and ESC features are
turned off. To enter the “Full Off” mode, push and
hold the ESC OFF switch for five seconds while the
vehicle is stopped with the engine running. After
five seconds, a chime will sound, the ESC OFF
Indicator Light will illuminate, and the ESC OFF
message will display in the instrument cluster. To
turn ESC on again, momentarily push the ESC OFF
switch.
NOTE:
System may switch from ESC “Full Off” to “Partial
Off” mode when vehicle exceeds a predetermined
speed. When the vehicle speed slows below the
predetermined speed the system will return to ESC
“Full Off”.
ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light
And ESC OFF Indicator Light
The ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator
Light in the instrument cluster will come
on when the ignition is placed in the ON
position. It should go out with the engine
running. If the ESC Activation/Malfunction
Indicator Light comes on continuously with the
engine running, a malfunction has been detected
in the ESC system. If this light remains on after
several ignition cycles, and the vehicle has been
driven several miles (kilometers) at speeds greater
than 30 mph (48 km/h), see an authorized dealer
as soon as possible to have the problem
diagnosed and corrected.
WARNING!
When in “Partial Off” mode, the TCS function-
ality of ESC, except for the limited slip feature
described in the TCS section, has been
disabled and the ESC OFF Indicator Light will
be illuminated. When in “Partial Off” mode,
the engine power reduction feature of TCS is
disabled, and the enhanced vehicle stability
offered by the ESC system is reduced.
Trailer Sway Control (TSC) is disabled when
the ESC system is in the “Partial Off” mode.
WARNING!
In the ESC “Full Off” mode, the engine torque
reduction and stability features are disabled.
Therefore, enhanced vehicle stability offered
by the ESC system is unavailable. In an emer-
gency evasive maneuver, the ESC system will
not engage to assist in maintaining stability.
ESC “Full Off” mode is intended for
off-highway or off-road use only.
With the ESC switched off, the enhanced
vehicle stability offered by ESC is unavailable.
In an emergency evasive maneuver, the ESC
system will not engage to assist in maintaining
stability. ESC “Full Off” mode is only intended
for off-highway or off-road use.
The Electronic Stability Control (ESC) cannot
prevent the natural laws of physics from
acting on the vehicle, nor can it increase the
traction afforded by prevailing road condi-
tions. ESC cannot prevent all accidents,
including those resulting from excessive
speed in turns, driving on very slippery
surfaces, or hydroplaning. ESC also cannot
prevent collisions.
WARNING!
22_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 218
SAFETY 219
The ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light
(located in the instrument cluster) starts to flash as
soon as the tires lose traction and the ESC system
becomes active. The ESC Activation/Malfunction
Indicator Light also flashes when TCS is active. If
the ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light
begins to flash during acceleration, ease up on the
accelerator and apply as little throttle as possible.
Be sure to adapt your speed and driving to the
prevailing road conditions.
NOTE:
The ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light
and the ESC OFF Indicator Light come on
momentarily each time the ignition is placed in
the ON position.
Each time the ignition is placed in the ON posi-
tion, the ESC system will be on even if it was
turned off previously.
The ESC system will make buzzing or clicking
sounds when it is active. This is normal; the
sounds will stop when ESC becomes inactive
following the maneuver that caused the ESC
activation.
The ESC OFF Indicator Light indicates the
customer has elected to have the
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) in a
reduced mode.
Hill Start Assist (HSA)
HSA is designed to mitigate roll back from a
complete stop while on an incline. If the driver
releases the brake while stopped on an incline,
HSA will continue to hold the brake pressure for a
short period. If the driver does not apply the
throttle before this time expires, the system will
release brake pressure and the vehicle will roll
down the hill as normal.
The following conditions must be met in order for
HSA to activate:
The feature must be enabled.
The vehicle must be stopped.
The parking brake must be off.
The driver door must be closed.
The vehicle must be on a sufficient grade.
The gear selection must match vehicle uphill
direction (i.e., vehicle facing uphill is in forward
gear; vehicle backing uphill is in REVERSE (R)
gear).
HSA will work in REVERSE (R) gear and all
forward gears. The system will not activate if the
transmission is in PARK (P) or NEUTRAL (N). For
vehicles equipped with a manual transmission,
if the clutch is pressed, HSA will remain active.
WARNING!
There may be situations where the Hill Start
Assist (HSA) will not activate and slight rolling
may occur, such as on minor hills or with a
loaded vehicle, or while pulling a trailer. HSA is
not a substitute for active driving involvement. It
is always the driver’s responsibility to be
attentive to distance to other vehicles, people,
and objects, and most importantly brake
operation to ensure safe operation of the vehicle
under all road conditions. Your complete
attention is always required while driving to
maintain safe control of your vehicle. Failure to
follow these warnings can result in a collision or
serious personal injury.
6
22_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 219
220 SAFETY
Towing With HSA
HSA will also provide assistance to mitigate roll
back while towing a trailer.
Disabling And Enabling HSA
This feature can be turned on or turned off. To
change the current setting, proceed as follows:
If disabling HSA using your instrument cluster
display, refer to Ú page 94 for further informa-
tion.
If disabling HSA using Uconnect settings, refer
to Ú page 150 for further information.
Trailer Sway Control (TSC)
TSC uses sensors in the vehicle to recognize an
excessively swaying trailer and will take the
appropriate actions to attempt to stop the sway.
NOTE:
TSC cannot stop all trailers from swaying. Always
use caution when towing a trailer and follow the
trailer tongue weight recommendations. Refer to
Ú page 133 for further information.
When TSC is functioning, the ESC Activation/
Malfunction Indicator Light will flash, the engine
power may be reduced and you may feel the
brakes being applied to individual wheels to
attempt to stop the trailer from swaying. TSC is
disabled when the ESC system is in the “Partial
Off” or “Full Off” modes.
Traction Control System (TCS)
TCS monitors the amount of wheel spin of each of
the driven wheels. If wheel spin is detected, the
TCS may apply brake pressure to the spinning
wheel(s) and/or reduce engine power to provide
enhanced acceleration and stability. A feature of
the TCS, Brake Limited Differential (BLD) functions
similarly to a limited slip differential and controls
the wheel spin across a driven axle. If one wheel on
a driven axle is spinning faster than the other, the
system will apply the brake of the spinning wheel.
This will allow more engine torque to be applied to
the wheel that is not spinning. BLD may remain
enabled even if TCS and ESC are in reduced
modes.
WARNING!
If you use a trailer brake controller with your
trailer, the trailer brakes may be activated and
deactivated with the brake switch. If so, there
may not be enough brake pressure to hold
both the vehicle and the trailer on a hill when
the brake pedal is released. In order to avoid
rolling down an incline while resuming accel-
eration, manually activate the trailer brake or
apply more vehicle brake pressure prior to
releasing the brake pedal.
HSA is not a parking brake. Always apply the
parking brake fully when exiting your vehicle.
Also, be certain to place the transmission in
PARK (P).
Failure to follow these warnings can result in a
collision or serious personal injury.
WARNING!
If TSC activates while driving, slow the vehicle
down, stop at the nearest safe location, and
adjust the trailer load to eliminate trailer sway.
22_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 220
SAFETY 221
AUXILIARY DRIVING SYSTEMS
TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING SYSTEM
(TPMS)
The TPMS will warn the driver of a low tire pressure
based on the vehicle recommended cold placard
pressure.
The tire pressure will vary with temperature by
about 1 psi (7 kPa) for every 12°F (6.5°C). This
means that when the outside temperature
decreases, the tire pressure will decrease. Tire
pressure should always be set based on cold
inflation tire pressure. This is defined as the tire
pressure after the vehicle has not been driven for
at least three hours, or driven less than 1 mile
(1.6 km) after a three hour period. The cold tire
inflation pressure must not exceed the maximum
inflation pressure molded into the tire sidewall.
The tire pressure will also increase as the vehicle
is driven — this is normal and there should be no
adjustment for this increased pressure.
See Ú page 320 for information on how to
properly inflate the vehicle’s tires.
The TPMS will warn the driver of a low tire pressure
if the tire pressure falls below the low-pressure
warning limit for any reason, including low
temperature effects and natural pressure loss
through the tire.
The TPMS will continue to warn the driver of low
tire pressure as long as the condition exists, and
will not turn off until the tire pressure is at or above
the recommended cold placard pressure. Once the
low tire pressure warning (TPMS Warning Light)
illuminates, you must increase the tire pressure to
the recommended cold placard pressure in order
for the TPMS Warning Light to turn off. The system
will automatically update and the TPMS Warning
Light will turn off once the system receives the
updated tire pressures. The vehicle may need to be
driven for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph
(24 km/h) in order for the TPMS to receive this
information.
NOTE:
When filling warm tires, the tire pressure may need
to be increased up to an additional 4 psi (28 kPa)
above the recommended cold placard pressure in
order to turn the TPMS Warning Light off.
For example, your vehicle may have a
recommended cold (parked for more than three
hours) placard pressure of 30 psi (207 kPa). If the
ambient temperature is 68°F (20°C) and the
measured tire pressure is 27 psi (186 kPa), a
temperature drop to 20°F (-7°C) will decrease the
tire pressure to approximately 23 psi (158 kPa).
This tire pressure is sufficiently low enough to turn
on the TPMS Warning Light. Driving the vehicle
may cause the tire pressure to rise to
approximately 27 psi (186 kPa), but the TPMS
Warning Light will still be on. In this situation, the
TPMS Warning Light will turn off only after the tires
are inflated to the vehicle’s recommended cold
placard pressure value.
CAUTION!
The TPMS has been optimized for the original
equipment tires and wheels. TPMS pressures
and warning have been established for the tire
size equipped on your vehicle. Undesirable
system operation or sensor damage may
result when using replacement equipment
that is not of the same size, type, and/or style.
Aftermarket wheels can cause sensor
damage.
Using aftermarket tire sealants may cause the
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)
sensor to become inoperable. After using an
aftermarket tire sealant it is recommended
that you take your vehicle to an authorized
dealership to have your sensor function
checked.
After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure
always reinstall the valve stem cap. This will
prevent moisture and dirt from entering the
valve stem, which could damage the TPMS
sensor.
6
22_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 221
222 SAFETY
NOTE:
The TPMS is not intended to replace normal tire
care and maintenance or to provide warning of
a tire failure or condition.
The TPMS should not be used as a tire pressure
gauge while adjusting your tire pressure.
Driving on a significantly underinflated tire
causes the tire to overheat and can lead to tire
failure. Underinflation also reduces fuel effi-
ciency and tire tread life, and may affect the
vehicle’s handling and stopping ability.
The TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire
maintenance, and it is the driver’s responsibility
to maintain correct tire pressure using an accu-
rate tire pressure gauge, even if underinflation
has not reached the level to trigger illumination
of the TPMS Warning Light.
Seasonal temperature changes will affect tire
pressure, and the TPMS will monitor the actual
tire pressure in the tire.
Premium System
The Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) uses
wireless technology with wheel rim mounted
electronic sensors to monitor tire pressure levels.
Sensors, mounted to each wheel as part of the
valve stem, transmit tire pressure readings to the
receiver module.
NOTE:
It is particularly important for you to check the tire
pressure in all of the tires on your vehicle monthly
and to maintain the proper pressure.
The TPMS consists of the following components:
Receiver module
Four Tire Pressure Monitoring System sensors
Various Tire Pressure Monitoring System
messages, which display in the instrument
cluster
Tire Pressure Monitoring System Warning Light
TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING SYSTEM LOW
PRESSURE WARNINGS
The TPMS Warning Light will illuminate in
the instrument cluster and a chime will
sound when tire pressure is low in one or
more of the four active road tires. In
addition, the instrument cluster will display a
graphic showing the pressure values of each tire
with the low tire pressure values in a different
color. An "Inflate to XX" message will also be
displayed.
Tire Pressure Monitoring System Low
Tire Pressure Warning
Should this occur, you should stop as soon as
possible and inflate the tires with a low pressure
condition (those in a different color in the
instrument cluster graphic) to the vehicle’s
recommended cold placard pressure inflation
value as shown in the "Inflate to XX" message.
Once the system receives the updated tire
pressures, the system will automatically update,
the graphic display in the instrument cluster will
return to its original color, and the TPMS Warning
Light will turn off. The vehicle may need to be
driven for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph
(24 km/h) in order for the TPMS to receive this
information.
22_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 222
SAFETY 223
SERVICE TPMS WARNING
If a system fault is detected, the TPMS Warning
Light will flash on and off for 75 seconds and then
remain on solid. The system fault will also sound a
chime. In addition, the instrument cluster will
display a "SERVICE TPM SYSTEM" message for a
minimum of five seconds and then display dashes
(--) in place of the pressure value to indicate which
sensor is not being received.
Tire Pressure Monitoring System Display
If the ignition switch is cycled, this sequence will
repeat, providing the system fault still exists. If the
system fault no longer exists, the TPMS Warning
Light will no longer flash, and the "SERVICE TPM
SYSTEM" message will no longer display, and a
pressure value will display in place of the dashes.
A system fault can occur due to any of the
following:
Signal interference due to electronic devices or
driving next to facilities emitting the same radio
frequencies as the TPMS sensors
Installing aftermarket window tinting that
contains materials that may block radio wave
signals
Accumulation of snow or ice around the wheels
or wheel housings
Using tire chains on the vehicle
Using wheels/tires not equipped with TPMS
sensors
A system fault may occur due to an incorrect TPMS
sensor location condition. When a system fault
occurs due to an incorrect TPMS sensor location,
the TPMS Warning Light will flash on and off for 75
seconds and then remain on solid. The system
fault will also sound a chime. In addition, the
instrument cluster will display a “Tire Pressure
Temporarily Unavailable” message in place of the
tire pressure display screen. If the ignition switch is
cycled, this sequence will repeat, providing the
system fault still exists. If the system fault no
longer exists, the TPMS Warning Light will no
longer flash and the tire pressure display screen
will be displayed showing the tire pressure values
for the correct locations.
Vehicles With Non-Matching Full Size Spare Or
Compact Spare
The non-matching full size spare or compact
spare tire does not have a TPMS sensor. There-
fore, the TPMS will not monitor the pressure in
the non-matching full size spare or compact
spare tire.
If you install the non-matching full size spare or
compact spare tire in place of a road tire that
has a pressure below the low-pressure warning
limit, upon the next ignition switch cycle, the
TPMS Warning Light and a “LOW TIRE” message
will remain on and a chime will sound. In addi-
tion, the graphic in the instrument cluster will
still display a pressure value in a different color
and an “Inflate to XX” message.
After driving the vehicle for up to 20 minutes
above 15 mph (24 km/h), the TPMS Warning
Light will flash on and off for 75 seconds and
then remain on solid. In addition, the instrument
cluster will display a "SERVICE TPM SYSTEM"
message for a minimum of five seconds and
then display dashes (--) in place of the pressure
value.
6
22_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 223
224 SAFETY
For each subsequent ignition switch cycle, a
chime will sound, the TPMS Warning Light will
flash on and off for 75 seconds and then remain
on solid, and the instrument cluster will display
a "SERVICE TPM SYSTEM" message for a
minimum of five seconds and then display
dashes (--) in place of the pressure value.
Once you repair or replace the original road tire
and reinstall it on the vehicle in place of the
non-matching full size spare or compact spare,
the TPMS will update automatically. In addition,
the TPMS Warning Light will turn off and the
graphic in the instrument cluster will display a
new pressure value instead of dashes (--), as
long as no tire pressure is below the low-pres-
sure warning limit in any of the four active road
tires. The vehicle may need to be driven for up
to 20 minutes above 15 mph (24 km/h) in
order for the TPMS to receive this information.
OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS
Some of the most important safety features in your
vehicle are the restraint systems:
OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS
F
EATURES
Seat Belt Systems
Supplemental Restraint Systems (SRS) Air Bags
Child Restraints
Some of the safety features described in this
section may be standard equipment on some
models, or may be optional equipment on others. If
you are not sure, ask an authorized dealer.
IMPORTANT SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
Please pay close attention to the information in
this section. It tells you how to use your restraint
system properly, to keep you and your passengers
as safe as possible.
Here are some simple steps you can take to
minimize the risk of harm from a deploying air bag:
1. Children 12 years old and under should
always ride buckled up in the rear seat of a
vehicle with a rear seat.
2. A child who is not big enough to wear the
vehicle seat belt properly must be secured in
the appropriate child restraint or
belt-positioning booster seat in a rear seating
position Ú page 242.
3. If a child from 2 to 12 years old (not in a
rear-facing child restraint) must ride in the
front passenger seat, move the seat as far
back as possible and use the proper child
restraint Ú page 242.
4. Never allow children to slide the shoulder belt
behind them or under their arm.
5. You should read the instructions provided with
your child restraint to make sure that you are
using it properly.
6. All occupants should always wear their lap and
shoulder belts properly.
7. The driver and front passenger seats should
be moved back as far as practical to allow the
front air bags room to inflate.
8. Do not lean against the door or window. If your
vehicle has side air bags, and deployment
occurs, the side air bags will inflate forcefully
into the space between occupants and the
door and occupants could be injured.
9. If the air bag system in this vehicle needs to be
modified to accommodate a disabled person,
see Ú page 350 for customer service contact
information.
22_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 224
SAFETY 225
SEAT BELT SYSTEMS
Buckle up even though you are an excellent driver,
even on short trips. Someone on the road may be
a poor driver and could cause a collision that
includes you. This can happen far away from home
or on your own street.
Research has shown that seat belts save lives, and
they can reduce the seriousness of injuries in a
collision. Some of the worst injuries happen when
people are thrown from the vehicle. Seat belts
reduce the possibility of ejection and the risk of
injury caused by striking the inside of the vehicle.
Everyone in a motor vehicle should be belted at all
times.
Enhanced Seat Belt Use Reminder System
(BeltAlert)
Driver And Passenger BeltAlert — If Equipped
BeltAlert is a feature intended to remind
the driver and outboard front seat
passenger (if equipped with outboard
front passenger seat BeltAlert) to buckle
their seat belts. The BeltAlert feature is active
whenever the ignition switch is in the START or ON/
RUN position.
Initial Indication
If the driver is unbuckled when the ignition switch
is first in the START or ON/RUN position, a chime
will signal for a few seconds. If the driver or
outboard front seat passenger (if equipped with
outboard front passenger seat BeltAlert) is
unbuckled when the ignition switch is first in the
START or ON/RUN position the Seat Belt Reminder
Light will turn on and remain on until both outboard
front seat belts are buckled. The outboard front
passenger seat BeltAlert is not active when an
outboard front passenger seat is unoccupied.
BeltAlert Warning Sequence
The BeltAlert warning sequence is activated when
the vehicle is moving above a specified vehicle
speed range and the driver or outboard front seat
passenger is unbuckled (if equipped with outboard
front passenger seat BeltAlert) (the outboard front
passenger seat BeltAlert is not active when the
outboard front passenger seat is unoccupied). The
BeltAlert warning sequence starts by blinking the
Seat Belt Reminder Light and sounding an
intermittent chime. Once the BeltAlert warning
sequence has completed, the Seat Belt Reminder
Light will remain on until the seat belts are
buckled. The BeltAlert warning sequence may
repeat based on vehicle speed until the driver and
occupied outboard front seat passenger seat belts
are buckled. The driver should instruct all
occupants to buckle their seat belts.
Change Of Status
If the driver or outboard front seat passenger (if
equipped with outboard front passenger seat
BeltAlert) unbuckles their seat belt while the
vehicle is traveling, the BeltAlert warning sequence
will begin until the seat belts are buckled again.
The outboard front passenger seat BeltAlert is not
active when the outboard front passenger seat is
unoccupied. BeltAlert may be triggered when an
animal or other items are placed on the outboard
front passenger seat or when the seat is folded flat
(if equipped). It is recommended that pets be
restrained in the rear seat (if equipped) in pet
harnesses or pet carriers that are secured by seat
belts, and cargo is properly stowed.
WARNING!
Never place a rear-facing child restraint in
front of an air bag. A deploying passenger
front air bag can cause death or serious injury
to a child 12 years or younger, including a
child in a rear-facing child restraint.
Never install a rear-facing child restraint in the
front seat of a vehicle. Only use a rear-facing
child restraint in the rear seat. If the vehicle
does not have a rear seat, do not transport a
rear-facing child restraint in that vehicle.
6
22_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 225
226 SAFETY
(Continued)
BeltAlert can be activated or deactivated by an
authorized dealer. FCA US LLC does not
recommend deactivating BeltAlert.
NOTE:
If BeltAlert has been deactivated and the driver or
outboard front seat passenger (if equipped with
outboard front passenger seat BeltAlert) is
unbuckled the Seat Belt Reminder Light will turn
on and remain on until the driver and outboard
front seat passenger seat belts are buckled.
Lap/Shoulder Belts
All seating positions except the Quad Cab and Crew
Cab front center seating position have
combination lap/shoulder belts.
The seat belt webbing retractor will lock only during
very sudden stops or collisions. This feature allows
the shoulder part of the seat belt to move freely
with you under normal conditions. However, in a
collision the seat belt will lock and reduce your risk
of striking the inside of the vehicle or being thrown
out of the vehicle.
WARNING!
Relying on the air bags alone could lead to
more severe injuries in a collision. The air
bags work with your seat belt to restrain you
properly. In some collisions, the air bags won’t
deploy at all. Always wear your seat belt even
though you have air bags.
In a collision, you and your passengers can
suffer much greater injuries if you are not
properly buckled up. You can strike the inte-
rior of your vehicle or other passengers, or you
can be thrown out of the vehicle. Always be
sure you and others in your vehicle are
buckled up properly.
It is dangerous to ride in a cargo area, inside
or outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people
riding in these areas are more likely to be seri-
ously injured or killed.
Do not allow people to ride in any area of your
vehicle that is not equipped with seats and
seat belts.
Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat
and using a seat belt properly. Occupants,
including the driver, should always wear their
seat belts whether or not an air bag is also
provided at their seating position to minimize
the risk of severe injury or death in the event
of a crash.
Wearing your seat belt incorrectly could make
your injuries in a collision much worse. You
might suffer internal injuries, or you could
even slide out of the seat belt. Follow these
instructions to wear your seat belt safely and
to keep your passengers safe, too.
Two people should never be belted into a
single seat belt. People belted together can
crash into one another in a collision, hurting
one another badly. Never use a lap/shoulder
belt or a lap belt for more than one person, no
matter what their size.
WARNING!
22_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 226
SAFETY 227
(Continued)
Lap/Shoulder Belt Operating Instructions
1. Enter the vehicle and close the door. Sit back
and adjust the seat.
2. The seat belt latch plate is above the back of
the front seat, and next to your arm in the rear
seat (for vehicles equipped with a rear seat).
Grab the latch plate and pull out the seat belt.
Slide the latch plate up the webbing as far as
necessary to allow the seat belt to go around
your lap.
Pulling Out The Latch Plate
WARNING!
A lap belt worn too high can increase the risk
of injury in a collision. The seat belt forces
won’t be at the strong hip and pelvic bones,
but across your abdomen. Always wear the lap
part of your seat belt as low as possible and
keep it snug.
A twisted seat belt may not protect you prop-
erly. In a collision, it could even cut into you.
Be sure the seat belt is flat against your body,
without twists. If you can’t straighten a seat
belt in your vehicle, take it to an authorized
dealer immediately and have it fixed.
A seat belt that is buckled into the wrong
buckle will not protect you properly. The lap
portion could ride too high on your body,
possibly causing internal injuries. Always
buckle your seat belt into the buckle nearest
you.
A seat belt that is too loose will not protect you
properly. In a sudden stop, you could move too
far forward, increasing the possibility of injury.
Wear your seat belt snugly.
A seat belt that is worn under your arm is
dangerous. Your body could strike the inside
surfaces of the vehicle in a collision,
increasing head and neck injury. A seat belt
worn under the arm can cause internal inju-
ries. Ribs aren’t as strong as shoulder bones.
Wear the seat belt over your shoulder so that
your strongest bones will take the force in a
collision.
A shoulder belt placed behind you will not
protect you from injury during a collision. You
are more likely to hit your head in a collision if
you do not wear your shoulder belt. The lap
and shoulder belt are meant to be used
together.
A frayed or torn seat belt could rip apart in a
collision and leave you with no protection.
Inspect the seat belt system periodically,
checking for cuts, frays, or loose parts.
Damaged parts must be replaced immedi-
ately. Do not disassemble or modify the seat
belt system. If your vehicle is involved in a
collision, or if you have questions regarding
seat belt or retractor conditions, take your
vehicle to an authorized FCA dealer or autho-
rized FCA Certified Collision Care Program
facility for inspection.
WARNING!
6
22_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 227
228 SAFETY
3. When the seat belt is long enough to fit, insert
the latch plate into the buckle until you hear a
“click.”
Inserting Latch Plate Into Buckle
4. Position the lap belt so that it is snug and lies
low across your hips, below your abdomen. To
remove slack in the lap belt portion, pull up on
the shoulder belt. To loosen the lap belt if it is
too tight, tilt the latch plate and pull on the lap
belt. A snug seat belt reduces the risk of sliding
under the seat belt in a collision.
Positioning The Lap Belt
5. Position the shoulder belt across the shoulder
and chest with minimal, if any slack so that it
is comfortable and not resting on your neck.
The retractor will withdraw any slack in the
shoulder belt.
6. To release the seat belt, push the red button
on the buckle. The seat belt will automatically
retract to its stowed position. If necessary,
slide the latch plate down the webbing to allow
the seat belt to retract fully.
Lap/Shoulder Belt Untwisting Procedure
Use the following procedure to untwist a twisted
lap/shoulder belt.
1. Position the latch plate as close as possible to
the anchor point.
2. At about 6 to 12 inches (15 to 30 cm) above
the latch plate, grab and twist the seat belt
webbing 180 degrees to create a fold that
begins immediately above the latch plate.
3. Slide the latch plate upward over the folded
webbing. The folded webbing must enter the
slot at the top of the latch plate.
4. Continue to slide the latch plate up until it
clears the folded webbing and the seat belt is
no longer twisted.
Adjustable Upper Shoulder Belt Anchorage
In the driver and outboard front passenger seats,
the top of the shoulder belt can be adjusted
upward or downward to position the seat belt away
from your neck. Push or squeeze the anchorage
button to release the anchorage, and move it up or
down to the position that serves you best.
22_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 228
SAFETY 229
Adjustable Anchorage
As a guide, if you are shorter than average, you will
prefer the shoulder belt anchorage in a lower
position, and if you are taller than average, you will
prefer the shoulder belt anchorage in a higher
position. After you release the anchorage button,
try to move it up or down to make sure that it is
locked in position.
NOTE:
The adjustable upper shoulder belt anchorage is
equipped with an Easy Up feature. This feature
allows the shoulder belt anchorage to be adjusted
in the upward position without pushing or
squeezing the release button. To verify the
shoulder belt anchorage is latched, pull downward
on the shoulder belt anchorage until it is locked
into position.
First Row Center Seat Belt Operating
Instructions (Regular Cab Only)
The first row center seat belt (Regular Cab only)
features a seat belt with a mini-latch plate and
buckle, which allows the seat belt to detach from
the lower anchor when the seat is folded. The
mini-latch plate and regular latch plate can then be
stored out of the way in the seat for added
convenience to open up utilization of the storage
areas behind the front seats when the seat is not
occupied.
1. Remove the mini-latch plate and regular latch
plate from its stowed position on the seat.
Connect Mini-Latch To Mini-Buckle
Mini-Latch And Mini-Buckle Connected
WARNING!
Wearing your seat belt incorrectly could make
your injuries in a collision much worse. You
might suffer internal injuries, or you could
even slide out of the seat belt. Follow these
instructions to wear your seat belt safely and
to keep your passengers safe, too.
Position the shoulder belt across the shoulder
and chest with minimal, if any slack so that it
is comfortable and not resting on your neck.
The retractor will withdraw any slack in the
shoulder belt.
Misadjustment of the seat belt could reduce
the effectiveness of the safety belt in a crash.
Always make all seat belt height adjustments
when the vehicle is stationary.
6
22_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 229
230 SAFETY
2. Grab the mini-latch plate and pull the seat belt
over the seat.
3. Route the shoulder belt to the inside of the
right head restraint.
4. When the seat belt is long enough to fit, insert
the mini-latch plate into the mini-buckle until
you hear a “click.”
5. Sit back in seat. Slide the regular latch plate up
the webbing as far as necessary to allow the
seat belt to go around your lap.
6. When the seat belt is long enough to fit, insert
the latch plate into the buckle until you hear a
“click.”
7. Position the lap belt so that it is snug and lies
low across your hips, below your abdomen. To
remove slack in the lap belt portion, pull up on
the shoulder belt. To loosen the lap belt if it is
too tight, pull on the lap belt. A snug seat belt
reduces the risk of sliding under the seat belt
in a collision.
8. Position the shoulder belt on your chest so that
it is comfortable and not resting on your neck.
The retractor will withdraw any slack in the
seat belt.
9. To release the seat belt, push the red button
on the buckle.
10. To disengage the mini-latch plate from the
mini-buckle for storage, insert the regular latch
plate into the center red slot on the
mini-buckle. The seat belt will automatically
retract to its stowed position. If necessary,
slide the latch plate down the webbing to allow
the seat belt to retract fully. Insert the
mini-latch plate and regular latch plate into its
stowed position.
Detaching Mini-Buckle With Seat Belt Tongue
First Row Center Lap Belt Operating
Instructions — If Equipped
The center seating position for the Quad Cab and
Crew Cab front seat has a lap belt only. To buckle
the lap belt, slide the latch plate into the buckle
until you hear a "click." To lengthen the lap belt, tilt
the latch plate and pull.
To remove slack, pull the loose end of the webbing.
Wear the lap belt snug against the hips. Sit back
and upright in the seat, then adjust the seat belt as
tightly as is comfortable.
WARNING!
If the mini-latch plate and mini-buckle are not
properly connected when the seat belt is used
by an occupant, the seat belt will not be able
to provide proper restraint and will increase
the risk of injury in a collision.
When reattaching the mini-latch plate and
mini-buckle, ensure the seat belt webbing is
not twisted. If the webbing is twisted, follow
the preceding procedure to detach the
mini-latch plate and mini-buckle, untwist the
webbing, and reattach the mini-latch plate
and mini-buckle.
22_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 230
SAFETY 231
Seat Belt Extender
If a seat belt is not long enough to fit properly, even
when the webbing is fully extended and the
adjustable upper shoulder belt anchorage (if
equipped) is in its lowest position, an authorized
dealer can provide you with a Seat Belt Extender.
The Seat Belt Extender should be used only if the
existing seat belt is not long enough. When the
Seat Belt Extender is not required for a different
occupant, it must be removed.
Seat Belts And Pregnant Women
Seat Belts And Pregnant Women
Seat belts must be worn by all occupants including
pregnant women: the risk of injury in the event of
an accident is reduced for the mother and the
unborn child if they are wearing a seat belt.
Position the lap belt snug and low below the
abdomen and across the strong bones of the hips.
Place the shoulder belt across the chest and away
from the neck. Never place the shoulder belt
behind the back or under the arm.
Seat Belt Pretensioner
The front outboard seat belt system is equipped
with pretensioning devices that are designed to
remove slack from the seat belt in the event of a
collision. These devices may improve the
performance of the seat belt by removing slack
from the seat belt early in a collision. Pretensioners
work for all size occupants, including those in child
restraints.
NOTE:
These devices are not a substitute for proper seat
belt placement by the occupant. The seat belt still
must be worn snugly and positioned properly.
The pretensioners are triggered by the Occupant
Restraint Controller (ORC). Like the air bags, the
pretensioners are single use items. A deployed
pretensioner or a deployed air bag must be
replaced immediately.
Energy Management Feature
The front outboard seat belt system is equipped
with an Energy Management feature that may help
further reduce the risk of injury in the event of a
collision. The seat belt system has a retractor
assembly that is designed to release webbing in a
controlled manner.
WARNING!
ONLY use a Seat Belt Extender if it is physically
required in order to properly fit the original
seat belt system. DO NOT USE the Seat Belt
Extender if, when worn, the distance between
the front edge of the Seat Belt Extender
buckle and the center of the occupant’s body
is LESS than 6 inches.
Using a Seat Belt Extender when not needed
can increase the risk of serious injury or death
in a collision. Only use the Seat Belt Extender
when the lap belt is not long enough and only
use in the recommended seating positions.
Remove and store the Seat Belt Extender
when not needed.
6
22_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 231
232 SAFETY
Switchable Automatic Locking Retractors
(ALR) — If Equipped
The seat belts in the passenger seating positions
may be equipped with a Switchable Automatic
Locking Retractor (ALR) which is used to secure a
child restraint system. For additional information,
refer to Ú page 253. The figure below illustrates
the locking feature for each seating position.
Regular Cab Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) Locations
Quad Cab/Crew Cab Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR)
Locations
If the passenger seating position is equipped with
an ALR and is being used for normal usage, only
pull the seat belt webbing out far enough to
comfortably wrap around the occupant’s
mid-section so as to not activate the ALR. If the ALR
is activated, you will hear a clicking sound as the
seat belt retracts. Allow the webbing to retract
completely in this case and then carefully pull out
only the amount of webbing necessary to
comfortably wrap around the occupant’s
mid-section. Slide the latch plate into the buckle
until you hear a "click."
In Automatic Locking Mode, the shoulder belt is
automatically pre-locked. The seat belt will still
retract to remove any slack in the shoulder belt.
Use the Automatic Locking Mode anytime a child
restraint is installed in a seating position that has
a seat belt with this feature. Children 12 years old
and under should always be properly restrained in
the rear seat of a vehicle with a rear seat.
ALR — Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor
ALR — Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor
Cinching Latchplate — Cinching Latchplate
WARNING!
Never place a rear-facing child restraint in
front of an air bag. A deploying passenger
front air bag can cause death or serious injury
to a child 12 years or younger, including a
child in a rear-facing child restraint.
Never install a rear-facing child restraint in the
front seat of a vehicle. Only use a rear-facing
child restraint in the rear seat. If the vehicle
does not have a rear seat, do not transport a
rear-facing child restraint in that vehicle.
22_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 232
SAFETY 233
(Continued)
How To Engage The Automatic Locking Mode
1. Buckle the combination lap and shoulder
belt.
2. Grab the shoulder portion and pull downward
until the entire seat belt is extracted.
3. Allow the seat belt to retract. As the seat belt
retracts, you will hear a clicking sound. This
indicates the seat belt is now in the Automatic
Locking Mode.
How To Disengage The Automatic Locking Mode
Unbuckle the combination lap/shoulder belt and
allow it to retract completely to disengage the
Automatic Locking Mode and activate the vehicle
sensitive (emergency) locking mode.
SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEMS
(SRS)
Some of the safety features described in this
section may be standard equipment on some
models, or may be optional equipment on others. If
you are not sure, ask an authorized dealer.
The air bag system must be ready to protect you in
a collision. The Occupant Restraint Controller
(ORC) monitors the internal circuits and
interconnecting wiring associated with the
electrical Air Bag System Components. Your
vehicle may be equipped with the following Air Bag
System Components:
Air Bag System Components
Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)
Air Bag Warning Light
Steering Wheel and Column
Instrument Panel
Knee Impact Bolsters
Driver and Front Passenger Air Bags
Seat Belt Buckle Switch
Supplemental Side Air Bags
Front and Side Impact Sensors
Seat Belt Pretensioners
Air Bag Warning Light
The Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)
monitors the readiness of the electronic
parts of the air bag system whenever the
ignition switch is in the START or ON/RUN
position. If the ignition switch is in the OFF position
or in the ACC position, the air bag system is not on
and the air bags will not inflate.
WARNING!
The seat belt assembly must be replaced if the
switchable Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR)
feature or any other seat belt function is not
working properly when checked according to
the procedures in the Service Manual.
Failure to replace the seat belt assembly
could increase the risk of injury in collisions.
Do not use the Automatic Locking Mode to
restrain occupants who are wearing the seat
belt or children who are using booster seats.
The locked mode is only used to install
rear-facing or forward-facing child restraints
that have a harness for restraining the child.
WARNING!
6
22_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 233
234 SAFETY
The ORC contains a backup power supply system
that may deploy the air bag system even if the
battery loses power or it becomes disconnected
prior to deployment.
The ORC turns on the Air Bag Warning Light in the
instrument panel for approximately four to eight
seconds for a self-check when the ignition switch is
first in the ON/RUN position. After the self-check,
the Air Bag Warning Light will turn off. If the ORC
detects a malfunction in any part of the system, it
turns on the Air Bag Warning Light, either
momentarily or continuously. A single chime will
sound to alert you if the light comes on again after
initial startup.
The ORC also includes diagnostics that will
illuminate the instrument panel Air Bag Warning
Light if a malfunction is detected that could affect
the air bag system. The diagnostics also record the
nature of the malfunction. While the air bag system
is designed to be maintenance free, if any of the
following occurs, have an authorized dealer
service the air bag system immediately.
The Air Bag Warning Light does not come on
during the four to eight seconds when the igni-
tion switch is first in the ON/RUN position.
The Air Bag Warning Light remains on after the
four to eight-second interval.
The Air Bag Warning Light comes on intermit-
tently or remains on while driving.
NOTE:
If the speedometer, tachometer, or any engine
related gauges are not working, the Occupant
Restraint Controller (ORC) may also be disabled. In
this condition the air bags may not be ready to
inflate for your protection. Have an authorized
dealer service the air bag system immediately.
Front Air Bags
This vehicle has front air bags and lap/shoulder
belts for both the driver and front passenger. The
front air bags are a supplement to the seat belt
restraint systems. The driver front air bag is
mounted in the center of the steering wheel. The
passenger front air bag is mounted in the
instrument panel, above the glove compartment.
The words “SRS AIRBAG” or “AIRBAG” are
embossed on the air bag covers.
Front Air Bag/Knee Bolster Locations
WARNING!
Ignoring the Air Bag Warning Light in your
instrument panel could mean you won’t have the
air bag system to protect you in a collision. If the
light does not come on as a bulb check when the
ignition is first turned on, stays on after you start
the vehicle, or if it comes on as you drive, have
an authorized dealer service the air bag system
immediately.
1 — Driver And Passenger Front Air Bags
2 — Driver Knee Impact Bolsters
3 — Passenger Knee Impact Bolsters
22_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 234
SAFETY 235
(Continued)
Driver And Passenger Front Air Bag
Features
The Advanced Front Air Bag system has multistage
driver and front passenger air bags. This system
provides output appropriate to the severity and
type of collision as determined by the Occupant
Restraint Controller (ORC), which may receive
information from the front impact sensors
(if equipped) or other system components.
The first stage inflator is triggered immediately
during an impact that requires air bag deployment.
A low energy output is used in less severe
collisions. A higher energy output is used for more
severe collisions.
This vehicle may be equipped with a driver and/or
front passenger seat belt buckle switch that
detects whether the driver or front passenger seat
belt is buckled. The seat belt buckle switch may
adjust the inflation rate of the Advanced Front Air
Bags.
Front Air Bag Operation
Front Air Bags are designed to provide additional
protection by supplementing the seat belts. Front
air bags are not expected to reduce the risk of
injury in rear, side, or rollover collisions. The front
air bags will not deploy in all frontal collisions,
including some that may produce substantial
vehicle damage — for example, some pole
collisions, truck underrides, and angle offset
collisions.
On the other hand, depending on the type and
location of impact, front air bags may deploy in
crashes with little vehicle front-end damage but
that produce a severe initial deceleration.
Because air bag sensors measure vehicle
deceleration over time, vehicle speed and damage
by themselves are not good indicators of whether
or not an air bag should have deployed.
WARNING!
Being too close to the steering wheel or instru-
ment panel during front air bag deployment
could cause serious injury, including death. Air
bags need room to inflate. Sit back, comfort-
ably extending your arms to reach the steering
wheel or instrument panel.
Never place a rear-facing child restraint in
front of an air bag. A deploying passenger
front air bag can cause death or serious injury
to a child 12 years or younger, including a
child in a rear-facing child restraint.
Never install a rear-facing child restraint in the
front seat of a vehicle. Only use a rear-facing
child restraint in the rear seat. If the vehicle
does not have a rear seat, do not transport a
rear-facing child restraint in that vehicle.
WARNING!
No objects should be placed over or near the
air bag on the instrument panel or steering
wheel because any such objects could cause
harm if the vehicle is in a collision severe
enough to cause the air bag to inflate.
Do not put anything on or around the air bag
covers or attempt to open them manually. You
may damage the air bags and you could be
injured because the air bags may no longer be
functional. The protective covers for the air
bag cushions are designed to open only when
the air bags are inflating.
Relying on the air bags alone could lead to
more severe injuries in a collision. The air
bags work with your seat belt to restrain you
properly. In some collisions, air bags won’t
deploy at all. Always wear your seat belts even
though you have air bags.
WARNING!
6
22_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 235
236 SAFETY
Seat belts are necessary for your protection in all
collisions, and also are needed to help keep you in
position, away from an inflating air bag.
When the Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)
detects a collision requiring the front air bags, it
signals the inflator units. A large quantity of
non-toxic gas is generated to inflate the front air
bags.
The steering wheel hub trim cover and the upper
passenger side of the instrument panel separate
and fold out of the way as the air bags inflate to
their full size. The front air bags fully inflate in less
time than it takes to blink your eyes. The front air
bags then quickly deflate while helping to restrain
the driver and front passenger.
Knee Impact Bolsters
The Knee Impact Bolsters help protect the knees
of the driver and front passenger, and position the
front occupants for improved interaction with the
front air bags.
Supplemental Side Air Bags
Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags (SABs)
This vehicle is equipped with Supplemental
Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags (SABs).
Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags (SABs)
are located in the outboard side of the front seats.
The SABs are marked with “SRS AIRBAG” or
“AIRBAG” on a label or on the seat trim on the
outboard side of the seats.
The SABs may help to reduce the risk of occupant
injury during certain side impacts, in addition to
the injury reduction potential provided by the seat
belts and body structure.
Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bag Label
When the SAB deploys, it opens the seam on the
outboard side of the seatback’s trim cover. The
inflating SAB deploys through the seat seam into
the space between the occupant and the door. The
SAB moves at a very high speed and with such a
high force that it could injure occupants if they are
not seated properly, or if items are positioned in
the area where the SAB inflates. Children are at an
even greater risk of injury from a deploying air bag.
Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtains
(SABICs)
This vehicle is equipped with Supplemental Side
Air Bag Inflatable Curtains (SABICs).
Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtains
(SABICs) are located above the side windows. The
trim covering the SABICs is labeled “SRS AIRBAG”
or “AIRBAG”.
WARNING!
Do not drill, cut, or tamper with the knee
impact bolsters in any way.
Do not mount any accessories to the knee
impact bolsters such as alarm lights, stereos,
citizen band radios, etc.
WARNING!
Do not use accessory seat covers or place
objects between you and the Side Air Bags; the
performance could be adversely affected and/or
objects could be pushed into you, causing
serious injury.
22_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 236
SAFETY 237
Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtain (SABIC)
Label Location
SABICs may help reduce the risk of head and other
injuries to front and rear seat outboard occupants
in certain side impacts, in addition to the injury
reduction potential provided by the seat belts and
body structure.
The SABIC deploys downward, covering the side
windows. An inflating SABIC pushes the outside
edge of the headliner out of the way and covers the
window. The SABICs inflate with enough force to
injure occupants if they are not belted and seated
properly, or if items are positioned in the area
where the SABICs inflate. Children are at an even
greater risk of injury from a deploying air bag.
The SABICs may help reduce the risk of partial or
complete ejection of vehicle occupants through
side windows in certain side impact events.
Side Impacts
The Side Air Bags are designed to activate in
certain side impacts. The Occupant Restraint
Controller (ORC) determines whether the
deployment of the Side Air Bags in a particular
impact event is appropriate, based on the severity
and type of collision. The side impact sensors aid
the ORC in determining the appropriate response
to impact events. The system is calibrated to
deploy the Side Air Bags on the impact side of the
vehicle during impacts that require Side Air Bag
occupant protection. In side impacts, the Side Air
Bags deploy independently; a left side impact
deploys the left Side Air Bags only and a right-side
impact deploys the right Side Air Bags only. Vehicle
damage by itself is not a good indicator of whether
or not Side Air Bags should have deployed.
WARNING!
Do not mount equipment, or stack luggage or
other cargo up high enough to block the
deployment of the SABICs. The trim covering
above the side windows where the SABIC and
its deployment path are located should
remain free from any obstructions.
In order for the SABICs to work as intended, do
not install any accessory items in your vehicle
which could alter the roof. Do not add an after-
market sunroof to your vehicle. Do not add
roof racks that require permanent attach-
ments (bolts or screws) for installation on the
vehicle roof. Do not drill into the roof of the
vehicle for any reason.
6
22_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 237
238 SAFETY
The Side Air Bags will not deploy in all side
collisions, including some collisions at certain
angles, or some side collisions that do not impact
the area of the passenger compartment. The Side
Air Bags may deploy during angled or offset frontal
collisions where the front air bags deploy.
Side Air Bags are a supplement to the seat belt
restraint system. Side Air Bags deploy in less time
than it takes to blink your eyes.
NOTE:
Air bag covers may not be obvious in the interior
trim, but they will open during air bag deployment.
Rollover Events
Side Air Bags and seat belt pretensioners are
designed to activate in certain rollover events. The
Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) determines
whether deployment in a particular rollover event
is appropriate, based on the severity and type of
collision. Vehicle damage by itself is not a good
indicator of whether or not Side Air Bags and seat
belt pretensioners should have deployed.
The Side Air Bags and seat belt pretensioners will
not deploy in all rollover events. The rollover
sensing system determines if a rollover event may
be in progress and whether deployment is
appropriate. In the event the vehicle experiences a
rollover or near rollover event, and deployment is
appropriate, the rollover sensing system will deploy
the side air bags and seat belt pretensioners on
both sides of the vehicle.
The SABICs may help reduce the risk of partial or
complete ejection of vehicle occupants through
side windows in certain rollover or side impact
events.
Air Bag System Components
NOTE:
The Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) monitors
the internal circuits and interconnecting wiring
associated with electrical Air Bag System Compo-
nents listed below:
Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)
Air Bag Warning Light
Steering Wheel and Column
Instrument Panel
Knee Impact Bolsters
WARNING!
Occupants, including children, who are up
against or very close to Side Air Bags can be
seriously injured or killed. Occupants,
including children, should never lean on or
sleep against the door, side windows, or area
where the side air bags inflate, even if they are
in an infant or child restraint.
Seat belts (and child restraints where appro-
priate) are necessary for your protection in all
collisions. They also help keep you in position,
away from an inflating Side Air Bag. To get the
best protection from the Side Air Bags, occu-
pants must wear their seat belts properly and
sit upright with their backs against the seats.
Children must be properly restrained in a child
restraint or booster seat that is appropriate for
the size of the child.
WARNING!
Side Air Bags need room to inflate. Do not lean
against the door or window. Sit upright in the
center of the seat.
Being too close to the Side Air Bags during
deployment could cause you to be severely
injured or killed.
Relying on the Side Air Bags alone could lead
to more severe injuries in a collision. The Side
Air Bags work with your seat belt to restrain
you properly. In some collisions, Side Air Bags
won’t deploy at all. Always wear your seat belt
even though you have Side Air Bags.
22_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 238
SAFETY 239
Driver and Front Passenger Air Bags
Seat Belt Buckle Switch
Supplemental Side Air Bags
Front and Side Impact Sensors
Seat Belt Pretensioners
If A Deployment Occurs
The front air bags are designed to deflate
immediately after deployment.
NOTE:
Front and/or side air bags will not deploy in all colli-
sions. This does not mean something is wrong with
the air bag system.
If you do have a collision which deploys the air
bags, any or all of the following may occur:
The air bag material may sometimes cause
abrasions and/or skin reddening to the occu-
pants as the air bags deploy and unfold. The
abrasions are similar to friction rope burns or
those you might get sliding along a carpet or
gymnasium floor. They are not caused by
contact with chemicals. They are not permanent
and normally heal quickly. However, if you
haven’t healed significantly within a few days, or
if you have any blistering, see your doctor imme-
diately.
As the air bags deflate, you may see some
smoke-like particles. The particles are a normal
by-product of the process that generates the
non-toxic gas used for air bag inflation. These
airborne particles may irritate the skin, eyes,
nose, or throat. If you have skin or eye irritation,
rinse the area with cool water. For nose or throat
irritation, move to fresh air. If the irritation
continues, see your doctor. If these particles
settle on your clothing, follow the garment
manufacturer’s instructions for cleaning.
Do not drive your vehicle after the air bags have
deployed. If you are involved in another collision,
the air bags will not be in place to protect you.
NOTE:
Air bag covers may not be obvious in the interior
trim, but they will open during air bag deploy-
ment.
After any collision, the vehicle should be taken
to an authorized dealer immediately.
Enhanced Accident Response System
In the event of an impact, if the communication
network remains intact, and the power remains
intact, depending on the nature of the event, the
ORC will determine whether to have the Enhanced
Accident Response System perform the following
functions:
Cut off fuel to the engine (if equipped)
Cut off battery power to the electric motor (if
equipped)
Flash hazard lights as long as the battery has
power
Turn on the interior lights, which remain on as
long as the battery has power or for 15 minutes
from the intervention of the Enhanced Accident
Response System
Unlock the power door locks
WARNING!
Deployed air bags and seat belt pretensioners
cannot protect you in another collision. Have the
air bags, seat belt pretensioners, and the seat
belt retractor assemblies replaced by an
authorized dealer immediately. Also, have the
Occupant Restraint Controller System serviced
as well.
6
22_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 239
240 SAFETY
(Continued)
Your vehicle may also be designed to perform any
of these other functions in response to the
Enhanced Accident Response System:
Turn off the Fuel Filter Heater, Turn off the HVAC
Blower Motor, Close the HVAC Circulation Door
Cut off battery power to the:
Engine
Electric Motor (if equipped)
Electric power steering
Brake booster
Electric park brake
Automatic transmission gear selector
Horn
Front wiper
Headlamp washer pump (if equipped)
NOTE:
After an accident, remember to cycle the ignition to
the STOP (OFF/LOCK) position and remove the key
from the ignition switch to avoid draining the
battery. Carefully check the vehicle for fuel leaks in
the engine compartment and on the ground near
the engine compartment and fuel tank before
resetting the system and starting the engine. If
there are no fuel leaks or damage to the vehicle
electrical devices (e.g. headlights) after an
accident, reset the system by following the
procedure described below. If you have any doubt,
contact an authorized dealer.
Enhanced Accident Response System
Reset Procedure
In order to reset the Enhanced Accident Response
System functions after an event, the ignition switch
must be changed from ignition START or ON/RUN
to ignition OFF. Carefully check the vehicle for fuel
leaks in the engine compartment and on the
ground near the engine compartment and fuel
tank before resetting the system and starting the
engine.
After an accident, if the vehicle will not start after
performing the reset procedure, the vehicle must
be towed to an authorized dealer to be inspected
and to have the Enhanced Accident Response
System reset.
Maintaining Your Air Bag System
WARNING!
Modifications to any part of the air bag system
could cause it to fail when you need it. You
could be injured if the air bag system is not
there to protect you. Do not modify the compo-
nents or wiring, including adding any kind of
badges or stickers to the steering wheel hub
trim cover or the upper passenger side of the
instrument panel. Do not modify the front
fascia/bumper, vehicle body structure, or add
aftermarket side steps or running boards.
It is dangerous to try to repair any part of the
air bag system yourself. Be sure to tell anyone
who works on your vehicle that it has an air
bag system.
22_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 240
SAFETY 241
Event Data Recorder (EDR)
This vehicle is equipped with an event data
recorder (EDR). The main purpose of an EDR is to
record, in certain crash or near crash-like
situations, such as an air bag deployment or hitting
a road obstacle, data that will assist in
understanding how a vehicle’s systems performed.
The EDR is designed to record data related to
vehicle dynamics and safety systems for a short
period of time, typically 30 seconds or less.
The EDR in this vehicle is designed to record such
data as:
How various systems in your vehicle were oper-
ating;
Whether or not the driver and passenger safety
belts were buckled/fastened;
How far (if at all) the driver was depressing the
accelerator and/or brake pedal; and,
How fast the vehicle was traveling.
These data can help provide a better
understanding of the circumstances in which
crashes and injuries occur.
NOTE:
EDR data are recorded by your vehicle only if a
non-trivial crash situation occurs; no data are
recorded by the EDR under normal driving condi-
tions and no personal data (e.g., name, gender,
age, and crash location) are recorded. However,
other parties, such as law enforcement, could
combine the EDR data with the type of personally
identifying data routinely acquired during a crash
investigation.
To read data recorded by an EDR, special
equipment is required, and access to the vehicle or
the EDR is needed. In addition to the vehicle
manufacturer, other parties, such as law
enforcement, that have the special equipment,
can read the information if they have access to the
vehicle or the EDR.
Do not attempt to modify any part of your air
bag system. The air bag may inflate acciden-
tally or may not function properly if modifica-
tions are made. Take your vehicle to an
authorized dealer for any air bag system
service. If your seat, including your trim cover
and cushion, needs to be serviced in any way
(including removal or loosening/tightening of
seat attachment bolts), take the vehicle to an
authorized dealer. Only manufacturer
approved seat accessories may be used. If it is
necessary to modify the air bag system for
persons with disabilities, contact an autho-
rized dealer.
WARNING!
6
22_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 241
242 SAFETY
CHILD RESTRAINTS
Everyone in your vehicle needs to be buckled up at
all times, including babies and children. Every
state in the United States, and every Canadian
province, requires that small children ride in
proper restraint systems. This is the law, and you
can be prosecuted for ignoring it.
Children 12 years or younger should ride properly
buckled up in a rear seat, if available. According to
crash statistics, children are safer when properly
restrained in the rear seats rather than in the front.
There are different sizes and types of restraints for
children from newborn size to the child almost
large enough for an adult safety belt. Always check
the child seat Owner’s Manual to make sure you
have the correct seat for your child. Carefully read
and follow all the instructions and warnings in the
child restraint Owner’s Manual and on all the
labels attached to the child restraint.
Before buying any restraint system, make sure that
it has a label certifying that it meets all applicable
Safety Standards. You should also make sure that
you can install it in the vehicle where you will use it.
NOTE:
For additional information, refer to http://
www.nhtsa.gov/parents-and-caregivers or call:
1–888–327–4236
Canadian residents should refer to Transport
Canada’s website for additional information:
https://www.tc.gc.ca/en/services/road/
child-car-seat-safety.html
WARNING!
In a collision, an unrestrained child can become
a projectile inside the vehicle. The force required
to hold even an infant on your lap could become
so great that you could not hold the child, no
matter how strong you are. The child and others
could be badly injured or killed. Any child riding
in your vehicle should be in a proper restraint for
the child’s size.
22_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 242
SAFETY 243
Summary Of Recommendations For Restraining Children In Vehicles
Infant And Child Restraints
Safety experts recommend that children ride
rear-facing in the vehicle until they are two years
old or until they reach either the height or weight
limit of their rear-facing child restraint. Two types of
child restraints can be used rear-facing: infant
carriers and convertible child seats.
The infant carrier is only used rear-facing in the
vehicle. It is recommended for children from birth
until they reach the weight or height limit of the
infant carrier. Convertible child seats can be used
either rear-facing or forward-facing in the vehicle.
Convertible child seats often have a higher weight
limit in the rear-facing direction than infant carriers
do, so they can be used rear-facing by children who
have outgrown their infant carrier but are still less
than at least two years old. Children should remain
rear-facing until they reach the highest weight or
height allowed by their convertible child seat.
Child Size, Height, Weight Or Age Recommended Type Of Child Restraint
Infants and Toddlers
Children who are two years old or younger and who
have not reached the height or weight limits of their
child restraint
Either an Infant Carrier or a Convertible Child
Restraint, facing rearward in a rear seat of the
vehicle
Small Children
Children who are at least two years old or who have
outgrown the height or weight limit of their
rear-facing child restraint
Forward-Facing Child Restraint with a five-point
Harness, facing forward in a rear seat of the
vehicle
Larger Children
Children who have outgrown their forward-facing
child restraint, but are too small to properly fit the
vehicle’s seat belt
Belt Positioning Booster Seat and the vehicle seat
belt, seated in a rear seat of the vehicle
Children Too Large for Child Restraints
Children 12 years old or younger, who have
outgrown the height or weight limit of their booster
seat
Vehicle Seat Belt, seated in a rear seat of the
vehicle
WARNING!
Never place a rear-facing child restraint in
front of an air bag. A deploying passenger
front air bag can cause death or serious injury
to a child 12 years or younger, including a
child in a rear-facing child restraint.
Never install a rear-facing child restraint in the
front seat of a vehicle. Only use a rear-facing
child restraint in the rear seat. If the vehicle
does not have a rear seat, do not transport a
rear-facing child restraint in that vehicle.
6
22_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 243
244 SAFETY
Older Children And Child Restraints
Children who are two years old or who have
outgrown their rear-facing convertible child seat
can ride forward-facing in the vehicle.
Forward-facing child seats and convertible child
seats used in the forward-facing direction are for
children who are over two years old or who have
outgrown the rear-facing weight or height limit of
their rear-facing convertible child seat. Children
should remain in a forward-facing child seat with a
harness for as long as possible, up to the highest
weight or height allowed by the child seat.
All children whose weight or height is above the
forward-facing limit for the child seat should use a
belt-positioning booster seat until the vehicle’s
seat belts fit properly. If the child cannot sit with
knees bent over the vehicle’s seat cushion while
the child’s back is against the seatback, they
should use a belt-positioning booster seat. The
child and belt-positioning booster seat are held in
the vehicle by the seat belt.
WARNING!
Do not install a rear-facing car seat using a rear
support leg in this vehicle. The floor of this
vehicle is not designed to manage the crash
forces of this type of car seat. In a crash, the
support leg may not function as it was designed
by the car seat manufacturer, and your child may
be more severely injured as a result.
WARNING!
Improper installation can lead to failure of an
infant or child restraint. It could come loose in
a collision. The child could be badly injured or
killed. Follow the child restraint manufac-
turer’s directions exactly when installing an
infant or child restraint.
After a child restraint is installed in the
vehicle, do not move the vehicle seat forward
or rearward because it can loosen the child
restraint attachments. Remove the child
restraint before adjusting the vehicle seat
position. When the vehicle seat has been
adjusted, reinstall the child restraint.
When your child restraint is not in use, secure
it in the vehicle with the seat belt or LATCH
anchorages, or remove it from the vehicle. Do
not leave it loose in the vehicle. In a sudden
stop or accident, it could strike the occupants
or seatbacks and cause serious personal
injury.
22_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 244
SAFETY 245
Children Too Large For Booster Seats
Children who are large enough to wear the
shoulder belt comfortably, and whose legs are long
enough to bend over the front of the seat when
their back is against the seatback, should use the
seat belt in a rear seat. Use this simple 5-step test
to decide whether the child can use the vehicle’s
seat belt alone:
1. Can the child sit all the way back against the
back of the vehicle seat?
2. Do the child’s knees bend comfortably over
the front of the vehicle seat while the child is
still sitting all the way back?
3. Does the shoulder belt cross the child’s
shoulder between the neck and arm?
4. Is the lap part of the belt as low as possible,
touching the child’s thighs and not the
stomach?
5. Can the child stay seated like this for the whole
trip?
If the answer to any of these questions was “no,”
then the child still needs to use a booster seat in
this vehicle. If the child is using the lap/shoulder
belt, check seat belt fit periodically and make sure
the seat belt buckle is latched. A child’s squirming
or slouching can move the belt out of position. If
the shoulder belt contacts the face or neck, move
the child closer to the center of the vehicle, or use
a booster seat to position the seat belt on the child
correctly.
WARNING!
Never allow a child to put the shoulder belt
under an arm or behind their back. In a crash,
the shoulder belt will not protect a child properly,
which may result in serious injury or death. A
child must always wear both the lap and
shoulder portions of the seat belt correctly.
6
22_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 245
246 SAFETY
Recommendations For Attaching Child Restraints
Restraint Type
Combined Weight of
the Child + Child
Restraint
Use Any Attachment Method Shown With An “X” Below
LATCH – Lower
Anchors Only
Seat Belt Only
LATCH – Lower
Anchors + Top Tether
Anchor
Seat Belt + Top Tether
Anchor
Rear-Facing Child
Restraint
Up to 65 lbs
(29.5 kg)
X X
Rear-Facing Child
Restraint
More than 65 lbs
(29.5 kg)
X
Forward-Facing Child
Restraint
Up to 65 lbs
(29.5 kg)
X X
Forward-Facing Child
Restraint
More than 65 lbs
(29.5 kg)
X
22_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 246
SAFETY 247
Lower Anchors And Tethers For CHildren
(LATCH) Restraint System
LATCH Label
Your vehicle is equipped with the child restraint
anchorage system called LATCH, which stands for
Lower Anchors and Tethers for CHildren. The
LATCH system has three vehicle anchor points for
installing LATCH-equipped child seats. There are
two lower anchorages located at the back of the
seat cushion where it meets the seatback and one
top tether anchorage located behind the seating
position. These anchorages are used to install
LATCH-equipped child seats without using the
vehicle’s seat belts. Some seating positions may
have a top tether anchorage but no lower
anchorages. In these seating positions, the seat
belt must be used with the top tether anchorage to
install the child restraint. Please see the following
table for more information.
LATCH Positions For Installing Child
Restraints In This Vehicle
Regular Cab LATCH Positions
Top Tether Anchorage Symbol
6
22_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 247
248 SAFETY
Crew Cab 60/40 Split Bench LATCH Positions
Quad Cab LATCH Positions Crew Cab Full Bench LATCH Positions
Top Tether Anchorage Symbol
Lower Anchorage Symbol
(2 Anchorages Per Seating Position)
Top Tether Anchorage Symbol
Lower Anchorage Symbol
(2 Anchorages Per Seating Position)
Top Tether Anchorage Symbol
Lower Anchorage Symbol
(2 Anchorages Per Seating Position)
22_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 248
SAFETY 249
Frequently Asked Questions About Installing Child Restraints With LATCH
What is the weight limit (child’s weight + weight of
the child restraint) for using the LATCH anchorage
system to attach the child restraint?
65 lbs (29.5 kg)
Use the LATCH anchorage system until the
combined weight of the child and the child restraint
is 65 lbs (29.5 kg). Use the seat belt and tether
anchor instead of the LATCH system once the
combined weight is more than 65 lbs (29.5 kg).
Can the LATCH anchorages and the seat belt be
used together to attach a rear-facing or
forward-facing child restraint?
No
Do not use the seat belt when you use the LATCH
anchorage system to attach a rear-facing or
forward-facing child restraint.
Booster seats may be attached to the LATCH
anchorages if allowed by the booster seat
manufacturer. See your booster seat owner’s
manual for more information.
Can a child seat be installed in the center position
using the inner LATCH lower anchorages from the
outboard seating positions?
Quad Cab and Crew Cab with full bench - No
Crew Cab Split Bench and Regular Cab - N/A
Regular Cab Front, Quad Cab or Crew Cab with full
bench rear seat: use the seat belt and tether
anchor to install a child seat in the center seating
position.
Crew Cab with split bench rear seat: Child
restraints can be installed using the supplied lower
anchorages for the center seating position.
6
22_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 249
250 SAFETY
Locating The LATCH Anchorages
The lower anchorages are round bars
that are found at the rear of the seat
cushion where it meets the seatback.
They are just visible when you lean into
the rear seat to install the child restraint. You will
easily feel them if you run your finger along the gap
between the seatback and seat cushion.
Quad Cab/Crew Cab Rear Outboard Seats (Driver Side)
Locating The Upper Tether Anchorages
Regular Cab models have tether strap
anchorages behind the front center and
right seats. Quad Cab and Crew Cab
models have tether strap anchorages
located behind each of the rear seats.
Can two child restraints be attached using a
common lower LATCH anchorage?
No
Never “share” a LATCH anchorage with two or more
child restraints. If the center position does not have
dedicated LATCH lower anchorages, use the seat
belt to install a child seat in the center position
next to a child seat using the LATCH anchorages in
an outboard position.
Can the rear-facing child restraint touch the back of
the front passenger seat?
Yes
The child seat may touch the back of the front
passenger seat if the child restraint manufacturer
also allows contact. See your child restraint
owner’s manual for more information.
Can the rear head restraints be removed? Yes
The head restraints can be removed in every rear
seating position if they interfere with the
installation of the child restraint Ú page 35.
Frequently Asked Questions About Installing Child Restraints With LATCH
22_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 250
SAFETY 251
Regular Cab Tether Anchorages (Behind Covers)
Crew Or Quad Cab Outboard Tether Anchorage
Crew Or Quad Cab Center Tether Anchorage With Head
Restraint In Raised Position
LATCH-compatible child restraint systems will be
equipped with a rigid bar or a flexible strap on each
side. Each will have a hook or connector to attach
to the lower anchorage and a way to tighten the
connection to the anchorage. Forward-facing child
restraints and some rear-facing child restraints will
also be equipped with a tether strap. The tether
strap will have a hook at the end to attach to the
top tether anchorage and a way to tighten the strap
after it is attached to the anchorage.
Center Seat LATCH
Regular Cab, Quad Cab Or Crew Cab Full Bench
Rear Seat: No Lower Center LATCH Anchorages
Available
1 — Tether Anchor
2 — Tether Strap Hook
3 — Tether Strap To Child Restraint
WARNING!
Do not install a child restraint in the center
position using the LATCH system. This position
is not approved for installing child seats using
the LATCH attachments. You must use the
seat belt and tether anchor to install a child
seat in the center seating position.
Never use the same lower anchorage to
attach more than one child restraint. Please
refer to Ú page 252 for typical installation
instructions.
6
22_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 251
252 SAFETY
Crew Cab Split Bench Rear Seat: Center LATCH
Anchorages Available
If a child restraint installed in the center position
blocks the seat belt webbing or buckle for the
outboard position, do not use that outboard
position. If a child seat in the center position blocks
the outboard LATCH anchors or seat belt, do not
install a child seat in that outboard position.
Always follow the directions of the child restraint
manufacturer when installing your child restraint.
Not all child restraint systems will be installed as
described here.
To Install a LATCH-Compatible Child
Restraint
If the selected seating position has a Switchable
Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) seat belt, stow
the seat belt, following the instructions below. See
Ú page 253 to check what type of seat belt each
seating position has.
1. Loosen the adjusters on the lower straps and
on the tether strap of the child seat so that
you can more easily attach the hooks or
connectors to the vehicle anchorages.
2. Place the child seat between the lower
anchorages for that seating position. If the
second row seat can be reclined, you may
recline the seat and/or raise the head restraint
(if adjustable) to get a better fit. If the rear seat
can be moved forward and rearward in the
vehicle, you may wish to move it to its
rear-most position to make room for the child
seat. You may also move the front seat forward
to allow more room for the child seat.
3. Attach the lower hooks or connectors of the
child restraint to the lower anchorages in the
selected seating position.
4. If the child restraint has a tether strap, connect
it to the top tether anchorage. See
Ú page 257 for directions to attach a tether
anchor.
5. Tighten all of the straps as you push the child
restraint rearward and downward into the
seat. Remove slack in the straps according to
the child restraint manufacturer’s instructions.
6. Test that the child restraint is installed tightly
by pulling back and forth on the child seat at
the belt path. It should not move more than
1 inch (25.4 mm) in any direction.
WARNING!
Never use the same lower anchorage to attach
more than one child restraint. Please refer to
Ú page 252 for typical installation instructions.
22_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 252
SAFETY 253
How To Stow An Unused Switchable-ALR
(ALR) Seat Belt:
When using the LATCH attaching system to install
a child restraint, stow all ALR seat belts that are not
being used by other occupants or being used to
secure child restraints. An unused belt could injure
a child if they play with it and accidentally lock the
seat belt retractor. Before installing a child
restraint using the LATCH system, buckle the seat
belt behind the child restraint and out of the child’s
reach. If the buckled seat belt interferes with the
child restraint installation, instead of buckling it
behind the child restraint, route the seat belt
through the child restraint belt path and then
buckle it. Do not lock the seat belt. Remind all
children in the vehicle that the seat belts are not
toys and that they should not play with them.
Installing Child Restraints Using The
Vehicle Seat Belt
Child restraint systems are designed to be secured
in vehicle seats by lap belts or the lap belt portion
of a lap/shoulder belt.
WARNING!
Improper installation of a child restraint to the
LATCH anchorages can lead to failure of the
restraint. The child could be badly injured or
killed. Follow the child restraint manufac-
turer’s directions exactly when installing an
infant or child restraint.
Child restraint anchorages are designed to
withstand only those loads imposed by
correctly-fitted child restraints. Under no
circumstances are they to be used for adult
seat belts, harnesses, or for attaching other
items or equipment to the vehicle.
WARNING!
Improper installation or failure to properly
secure a child restraint can lead to failure of
the restraint. The child could be badly injured
or killed.
Follow the child restraint manufacturer’s
directions exactly when installing an infant or
child restraint.
6
22_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 253
254 SAFETY
The seat belts in the passenger seating positions
are equipped with either a Switchable Automatic
Locking Retractor (ALR) or a cinching latch plate or
both. Both types of seat belts are designed to keep
the lap portion of the seat belt tight around the
child restraint so that it is not necessary to use a
locking clip. The ALR retractor can be “switched”
into a locked mode by pulling all of the webbing out
of the retractor and then letting the webbing
retract back into the retractor. If it is locked, the
ALR will make a clicking noise while the webbing is
pulled back into the retractor. Refer to the
“Automatic Locking Mode” description on
Ú page 232 for additional information on ALR. The
cinching latch plate is designed to hold the lap
portion of the seat belt tight when webbing is
pulled tight and straight through a child restraint’s
belt path.
Please see the table below and the following
sections for more information.
Lap/Shoulder Belt Systems For Installing
Child Restraints In This Vehicle
Regular Cab Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) Locations
Quad Cab/Crew Cab Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR)
Locations
ALR — Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor
Top Tether Anchorage Symbol
Cinching Latchplate — Cinching Latchplate
ALR — Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor
Top Tether Anchorage Symbol
Frequently Asked Questions About Installing Child Restraints With Seat Belts
What is the weight limit (child’s weight + weight of
the child restraint) for using the Tether Anchor with
the seat belt to attach a forward facing child
restraint?
Weight limit of the Child Restraint
Always use the tether anchor when using the seat
belt to install a forward facing child restraint, up to
the recommended weight limit of the child
restraint.
Can the rear-facing child restraint touch the back of
the front passenger seat?
Yes
Contact between the front passenger seat and the
child restraint is allowed, if the child restraint
manufacturer also allows contact.
22_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 254
SAFETY 255
Installing A Child Restraint With A
Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor
(ALR):
Child restraint systems are designed to be secured
in vehicle seats by lap belts or the lap belt portion
of a lap/shoulder belt.
1. For Crew And Quad Cab Models
Place the child seat in the center of the seating
position. If the second row seat can be re-
clined, you may recline the seat and/or raise
the head restraint (if adjustable) to get a better
fit. If the rear seat can be moved forward and
rearward in the vehicle, you may wish to move
it to its rear-most position to make room for the
child seat. You may also move the front seat
forward to allow more room for the child seat.
For Regular Cab Models
Place the child seat in the center of the seating
position. Move the vehicle seat as far rearward
as possible to keep the child as far from the
passenger air bag as possible.
2. Pull enough of the seat belt webbing from the
retractor to pass it through the belt path of the
child restraint. Do not twist the belt webbing in
the belt path.
3. Slide the latch plate into the buckle until you
hear a “click.”
4. Pull on the webbing to make the lap portion
tight against the child seat.
5. To lock the seat belt, pull down on the shoulder
part of the belt until you have pulled all the
seat belt webbing out of the retractor. Then,
allow the webbing to retract back into the
retractor. As the webbing retracts, you will hear
a clicking sound. This means the seat belt is
now in the Automatic Locking mode.
6. Try to pull the webbing out of the retractor. If it
is locked, you should not be able to pull out any
webbing. If the retractor is not
locked, repeat
step 5.
Can the rear head restraints be removed? Yes
The rear head restraints can be removed in every
seating position if they interfere with the
installation of the child restraint Ú page 35.
Can the buckle stalk be twisted to tighten the seat
belt against the belt path of the child restraint?
Yes – Cinching Latch Plate
No – ALR
In positions with cinching latch plates (CINCH), the
buckle stalk may be twisted up to 3 full turns. Do
not twist the buckle stalk in a seating position with
an ALR retractor.
Frequently Asked Questions About Installing Child Restraints With Seat Belts
WARNING!
Improper installation or failure to properly
secure a child restraint can lead to failure of
the restraint. The child could be badly injured
or killed.
Follow the child restraint manufacturer’s
directions exactly when installing an infant or
child restraint.
6
22_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 255
256 SAFETY
7. Finally, pull up on any excess webbing to
tighten the lap portion around the child
restraint while you push the child restraint
rearward and downward into the vehicle seat.
8. If the child restraint has a top tether strap and
the seating position has a top tether
anchorage, connect the tether strap to the
anchorage and tighten the tether strap. See
Ú page 257 for directions to attach a tether
anchor.
9. Test that the child restraint is installed tightly
by pulling back and forth on the child seat at
the belt path. It should not move more than
1 inch (25.4 mm) in any direction.
Any seat belt system will loosen with time, so check
the belt occasionally, and pull it tight if necessary.
Installing A Child Restraint With A Cinching
Latch Plate (CINCH) — If Equipped:
Child restraint systems are designed to be secured
in vehicle seats by lap belts or the lap belt portion
of a lap/shoulder belt.
1. Place the child seat in the center of the
seating position. If the second row seat can
be reclined, you may recline the seat and/or
raise the head restraint (if adjustable) to get a
better fit. If the rear seat can be moved
forward and rearward in the vehicle, you may
wish to move it to its rear-most position to
make room for the child seat. You may also
move the front seat forward to allow more
room for the child seat.
2. Next, pull enough of the seat belt webbing
from the retractor to pass it through the belt
path of the child restraint. Do not twist the belt
webbing in the belt path.
3. Slide the latch plate into the buckle until you
hear a “click.”
4. Finally, pull up on any excess webbing to
tighten the lap portion around the child
restraint while you push the child restraint
rearward and downward into the vehicle seat.
5. If the child restraint has a top tether strap and
the seating position has a top tether
anchorage, connect the tether strap to the
anchorage and tighten the tether strap. See
Ú page 257 for directions to attach a tether
anchor.
6. Test that the child restraint is installed tightly
by pulling back and forth on the child seat at
the belt path. It should not move more than
1 inch (25.4 mm) in any direction.
Any seat belt system will loosen with time, so check
the belt occasionally, and pull it tight if necessary.
If the buckle or the cinching latch plate is too close
to the belt path opening of the child restraint, you
may have trouble tightening the seat belt. If this
happens, disconnect the latch plate from the
buckle and twist the short buckle-end belt up to
three full turns to shorten it. Insert the latch plate
into the buckle with the release button facing out,
away from the child restraint. Repeat steps 4 to 6,
above, to complete the installation of the child
restraint.
WARNING!
Improper installation or failure to properly
secure a child restraint can lead to failure of
the restraint. The child could be badly injured
or killed.
Follow the child restraint manufacturer’s
directions exactly when installing an infant or
child restraint.
22_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 256
SAFETY 257
If the belt still cannot be tightened after you
shorten the buckle, disconnect the latch plate from
the buckle, turn the buckle around one half turn,
and insert the latch plate into the buckle again. If
you still cannot make the child restraint installation
tight, try a different seating position.
Installing Child Restraints Using The Top
Tether Anchorage
Regular Cab Trucks:
In the regular cab truck, the top tether anchorages
are located behind the center and right passenger
seats. There is a plastic cover over each
anchorage. To attach the tether strap of the child
restraint:
1. Place the child restraint on the seat and
adjust the tether strap so that it will reach
over the seat back, under the head restraint
and to the tether anchor directly behind the
seat.
Regular Cab Tether Anchorages
2. Route the tether strap to provide the most
direct path between the anchorage and the
child seat. The tether strap should go between
the head restraint posts underneath the head
restraint. You may need to adjust the head
restraint to the upward position to pass the
tether strap underneath the head restraint
and between its posts.
3. Lift the cover (if so equipped), and attach the
hook to the square opening in the sheet metal.
Tighten the tether strap according to the child
seat manufacturer’s instructions.
WARNING!
Do not attach a tether strap for a rear-facing car
seat to any location in front of the car seat,
including the seat frame or a tether anchorage.
Only attach the tether strap of a rear-facing car
seat to the tether anchorage that is approved for
that seating position, located behind the top of
the vehicle seat. See Ú page 247 for the
location of approved tether anchorages in your
vehicle.
1 — Tether Anchor
2 — Tether Strap Hook
3 — Tether Strap To Child Restraint
WARNING!
Never place a rear-facing child restraint in front
of an air bag. A deploying Passenger Front Air
Bag can cause death or serious injury to a child
12 years or younger, including a child in a
rear-facing child restraint.
6
22_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 257
258 SAFETY
Quad Or Crew Cab Trucks
The top tether anchorages in this vehicle are tether
strap loops located between the rear glass and the
back of the rear seat. There is a tether strap loop
located behind each seating position. Follow the
steps below to attach the tether strap of the child
restraint.
Right Or Left Outboard Seats:
1. Raise the head restraint and reach between
the rear seat and rear glass to access the
tether strap loop.
Head Restraint In Raised Position
Tether Strap Loop With Center Head Restraint
In Raised Position
2. Place a child restraint on the seat and adjust
the tether strap so that it will reach over the
seat back, under the head restraint, through
the tether strap loop behind the seat and over
to the tether strap loop behind the center seat.
3. Pass the tether strap hook under the head
restraint behind the child seat, though the
tether strap loop behind the seat and over to
the center tether strap loop.
Tether Strap Through Outboard Tether Strap Loop
4. Attach the hook to the center tether strap loop
(see diagram). Tighten the tether strap
according to the child seat manufacturer’s
instructions.
Tether Strap Through Outboard Tether Strap Loop And
Attached To Center Tether Strap Loop
22_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 258
SAFETY 259
NOTE:
If there are child seats in both of the outboard (left
and right) seating positions, the tether strap hooks
of both child seats should be connected to the
center tether strap loop. This is the correct way to
tether two outboard child seats.
Center Seat:
1. Raise the head restraint and reach between
the rear seat and rear glass to access the
tether strap loop.
Tether Strap Loop With Head Restraint In Raised Position
2. Place a child restraint on the seat and adjust
the tether strap so that it will reach over the
seat back, under the head restraint, through
the tether strap loop behind the seat and over
to the tether strap loop behind either the right
or left outboard seat.
3. Pass the tether strap hook under the head
restraint behind the child seat, though the
tether strap loop behind the seat and over to
the right or left outboard tether strap loop.
Tether Strap Through Center Tether Strap Loop
4. Attach the hook to the outboard tether strap
loop (see diagram). Tighten the tether strap
according to the child seat manufacturer’s
instructions.
Tether Strap Through Center Tether Strap Loop And
Attached To Outboard Tether Strap Loop
Installing Three Child Restraints:
1. Place a child restraint on each outboard rear
seat. Route the tether straps following the
directions for right and left seating positions,
above.
2. Attach both hooks to the center tether strap
loop, but do not tighten the straps yet.
3. Place a child restraint on the center rear seat.
Route the tether strap following the directions
for the center seating position, above.
6
22_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 259
260 SAFETY
4. Attach the hook to the outboard tether strap
loop.
5. Tighten the tether straps according to the child
seat manufacturer’s instructions, tightening
the right and left tether straps before the
center tether strap.
Outboard And Center Seating Positions Shown
SAFETY TIPS
TRANSPORTING PASSENGERS
NEVER TRANSPORT PASSENGERS IN THE CARGO
AREA.
TRANSPORTING PETS
Air Bags deploying in the front seat could harm
your pet. An unrestrained pet will be thrown about
and possibly injured, or injure a passenger during
panic braking or in a collision.
Pets should be restrained in the rear seat (if
equipped) in pet harnesses or pet carriers that are
secured by seat belts.
CONNECTED VEHICLES
Privacy of any wireless and wired communications
cannot be assured. Third parties may unlawfully
intercept information and private communications
without your consent. For further information, refer
to “Data Collection & Privacy” in your Uconnect
Owner’s Manual Supplement or “Onboard
Diagnostic System (OBD II) Cybersecurity”
Ú page 109.
WARNING!
An incorrectly anchored tether strap could
lead to increased head motion and possible
injury to the child. Use only the anchorage
position directly behind the child seat to
secure a child restraint top tether strap.
If your vehicle is equipped with a split rear
seat, make sure the tether strap does not slip
into the opening between the seatbacks as
you remove slack in the strap.
WARNING!
Do not leave children or animals inside parked
vehicles in hot weather. Interior heat buildup
may cause serious injury or death.
It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo
area, inside or outside of a vehicle. In a colli-
sion, people riding in these areas are more
likely to be seriously injured or killed.
Do not allow people to ride in any area of your
vehicle that is not equipped with seats and
seat belts.
Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat
and using a seat belt properly.
WARNING!
It is not possible to know or to predict all of the
possible outcomes if your vehicle’s systems are
breached. It may be possible that vehicle
systems, including safety related systems, could
be impaired or a loss of vehicle control could
occur that may result in an accident involving
serious injury or death.
22_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 260
SAFETY 261
(Continued)
SAFETY CHECKS YOU SHOULD MAKE
I
NSIDE THE VEHICLE
Seat Belts
Inspect the seat belt system periodically, checking
for cuts, frays, and loose parts. Damaged parts
must be replaced immediately. Do not
disassemble or modify the system.
If your vehicle is involved in a collision, or if you
have questions regarding the seat belt or retractor
conditions, take your vehicle to an authorized FCA
dealer or authorized FCA Certified Collision Care
Program facility for inspection.
Air Bag Warning Light
The Air Bag warning light will turn on for
four to eight seconds as a bulb check
when the ignition switch is first placed in
the ON/RUN position. If the light is either
not on during starting, stays on, or turns on while
driving, have the system inspected at an
authorized dealer as soon as possible. After the
bulb check, this light will illuminate with a single
chime when a fault with the Air Bag System has
been detected. It will stay on until the fault is
removed. If the light comes on intermittently or
remains on while driving, have an authorized
dealer service the vehicle immediately
Ú page 224.
Defroster
Check operation by selecting the defrost mode and
place the blower control on high speed. You should
be able to feel the air directed against the
windshield. See an authorized dealer for service if
your defroster is inoperable.
Floor Mat Safety Information
Always use floor mats designed to fit your vehicle.
Only use a floor mat that does not interfere with the
operation of the accelerator, brake or clutch
pedals. Only use a floor mat that is securely
attached using the floor mat fasteners so it cannot
slip out of position and interfere with the
accelerator, brake or clutch pedals or impair safe
operation of your vehicle in other ways.
WARNING!
An improperly attached, damaged, folded, or
stacked floor mat, or damaged floor mat
fasteners may cause your floor mat to interfere
with the accelerator, brake, or clutch pedals and
cause a loss of vehicle control. To prevent
SERIOUS INJURY or DEATH:
ALWAYS securely attach your floor
mat using the floor mat fasteners.
DO NOT install your floor mat upside
down or turn your floor mat over.
Lightly pull to confirm mat is secured using the
floor mat fasteners on a regular basis.
ALWAYS REMOVE THE EXISTING
FLOOR MAT FROM THE VEHICLE
before installing any other floor mat.
NEVER install or stack an additional
floor mat on top of an existing floor mat.
ONLY install floor mats designed to fit your
vehicle. NEVER install a floor mat that cannot
be properly attached and secured to your
vehicle. If a floor mat needs to be replaced,
only use a FCA approved floor mat for the
specific make, model, and year of your
vehicle.
6
22_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 261
262 SAFETY
(Continued)
PERIODIC SAFETY CHECKS YOU SHOULD
M
AKE OUTSIDE THE VEHICLE
Tires
Examine tires for excessive tread wear and uneven
wear patterns. Check for stones, nails, glass, or
other objects lodged in the tread or sidewall.
Inspect the tread for cuts and cracks. Inspect
sidewalls for cuts, cracks, and bulges. Check the
wheel bolts for tightness. Check the tires (including
spare) for proper cold inflation pressure.
Lights
Have someone observe the operation of brake
lights and exterior lights while you work the
controls. Check turn signal and high beam
indicator lights on the instrument panel.
Door Latches
Check for proper closing, latching, and locking.
Fluid Leaks
Check area under the vehicle after overnight
parking for fuel, coolant, oil, or other fluid leaks.
Also, if gasoline fumes are detected or if fuel, or
brake fluid leaks are suspected, the cause should
be located and corrected immediately.
ONLY use the driver’s side floor mat on the
driver’s side floor area. To check for interfer-
ence, with the vehicle properly parked with the
engine off, fully depress the accelerator, the
brake, and the clutch pedal (if present) to
check for interference. If your floor mat inter-
feres with the operation of any pedal, or is not
secure to the floor, remove the floor mat from
the vehicle and place the floor mat in your
trunk.
ONLY use the passenger’s side floor mat on
the passenger’s side floor area.
ALWAYS make sure objects cannot fall or slide
into the driver’s side floor area when the
vehicle is moving. Objects can become
trapped under accelerator, brake, or clutch
pedals and could cause a loss of vehicle
control.
WARNING!
NEVER place any objects under the floor mat
(e.g., towels, keys, etc.). These objects could
change the position of the floor mat and may
cause interference with the accelerator,
brake, or clutch pedals.
If the vehicle carpet has been removed and
re-installed, always properly attach carpet to
the floor and check the floor mat fasteners are
secure to the vehicle carpet. Fully depress
each pedal to check for interference with the
accelerator, brake, or clutch pedals then
re-install the floor mats.
It is recommended to only use mild soap and
water to clean your floor mats. After cleaning,
always check your floor mat has been properly
installed and is secured to your vehicle using
the floor mat fasteners by lightly pulling mat.
WARNING!
22_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 262
SAFETY 263
Exhaust Gas
The best protection against carbon monoxide entry
into the vehicle body is a properly maintained
engine exhaust system.
Whenever a change is noticed in the sound of the
exhaust system, when exhaust fumes can be
detected inside the vehicle, or when the underside
or rear of the vehicle is damaged, have an
authorized dealer inspect the complete exhaust
system and adjacent body areas for broken,
damaged, deteriorated, or mispositioned parts.
Open seams or loose connections could permit
exhaust fumes to seep into the passenger
compartment. In addition, inspect the exhaust
system each time the vehicle is raised for
lubrication or oil change. Replace as required.
Carbon Monoxide Warnings
WARNING!
Exhaust gases can injure or kill. They contain
carbon monoxide (CO), which is colorless and
odorless. Breathing it can make you
unconscious and can eventually poison you. To
avoid breathing (CO), follow these safety tips:
Do not run the engine in a closed garage or in
confined areas any longer than needed to
move your vehicle in or out of the area.
If you are required to drive with the trunk/lift-
gate/rear doors open, make sure that all
windows are closed and the climate control
BLOWER switch is set at high speed. DO NOT
use the recirculation mode.
If it is necessary to sit in a parked vehicle with
the engine running, adjust your heating or
cooling controls to force outside air into the
vehicle. Set the blower at high speed.
WARNING!
Carbon monoxide (CO) in exhaust gases is
deadly. Follow the precautions below to prevent
carbon monoxide poisoning:
Do not inhale exhaust gases. They contain
carbon monoxide, a colorless and odorless
gas, which can kill. Never run the engine in a
closed area, such as a garage, and never sit in
a parked vehicle with the engine running for
an extended period. If the vehicle is stopped in
an open area with the engine running for more
than a short period, adjust the ventilation
system to force fresh, outside air into the
vehicle.
Guard against carbon monoxide with proper
maintenance. Have the exhaust system
inspected every time the vehicle is raised.
Have any abnormal conditions repaired
promptly. Until repaired, drive with all side
windows fully open.
6
22_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 263
264
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
HAZARD WARNING FLASHERS
The Hazard Warning Flashers button is located
above the climate controls just below the radio.
Hazard Warning Flashers Button
Push the button to turn on the Hazard Warning
Flashers. When the button is activated, all
directional turn signals will flash on and off to warn
oncoming traffic of an emergency. Push the button
a second time to turn off the Hazard Warning
Flashers.
This is an emergency warning system and it should
not be used when the vehicle is in motion. Use it
when your vehicle is disabled and it is creating a
safety hazard for other motorists.
When leaving the vehicle to seek assistance, the
Hazard Warning Flashers will continue to operate
even though the ignition is placed in the OFF
position.
NOTE:
With extended use the Hazard Warning Flashers
may wear down your battery.
ASSIST AND SOS MIRROR — IF EQUIPPED
Assist And SOS Mirror
If equipped, the rearview mirror contains an
ASSIST and a SOS button.
NOTE:
Your vehicle may be transmitting data as autho-
rized by the subscriber Ú page 353.
The SOS and ASSIST buttons will only function if
you are connected to an operable LTE (voice/
data) or 4G (data) network. Other Uconnect
services will only be operable if your SiriusXM
Guardian™ service is active and you are
connected to an operable LTE (voice/data) or
4G (data) network.
WARNING!
ALWAYS obey traffic laws and pay attention to
the road. ALWAYS drive safely with your hands on
the steering wheel. You have full responsibility
and assume all risks related to the use of the
Uconnect features and applications in this
vehicle. Only use Uconnect features and
services when it is safe to do so. Failure to do so
may result in an accident involving serious injury
or death.
22_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 264
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 265
ASSIST Call
The ASSIST Button is used to automatically
connect you to any one of the following support
centers:
Roadside Assistance – If you get a flat tire, or
need a tow, just push the ASSIST button and
you’ll be connected to someone who can help.
Roadside Assistance will know what vehicle
you’re driving and its location. Additional fees
may apply for roadside Assistance.
SiriusXM Guardian™ Customer Care – In-vehicle
support for SiriusXM Guardian™.
Vehicle Customer Care – Total support for all
other vehicle issues.
Uconnect Customer Care – Total support for
Radio, Phone and NAV issues.
SOS Call
1. Push the SOS Call button on the Rearview
Mirror.
NOTE:
In case the SOS Call button is pushed in error,
there will be a 10 second delay before the SOS Call
system initiates a call to a SOS operator. To cancel
the SOS Call connection, push the SOS call button
on the Rearview Mirror or press the cancellation
button on the Device Screen. Termination of the
SOS Call will turn off the green LED light on the
Rearview Mirror.
2. The LED light located between the ASSIST and
SOS buttons on the Rearview Mirror will turn
green once a connection to a SOS operator has
been made.
3. Once a connection between the vehicle and a
SOS operator is made, the SOS Call system
may transmit the following important vehicle
information to a SOS operator:
Indication that the occupant placed a SOS
Call
The vehicle brand
The last known GPS coordinates of the
vehicle
4. You should be able to speak with the SOS
operator through the vehicle audio system to
determine if additional help is needed.
NOTE:
Your vehicle may be transmitting data as
authorized by the subscriber.
Once a connection is made between the
vehicle’s SOS Call system and the SOS oper-
ator, the SOS operator may be able to open
a voice connection with the vehicle to deter-
mine if additional help is needed. Once the
SOS operator opens a voice connection with
the vehicle’s SOS Call system, the operator
should be able to speak with you or other
vehicle occupants and hear sounds occur-
ring in the vehicle. The vehicle’s SOS Call
system will attempt to remain connected
with the SOS operator until the SOS oper-
ator terminates the connection.
5. The SOS operator may attempt to contact
appropriate emergency responders and
provide them with important vehicle
information and GPS coordinates.
WARNING!
ALWAYS obey traffic laws and pay attention to
the road. ALWAYS drive safely with your hands on
the steering wheel. You have full responsibility
and assume all risks related to the use of the
Uconnect features and applications in this
vehicle. Only use Uconnect features and
services when it is safe to do so. Failure to do so
may result in an accident involving serious injury
or death.
7
22_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 265
266 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
(Continued)
SOS Call System Limitations
Vehicles sold in Mexico DO NOT have SOS Call
system capabilities.
SOS or other emergency line operators in Mexico
may not answer or respond to SOS system calls.
If the SOS Call system detects a malfunction, any
of the following may occur at the time the
malfunction is detected, and at the beginning of
each ignition cycle:
The Rearview Mirror light located between the
ASSIST and SOS buttons will continuously illumi-
nate red.
The Device Screen will display the following
message “Vehicle device requires service.
Please contact an authorized dealer.”
An In-Vehicle Audio message will state “Vehicle
device requires service. Please contact an
authorized dealer.”
WARNING!
If anyone in the vehicle could be in danger
(e.g., fire or smoke is visible, dangerous road
conditions or location), do not wait for voice
contact from an Emergency Services Agent. All
occupants should exit the vehicle immediately
and move to a safe location.
Never place anything on or near the vehicle’s
operable network and GPS antennas. You
could prevent operable network and GPS
signal reception, which can prevent your
vehicle from placing an emergency call. An
operable network and GPS signal reception is
required for the SOS Call system to function
properly.
The SOS Call system is embedded into the
vehicle’s electrical system. Do not add after-
market electrical equipment to the vehicle’s
electrical system. This may prevent your
vehicle from sending a signal to initiate an
emergency call. To avoid interference that can
cause the SOS Call system to fail, never add
aftermarket equipment (e.g., two-way mobile
radio, CB radio, data recorder, etc.) to your
vehicle’s electrical system or modify the
antennas on your vehicle. IF YOUR VEHICLE
LOSES BATTERY POWER FOR ANY REASON
(INCLUDING DURING OR AFTER AN ACCI-
DENT), THE UCONNECT FEATURES, APPS AND
SERVICES, AMONG OTHERS, WILL NOT
OPERATE.
Modifications to any part of the SOS Call
system could cause the air bag system to fail
when you need it. You could be injured if the
air bag system is not there to help protect you.
WARNING!
22_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 266
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 267
Even if the SOS Call system is fully functional,
factors beyond FCA US LLC’s control may prevent
or stop the SOS Call system operation. These
include, but are not limited to, the following
factors:
The ignition is in the OFF position
The vehicle’s electrical systems are not intact
The SOS Call system software and/or hardware
are damaged during a crash
The vehicle battery loses power or becomes
disconnected during a vehicle crash
LTE (voice/data) or 4G (data) network and/or
Global Positioning Satellite signals are unavail-
able or obstructed
Equipment malfunction at the SOS operator
facility
Operator error by the SOS operator
LTE (voice/data) or 4G (data) network conges-
tion
Weather
Buildings, structures, geographic terrain, or
tunnels
NOTE:
Your vehicle may be transmitting data as autho-
rized by the subscriber.
Never place anything on or near the vehicle’s
LTE (voice/data) or 4G (data) and GPS
antennas. You could prevent LTE (voice/data) or
4G (data) and GPS signal reception, which can
prevent your vehicle from placing an emergency
call. An operable LTE (voice/data) or 4G (data)
network connection and a GPS signal is
required for the SOS Call system to function
properly.
NOTE:
Changes or modifications not expressly approved
by the party responsible for compliance could void
the user's authority to operate the equipment.
WARNING!
Ignoring the Rearview Mirror light could mean
you will not have SOS Call services. If the Rear-
view Mirror light is illuminated, have an autho-
rized dealer service the SOS Call system
immediately.
The Occupant Restraint Control module turns
on the air bag Warning Light on the instrument
panel if a malfunction in any part of the
system is detected. If the Air Bag Warning
Light is illuminated, have an authorized dealer
service the Occupant Restraint Control system
immediately.
WARNING!
ALWAYS obey traffic laws and pay attention to
the road. ALWAYS drive safely with your hands on
the steering wheel. You have full responsibility
and assume all risks related to the use of the
Uconnect features and applications in this
vehicle. Only use Uconnect features and
services when it is safe to do so. Failure to do so
may result in an accident involving serious injury
or death.
CAUTION!
To avoid damage to the mirror during cleaning,
never spray any cleaning solution directly onto
the mirror. Apply the solution onto a clean cloth
and wipe the mirror clean.
7
22_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 267
268 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
(Continued)
Automatic SOS — If Equipped
Automatic SOS is a hands-free safety service that
can immediately connect you with help in the event
that your vehicle’s airbags deploy. Please refer to
your provided radio supplement for complete
information.
JACKING AND TIRE CHANGING
PREPARATIONS FOR JACKING
1. Park the vehicle on a firm, level surface. Avoid
ice or slippery areas.
2. Turn on the Hazard Warning Flashers.
3. Apply the parking brake.
4. Shift the transmission into Park (P).
5. Turn the ignition OFF.
6. Block both front and rear of the wheel
diagonally opposite of the jacking position. For
example, if the driver’s front wheel is being
changed, block the passenger’s rear wheel.
Wheel Blocked Example
WARNING!
Do not attempt to change a tire on the side of
the vehicle close to moving traffic. Pull far
enough off the road to avoid the danger of
being hit when operating the jack or changing
the wheel.
Being under a jacked-up vehicle is dangerous.
The vehicle could slip off the jack and fall on
you. You could be crushed. Never put any part
of your body under a vehicle that is on a jack.
If you need to get under a raised vehicle, take
it to a service center where it can be raised on
a lift.
Never start or run the engine while the vehicle
is on a jack.
The jack is designed to be used as a tool for
changing tires only. The jack should not be
used to lift the vehicle for service purposes.
The vehicle should be jacked on a firm level
surface only. Avoid ice or slippery areas.
WARNING!
Do not attempt to change a tire on the side of
the vehicle close to moving traffic. Pull far
enough off the road to avoid being hit when
operating the jack or changing the wheel.
WARNING!
22_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 268
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 269
NOTE:
Passengers should not remain in the vehicle when
the vehicle is being lifted or raised.
JACK LOCATION
The jack and jack tools are stored under the front
passenger seat.
REMOVAL OF JACK AND TOOLS
To access the jack and jack tools, you must remove
the plastic access cover located on the side of the
front passenger’s seat. To remove the cover, pull
the front part of the cover (closest to the front of
the seat) toward you to release a locking tab. Once
the front of the cover is loose, slide the cover
toward the front of the seat until it is free from the
seat frame.
Jack Access Cover
Remove the jack and tools by turning the wing bolt
counterclockwise, remove the wing bolt and then
slide the assembly out from under the seat.
Jack And Tools
Release the tool bag straps from the jack and
remove tools from bag.
Jack And Tool Bag
7
22_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 269
270 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
(Continued)
There are two ways to assemble the tools:
Assembled For Spare Tire Lowering/Raising
Assembled For Spare Tire Lowering/Raising
Assembled For Jack Operation
Assembled For Jack Operation
REMOVING THE SPARE TIRE
Remove the spare tire before attempting to jack up
the truck.
1. Attach the lug wrench to the extension tubes
with the curved angle facing away from the
vehicle.
2. Insert the extension tube through the access
hole between the lower tailgate and the top of
the fascia/bumper and into the winch
mechanism tube.
1 — Lug Wrench
2 — Extension 2
3 — Extension 3
4 — Extension 4
CAUTION!
The lug wrench can only be attached to
extension 2.
When attaching the tool to the winch mecha-
nism be sure the large flared end opening on
extension 4 is positioned correctly over the
winch mechanism adjusting nut.
Damage to the lug wrench, extensions and
winch mechanism may occur from improper
tool assembly.
1 — Lug Wrench
2 — Extension 2
3 — Extension 3
4 — Extension 4
5 — Extension With Jack Hook
CAUTION!
WARNING!
After using the jack and tools, always reinstall
them in the original carrier and location. While
driving you may experience abrupt stopping,
rapid acceleration or sharp turns. A loose jack,
tools, bracket or other objects in the vehicle may
move around with force, resulting in serious
injury.
22_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 270
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 271
Access Hole And Winch Mechanism Tube Location
Inserting The Extension Tubes Into The Access Hole
3. Rotate the lug wrench handle counter-
clockwise until the spare tire is on the ground
with enough cable slack to allow you to pull it
out from under the vehicle.
Rotating The Lug Wrench Handle
4. Pull the spare tire out from under the vehicle to
gain access to the spare tire retainer.
Removing The Spare Tire
5. Lift the spare tire with one hand to give
clearance to tilt the retainer at the end of the
cable.
6. Pull the retainer through the center of the
wheel.
Disengaging The Retainer
CAUTION!
The winch mechanism is designed for use with
the jack extension tube only. Use of an air
wrench or other power tools is not
recommended and can damage the winch.
7
22_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 271
272 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
(Continued)
JACKING INSTRUCTIONS
Jack Warning Label
1. Remove the spare tire, jack, and tools from
the stored location.
2. Using the lug wrench, loosen the wheel nuts
(but do not remove), by turning them counter-
clockwise one turn while the wheel is still on
the ground.
3. Assemble the jack and tools. Connect the jack
handle driver to the extension, then to the lug
wrench.
Assembled Jack And Tools
WARNING!
Carefully follow these tire changing warnings to
help prevent personal injury or damage to your
vehicle:
Always park on a firm, level surface as far from
the edge of the roadway as possible before
raising the vehicle.
Turn on the Hazard Warning Flashers.
Apply the parking brake firmly and set the
transmission in PARK.
Block the wheel diagonally opposite the wheel
to be raised.
Never start or run the engine with the vehicle
on a jack.
Do not let anyone sit in the vehicle when it is
on a jack.
Do not get under the vehicle when it is on a
jack. If you need to get under a raised vehicle,
take it to a service center where it can be
raised on a lift.
Only use the jack in the positions indicated
and for lifting this vehicle during a tire change.
If working on or near a roadway, be extremely
careful of motor traffic.
To assure that spare tires, flat or inflated, are
securely stowed, spares must be stowed with
the valve stem facing the ground.
CAUTION!
Do not attempt to raise the vehicle by jacking on
locations other than those indicated in the
Jacking Instructions for this vehicle.
WARNING!
22_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 272
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 273
4. Placement for the front and rear jacking
locations are critical. See below images for
proper jacking locations.
NOTE:
Keep the jack and tools aligned while raising the
vehicle.
Jack / Extensions Placement
Front Jacking Location
There is a jack location indicator on the rear
portion of the front lower control arm.
Front Lifting Point
When changing a front wheel, place the scis-
sor jack under the rear portion of the lower
control arm as shown below.
Front Jacking Location
Rear Jacking Location
Operate the jack using the extension with jack
hook and the lug wrench. The extension tubes
may be used but are not required.
When changing a rear wheel, assemble the ex-
tension with jack hook to the jack and connect
the extension tubes. Access the rear jacking lo-
cation from behind the rear tire. Place the jack
under the axle between the wheel and the
shock bracket with the extension with jack
hook extending to the rear.
Rear Lifting Point
7
22_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 273
274 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
Rear Jacking Location
5. By rotating the lug wrench clockwise, raise the
vehicle until the wheel just clears the surface.
6. Remove the lug nuts and pull the wheel off.
Install the spare wheel and lug nuts with the
cone shaped end of the lug nuts toward the
wheel. Hand tighten the lug nuts with the
vehicle lifted. To avoid the risk of forcing the
vehicle off the jack, do not fully tighten the lug
nuts until the vehicle has been lowered.
7. Lower the vehicle to the ground and finish
tightening the lug nuts. Push down on the
wrench handle for increased leverage. Tighten
the lug nuts in a star pattern until each lug nut
has been tightened twice Ú page 343. If in
doubt about the correct tightness, have them
checked with a torque wrench by an
authorized dealer or at a service station.
8. If your vehicle is equipped with a wheel center
cap, install the cap and remove the wheel
blocks. Do not install chrome or aluminum
wheel center caps on the spare wheel. This
may result in cap damage.
9. Lower the jack to its fully closed position. Stow
the replaced tire, and secure the jack and tools
in the proper location.
10. Adjust the tire pressure when possible.
NOTE:
Do not oil wheel studs. For chrome wheels, do not
substitute with chrome plated wheel nuts.
TO STOW THE FLAT OR SPARE
1. Lift the spare tire with one hand to give
clearance to tilt the retainer at the end of the
cable.
2. Position the wheel behind the rear fascia/
bumper facing outward. Push the end of the
winch’s cable, spring and steel sleeve through
the back of the road wheel. Making sure the
valve stem is facing the ground when the
wheel is stowed.
Positioning Of Retainer For Re-installation
CAUTION!
Before raising the wheel off the ground, make
sure that the jack will not damage surrounding
truck parts and adjust the jack position as
required.
WARNING!
Raising the vehicle higher than necessary can
make the vehicle less stable. It could slip off the
jack and hurt someone near it. Raise the vehicle
only enough to remove the tire.
WARNING!
A loose tire or jack thrown forward in a collision
or hard stop, could endanger the occupants of
the vehicle. Always stow the jack parts and the
spare tire in the places provided.
22_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 274
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 275
3. Remove the extension with the hook and
reattach the short extension 5. Attach the lug
wrench to the extension tubes with the curved
angle facing away from the vehicle
Ú page 269. Insert the extension tubes
through the access hole between the lower
tailgate and the top of the fascia/bumper and
into the winch mechanism tube.
Raising The Spare Tire
4. Rotate the lug wrench handle clockwise until
the wheel is drawn into place against the
underside of the vehicle. Continue to rotate
until you feel the winch mechanism slip, or
click three or four times. It cannot be
overtightened. Push against the tire several
times to ensure it is firmly in place.
Rotating The Lug Wrench Handle
NOTE:
Have the flat tire repaired or replaced immediately.
REINSTALLING THE JACK AND TOOLS
1. Tighten the jack all the way down by turning
the jack turn-screw counterclockwise until the
jack is snug.
2. Position the jack and tool bag. Make sure the
lug wrench is under the jack near the jack
turn-screw.
Jack And Tool Bag
CAUTION!
The winch mechanism is designed for use with
the jack extension tube only. Use of an air
wrench or other power tools is not
recommended and can damage the winch.
WARNING!
A loose tire or jack thrown forward in a collision
or hard stop could endanger the occupants of
the vehicle. Always stow the jack parts and the
spare tire in the places provided. Have the
deflated (flat) tire repaired or replaced
immediately.
7
22_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 275
276 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
3. Secure the tool bag straps to the jack.
Jack And Tools Tied
4. Place the jack and tools in the storage position
holding the jack by the jack turn-screw, slip the
jack and tools under the seat so that the
bottom slot engages into the fastener on the
floor.
NOTE:
Ensure that the jack slides into the front hold down
location.
5. Turn the wing bolt clockwise to secure to the
floor pan. Reinstall the plastic cover.
Jack And Tools
JUMP STARTING
If your vehicle has a discharged battery, it can be
jump started using a set of jumper cables and a
battery in another vehicle, or by using a portable
battery booster pack. Jump starting can be
dangerous if done improperly, so please follow the
procedures in this section carefully.
NOTE:
When using a portable battery booster pack, follow
the manufacturer's operating instructions and
precautions.
WARNING!
After using the jack and tools, always reinstall
them in the original carrier and location. While
driving you may experience abrupt stopping,
rapid acceleration or sharp turns. A loose jack,
tools, bracket or other objects in the vehicle may
move around with force, resulting in serious
injury.
WARNING!
Do not attempt jump starting if the battery is
frozen. It could rupture or explode and cause
personal injury.
CAUTION!
Do not use a portable battery booster pack or
any other booster source with a system voltage
greater than 12 Volts or damage to the battery,
starter motor, alternator or electrical system may
occur.
22_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 276
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 277
(Continued)
PREPARATIONS FOR JUMP START
The battery in your vehicle is located in the front of
the engine compartment, behind the left headlight
assembly.
Battery Location
NOTE:
The positive battery post may be covered with a
protective cap if equipped. Lift up on the cap to
gain access to the positive battery post. Do not
jump off fuses. Only jump directly off positive post
which has a positive (+) symbol on or around the
post.
See the following steps to prepare for jump
starting:
1. Shift the automatic transmission into PARK,
apply the parking brake and turn the ignition
OFF.
2. Turn off the heater, radio, and all electrical
accessories.
3. Pull upward and remove the protective cap
from the remote positive (+) battery post.
4. When using another vehicle to jump start the
battery, park the vehicle within the jumper
cables’ reach, apply the parking brake, shift
the automatic transmission into PARK and
turn the ignition OFF.
JUMP STARTING PROCEDURE
NOTE:
Do not jump off fuses. Only jump directly off
positive post.
WARNING!
Do not allow vehicles to touch each other as this
could establish a ground connection and
personal injury could result.
WARNING!
Take care to avoid the radiator cooling fan
whenever the hood is raised. It can start
anytime the ignition switch is ON. You can be
injured by moving fan blades.
Remove any metal jewelry such as rings,
watch bands and bracelets that could make
an inadvertent electrical contact. You could be
seriously injured.
Batteries contain sulfuric acid that can burn
your skin or eyes and generate hydrogen gas
which is flammable and explosive. Keep open
flames or sparks away from the battery.
WARNING!
Failure to follow this jump starting procedure
could result in personal injury or property
damage due to battery explosion.
CAUTION!
Failure to follow these procedures could result in
damage to the charging system of the booster
vehicle or the discharged vehicle.
WARNING!
7
22_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 277
278 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
Connecting The Jumper Cables
1. Connect the positive
(+) end of the jumper
cable to the positive (+)
post of the discharged
vehicle.
2. Connect the opposite end of the positive (+)
jumper cable to the positive (+) post of the
booster battery.
3. Connect the negative (-) end of the jumper
cable to the negative (-) post of the booster
battery.
4. Connect the opposite end of the negative (-)
jumper cable to a good engine ground. A
“ground” is an exposed metallic/unpainted
part of the engine, frame or chassis, such as
an accessory bracket or large bolt. The ground
must be away from the battery and the fuel
injection system.
Jump Starting Label
5. Start the engine in the vehicle that has the
booster battery, let the engine idle a few
minutes, and then start the engine in the
vehicle with the discharged battery.
6. Once the engine is started, follow the discon-
nection procedure below.
Disconnecting The Jumper Cables
1. Disconnect the negative
(-)
end of the jumper
cable from the engine ground of the vehicle
with the discharged battery.
2. Disconnect the opposite end of the negative (-)
jumper cable from the negative (-) post of the
booster battery.
3. Disconnect the positive (+) end of the jumper
cable from the positive (+) post of the booster
battery.
4. Disconnect the opposite end of the positive (+)
jumper cable from the positive (+) post of the
vehicle with the discharged battery and
reinstall the protective cap.
If frequent jump starting is required to start your
vehicle you should have the battery and charging
system inspected at an authorized dealer.
WARNING!
Do not connect the jumper cable to the negative
(-) post of the discharged battery. The resulting
electrical spark could cause the battery to
explode and could result in personal injury.
CAUTION!
Do not connect jumper cable to any of the fuses
on the positive battery terminal. The resulting
electrical current will blow the fuse.
CAUTION!
Accessories plugged into the vehicle power
outlets draw power from the vehicle’s battery,
even when not in use (i.e., cellular devices, etc.).
Eventually, if plugged in long enough without
engine operation, the vehicle’s battery will
discharge sufficiently to degrade battery life
and/or prevent the engine from starting.
22_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 278
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 279
IF YOUR ENGINE OVERHEATS
NOTE:
If the vehicle is overheating, it will need to be
serviced by an authorized dealer.
In any of the following situations, you can reduce
the potential for overheating by taking the
appropriate action.
On the highways — slow down.
In city traffic — while stopped, place the trans-
mission in NEUTRAL (N), but do not increase the
engine idle speed while preventing vehicle
motion with the brakes.
NOTE:
There are steps that you can take to slow down an
impending overheat condition:
If your Air Conditioner (A/C) is on, turn it off. The
A/C system adds heat to the engine cooling
system and turning the A/C off can help remove
this heat.
You can also turn the temperature control to
maximum heat, the mode control to floor and
the blower control to high. This allows the heater
core to act as a supplement to the radiator and
aids in removing heat from the engine cooling
system.
MANUAL PARK RELEASE
To push or tow the vehicle in cases where the
transmission will not shift out of PARK (P) (such as
a depleted battery), a Manual Park Release is
available.
WARNING!
You or others can be badly burned by hot engine
coolant (antifreeze) or steam from your radiator.
If you see or hear steam coming from under the
hood, do not open the hood until the radiator
has had time to cool. Never try to open a cooling
system pressure cap when the radiator or
coolant bottle is hot.
CAUTION!
Driving with a hot cooling system could damage
your vehicle. If the temperature gauge reads
HOT (H), pull over and stop the vehicle. Idle the
vehicle with the air conditioner turned off until
the pointer drops back into the normal range. If
the pointer remains on HOT (H), and you hear
continuous chimes, turn the engine off
immediately and call for service.
WARNING!
Always secure your vehicle by fully applying the
parking brake before activating the Manual Park
Release. In addition, you should be seated in the
driver’s seat with your foot firmly on the brake
pedal when activating the Manual Park Release.
Activating the Manual Park Release will allow
your vehicle to roll away if it is not secured by the
parking brake, or by proper connection to a tow
vehicle. Activating the Manual Park Release on
an unsecured vehicle could lead to serious
injury or death for those in or around the vehicle.
7
22_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 279
280 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
To activate the Manual Park Release, see the
following steps:
1. Apply firm pressure to the brake pedal while
seated in the driver’s seat.
2. Apply the parking brake, if possible.
3. Using a small screwdriver or similar tool,
remove the Manual Park Release access
cover, which is located to the lower left of the
steering column.
Manual Park Release Access Cover
4. Behind the Manual Park Release access cover
is the orange tether strap. Pull the tether strap
out as far as it will go, then release it. The
tether and lever will remain outside of the trim
panel and the transmission should now be in
NEUTRAL, allowing the vehicle to be moved.
Manual Park Release Tether
To Reset The Manual Park Release:
1. Apply firm pressure to the brake pedal while
seated in the driver’s seat.
2. Pull the tether strap out again, then release it.
3. Allow the tether strap to retract with the lever
back to its original position.
Manual Park Release Tether Reset
4. Verify that the transmission is in PARK.
5. Confirm that the tether has retracted fully and
re-install the access cover.If the access cover
cannot be reinstalled, repeat step 1 through 4.
NOTE:
When the lever is locked in the released position
the access cannot be reinstalled.
22_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 280
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 281
FREEING A STUCK VEHICLE
If your vehicle becomes stuck in mud, sand, or
snow, it can often be moved using a rocking
motion. Turn the steering wheel right and left to
clear the area around the front wheels. Then shift
back and forth between DRIVE (D) and REVERSE
(R), while gently pressing the accelerator. Use the
least amount of accelerator pedal pressure that
will maintain the rocking motion, without spinning
the wheels or racing the engine.
NOTE:
Shifts between DRIVE (D) and REVERSE (R) can
only be achieved at wheel speeds of 5 mph
(8 km/h) or less. Whenever the transmission
remains in NEUTRAL (N) for more than two
seconds, you must press the brake pedal to
engage DRIVE(D) or REVERSE (R).
NOTE:
Push the ESC OFF button to place the Electronic
Stability Control (ESC) system in “Partial OFF”
mode, before rocking the vehicle Ú page 216.
Once the vehicle has been freed, push the ESC OFF
button again to restore “ESC On” mode.
WARNING!
Fast spinning tires can be dangerous. Forces
generated by excessive wheel speeds may
cause damage, or even failure, of the axle and
tires. A tire could explode and injure someone.
Do not spin your vehicle's wheels faster
than 30 mph (48 km/h) or for longer than
30 seconds continuously without stopping when
you are stuck and do not let anyone near a
spinning wheel, no matter what the speed.
CAUTION!
Racing the engine or spinning the wheels may
lead to transmission overheating and failure.
Allow the engine to idle with the transmission
in NEUTRAL for at least one minute after every
five rocking-motion cycles. This will minimize
overheating and reduce the risk of clutch or
transmission failure during prolonged efforts
to free a stuck vehicle.
When “rocking” a stuck vehicle by shifting
between DRIVE/2nd gear and REVERSE, do
not spin the wheels faster than 15 mph
(24 km/h), or drivetrain damage may result.
Revving the engine or spinning the wheels too
fast may lead to transmission overheating and
failure. It can also damage the tires. Do not
spin the wheels above 30 mph (48 km/h)
while in gear (no transmission shifting
occurring).
7
22_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 281
282 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
TOWING A DISABLED VEHICLE
This section describes procedures for towing a disabled vehicle using a commercial towing service.
If the transmission and drivetrain are operable, disabled vehicles may also be towed as described on Ú page 143.
Proper towing or lifting equipment is required to prevent damage to your vehicle. Use only tow bars and other equipment designed for this purpose, following
equipment per FCA US LLC instructions. Use of safety chains is mandatory. Attach a tow bar or other towing device to main structural members of the vehicle,
not to fascia/bumpers or associated brackets. State and local laws regarding vehicles under tow must be observed.
Towing Condition
Wheels OFF The
Ground
Two-Wheel Drive
Models
Four-Wheel Drive Models
Flat Tow NONE NOT ALLOWED
See Instructions
Transmission in PARK
Transfer case in N (Neutral)
Tow in forward direction
Dolly Tow
Front NOT ALLOWED NOT ALLOWED
Rear OK NOT ALLOWED
On Trailer ALL OK OK
22_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 282
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 283
If you must use the accessories (wipers,
defrosters, etc.) while being towed, the ignition
must be in the ON/RUN mode, not the ACC mode.
If the key fob is unavailable or the vehicle's battery
is discharged, find Instructions on shifting the
transmission out of PARK in order to move the
vehicle Ú page 279.
TWO-WHEEL DRIVE MODELS
FCA US LLC recommends towing your vehicle with
all four wheels OFF the ground using a flatbed.
If flatbed equipment is not available, and the
transmission is operable, the vehicle may be towed
(with rear wheels ON the ground) under the
following conditions:
The transmission must be in NEUTRAL (N).
Instructions on shifting the 8–speed transmis-
sion to NEUTRAL (N) when the engine is OFF
Ú page 279.
The towing speed must not exceed 30 mph
(48 km/h).
The towing distance must not exceed 15 miles
(24 km) for 6–speed transmission, or 30 miles
(48 km) for 8–speed transmission.
If the transmission is not operable, or the vehicle
must be towed faster than 30 mph (48 km/h) or
farther than 15 miles (24 km) for 6–speed
transmission, or 30 miles (48 km) for 8–speed
transmission, tow with the rear wheels OFF the
ground. Acceptable methods are to tow the vehicle
on a flatbed, or with the front wheels raised and
the rear wheels on a towing dolly, or (when using a
suitable steering wheel stabilizer to hold the front
wheels in the straight position) with the rear
wheels raised and the front wheels ON the ground.
FOUR-WHEEL DRIVE MODELS
FCA US LLC recommends towing with all wheels
OFF the ground. Acceptable methods are to tow
the vehicle on a flatbed or with one end of vehicle
raised and the opposite end on a towing dolly.
CAUTION!
Do not use sling type equipment when towing.
Vehicle damage may occur.
When securing the vehicle to a flat bed truck,
do not attach to front or rear suspension
components. Damage to your vehicle may
result from improper towing.
CAUTION!
Towing this vehicle in violation of the above
requirements can cause severe engine and/or
transmission damage. Damage from improper
towing is not covered under the New Vehicle
Limited Warranty.
CAUTION!
Front or rear wheel lifts must not be used
(if the remaining wheels are on the ground).
Internal damage to the transmission or
transfer case will occur if a front or rear wheel
lift is used when towing.
Towing this vehicle in violation of the above
requirements can cause severe transmission
and/or transfer case damage. Damage from
improper towing is not covered under the New
Vehicle Limited Warranty.
7
22_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 283
284 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
EMERGENCY TOW HOOKS —
I
F EQUIPPED
Your vehicle may be equipped with emergency tow
hooks.
Front Tow Hooks Location
NOTE:
For off road recovery, it is recommended to use
both of the front tow hooks to minimize the risk of
damage to the vehicle.
ENHANCED ACCIDENT RESPONSE SYSTEM
(EARS)
This vehicle is equipped with an Enhanced
Accident Response System.
This feature is a communication network that
takes effect in the event of an impact Ú page 239.
EVENT DATA RECORDER (EDR)
This vehicle is equipped with an event data
recorder (EDR). The main purpose of an EDR is to
record data that will assist in understanding how a
vehicle’s systems performed under certain crash
or near crash-like situations, such as an air bag
deployment or hitting a road obstacle Ú page 241.
WARNING!
Do not use a chain for freeing a stuck vehicle.
Chains may break, causing serious injury or
death.
Stand clear of vehicles when pulling with tow
hooks. Tow straps may become disengaged,
causing serious injury.
CAUTION!
Tow hooks are for emergency use only, to rescue
a vehicle stranded off road. Do not use tow
hooks for tow truck hookup or highway towing.
You could damage your vehicle.
22_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 284
285
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
SCHEDULED SERVICING
Your vehicle is equipped with an automatic oil
change indicator system. The oil change indicator
system will remind you that it is time to take your
vehicle in for scheduled maintenance.
Based on engine operation conditions, the oil
change indicator message will illuminate. This
means that service is required for your vehicle.
Operating conditions such as frequent short-trips,
trailer tow, and extremely hot or cold ambient
temperatures will influence when the “Oil Change
Required” message is displayed. Have your vehicle
serviced as soon as possible, within the next
500 miles (805 km).
An authorized dealer will reset the oil change
indicator message after completing the scheduled
oil change.
NOTE:
Under no circumstances should oil change
intervals exceed 10,000 miles (16,000 km),
12 months or 350 hours of engine run time,
whichever comes first. The 350 hours of engine
run or idle time is generally only a concern for fleet
customers.
Once A Month Or Before A Long Trip:
Check engine oil level
Check windshield washer fluid level
Check tire pressure and look for unusual wear
or damage. Rotate tires at the first sign of irreg-
ular wear, even if it occurs before the oil indi-
cator system turns on
Check the fluid levels of the coolant reservoir,
brake master cylinder and fill as needed
Check function of all interior and exterior lights
8
22_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 285
286 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
MAINTENANCE PLAN
NOTE:
Using white lithium grease, lubricate the door hinge roller pivot joints twice a year to prevent premature wear.
At Every Oil Change Interval As Indicated By Oil Change Indicator System:
Change the oil and filter.
Rotate the tires at the first sign of irregular wear, even if it occurs before the oil indicator system turns on.
Inspect the battery and clean and tighten terminals as required.
Inspect the CV/Universal joints.
Inspect the automatic transmission fluid if equipped with dipstick.
Inspect the brake pads, shoes, rotors, drums, hoses and parking brake.
Inspect the engine cooling system protection and hoses.
Inspect the exhaust system.
Inspect the engine air cleaner filter if using in dusty or off-road conditions, replace engine air cleaner filter if necessary.
Inspect and replace the Evaporative System Fresh Air Filter as necessary, replacement may be more frequent if vehicle is operated in extreme
dusty conditions.
22_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 286
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 287
Mileage or time passed (whichever
comes first)
20,000
30,000
40,000
50,000
60,000
70,000
80,000
90,000
100,000
110,000
120,000
130,000
140,000
150,000
Or Years: 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
Or Kilometers:
32,000
48,000
64,000
80,000
96,000
112,000
128,000
144,000
160,000
176,000
192,000
208,000
224,000
240,000
Additional Inspections
Inspect the CV/Universal joints. X X X X X X X X X X X X X X
Inspect front suspension, tie rod ends,
and replace if necessary.
X X X X X X X
Inspect the front and rear axle surfaces.
If gear oil leakage is suspected, check
the fluid level. If using your vehicle for
police, taxi, fleet, off-road or frequent
trailer towing, change axle fluid.
X X X X X
Inspect the brake linings, replace as
necessary.
X X X X X X X
Adjust parking brake as necessary. X X X X X X X
Inspect transfer case fluid. X X X
8
22_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 287
288 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Additional Maintenance
Replace cabin air filter. To be replaced every 12,000 mi (19,000 km).
For severe dusty driving conditions,
inspect and replace the Evaporative
System Fresh Air Filter as necessary;
replacement may be more frequent
depending on conditions.
X X X X X X X X X X X X X X
Replace engine air cleaner filter. X X X X X
Replace spark plugs.
1
X
Flush and replace the engine coolant at
10 years or 150,000 miles (240,000 km)
whichever comes first.
X X
Mileage or time passed (whichever
comes first)
20,000
30,000
40,000
50,000
60,000
70,000
80,000
90,000
100,000
110,000
120,000
130,000
140,000
150,000
Or Years: 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
Or Kilometers:
32,000
48,000
64,000
80,000
96,000
112,000
128,000
144,000
160,000
176,000
192,000
208,000
224,000
240,000
22_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 288
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 289
Inspect the transfer case fluid, change for
any of the following: police, taxi, fleet, or
frequent trailer towing.
X X
Change the transfer case fluid. X
Inspect and replace PCV valve if
necessary.
X
1. The spark plug change interval is mileage based only, yearly intervals do not apply.
Mileage or time passed (whichever
comes first)
20,000
30,000
40,000
50,000
60,000
70,000
80,000
90,000
100,000
110,000
120,000
130,000
140,000
150,000
Or Years: 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
Or Kilometers:
32,000
48,000
64,000
80,000
96,000
112,000
128,000
144,000
160,000
176,000
192,000
208,000
224,000
240,000
WARNING!
You can be badly injured working on or around a motor vehicle. Do only service work for which you have the knowledge and the right equipment. If you have
any doubt about your ability to perform a service job, take your vehicle to a competent mechanic.
Failure to properly inspect and maintain your vehicle could result in a component malfunction and affect vehicle handling and performance. This could cause
an accident.
8
22_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 289
290 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
ENGINE COMPARTMENT
3.6L ENGINE
1 — Engine Air Cleaner Filter 5 — Battery
2 — Engine Oil Dipstick 6 — Engine Coolant Reservoir Cap
3 — Engine Oil Fill 7 — Power Distribution Center (Fuses)
4 — Brake Fluid Reservoir Cap 8 — Washer Fluid Reservoir Cap
22_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 290
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 291
5.7L ENGINE
1 — Engine Air Cleaner Filter 6 — Engine Coolant Reservoir Cap
2 — Engine Oil Fill 7 — Engine Coolant Pressure Cap
3 — Engine Oil Dipstick 8 — Washer Fluid Reservoir Cap
4 — Brake Fluid Reservoir Cap 9 — Power Distribution Center (Fuses)
5 — Battery
8
22_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 291
292 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
(Continued)
CHECKING OIL LEVEL
To ensure proper engine lubrication, the engine oil
must be maintained at the correct level. Check the
oil level at regular intervals, such as every fuel
stop. The best time to check the engine oil level is
about five minutes after a fully warmed up engine
is shut off.
Checking the oil while the vehicle is on level ground
will improve the accuracy of the oil level readings.
There are four possible dipstick types:
Crosshatched zone.
Crosshatched zone marked SAFE.
Crosshatched zone marked with MIN at the low
end of the range and MAX at the high end of the
range.
Crosshatched zone marked with dimples at the
MIN and the MAX ends of the range.
NOTE:
Always maintain the oil level within the crosshatch
markings on the dipstick.
Adding 1 quart (1 liter) of oil when the reading is at
the low end of the dipstick range will raise the oil
level to the high end of the range marking.
ADDING WASHER FLUID
The fluid reservoir is located under the hood and
the fluid level should be checked at regular
intervals. Fill the reservoir with windshield washer
solvent only (not radiator antifreeze). When
refilling the washer fluid reservoir, take some
washer fluid and apply it to a cloth or towel and
wipe the wiper blades clean. This will help blade
performance.
To prevent freeze-up of your windshield washer
system in cold weather, select a solution or mixture
that meets or exceeds the temperature range of
your climate. This rating information can be found
on most washer fluid containers.
After the engine has warmed up, operate the
defroster for a few minutes to reduce the
possibility of smearing or freezing the fluid on the
cold windshield. Windshield washer solution used
with water as directed on the container, aids
cleaning action, reduces the freezing point to avoid
line clogging, and is not harmful to paint or trim.
MAINTENANCE -FREE BATTERY
Your vehicle is equipped with a maintenance-free
battery. You will never have to add water, and
periodic maintenance is not required.
CAUTION!
Overfilling or underfilling the crankcase will
cause aeration or loss of oil pressure. This could
damage your engine.
WARNING!
Commercially available windshield washer
solvents are flammable. They could ignite and
burn you. Care must be exercised when filling or
working around the washer solution.
WARNING!
Battery fluid is a corrosive acid solution and
can burn or even blind you. Do not allow
battery fluid to contact your eyes, skin, or
clothing. Do not lean over a battery when
attaching clamps. If acid splashes in eyes or
on skin, flush the area immediately with large
amounts of water Ú page 276.
Battery gas is flammable and explosive. Keep
flame or sparks away from the battery. Do not
use a booster battery or any other booster
source with an output greater than 12 Volts.
Do not allow cable clamps to touch each
other.
22_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 292
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 293
PRESSURE WASHING
Cleaning the engine compartment with a high
pressure washer is not recommended.
VEHICLE MAINTENANCE
An authorized dealer has the qualified service
personnel, special tools, and equipment to
perform all service operations in an expert
manner. Service Manuals are available which
include detailed service information for your
vehicle. Refer to these Service Manuals before
attempting any procedure yourself.
NOTE:
Intentional tampering with emissions control
systems may void your warranty and could result in
civil penalties being assessed against you.
ENGINE OIL
Engine Oil Selection
Use only the manufacturer's recommended fluids
Ú page 347.
NOTE:
Hemi engines (5.7L) at times can tick right after
startup and then quiet down after approximately
30 seconds. This is normal and will not harm the
engine. This characteristic can be caused by short
drive cycles. For example, if the vehicle is started
then shut off after driving a short distance. Upon
restarting, you may experience a ticking sound.
Other causes could be if the vehicle is unused for
an extended period of time, incorrect oil, extended
oil changes or extended idling. If the engine
continues to tick or if the Malfunction Indicator
Light (MIL) comes on, see the nearest authorized
dealer.
Battery posts, terminals, and related accesso-
ries contain lead and lead compounds. Wash
hands after handling.
CAUTION!
It is essential when replacing the cables on
the battery that the positive cable is attached
to the positive post and the negative cable is
attached to the negative post. Battery posts
are marked positive (+) and negative (-) and
are identified on the battery case. Cable
clamps should be tight on the terminal posts
and free of corrosion.
If a “fast charger” is used while the battery is
in the vehicle, disconnect both vehicle battery
cables before connecting the charger to the
battery. Do not use a “fast charger” to provide
starting voltage.
WARNING!
CAUTION!
Precautions have been taken to safeguard all
parts and connections however, the pressures
generated by these machines is such that
complete protection against water ingress
cannot be guaranteed.
WARNING!
You can be badly injured working on or around a
motor vehicle. Only do service work for which
you have the knowledge and the proper
equipment. If you have any doubt about your
ability to perform a service job, take your vehicle
to a competent mechanic.
8
22_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 293
294 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
American Petroleum Institute (API)
Approved Engine Oil
These symbols mean that the oil has been certified
by the API. The manufacturer only recommends API
trademark oils.
The API Starburst trademark certifies
0W-20, 0W-30 and 5W-30 engine oils.
The API Donut trademark certifies 0W-40
and 5W-40 engine oil.
Synthetic Engine Oils
Your engine was designed for synthetic engine oils,
only use synthetic API approved engine oils.
Synthetic engine oils which do not have both the
correct API trademark and the correct SAE viscosity
grade numbers should not be used.
Materials Added To Engine Oil
The manufacturer strongly recommends against
the addition of any additives (other than leak
detection dyes) to the engine oil. Engine oil is an
engineered product and its performance may be
impaired by supplemental additives.
Disposing Of Used Engine Oil And Oil
Filters
Care should be taken in disposing of used engine
oil and oil filters from your vehicle. Used oil and oil
filters, indiscriminately discarded, can present a
problem to the environment. Contact an
authorized dealer, service station or governmental
agency for advice on how and where used oil and
oil filters can be safely discarded in your area.
ENGINE OIL FILTER
The engine oil filter should be replaced with a new
filter at every engine oil change.
Engine Oil Filter Selection
A full-flow type disposable oil filter should be used
for replacement. The quality of replacement filters
varies considerably. Only high quality Mopar®
certified filters should be used.
ENGINE AIR CLEANER FILTER
For the proper maintenance intervals Ú page 286.
Engine Air Cleaner Filter Selection
The quality of replacement filters varies
considerably. Only high quality Mopar® certified
filters should be used.
CAUTION!
Do not use chemical flushes in your engine oil as
the chemicals can damage your engine. Such
damage is not covered by the New Vehicle
Limited Warranty.
WARNING!
The air induction system (air cleaner, hoses,
etc.) can provide a measure of protection in the
case of engine backfire. Do not remove the air
induction system (air cleaner, hoses, etc.) unless
such removal is necessary for repair or
maintenance. Make sure that no one is near the
engine compartment before starting the vehicle
with the air induction system (air cleaner, hoses,
etc.) removed. Failure to do so can result in
serious personal injury.
22_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 294
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 295
Engine Air Cleaner Filter Inspection and
Replacement
Engine Air Cleaner Filter Removal
1. Release the spring clips from the engine air
cleaner cover.
Engine Air Cleaner Cover
2. Lift the engine air cleaner cover to access the
engine air cleaner filter.
3. Remove the engine air cleaner filter from the
housing assembly.
Engine Air Cleaner Filter Assembly
Engine Air Cleaner Filter Installation
NOTE:
Inspect and clean the housing if significant dirt or
debris is present before replacing the engine air
cleaner filter.
1. Install the engine air cleaner filter into the
housing assembly with the air cleaner filter
inspection surface facing downward.
2. Install the engine air cleaner cover onto the
housing assembly locating tabs.
3. Latch the spring clips to lock the engine air
cleaner cover onto the housing assembly.
AIR CONDITIONER MAINTENANCE
For best possible performance, your air conditioner
should be checked and serviced by an authorized
dealer at the start of each warm season. This
service should include cleaning of the condenser
fins and a performance test. Drive belt tension
should also be checked at this time.
1 — Clean Air Hose Clamp
2 — Air Hose
3 — Spring Clips
1 — Engine Air Cleaner Cover
2 — Engine Air Cleaner Filter
WARNING!
Use only refrigerants and compressor lubri-
cants approved by the manufacturer for your
air conditioning system. Some unapproved
refrigerants are flammable and can explode,
injuring you. Other unapproved refrigerants or
lubricants can cause the system to fail,
requiring costly repairs. Refer to Warranty
Information Book, for further warranty infor-
mation.
The air conditioning system contains refrig-
erant under high pressure. To avoid risk of
personal injury or damage to the system,
adding refrigerant or any repair requiring lines
to be disconnected should be done by an
experienced technician.
8
22_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 295
296 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Refrigerant Recovery And Recycling
R-134a — If Equipped
R-134a Air Conditioning Refrigerant is a Hydrofluo-
rocarbon (HFC) that is an ozone-friendly
substance. The manufacturer recommends that
air conditioning service be performed by an
authorized dealer or other service facilities using
recovery and recycling equipment.
NOTE:
Use only manufacturer approved A/C system PAG
compressor oil and refrigerants.
Refrigerant Recovery And Recycling
R-1234yf — If Equipped
R-1234yf Air Conditioning Refrigerant is a Hydroflu-
oroolefin (HFO) that is endorsed by the
Environmental Protection Agency and is an
ozone-friendly substance with a low
global-warming potential. The manufacturer
recommends that air conditioning service be
performed by an authorized dealer using recovery
and recycling equipment.
NOTE:
Use only manufacturer approved A/C system PAG
compressor oil, and refrigerants.
Cabin Air Filter Replacement
For the proper maintenance intervals Ú page 286.
The cabin air filter is located in the fresh air inlet
behind the glove compartment. Perform the
following procedure to replace the filter:
1. Open the glove compartment and remove all
contents.
2. With the glove compartment door open,
remove the glove compartment tension tether
and tether clip by sliding the clip toward the
face of the glove compartment door. Lift the
clip out of glove compartment door and
release into dash panel.
Right Side Of Glove Compartment
CAUTION!
Do not use chemical flushes in your air
conditioning system as the chemicals can
damage your air conditioning components. Such
damage is not covered by the New Vehicle
Limited Warranty.
1 — Glove Compartment Tension Tether
2 — Glove Compartment Door
22_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 296
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 297
3. There are glove compartment travel stops on
both sides of the glove compartment door,
push inward on both sides of the glove
compartment to release the glove
compartment travel stops.
Glove Compartment
4. Disengage the glove compartment door from
its hinges by opening the glove compartment
past the travel stop and pulling it toward you.
5. Remove the filter cover by pushing in on the
finger tabs on each end of the filter cover.
Filter Cover
Finger Tabs
Finger Tab
6. Remove the cabin air filter by pulling it straight
out of the housing.
Cabin Air Filter
1 — Glove Compartment Travel Stops
2 — Glove Compartment Door
3 — Glove Compartment Tension Tether
8
22_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 297
298 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
7. Install the cabin air filter with the arrow on the
filter pointing toward the floor. When installing
the filter cover, press on each end until you
hear an audible click.
8. Reinstall the glove compartment on the
hinges.
9. Pull the tension tether outward and reinstall
the glove compartment past the travel stops by
pushing in on the glove compartment sides.
NOTE:
Ensure the glove compartment door hinges and
glove compartment travel stops are fully engaged.
10. Reattach the glove compartment tension
tether by inserting the tether clip in the glove
compartment and sliding the clip away from
the face of the glove compartment door.
ACCESSORY DRIVE BELT INSPECTION
When inspecting accessory drive belts, small
cracks that run across the ribbed surface of a belt
from rib to rib, are considered normal. These are
not a reason to replace the belt. However, cracks
running along a rib (not across) are not normal. Any
belt with cracks running along a rib must be
replaced. Also have the belt replaced if it has
excessive wear, frayed cords, or severe glazing.
Accessory Belt (Serpentine Belt)
Conditions that would require replacement:
Rib chunking (one or more ribs has separated
from belt body)
Rib or belt wear
Longitudinal belt cracking
(cracks between two ribs)
Belt slips
“Groove jumping" (belt does not maintain
correct position on pulley)
Belt broken (note: identify and correct problem
before new belt is installed)
Noise (objectionable squeal, squeak, or rumble
is heard or felt while drive belt is in operation)
CAUTION!
The cabin air filter is identified with an arrow to
indicate airflow direction through the filter.
Failure to properly install the filter will result in
the need to replace it more often.
WARNING!
Do not attempt to inspect an accessory drive
belt with vehicle running.
When working near the radiator cooling fan,
disconnect the fan motor lead. The fan is
temperature controlled and can start at any
time regardless of ignition mode. You could be
injured by the moving fan blades.
You can be badly injured working on or around
a motor vehicle. Only do service work for which
you have the knowledge and the proper equip-
ment. If you have any doubt about your ability
to perform a service job, take your vehicle to a
competent mechanic.
22_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 298
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 299
Some conditions can be caused by a faulty
component such as a belt pulley. Belt pulleys
should be carefully inspected for damage and
proper alignment.
Belt replacement on some models requires the
use of special tools, we recommend having your
vehicle serviced at an authorized dealer.
BODY LUBRICATION
Locks and all body pivot points, including such
items as seat tracks, door hinge pivot points and
rollers, liftgate, tailgate, decklid, sliding doors and
hood hinges, should be lubricated periodically with
a lithium based grease, such as Mopar® Spray
White Lube to ensure quiet, easy operation and to
protect against rust and wear. Prior to the
application of any lubricant, the parts concerned
should be wiped clean to remove dust and grit;
after lubricating, excess oil and grease should be
removed. Particular attention should also be given
to hood latching components to ensure proper
function. When performing other underhood
services, the hood latch release mechanism, and
safety catch should be cleaned and lubricated.
The external lock cylinders should be lubricated
twice a year, preferably in the Autumn and Spring.
Apply a small amount of a high quality lubricant,
such as Mopar® Lock Cylinder Lubricant directly
into the lock cylinder.
WINDSHIELD WIPER BLADES
Clean the rubber edges of the wiper blades and the
windshield periodically with a sponge or soft cloth
and a mild nonabrasive cleaner. This will remove
accumulations of salt or road film.
Operation of the wipers on dry glass for long
periods may cause deterioration of the wiper
blades. Always use washer fluid when using the
wipers to remove salt or dirt from a dry windshield.
Avoid using the wiper blades to remove frost or ice
from the windshield. Keep the blade rubber out of
contact with petroleum products such as engine
oil, gasoline, etc.
NOTE:
Life expectancy of wiper blades varies depending
on geographical area and frequency of use. Poor
performance of blades may be present with chat-
tering, marks, water lines or wet spots. If any of
these conditions are present, clean the wiper
blades or replace as necessary.
The wiper blades and wiper arms should be
inspected periodically, not just when wiper
performance problems are experienced. This
inspection should include the following points:
Wear or uneven edges
Foreign material
Hardening or cracking
Deformation or fatigue
If a wiper blade or wiper arm is damaged, replace
the affected wiper blade or arm with a new unit. Do
not attempt to repair a wiper blade or arm that is
damaged.
Wiper Blade Removal/Installation
1. Lift the wiper arm to raise the wiper blade off
of the glass, until the wiper arm is in the full
up position.
Windshield Wiper Arm And Blade
CAUTION!
Do not allow the wiper arm to spring back
against the glass without the wiper blade in
place or the glass may be damaged.
1 — Wiper
2 — Locking Tab
3 — Wiper Arm
8
22_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 299
300 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
2. To disengage the wiper blade from the wiper
arm, flip up the locking tab.
Wiper Locking Assembly
3. Tilt the lower end of the wiper blade away from
the arm and with one finger push the release
tab toward the wiper arm.
Wiper Disengaging
4. Slide the wiper blade down towards the base
of the wiper arm.
5. With the wiper blade disengaged, remove the
wiper blade from the wiper arm by holding the
wiper arm with one hand and separating the
wiper blade from the wiper arm with the other
hand (move the wiper blade down toward the
base of the wiper arm and away from the J
hook in the end of the wiper arm).
Removing Wiper From Wiper Arm
6. Gently lower the wiper arm onto the glass.
Installing The Front Wipers
1. Lift the wiper arm off of the glass, until the
wiper arm is in the full up position.
2. Position the wiper blade under the hook on the
tip of the wiper arm with the wiper locking tab
open.
3. Insert the receiver bracket on the wiper
assembly into the hook on the tip of the arm
through the opening in the wiper blade under
the locking tab.
1 — Wiper
2 — Locking Tab
3 — Wiper Arm
1 — Wiper
2 — Locking Tab
3 — Release Tab
1 — Wiper
2 — Locking Tab
3 — Wiper Arm J Hook
22_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 300
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 301
(Continued)
4. Slide the wiper blade up into the hook on the
wiper arm until it is latched (engagement will
be accompanied by an audible click). Fold
down the latch release tab and snap it into its
locked position.
5. Gently lower the wiper blade onto the glass.
EXHAUST SYSTEM
The best protection against carbon monoxide entry
into the vehicle body is a properly maintained
engine exhaust system.
If you notice a change in the sound of the exhaust
system; or if the exhaust fumes can be detected
inside the vehicle; or when the underside or rear of
the vehicle is damaged; have an authorized
technician inspect the complete exhaust system
and adjacent body areas for broken, damaged,
deteriorated, or mispositioned parts. Open seams
or loose connections could permit exhaust fumes
to seep into the passenger compartment. In
addition, have the exhaust system inspected each
time the vehicle is raised for lubrication or oil
change. Replace as required.
Under normal operating conditions, the catalytic
converter will not require maintenance. However, it
is important to keep the engine properly tuned to
ensure proper catalyst operation and prevent
possible catalyst damage.
NOTE:
Intentional tampering with emissions control
systems can result in civil penalties being
assessed against you.
In unusual situations involving grossly
malfunctioning engine operation, a scorching odor
may suggest severe and abnormal catalyst
overheating. If this occurs, stop the vehicle, turn off
the engine and allow it to cool. Service, including a
tune-up to manufacturer's specifications, should
be obtained immediately.
WARNING!
Exhaust gases can injure or kill. They contain
carbon monoxide (CO), which is colorless and
odorless. Breathing it can make you uncon-
scious and can eventually poison you. To
avoid breathing CO see Ú page 263.
A hot exhaust system can start a fire if you
park over materials that can burn. Such mate-
rials might be grass or leaves coming into
contact with your exhaust system. Do not park
or operate your vehicle in areas where your
exhaust system can contact anything that can
burn.
CAUTION!
The catalytic converter requires the use of
unleaded fuel only. Leaded gasoline will
destroy the effectiveness of the catalyst as an
emissions control device and may seriously
reduce engine performance and cause
serious damage to the engine.
Damage to the catalytic converter can result if
your vehicle is not kept in proper operating
condition. In the event of engine malfunction,
particularly involving engine misfire or other
apparent loss of performance, have your
vehicle serviced promptly. Continued opera-
tion of your vehicle with a severe malfunction
could cause the converter to overheat,
resulting in possible damage to the converter
and vehicle.
CAUTION!
8
22_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 301
302 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
(Continued)
To minimize the possibility of catalytic converter
damage:
Do not interrupt the ignition when the transmis-
sion is in gear and the vehicle is in motion.
Do not try to start the vehicle by pushing or
towing the vehicle.
Do not idle the engine with any ignition compo-
nents disconnected or removed, such as when
diagnostic testing, or for prolonged periods
during very rough idle or malfunctioning oper-
ating conditions.
COOLING SYSTEM
Engine Coolant Checks
Check the engine coolant (antifreeze) protection
every 12 months (before the onset of freezing
weather, where applicable). If the engine coolant is
dirty or rusty in appearance, the system should be
drained, flushed and refilled with fresh coolant.
Check the front of the A/C condenser (if equipped)
or radiator for any accumulation of bugs, leaves,
etc. If dirty, clean by gently spraying water from a
garden hose vertically down the face of the A/C
condenser (if equipped) or the back of the radiator
core.
Check the engine cooling system hoses for brittle
rubber, cracking, tears, cuts and tightness of the
connection at the coolant recovery bottle and
radiator. Inspect the entire system for leaks.
DO NOT REMOVE THE COOLANT PRESSURE CAP
WHEN THE COOLING SYSTEM IS HOT.
Cooling System — Drain, Flush And Refill
NOTE:
Some vehicles require special tools to add coolant
(antifreeze) properly. Failure to fill these systems
properly could lead to severe internal engine
damage. If any coolant is needed to be added to
the system please contact an authorized dealer.
If the engine coolant (antifreeze) is dirty or
contains visible sediment, have an authorized
dealer clean and flush with Organic Additive
Technology (OAT) coolant (conforming to
MS.90032).
For the proper maintenance intervals Ú page 286.
Selection Of Coolant
For further information Ú page 347.
NOTE:
Mixing of engine coolant (antifreeze) other than
specified Organic Additive Technology (OAT)
engine coolant, may result in engine damage
and may decrease corrosion protection. OAT
engine coolant is different and should not be
mixed with Hybrid Organic Additive Technology
(HOAT) engine coolant or any “globally compat-
ible” coolant. If a non-OAT engine coolant is
introduced into the cooling system in an emer-
gency, the cooling system will need to be
drained, flushed, and refilled with fresh OAT
coolant (conforming to MS.90032), by an autho-
rized dealer as soon as possible.
WARNING!
You or others can be badly burned by hot
engine coolant (antifreeze) or steam from your
radiator. If you see or hear steam coming from
under the hood, do not open the hood until the
radiator has had time to cool. Never open a
cooling system pressure cap when the radi-
ator or coolant bottle is hot.
Keep hands, tools, clothing, and jewelry away
from the radiator cooling fan when the hood is
raised. The fan starts automatically and may
start at any time, whether the engine is
running or not.
When working near the radiator cooling fan,
disconnect the fan motor lead or turn the igni-
tion to the OFF mode. The fan is temperature
controlled and can start at any time the igni-
tion is in the ON mode.
WARNING!
22_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 302
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 303
Do not use water alone or alcohol-based engine
coolant products. Do not use additional rust
inhibitors or anti-rust products, as they may not
be compatible with the radiator engine coolant
and may plug the radiator.
This vehicle has not been designed for use with
propylene glycol-based engine coolant. Use of
propylene glycol-based engine coolant is not
recommended.
Some vehicles require special tools to add
coolant properly. Failure to fill these systems
properly could lead to severe internal engine
damage. If any coolant is needed to be added to
the system please contact an authorized dealer.
Adding Coolant
Your vehicle has been built with an improved
engine coolant (OAT coolant conforming to
MS.90032) that allows extended maintenance
intervals. This engine coolant (antifreeze)
can be used up to 10 years or 150,000 miles
(240,000 km) before replacement. To prevent
reducing this extended maintenance period, it is
important that you use the same engine coolant
(OAT coolant conforming to MS.90032) throughout
the life of your vehicle.
Please review these recommendations for using
Organic Additive Technology (OAT) engine coolant
that meets the requirements of the manufacturer
Material Standard MS.90032. When adding
engine coolant:
We recommend using Mopar® Antifreeze/
Coolant 10 Year/150,000 Mile (240,000 km)
Formula OAT that meets the requirements of the
manufacturer Material Standard MS.90032.
Mix a minimum solution of 50% OAT engine
coolant that meets the requirements of the
manufacturer Material Standard MS.90032
and distilled water. Use higher concentrations
(not to exceed 70%) if temperatures below
−34°F (−37°C) are anticipated. Please contact
an authorized dealer for assistance.
Use only high purity water such as distilled or
deionized water when mixing the water/engine
coolant solution. The use of lower quality water
will reduce the amount of corrosion protection
in the engine cooling system.
NOTE:
It is the owner's responsibility to maintain the
proper level of protection against freezing
according to the temperatures occurring in the
area where the vehicle is operated.
Some vehicles require special tools to add
coolant properly. Failure to fill these systems
properly could lead to severe internal engine
damage. If any coolant is needed to be added to
the system, please contact an authorized
dealer.
Mixing engine coolant types is not recom-
mended and can result in cooling system
damage. If HOAT and OAT coolant are mixed in
an emergency, have an authorized dealer drain,
flush, and refill with OAT coolant (conforming to
MS.90032) as soon as possible.
Cooling System Pressure Cap
The cap must be fully tightened to prevent loss of
engine coolant (antifreeze), and to ensure that
engine coolant will return to the radiator from the
coolant expansion bottle/recovery tank
(if equipped).
8
22_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 303
304 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
The cap should be inspected and cleaned if there
is any accumulation of foreign material on the
sealing surfaces.
Disposal Of Used Coolant
Used ethylene glycol-based coolant (antifreeze) is
a regulated substance requiring proper disposal.
Check with your local authorities to determine the
disposal rules for your community. To prevent
ingestion by animals or children, do not store
ethylene glycol-based coolant in open containers
or allow it to remain in puddles on the ground,
clean up any ground spills immediately. If ingested
by a child or pet, seek emergency assistance
immediately.
Checking Coolant Level
With the engine off and cold, the level of the engine
coolant should be between the ADD and SAFE
range on the dipstick.
To check the coolant level:
1. Open the coolant reservoir.
2. Lift and remove the plastic dipstick from the
reservoir neck.
Coolant Reservoir Dipstick
3. Check the coolant level on the dipstick.
The radiator normally remains completely full, so
there is no need to remove the radiator cap unless
checking for engine coolant (antifreeze) freeze
point or replacing engine coolant. Advise your
service attendant of this. As long as the engine
operating temperature is satisfactory, the coolant
bottle need only be checked once a month.
When additional engine coolant is needed to
maintain the proper level, it should be added to the
coolant bottle. Do not overfill.
Cooling System Notes
NOTE:
When the vehicle is stopped after a few miles/kilo-
meters of operation, you may observe vapor
coming from the front of the engine compartment.
This is normally a result of moisture from rain,
snow, or high humidity accumulating on the
radiator and being vaporized when the thermostat
opens, allowing hot engine coolant (antifreeze) to
enter the radiator.
If an examination of your engine compartment
shows no evidence of radiator or hose leaks, the
vehicle may be safely driven. The vapor will soon
dissipate.
Do not overfill the coolant expansion bottle.
Check the coolant freeze point in the radiator
and in the coolant expansion bottle. If engine
coolant needs to be added, the contents of the
coolant expansion bottle must also be protected
against freezing.
If frequent engine coolant additions are
required, the cooling system should be pressure
tested for leaks.
WARNING!
Do not open hot engine cooling system. Never
add engine coolant (antifreeze) when the
engine is overheated. Do not loosen or
remove the cap to cool an overheated engine.
Heat causes pressure to build up in the
cooling system. To prevent scalding or injury,
do not remove the pressure cap while the
system is hot or under pressure.
Do not use a pressure cap other than the one
specified for your vehicle. Personal injury or
engine damage may result.
22_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 304
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 305
(Continued)
Maintain engine coolant concentration at a
minimum of 50% OAT coolant (conforming to
MS.90032) and distilled water for proper corro-
sion protection of your engine which contains
aluminum components.
Make sure that the coolant expansion bottle
overflow hoses are not kinked or obstructed.
Keep the front of the radiator clean. If your
vehicle is equipped with air conditioning, keep
the front of the condenser clean.
Do not change the thermostat for Summer or
Winter operation. If replacement is ever neces-
sary, install ONLY the correct type thermostat.
Other designs may result in unsatisfactory
engine cooling performance, poor gas mileage,
and increased emissions.
BRAKE SYSTEM
In order to ensure brake system performance, all
brake system components should be inspected
periodically Ú page 286.
Fluid Level Check — Brake Master Cylinder
The fluid level of the brake master cylinder should
be checked whenever the vehicle is serviced, or
immediately if the Brake System Warning Light is
on. If necessary, add fluid to bring level within the
designated marks on the side of the reservoir of
the brake master cylinder. Be sure to clean the top
of the master cylinder area before removing cap.
With disc brakes, fluid level can be expected to fall
as the brake pads wear. Brake fluid level should be
checked when pads are replaced. If the brake fluid
is abnormally low, check the system for leaks
Ú page 349.
WARNING!
Riding the brakes can lead to brake failure and
possibly a collision. Driving with your foot resting
or riding on the brake pedal can result in
abnormally high brake temperatures, excessive
lining wear, and possible brake damage. You
would not have your full braking capacity in an
emergency.
WARNING!
Use only manufacturer's recommended brake
fluid Ú page 349. Using the wrong type of
brake fluid can severely damage your brake
system and/or impair its performance. The
proper type of brake fluid for your vehicle is
also identified on the original factory installed
hydraulic master cylinder reservoir.
To avoid contamination from foreign matter or
moisture, use only new brake fluid or fluid that
has been in a tightly closed container. Keep
the master cylinder reservoir cap secured at
all times. Brake fluid in an open container
absorbs moisture from the air resulting in a
lower boiling point. This may cause it to boil
unexpectedly during hard or prolonged
braking, resulting in sudden brake failure. This
could result in a collision.
8
22_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 305
306 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION
Special Additives
The manufacturer strongly recommends against
using any special additives in the transmission.
Automatic Transmission Fluid (ATF) is an
engineered product and its performance may be
impaired by supplemental additives. Therefore, do
not add any fluid additives to the transmission. The
only exception to this policy is the use of special
dyes for diagnosing fluid leaks in transmissions.
Avoid using transmission sealers as they may
adversely affect seals.
Fluid Level Check
The fluid level is preset at the factory and does not
require adjustment under normal operating
conditions. Routine fluid level checks are not
required, therefore the transmission has no
dipstick. An authorized dealer can check your
transmission fluid level using special service tools.
If you notice fluid leakage or transmission
malfunction, visit an authorized dealer
immediately to have the transmission fluid level
checked. Operating the vehicle with an improper
fluid level can cause severe transmission damage.
Fluid And Filter Changes
Under normal operating conditions, the fluid
installed at the factory will provide satisfactory
lubrication for the life of the vehicle.
Routine fluid and filter changes are not required.
However, change the fluid and filter if the fluid
becomes contaminated (with water, etc.), or if the
transmission is disassembled for any reason.
Selection Of Lubricant
It is important to use the proper transmission fluid
to ensure optimum transmission performance and
life. Use only the recommended transmission fluid
Ú page 349. It is important to maintain the
transmission fluid at the correct level using the
recommended fluid. No chemical flushes should
be used in any transmission; only the approved
lubricant should be used.
Overfilling the brake fluid reservoir can result
in spilling brake fluid on hot engine parts,
causing the brake fluid to catch fire. Brake
fluid can also damage painted and vinyl
surfaces, care should be taken to avoid its
contact with these surfaces.
Do not allow petroleum based fluid to contam-
inate the brake fluid. Brake seal components
could be damaged, causing partial or
complete brake failure. This could result in a
collision.
WARNING!
CAUTION!
Do not use chemical flushes in your
transmission as the chemicals can damage your
transmission components. Such damage is not
covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
CAUTION!
If a transmission fluid leak occurs, visit an
authorized dealer immediately. Severe
transmission damage may occur. An authorized
dealer has the proper tools to adjust the fluid
level accurately.
CAUTION!
Using a transmission fluid other than the
manufacturer’s recommended fluid may cause
deterioration in transmission shift quality and/or
torque converter shudder Ú page 349.
22_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 306
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 307
(Continued)
REAR AXLE AND 4X4 FRONT DRIVING
A
XLE FLUID LEVEL
For normal service, periodic fluid level checks are
not required. When the vehicle is serviced for other
reasons the exterior surfaces of the axle assembly
should be inspected. If gear oil leakage is
suspected inspect the fluid level. This inspection
should be made with the vehicle in a level position.
The fluid level should be even with the bottom of
the fill hole (within 1/4 inch (6.4 mm) of edge of
hole) for the front axle and rear axle.
Drain And Refill
For the proper maintenance intervals Ú page 286.
Lubricant Selection
For further information Ú page 349.
NOTE:
The presence of water in the gear lubricant will
result in corrosion and possible failure of differ-
ential components. Operation of the vehicle in
water, as may be encountered in some off-highway
types of service, will require draining and refilling
the axle to avoid damage.
Limited-Slip Differentials
Rear axles equipped with a Limited Slip Differential
require that 5 oz. (148 ml) Mopar® Limited Slip
Additive be added to the gear lubricant
Ú page 349. The Mopar® Limited Slip Additive
should be added to the gear lubricant whenever a
fluid change is made to an axle equipped with a
Limited Slip Differential.
NOTE:
When refilling an axle with a Limited Slip Differ-
ential, (which requires a Limited Slip Additive),
the Limited Slip Additive should be added before
the gear lubricant is added to insure proper
additive fill.
TRANSFER CASE
Fluid Level Check
This fluid level can be checked by removing
the filler plug. The fluid level should be to the
bottom edge of the filler plug hole (or at least
within 1/8 inch of the bottom) with the vehicle
in a level position.
Drain And Refill
For the proper maintenance intervals Ú page 286.
Selection Of Lubricant
Use only the recommended fluid Ú page 349.
FUSES
General Information
WARNING!
When replacing a blown fuse, always use an
appropriate replacement fuse with the same
amp rating as the original fuse. Never replace
a fuse with another fuse of higher amp rating.
The use of a fuse with a rating other than indi-
cated may result in a dangerous electrical
system overload. If a properly rated fuse
continues to blow, it indicates a problem in the
circuit that must be corrected. Never replace a
blown fuse with metal wires or any other mate-
rial. Do not place a fuse inside a circuit
breaker cavity or vice versa. Failure to use
proper fuses may result in serious personal
injury, fire and/or property damage.
Before replacing a fuse, make sure that the
ignition is off and that all the other services
are switched off and/or disengaged.
8
22_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 307
308 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
The fuses protect electrical systems against
excessive current.
When a device does not work, you must check the
fuse element inside the blade fuse for a break/
melt.
Also, please be aware that using power outlets for
extended periods of time with the engine off may
result in vehicle battery discharge.
Blade Fuses
Power Distribution Center
The Power Distribution Center is located in the
engine compartment near the battery. This center
contains cartridge fuses, micro fuses, relays, and
circuit breakers. A description of each fuse and
component may be stamped on the inside cover,
otherwise the cavity number of each fuse is
stamped on the inside cover that corresponds to
the following chart.
If the replaced fuse blows again, contact an
authorized dealer.
If a general protection fuse for safety systems
(air bag system, braking system), power unit
systems (engine system, transmission
system) or steering system blows, contact an
authorized dealer.
CAUTION!
If it is necessary to wash the engine
compartment, take care not to directly hit the
fuse box, and the windshield wiper motors with
water.
WARNING!
1 — Fuse Element
2 — Blade Fuse with a good/functional fuse
element
3 — Blade fuse with a bad/not functional fuse
element (blown fuse)
CAUTION!
When installing the power distribution center
cover, it is important to ensure the cover is
properly positioned and fully latched. Failure to
do so may allow water to get into the power
distribution center and possibly result in an
electrical system failure.
22_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 308
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 309
Power Distribution Center Location
8
22_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 309
310 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Cavity Cartridge Fuse Micro Fuse Description
*If Equipped
F01 80 Amp Black – Rad Fan PWM *
F02 – – Spare
F03 60 Amp Yellow – Rad Fan HI / LO *
F04 – – Spare
F05 – – Spare
F06 40 Amp Green – ABS Pump Mtr
F07 40 Amp Green – Starter Solenoid
F08 – – Spare
F09 – – Spare
F10 40 Amp Green – CBC #2 / EXT Light *
F11 30 Amp Pink – ITBM / TRLR Tow Brake *
F12 40 Amp Green – CBC #3 / PWR Locks *
F13 40 Amp Green – HVAC BLWR MTR
F14 40 Amp Green – CBC #4 / EXT Light *
F15 – – Spare
F16 – – Spare
F17 – – Spare
F18 – – Spare
F19 – – Spare
F20 30 Amp Pink – Pass Door Mod
22_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 310
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 311
F21 30 Amp Pink – DTCM
F22 20 Amp Blue – ECM
F23 30 Amp Pink – CBC #1 / INT Light
F24 30 Amp Pink – Driver Door Mod
F25 30 Amp Pink – FT Wiper
F26 30 Amp Pink – ABS / BSM ECU / Valves
F27 – – Spare
F28 20 Amp Blue – TRLR Tow B / U *
F29 20 Amp Blue – TRLR Tow Park *
F30 30 Amp Pink – TRLR Tow *
F31 – – Spare
F32 – – Spare
F33 – – Spare
F34 – – Spare
F35 30 Amp Pink – Sunroof *
F36 30 Amp Pink – EBL *
F37 – – Spare
F38 30 Amp Pink – Power Inverter *
F39 – – Spare
F40 – – Spare
Cavity Cartridge Fuse Micro Fuse Description
*If Equipped
8
22_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 311
312 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
F41 – 10 Amp Red Act Grille Shutter *
F42 – 20 Amp Yellow Horn
F43 – – Spare
F44 – 10 Amp Red Diagnostic Port
F45 – – Spare
F46 – 10 Amp Red Upfitters *
F47 – – Spare
F48 – – Spare
F49 – 10 Amp Red ICS / HVAC
F50 – – Spare
F51 – 10 Amp Red Ign Mod
F52 – 5 Amp Tan Batt Snsr
F53 – 20 Amp Yellow TRLR Tow– Lt Turn / Stop *
F54 – 20 Amp Yellow Adj Pedals *
F55 – – Spare
F56 – – Spare
F57 – 20 Amp Yellow Transmission
F58 – – Spare
F59 – – Spare
F60 – – Spare
Cavity Cartridge Fuse Micro Fuse Description
*If Equipped
22_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 312
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 313
F61 – – Spare
F62 – 10 Amp Red A/C Clutch
F63 – 20 Amp Yellow Ignition Coils
F64 – 25 Amp Clear Fuel Injectors / PCM
F65 – – Spare
F66 – 10 Amp Red Sunroof / LRSM
F67 – 10 Amp Red Bluetooth® / CDM *
F68 – – Spare
F69 – – Spare
F70 – 30 Amp Green Fuel Pump MTR
F71 – 25 Amp Clear Amplifier *
F72 – – Spare
F73 – – Spare
F74 – 20 Amp Yellow Vac Pump *
F75 – 10 Amp Red Cool Temp *
F76 – 10 Amp Red BSM / Stp LP SW / EPB / ESC *
F77 – 10 Amp Red DTCM / ELSD / PTU / RDM
F78 – 10 Amp Red ECM / PCM / EPS
F79 – – Spare
F80 – 10 Amp Red UGDO / COMP / ITM
Cavity Cartridge Fuse Micro Fuse Description
*If Equipped
8
22_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 313
314 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
F81 – 20 Amp Yellow Trlr Tow RT Turn / Stop *
F82 – 10 Amp Red SCCM / Cruise Control
F83 – – Spare
F84 – 15 Amp Blue ICS
F85 – 10 Amp Red ORC (AIRBAG)
F86 – 10 Amp Red ORC (AIRBAG)
F87 – 10 Amp Red TT / SCCM
F88 – 15 Amp Blue IPC
F89 – – Spare
F90 – 20 Amp Yellow Power Outlet RR-BATT
F91 – – Power Outlet RR-ACC
F92 – – Spare
F93 – 20 Amp Yellow Cigar Lighter *
F94 – 10 Amp Red SBW / TCASE SW
F95 – 10 Amp Red RR Cam / Park Assist *
F96 – 10 Amp Red RR Seat Heater SW *
F97 – 25 Amp Clear Rear HTD STS & HTD STR Wheel *
F98 – 25 Amp Clear Front HTD STS *
F99 – 10 Amp Red HVAC / DASM
F100 – – Spare
Cavity Cartridge Fuse Micro Fuse Description
*If Equipped
22_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 314
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 315
BULB REPLACEMENT
Replacement Bulbs, Names, And Part Numbers
In the instance a bulb needs to be replaced, this section includes bulb description and replacement part numbers. All of the inside bulbs are brass or glass-wedge
base. Aluminum base bulbs are not approved.
NOTE:
See an authorized dealer for LED replacement
F101 – – Spare
F102 – – Spare
F103 – – Spare
F104 – 20 Amp Yellow Power Outlets IP / Console
Cavity Cartridge Fuse Micro Fuse Description
*If Equipped
Interior Bulbs
Bulb Name Bulb Number
Overhead Console Lamps TS 212–9
Dome Lamp 7679
NOTE:
For lighted switches, see an authorized dealer for replacement instructions.
8
22_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 315
316 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Exterior Bulbs
Bulb Name Bulb Number
Base Quad Headlamp – Low Beam H11LL
Base Quad Headlamp – High Beam 9005LL
Front Turn Signal Lamp (Base Quad Headlamp) 3157NA
Premium Bi Halogen Projector Headlamp - Low Beam 9005Sl+
Premium Bi Halogen Projector Headlamp - High Beam 9005LL
Front Turn Signal Lamp (Premium Headlamp) LED
Fog Lamp (Horizontal shape) 9145
Fog Lamp (Vertical shape) 9006
Center High Mounted Stop Lamp (CHMSL) 921K
Rear Cargo Lamp 921
Center High Mounted Stop Lamp (CHMSL)/Cargo Lamp LED
Base Rear Tail/Turn and Stop Lamp 3157K
Premium Rear Tail/Turn and Stop Lamp LED
Premium Backup Lamp 7440/W21W
Backup Lamp 921
Rear License Plate Lamp 194
22_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 316
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 317
Replacing Exterior Bulbs
BASE QUAD / PREMIUM BI-HALOGEN: LOW
BEAM HEADLAMP, HIGH BEAM HEADLAMP,
FRONT PARK AND TURN — IF EQUIPPED
See the following steps to replace:
1. Open the hood.
2. Disconnect and isolate the negative battery
cable.
3. Remove the six plastic push-in fasteners that
secure the upper radiator seal to the grille
support and both fender ledges.
4. Remove the two plastic push-in rivets that
secure the upper radiator seal to the radiator.
5. Remove the upper radiator seal from the
vehicle.
6. Remove the two headlamp assembly
attachment screws.
Headlamp Assembly Attachment Screw Locations
7. Reach into the front wheel house ahead of the
front wheel, remove the fastener, and lift the
cover over the access hole in the front of the
wheel house splash shield. Access to the rear
of the lamp can be gained through this access
hole.
8. Reach through the access hole of the wheel
house splash shield and lift the slide lock
upward far enough to disengage it from the
lock post on the back of the front lamp unit
housing.
Slide Lock
9. Remove the headlamp assembly. Grab the
outboard edge of the lamp and pull it straight
forward to disengage the ball stud from the
plastic grommet.
Headlamp Screw Locations
8
22_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 317
318 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
10. Disconnect the wiring harness connectors
from the bulb socket.
Bulb Location
Bulb Location
11. Replace bulb(s) as necessary.
NOTE:
There are access covers over both headlamp bulb
access holes in the quad front lamp unit housing (if
equipped). These covers MUST be reinstalled after
the bulb has been replaced.
FOG LAMPS — IF EQUIPPED
See the following steps to replace:
1. Reach under and behind the front fascia/
bumper to access the back of the front fog
lamp housing.
2. Disconnect the fog lamp wiring harness
connector from the fog lamp bulb.
Fog Lamp Bulb
3. Rotate the bulb counterclockwise a quarter
turn to unlock the bulb from the housing.
4. Pull the bulb straight out from the housing.
CAUTION!
Do not contaminate the bulb glass by touching
it with your fingers or by allowing it to contact
other oily surfaces. Shortened bulb life will
result.
Always use the correct bulb size and type for
replacement. An incorrect bulb size or type
may overheat and cause damage to the lamp,
the bulb socket, or the lamp wiring.
CAUTION!
Do not contaminate the bulb glass by touching it
with your fingers or by allowing it to contact other
oily surfaces. Shortened bulb life will result.
22_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 318
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 319
REAR TAIL / STOP, TURN SIGNAL AND BACKUP
LAMPS
See the following steps to replace:
1. Remove the two screws that pass through the
bed sheet metal.
Tail Lamp Screw Locations
2. Pull the outboard side of the lamp rearward far
enough to unsnap the two receptacles on the
outboard side of the lamp housing from the
two plastic snap post retainers in the outer box
side panel.
Pulling Out The Tail Lamp
3. Disconnect the wiring harness connectors
from the bulb socket.
4. Rotate the bulb socket counterclockwise a
quarter turn to unlock it from the housing.
5. Pull the bulb straight out of the socket.
6. Reverse the procedure to install the bulb and
housing.
CAUTION!
Do not contaminate the bulb glass by touching it
with your fingers or by allowing it to contact other
oily surfaces. Shortened bulb life will result.
8
22_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 319
320 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
CENTER HIGH MOUNTED STOP LAMP (CHMSL)
WITH CARGO LAMP
See the following steps to replace:
1. Remove the two screws holding the housing/
lens to the body as shown.
CHMSL Mounting Screw Locations
2. Separate the connector holding the housing
and wiring harness to the body.
CHMSL Connector Location
3. Turn the desired bulb socket a quarter turn
and remove the socket and bulb from housing.
4. Pull the desired bulb straight from the socket.
Outside Bulbs: Cargo Lamps
Inside Bulb: Center High Mounted Stop
Lamp
5. Reverse the procedure for installation of bulbs
and housing.
TIRES
TIRE SAFETY INFORMATION
Tire safety information will cover aspects of the
following information: Tire Markings, Tire
Identification Numbers, Tire Terminology and
Definitions, Tire Pressures, and Tire Loading.
CAUTION!
Do not contaminate the bulb glass by touching it
with your fingers or by allowing it to contact other
oily surfaces. Shortened bulb life will result.
22_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 320
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 321
Tire Markings
Tire Markings
NOTE:
P (Passenger) — Metric tire sizing is based on US
design standards. P-Metric tires have the letter
“P” molded into the sidewall preceding the size
designation. Example: P215/65R15 95H.
European — Metric tire sizing is based on Euro-
pean design standards. Tires designed to this
standard have the tire size molded into the side-
wall beginning with the section width. The letter
"P" is absent from this tire size designation.
Example: 215/65R15 96H.
LT (Light Truck) — Metric tire sizing is based on
US design standards. The size designation for
LT-Metric tires is the same as for P-Metric tires
except for the letters “LT” that are molded into
the sidewall preceding the size designation.
Example: LT235/85R16.
Temporary spare tires are designed for tempo-
rary emergency use only. Temporary high pres-
sure compact spare tires have the letter “T” or
“S” molded into the sidewall preceding the size
designation. Example: T145/80D18 103M.
High flotation tire sizing is based on US design
standards and it begins with the tire diameter
molded into the sidewall.
Example: 31x10.5 R15 LT.
1 — US DOT Safety Standards Code
(TIN)
2 — Size Designation
3 — Service Description
4 — Maximum Load
5 — Maximum Pressure
6 — Treadwear, Traction and
Temperature Grades
8
22_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 321
322 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
TIRE SIZING CHART
EXAMPLE:
Example Size Designation: P215/65R15XL 95H, 215/65R15 96H, LT235/85R16C, T145/80D18 103M, 31x10.5 R15 LT
P = Passenger car tire size based on US design standards, or
"....blank...." = Passenger car tire based on European design standards, or
LT = Light truck tire based on US design standards, or
T or S = Temporary spare tire or
31 = Overall diameter in inches (in)
215, 235, 145 = Section width in millimeters (mm)
65, 85, 80 = Aspect ratio in percent (%)
Ratio of section height to section width of tire, or
10.5 = Section width in inches (in)
R = Construction code
"R" means radial construction, or
"D" means diagonal or bias construction
15, 16, 18 = Rim diameter in inches (in)
Service Description:
95 = Load Index
A numerical code associated with the maximum load a tire can carry
H = Speed Symbol
A symbol indicating the range of speeds at which a tire can carry a load corresponding to its load index under certain operating conditions
The maximum speed corresponding to the speed symbol should only be achieved under specified operating conditions (i.e., tire pressure, vehicle loading,
road conditions, and posted speed limits)
22_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 322
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 323
Tire Identification Number (TIN)
The Tire Identification Number (TIN) may be found on one or both sides of the tire; however, the date code may only be on one side. Tires with white sidewalls
will have the full TIN, including the date code, located on the white sidewall side of the tire. Look for the TIN on the outboard side of black sidewall tires as
mounted on the vehicle. If the TIN is not found on the outboard side, then you will find it on the inboard side of the tire.
Load Identification:
Absence of the following load identification symbols on the sidewall of the tire indicates a Standard Load (SL) tire:
XL = Extra load (or reinforced) tire, or
LL = Light load tire or
C, D, E, F, G = Load range associated with the maximum load a tire can carry at a specified pressure
Maximum Load – Maximum load indicates the maximum load this tire is designed to carry
Maximum Pressure – Maximum pressure indicates the maximum permissible cold tire inflation pressure for this tire
EXAMPLE:
EXAMPLE:
DOT MA L9 ABCD 0301
DOT = Department of Transportation
This symbol certifies that the tire is in compliance with the US Department of Transportation tire safety standards and is approved for highway use
MA = Code representing the tire manufacturing location (two digits)
L9 = Code representing the tire size (two digits)
ABCD = Code used by the tire manufacturer (one to four digits)
8
22_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 323
324 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Tire Terminology And Definitions
03 = Number representing the week in which the tire was manufactured (two digits)
03 means the 3rd week
01 = Number representing the year in which the tire was manufactured (two digits)
01 means the year 2001
Prior to July 2000, tire manufacturers were only required to have one number to represent the year in which the tire was manufactured. Example: 031 could
represent the 3rd week of 1981 or 1991
Term Definition
B-pillar The vehicle B-pillar is the structural member of the body located behind the front door.
Cold Tire Inflation Pressure
Cold tire inflation pressure is defined as the tire pressure after the vehicle has not been
driven for at least three hours, or driven less than 1 mile (1.6 km) after sitting for a minimum
of three hours. Inflation pressure is measured in units of PSI (pounds per square inch) or kPa
(kilopascals).
Maximum Inflation Pressure
The maximum inflation pressure is the maximum permissible cold tire inflation pressure for
this tire. The maximum inflation pressure is molded into the sidewall.
Recommended Cold Tire Inflation Pressure
Vehicle manufacturer's recommended cold tire inflation pressure as shown on the tire
placard.
Tire Placard
A label permanently attached to the vehicle describing the vehicle’s loading capacity, the
original equipment tire sizes and the recommended cold tire inflation pressures.
EXAMPLE:
22_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 324
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 325
Tire Loading And Tire Pressure
NOTE:
The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed on
the driver’s side B-pillar or the rear edge of the
driver's side door.
Check the inflation pressure of each tire, including
the spare tire (if equipped), at least monthly and
inflate to the recommended pressure for your
vehicle.
Example Tire Placard Location (Door)
Example Tire Placard Location (B-pillar)
Tire And Loading Information Placard
Tire And Loading Information Placard
This placard tells you important information about
the:
1. Number of people that can be carried in the
vehicle.
2. Total weight your vehicle can carry.
3. Tire size designed for your vehicle.
4. Cold tire inflation pressures for the front, rear,
and spare tires.
Loading
The vehicle maximum load on the tire must not
exceed the load carrying capacity of the tire on your
vehicle. You will not exceed the tire's load carrying
capacity if you adhere to the loading conditions,
tire size, and cold tire inflation pressures specified
on the Tire and Loading Information placard in
Vehicle Loading Ú page 132.
NOTE:
Under a maximum loaded vehicle condition, Gross
Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) for the front and rear
axles must not be exceeded.
For further information on GAWR, vehicle loading,
and trailer towing Ú page 132.
8
22_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 325
326 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
To determine the maximum loading conditions of
your vehicle, locate the statement “The combined
weight of occupants and cargo should never
exceed XXX kg or XXX lbs” on the Tire and Loading
Information placard. The combined weight of
occupants, cargo/luggage and trailer tongue
weight (if applicable) should never exceed the
weight referenced here.
Steps For Determining Correct Load
Limit—
(1) Locate the statement “The combined
weight of occupants and cargo should
never exceed XXX kg or XXX lbs.” on your
vehicle's placard.
(2) Determine the combined weight of
the driver and passengers that will be
riding in your vehicle.
(3) Subtract the combined weight of the
driver and passengers from XXX kg or
XXX lbs.
(4) The resulting figure equals the
available amount of cargo and luggage
load capacity. For example, if “XXX”
amount equals 1400 lbs. and there will
be five 150 lb passengers in your
vehicle, the amount of available cargo
and luggage load capacity is 650 lbs.
(1400-750 (5x150) = 650 lbs.)
(5) Determine the combined weight of
luggage and cargo being loaded on the
vehicle. That weight may not safely
exceed the available cargo and luggage
load capacity calculated in Step 4.
(6) If your vehicle will be towing a trailer,
load from your trailer will be transferred
to your vehicle. Consult this manual to
determine how this reduces the
available cargo and luggage load
capacity of your vehicle.
Metric Example For Load Limit
For example, if “XXX” amount equals 635 kg and
there will be five 68 kg passengers in your vehicle,
the amount of available cargo and luggage load
capacity is 295 kg (635-340 (5x68) = 295 kg) as
shown in step 4.
NOTE:
If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, load from
your trailer will be transferred to your vehicle.
The following table shows examples on how to
calculate total load, cargo/luggage, and towing
capacities of your vehicle with varying seating
configurations and number and size of occu-
pants. This table is for illustration purposes only
and may not be accurate for the seating and
load carry capacity of your vehicle.
For the following example, the combined weight
of occupants and cargo should never exceed
865 lbs (392 kg).
22_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 326
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 327
WARNING!
Overloading of your tires is dangerous. Overloading can cause tire failure, affect vehicle handling, and increase your stopping distance. Use tires of the
recommended load capacity for your vehicle. Never overload them.
8
22_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 327
328 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
(Continued)
TIRES — GENERAL INFORMATION
Tire Pressure
Proper tire inflation pressure is essential to the
safe and satisfactory operation of your vehicle.
Four primary areas are affected by improper tire
pressure:
Safety
Fuel Economy
Tread Wear
Ride Comfort and Vehicle Stability
Safety
Both underinflation and overinflation affect the
stability of the vehicle and can produce a feeling of
sluggish response or over responsiveness in the
steering.
NOTE:
Unequal tire pressures from side to side may
cause erratic and unpredictable steering
response.
Unequal tire pressure from side to side may
cause the vehicle to drift left or right.
Fuel Economy
Underinflated tires will increase tire rolling
resistance resulting in higher fuel consumption.
Tread Wear
Improper cold tire inflation pressures can cause
abnormal wear patterns and reduced tread life,
resulting in the need for earlier tire replacement.
Ride Comfort And Vehicle Stability
Proper tire inflation contributes to a comfortable
ride. Overinflation produces a jarring and
uncomfortable ride.
Tire Inflation Pressures
The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed on
the driver's side B-pillar or rear edge of the driver's
side door.
At least once a month:
Check and adjust tire pressure with a good
quality pocket-type pressure gauge. Do not
make a visual judgment when determining
proper inflation. Tires may look properly inflated
even when they are underinflated.
Inspect tires for signs of tire wear or visible
damage.
WARNING!
Improperly inflated tires are dangerous and
can cause collisions.
Underinflation increases tire flexing and can
result in overheating and tire failure.
Overinflation reduces a tire's ability to cushion
shock. Objects on the road and chuckholes
can cause damage that result in tire failure.
Overinflated or underinflated tires can affect
vehicle handling and can fail suddenly,
resulting in loss of vehicle control.
Unequal tire pressures can cause steering
problems. You could lose control of your
vehicle.
Unequal tire pressures from one side of the
vehicle to the other can cause the vehicle to
drift to the right or left.
Always drive with each tire inflated to the
recommended cold tire inflation pressure.
WARNING!
CAUTION!
After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure,
always reinstall the valve stem cap. This will
prevent moisture and dirt from entering the
valve stem, which could damage the valve stem.
22_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 328
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 329
Inflation pressures specified on the placard are
always “cold tire inflation pressure”. Cold tire
inflation pressure is defined as the tire pressure
after the vehicle has not been driven for at least
three hours, or driven less than 1 mile (1.6 km)
after sitting for a minimum of three hours. The cold
tire inflation pressure must not exceed the
maximum inflation pressure molded into the tire
sidewall.
Check tire pressures more often if subject to a
wide range of outdoor temperatures, as tire
pressures vary with temperature changes.
Tire pressures change by approximately 1 psi
(7 kPa) per 12°F (7°C) of air temperature change.
Keep this in mind when checking tire pressure
inside a garage, especially in the Winter.
Example: If garage temperature = 68°F (20°C)
and the outside temperature = 32°F (0°C) then
the cold tire inflation pressure should be increased
by 3 psi (21 kPa), which equals 1 psi (7 kPa) for
every 12°F (7°C) for this outside temperature
condition.
Tire pressure may increase from 2 to 6 psi
(13 to 40 kPa) during operation. DO NOT reduce
this normal pressure build up or your tire pressure
will be too low.
Tire Pressures For High Speed Operation
The manufacturer advocates driving at safe
speeds and within posted speed limits. Where
speed limits or conditions are such that the vehicle
can be driven at high speeds, maintaining correct
tire inflation pressure is very important. Increased
tire pressure and reduced vehicle loading may be
required for high-speed vehicle operation. Refer to
an authorized tire dealer or original equipment
vehicle dealer for recommended safe operating
speeds, loading and cold tire inflation pressures.
Radial Ply Tires
Tire Repair
If your tire becomes damaged, it may be repaired if
it meets the following criteria:
The tire has not been driven on when flat.
The damage is only on the tread section of your
tire (sidewall damage is not repairable).
The puncture is no greater than a ¼ of an inch
(6 mm).
Consult an authorized tire dealer for tire repairs
and additional information.
Damaged Run Flat tires, or Run Flat tires that have
experienced a loss of pressure should be replaced
immediately with another Run Flat tire of identical
size and service description (Load Index and
Speed Symbol). Replace the tire pressure sensor
as well as it is not designed to be reused.
WARNING!
High speed driving with your vehicle under
maximum load is dangerous. The added strain
on your tires could cause them to fail. You could
have a serious collision. Do not drive a vehicle
loaded to the maximum capacity at continuous
speeds above 75 mph (120 km/h).
WARNING!
Combining radial ply tires with other types of
tires on your vehicle will cause your vehicle to
handle poorly. The instability could cause a
collision. Always use radial ply tires in sets of
four. Never combine them with other types of
tires.
8
22_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 329
330 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Run Flat Tires — If Equipped
Run Flat tires allow you the capability to drive
50 miles (80 km) at 50 mph (80 km/h) after a
rapid loss of inflation pressure. This rapid loss of
inflation is referred to as the Run Flat mode. A Run
Flat mode occurs when the tire inflation pressure is
of/or below 14 psi (96 kPa). Once a Run Flat tire
reaches the Run Flat mode it has limited driving
capabilities and needs to be replaced immediately.
A Run Flat tire is not repairable. When a Run Flat
tire is changed after driving with underinflated tire
condition, please replace the TPMS sensor as it is
not designed to be reused when driven under Run
Flat mode 14 psi (96 kPa) condition.
NOTE:
The TPMS Sensor must be replaced after driving
the vehicle on a flat tire condition.
It is not recommended to drive a vehicle loaded at
full capacity or to tow a trailer while a tire is in the
Run Flat mode.
For more information Ú page 221.
Tire Spinning
When stuck in mud, sand, snow, or ice conditions,
do not spin your vehicle's wheels above 30 mph
(48 km/h) or for longer than 30 seconds
continuously without stopping.
For further information Ú page 281.
Tread Wear Indicators
Tread wear indicators are in the original equipment
tires to help you in determining when your tires
should be replaced.
Tire Tread
These indicators are molded into the bottom of the
tread grooves. They will appear as bands when the
tread depth becomes a 1/16 of an inch (1.6 mm).
When the tread is worn to the tread wear
indicators, the tire should be replaced.
For further information Ú page 331.
Life Of Tire
The service life of a tire is dependent upon varying
factors including, but not limited to:
Driving style.
Tire pressure - Improper cold tire inflation pres-
sures can cause uneven wear patterns to
develop across the tire tread. These abnormal
wear patterns will reduce tread life, resulting in
the need for earlier tire replacement.
Distance driven.
Performance tires, tires with a speed rating of V
or higher, and Summer tires typically have a
reduced tread life. Rotation of these tires per
the vehicle scheduled maintenance is highly
recommended.
WARNING!
Fast spinning tires can be dangerous. Forces
generated by excessive wheel speeds may
cause tire damage or failure. A tire could
explode and injure someone. Do not spin your
vehicle's wheels faster than 30 mph (48 km/h)
for more than 30 seconds continuously when
you are stuck, and do not let anyone near a
spinning wheel, no matter what the speed.
1 — Worn Tire
2 — New Tire
22_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 330
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 331
(Continued)
NOTE:
Wheel valve stem must be replaced as well when
installing new tires due to wear and tear in existing
tires.
Keep dismounted tires in a cool, dry place with as
little exposure to light as possible. Protect tires
from contact with oil, grease, and gasoline.
Replacement Tires
The tires on your new vehicle provide a balance of
many characteristics. They should be inspected
regularly for wear and correct cold tire inflation
pressures. The manufacturer strongly
recommends that you use tires equivalent to the
originals in size, quality and performance when
replacement is needed Ú page 330. Refer to the
Tire and Loading Information placard or the
Vehicle Certification Label for the size designation
of your tire. The Load Index and Speed Symbol for
your tire will be found on the original equipment
tire sidewall.
For more information relating to the Load Index
and Speed Symbol of a tire Ú page 322.
It is recommended to replace the two front tires or
two rear tires as a pair. Replacing just one tire can
seriously affect your vehicle’s handling. If you ever
replace a wheel, make sure that the wheel’s
specifications match those of the original wheels.
It is recommended you contact an authorized tire
dealer or original equipment dealer with any
questions you may have on tire specifications or
capability. Failure to use equivalent replacement
tires may adversely affect the safety, handling, and
ride of your vehicle.
TIRE TYPES
All Season Tires — If Equipped
All Season tires provide traction for all seasons
(Spring, Summer, Autumn, and Winter). Traction
levels may vary between different all season tires.
All season tires can be identified by the M+S, M&S,
M/S or MS designation on the tire sidewall. Use all
season tires only in sets of four; failure to do so
may adversely affect the safety and handling of
your vehicle.
WARNING!
Tires and the spare tire should be replaced after
six years, regardless of the remaining tread.
Failure to follow this warning can result in
sudden tire failure. You could lose control and
have a collision resulting in serious injury or
death.
WARNING!
Do not use a tire, wheel size, load rating, or
speed rating other than that specified for your
vehicle. Some combinations of unapproved
tires and wheels may change suspension
dimensions and performance characteristics,
resulting in changes to steering, handling, and
braking of your vehicle. This can cause unpre-
dictable handling and stress to steering and
suspension components. You could lose
control and have a collision resulting in
serious injury or death. Use only the tire and
wheel sizes with load ratings approved for
your vehicle.
Never use a tire with a smaller load index or
capacity, other than what was originally
equipped on your vehicle. Using a tire with a
smaller load index could result in tire over-
loading and failure. You could lose control and
have a collision.
Failure to equip your vehicle with tires having
adequate speed capability can result in
sudden tire failure and loss of vehicle control.
CAUTION!
Replacing original tires with tires of a different
size may result in false speedometer and
odometer readings.
WARNING!
8
22_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 331
332 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Summer Or Three Season Tires —
If Equipped
Summer tires provide traction in both wet and dry
conditions, and are not intended to be driven in
snow or on ice. If your vehicle is equipped with
Summer tires, be aware these tires are not
designed for Winter or cold driving conditions.
Install Winter tires on your vehicle when ambient
temperatures are less than 40°F (5°C) or if roads
are covered with ice or snow. For more
information, contact an authorized dealer.
Summer tires do not contain the all season
designation or “mountain/snowflake” symbol on
the tire sidewall. Use Summer tires only in sets of
four; failure to do so may adversely affect the
safety and handling of your vehicle.
Snow Tires
Some areas of the country require the use of snow
tires during the Winter. Snow tires can be identified
by a “mountain/snowflake” symbol on the tire
sidewall.
If you need snow tires, select tires
equivalent in size and type to the original
equipment tires. Use snow tires only in
sets of four; failure to do so may
adversely affect the safety and handling of your
vehicle.
Snow tires generally have lower speed ratings than
what was originally equipped with your vehicle and
should not be operated at sustained speeds over
75 mph (120 km/h). For speeds above 75 mph
(120 km/h) refer to original equipment or an
authorized tire dealer for recommended safe
operating speeds, loading and cold tire inflation
pressures.
While studded tires improve performance on ice,
skid and traction capability on wet or dry surfaces
may be poorer than that of non-studded tires.
Some states prohibit studded tires; therefore, local
laws should be checked before using these tire
types.
SPARE TIRES — IF EQUIPPED
NOTE:
For vehicles equipped with Tire Service Kit instead
of a spare tire, please refer to “Tire Service Kit” in
“In Case Of Emergency” for further information.
For restrictions when towing with a spare tire
designated for temporary emergency use
Ú page 138.
WARNING!
Do not use Summer tires in snow/ice conditions.
You could lose vehicle control, resulting in
severe injury or death. Driving too fast for
conditions also creates the possibility of loss of
vehicle control.
CAUTION!
Because of the reduced ground clearance, do
not take your vehicle through an automatic car
wash with a compact or limited use temporary
spare installed. Damage to the vehicle may
result.
22_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 332
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 333
Spare Tire Matching Original Equipped Tire
And Wheel — If Equipped
Your vehicle may be equipped with a spare tire and
wheel equivalent in look and function to the
original equipment tire and wheel found on the
front or rear axle of your vehicle. This spare tire
may be used in the tire rotation for your vehicle. If
your vehicle has this option, refer to an authorized
tire dealer for the recommended tire rotation
pattern.
Compact Spare Tire — If Equipped
The compact spare is for temporary emergency
use only. You can identify if your vehicle is
equipped with a compact spare by looking at the
spare tire description on the Tire and Loading
Information Placard located on the driver’s side
door opening or on the sidewall of the tire.
Compact spare tire descriptions begin with the
letter “T” or “S” preceding the size designation.
Example: T145/80D18 103M.
T, S = Temporary Spare Tire
Since this tire has limited tread life, the original
equipment tire should be repaired (or replaced)
and reinstalled on your vehicle at the first
opportunity.
Do not install a wheel cover or attempt to mount a
conventional tire on the compact spare wheel,
since the wheel is designed specifically for the
compact spare tire. Do not install more than one
compact spare tire and wheel on the vehicle at any
given time.
Collapsible Spare Tire — If Equipped
The collapsible spare is for temporary emergency
use only. You can identify if your vehicle is
equipped with a collapsible spare by looking at the
spare tire description on the Tire and Loading
Information Placard located on the driver’s side
door opening or on the sidewall of the tire.
Collapsible spare tire description
example: 165/80-17 101P.
Since this tire has limited tread life, the original
equipment tire should be repaired (or replaced)
and reinstalled on your vehicle at the first
opportunity.
Inflate collapsible tire only after the wheel is
properly installed to the vehicle. Inflate the
collapsible tire using the electric air pump before
lowering the vehicle.
WARNING!
Compact and collapsible spares are for
temporary emergency use only. With these
spares, do not drive more than 50 mph
(80 km/h). Temporary use spares have limited
tread life. When the tread is worn to the tread
wear indicators, the temporary use spare tire
needs to be replaced. Be sure to follow the
warnings, which apply to your spare. Failure to
do so could result in spare tire failure and loss of
vehicle control.
8
22_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 333
334 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Do not install a wheel cover or attempt to mount a
conventional tire on the collapsible spare wheel,
since the wheel is designed specifically for the
collapsible spare tire.
Full Size Spare — If Equipped
The full size spare is for temporary emergency use
only. This tire may look like the originally equipped
tire on the front or rear axle of your vehicle, but it is
not. This spare tire may have limited tread life.
When the tread is worn to the tread wear
indicators, the temporary use full size spare tire
needs to be replaced. Since it is not the same as
your original equipment tire, replace (or repair) the
original equipment tire and reinstall on the vehicle
at the first opportunity.
Limited Use Spare — If Equipped
The limited use spare tire is for temporary
emergency use only. This tire is identified by a label
located on the limited use spare wheel. This label
contains the driving limitations for this spare. This
tire may look like the original equipped tire on the
front or rear axle of your vehicle, but it is not.
Installation of this limited use spare tire affects
vehicle handling. Since it is not the same as your
original equipment tire, replace (or repair) the
original equipment tire and reinstall on the vehicle
at the first opportunity.
WHEEL AND WHEEL TRIM CARE
All wheels and wheel trim, especially aluminum
and chrome plated wheels, should be cleaned
regularly using mild (neutral Ph) soap and water to
maintain their luster and to prevent corrosion.
Wash wheels with the same soap solution
recommended for the body of the vehicle and
remember to always wash when the surfaces are
not hot to the touch.
Your wheels are susceptible to deterioration
caused by salt, sodium chloride, magnesium
chloride, calcium chloride, etc., and other road
chemicals used to melt ice or control dust on dirt
roads. Use a soft cloth or sponge and mild soap to
wipe away promptly. Do not use harsh chemicals or
a stiff brush. They can damage the wheel’s
protective coating that helps keep them from
corroding and tarnishing.
WARNING!
Compact and Collapsible spares are for
temporary emergency use only. With these
spares, do not drive more than 50 mph
(80 km/h). Temporary use spares have limited
tread life. When the tread is worn to the tread
wear indicators, the temporary use spare tire
needs to be replaced. Be sure to follow the
warnings, which apply to your spare. Failure to
do so could result in spare tire failure and loss of
vehicle control.
WARNING!
Limited use spares are for emergency use only.
Installation of this limited use spare tire affects
vehicle handling. With this tire, do not drive
more than the speed listed on the limited use
spare wheel. Keep inflated to the cold tire
inflation pressures listed on your Tire and
Loading Information Placard located on the
driver’s side B-pillar or the rear edge of the
driver’s side door. Replace (or repair) the original
equipment tire at the first opportunity and
reinstall it on your vehicle. Failure to do so could
result in loss of vehicle control.
22_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 334
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 335
When cleaning extremely dirty wheels including
excessive brake dust, care must be taken in the
selection of tire and wheel cleaning chemicals and
equipment to prevent damage to the wheels.
Mopar® Wheel Treatment or Mopar® Chrome
Cleaner or their equivalent is recommended or
select a non-abrasive, non-acidic cleaner for
aluminum or chrome wheels.
NOTE:
If you intend parking or storing your vehicle for an
extended period after cleaning the wheels with
wheel cleaner, drive your vehicle and apply the
brakes to remove the water droplets from the
brake components. This activity will remove the
red rust on the brake rotors and prevent vehicle
vibration when braking.
Dark Vapor Chrome, Black Satin Chrome, or Low
Gloss Clear Coat Wheels
CAUTION!
Avoid products or automatic car washes that use
acidic solutions or strong alkaline additives or
harsh brushes. Many aftermarket wheel
cleaners and automatic car washes may
damage the wheel's protective finish. Such
damage is not covered by the New Vehicle
Limited Warranty. Only car wash soap, Mopar®
Wheel Cleaner or equivalent is recommended.
CAUTION!
Do not use scouring pads, steel wool, a bristle
brush, metal polishes or oven cleaner. These
products may damage the wheel's protective
finish. Such damage is not covered by the New
Vehicle Limited Warranty. Only car wash soap,
Mopar® Wheel Cleaner or equivalent is
recommended.
CAUTION!
If your vehicle is equipped with these specialty
wheels, DO NOT USE wheel cleaners, abrasives,
or polishing compounds. They will permanently
damage this finish and such damage is not
covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
HAND WASH ONLY USING MILD SOAP AND
WATER WITH A SOFT CLOTH. Used on a regular
basis; this is all that is required to maintain this
finish.
8
22_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 335
336 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
SNOW TRACTION DEVICES
Use of traction devices require sufficient tire-to-body clearance. Due to limited clearance, the following snow traction devices are recommended. Follow these
recommendations to guard against damage:
Snow traction device must be of proper size for the tire, as recommended by the snow traction device manufacturer.
No other tire sizes are recommended for use with the snow traction device.
Please follow the table below for the recommended tire size, axle and snow traction device:
4x2 (2WD)
Trim Level
Axle Tire/Wheel Size
Snow Traction Device (maximum
projection beyond tire profile or
equivalent)
Tradesman Rear P265/70R17 S Class
SLT Rear NONE NONE
4x4 (4WD)
Trim Level
Axle Tire/Wheel Size
Snow Traction Device (maximum
projection beyond tire profile or
equivalent)
Tradesman Rear P265/70R17 S Class
SLT Rear NONE NONE
WARNING!
Using tires of different size and type (M+S, Snow) between front and rear axles can cause unpredictable handling. You could lose control and have a collision.
22_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 336
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 337
(Continued)
TIRE ROTATION RECOMMENDATIONS
Tires on the front and rear axles of vehicles
operate at different loads and perform different
steering, driving, and braking functions. For these
reasons, they wear at unequal rates.
These effects can be reduced by timely rotation of
tires. The benefits of rotation are especially
worthwhile with aggressive tread designs such as
those on all season type tires. Rotation will
increase tread life, help to maintain mud, snow
and wet traction levels and contribute to a smooth,
quiet ride.
Refer to the “Maintenance Plan” in this chapter for
the proper maintenance intervals. More frequent
rotation is permissible if desired. The reasons for
any rapid or unusual wear should be corrected
prior to rotation being performed.
The suggested rotation method is the “rearward
cross” shown in the following diagram. This
rotation pattern does not apply to some directional
tires that must not be reversed.
Tire Rotation (Rearward Cross)
DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION
UNIFORM TIRE QUALITY GRADES
The following tire grading categories
were established by the National
Highway Traffic Safety Administration.
The specific grade rating assigned by the
tire's manufacturer in each category is
shown on the sidewall of the tires on
your vehicle.
All passenger vehicle tires must conform
to Federal safety requirements in
addition to these grades.
CAUTION!
To avoid damage to your vehicle or tires, observe
the following precautions:
Because of restricted traction device clearance
between tires and other suspension compo-
nents, it is important that only traction devices
in good condition are used. Broken devices can
cause serious damage. Stop the vehicle imme-
diately if noise occurs that could indicate device
breakage. Remove the damaged parts of the
device before further use.
Install device as tightly as possible and then
retighten after driving about ½ mile (0.8 km).
Autosock traction devices do not require retight-
ening.
Do not exceed 30 mph (48 km/h).
Drive cautiously and avoid severe turns and
large bumps, especially with a loaded vehicle.
Do not drive for a prolonged period on dry pave-
ment.
Observe the traction device manufacturer’s
instructions on the method of installation, oper-
ating speed, and conditions for use. Always use
the suggested operating speed of the device
manufacturer’s if it is less than 30 mph
(48 km/h).
Do not use traction devices on a compact spare
tire.
CAUTION!
8
22_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 337
338 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
TREADWEAR
The Treadwear grade is a comparative
rating, based on the wear rate of the tire
when tested under controlled conditions
on a specified government test course.
For example, a tire graded 150 would
wear one and one-half times as well on
the government course as a tire graded
100. The relative performance of tires
depends upon the actual conditions of
their use, however, and may depart
significantly from the norm due to
variations in driving habits, service
practices, and differences in road
characteristics and climate.
TRACTION GRADES
The Traction grades, from highest to
lowest, are AA, A, B, and C. These grades
represent the tire's ability to stop on wet
pavement, as measured under
controlled conditions on specified
government test surfaces of asphalt and
concrete. A tire marked C may have poor
traction performance.
TEMPERATURE GRADES
The Temperature grades are A (the
highest), B, and C, representing the tire's
resistance to the generation of heat and
its ability to dissipate heat, when tested
under controlled conditions on a
specified indoor laboratory test wheel.
Sustained high temperature can cause
the material of the tire to degenerate
and reduce tire life, and excessive
temperature can lead to sudden tire
failure. The grade C corresponds to a
level of performance, which all
passenger vehicle tires must meet
under the Federal Motor Vehicle Safety
Standard No. 109. Grades B and A
represent higher levels of performance
on the laboratory test wheel, than the
minimum required by law.
STORING THE VEHICLE
If you are storing your vehicle for more than three
weeks, we recommend that you take the following
steps to minimize the drain on your vehicle's
battery:
Disconnect the negative cable from battery.
Any time you store your vehicle or keep it out of
service (i.e., vacation) for two weeks or more,
run the air conditioning system at idle for about
five minutes in the fresh air and high blower
setting. This will ensure adequate system lubri-
cation to minimize the possibility of compressor
damage when the system is started again.
WARNING!
The traction grade assigned to this tire is based
on straight-ahead braking traction tests, and
does not include acceleration, cornering,
hydroplaning, or peak traction characteristics.
WARNING!
The temperature grade for this tire is
established for a tire that is properly inflated and
not overloaded. Excessive speed, underinflation,
or excessive loading, either separately or in
combination, can cause heat buildup and
possible tire failure.
22_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 338
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 339
BODYWORK
PROTECTION FROM ATMOSPHERIC
A
GENTS
Vehicle body care requirements vary according to
geographic locations and usage. Chemicals that
make roads passable in snow and ice and those
that are sprayed on trees and road surfaces during
other seasons are highly corrosive to the metal in
your vehicle. Outside parking, which exposes your
vehicle to airborne contaminants, road surfaces on
which the vehicle is operated, extreme hot or cold
weather and other extreme conditions will have an
adverse affect on paint, metal trim, and underbody
protection.
The following maintenance recommendations will
enable you to obtain maximum benefit from the
corrosion resistance built into your vehicle.
What Causes Corrosion?
Corrosion is the result of deterioration or removal
of paint and protective coatings from your vehicle.
The most common causes are:
Road salt, dirt and moisture accumulation.
Stone and gravel impact.
Insects, tree sap and tar.
Salt in the air near seacoast localities.
Atmospheric fallout/industrial pollutants.
BODY AND UNDERBODY MAINTENANCE
Cleaning Headlights
Your vehicle is equipped with plastic headlights
and fog lights that are lighter and less susceptible
to stone breakage than glass headlights.
Plastic is not as scratch resistant as glass and
therefore different lens cleaning procedures must
be followed.
To minimize the possibility of scratching the lenses
and reducing light output, avoid wiping with a dry
cloth. To remove road dirt, wash with a mild soap
solution followed by rinsing.
Do not use abrasive cleaning components,
solvents, steel wool or other aggressive material to
clean the lenses.
Tri-Fold Soft Tonneau Cover Care
For cleaning and protecting the vinyl Tri-Fold
Tonneau cover, use Mopar® Whitewall & Vinyl Top
Cleaner and Mopar® Leather and Vinyl
Conditioner/Protectant.
PRESERVING THE BODYWORK
Washing
Wash your vehicle regularly. Always wash your
vehicle in the shade using Mopar® Car Wash, or
a mild car wash soap, and rinse the panels
completely with water.
If insects, tar, or other similar deposits have
accumulated on your vehicle, use Mopar®
Super Kleen Bug and Tar Remover to remove.
Use a high quality cleaner wax, such as Mopar®
Cleaner Wax to remove road film, stains and to
protect your paint finish. Use precautions to not
scratch the paint.
Avoid using abrasive compounds and power
buffing that may diminish the gloss or thin out
the paint finish.
CAUTION!
Do not use abrasive or strong cleaning mate-
rials such as steel wool or scouring powder
that will scratch metal and painted surfaces.
Use of power washers exceeding 1,200 psi
(8,274 kPa) can result in damage or removal
of paint and decals.
8
22_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 339
340 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
(Continued)
Bumper Care
The customer is responsible to clean and maintain
the chrome components of the vehicle. Washing
away road debris and salt using an automotive
soap. Bumpers should be cleaned regularly using
mild (neutral Ph) soap and water to maintain their
luster and to prevent corrosion.
Your bumpers are susceptible to deterioration
caused by salt, sodium chloride, magnesium
chloride, calcium chloride, etc., and other road
chemicals used to melt ice or control dust on dirt
roads. Do not use harsh chemicals or a stiff brush.
They can stain or damage the protective coating
that helps keep them from corroding and
tarnishing.
Special Care
If you drive on salted or dusty roads or if you
drive near the ocean, hose off the undercarriage
at least once a month.
It is important that the drain holes in the lower
edges of the doors, rocker panels, and trunk be
kept clear and open.
If you detect any stone chips or scratches in the
paint, touch them up immediately.
If your vehicle is damaged due to a collision or
similar cause that destroys the paint and protec-
tive coating, have your vehicle repaired as soon
as possible.
If you carry special cargo such as chemicals,
fertilizers, de-icer salt, etc., be sure that such
materials are well packaged and sealed.
If a lot of driving is done on gravel roads,
consider mud or stone shields behind each
wheel.
Use Mopar® Touch Up Paint on scratches as
soon as possible. An authorized dealer has
touch up paint to match the color of your
vehicle.
Spray-On Bedliner – If Equipped
During ownership, the shine and luster of the
Spray-On Bedliner can fade from oxidation, road
dirt, heavy-duty hauling and hard water stains.
Weathering and Ultra-Violet (UV) exposure will lead
to fading, dulling, and loss of gloss over time.
To help maintain the appearance of your Spray-On
Bedliner, the manufacturer recommends you
periodically rinse all loose dirt from your truck bed
and clean your truck at least twice per year using
the Mopar® Spray-On Bedliner Conditioner
available at your local authorized dealer.
CAUTION!
Do not use scouring pads, steel wool, a bristle
brush, metal polishes, or oven cleaner. These
products may damage the bumper’s protec-
tive finish. Such damage is not covered by the
New Vehicle Limited Warranty. Only car wash
soap, Mopar® Chrome Cleaner, or equivalent
is recommended.
Avoid products or automatic car washes that
use acidic solutions, strong alkaline additives,
or harsh brushes. Many aftermarket cleaners
and automatic car washes may damage the
bumper’s protective finish. Such damage is
not covered by the New Vehicle Limited
Warranty. Only car wash soap, Mopar®
Chrome Cleaner, or equivalent is recom-
mended.
CAUTION!
22_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 340
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 341
To Help Maintain The Appearance Of Your
Spray-On Bedliner, Follow The Steps Below:
1. Rinse your truck bed out with water to remove
any loose dirt and debris.
2. Mix a mild soap or detergent with water, and
clean truck bed with a soft cloth or brush.
3. Rinse bedliner with water.
4. Once dry, apply a small amount of Mopar®
Spray-On Bedliner Conditioner to a moist towel
or sponge and wipe over the entire surface of
the truck bedliner.
Spray-On Bedliners are chemically-resistant to
many different types of chemicals (including
gasoline, oil, hydraulic fluids) for short periods of
time. If a spill occurs on your Spray-On Bedliner,
rinse the truck out as soon as possible to avoid
permanent damage.
Repairing The Spray-On Bedliner
While extremely tough, it is possible to damage a
Spray-On Bedliner. One common condition is when
loading a heavy pallet and dragging that pallet
across the floor of the bed. If a nail or sharp point
is exposed under the weight of the pallet a scratch
or tear is possible. While not covered by your new
vehicle warranty, a cosmetic fix to cover the metal
exposed by the scratch is required. To repair a tear
or gouge, follow the directions provided in the
Mopar® Quick Repair Kit.
INTERIORS
SEATS AND FABRIC PARTS
Use Mopar® Total Clean to clean fabric upholstery
and carpeting.
Stain Repel Fabric Cleaning Procedure —
If Equipped
Stain Repel seats may be cleaned in the following
manner:
Remove as much of the stain as possible by
blotting with a clean, dry towel.
Blot any remaining stain with a clean, damp
towel.
For tough stains, apply Mopar® Total Clean, or
a mild soap solution to a clean, damp cloth and
remove stain. Use a fresh, damp towel to
remove soap residue.
For grease stains, apply Mopar® Multi-Purpose
Cleaner to a clean, damp cloth and remove
stain. Use a fresh, damp towel to remove soap
residue.
Do not use any harsh solvents or any other form
of protectants on Stain Repel products.
Seat Belt Maintenance
Do not bleach, dye or clean the belts with chemical
solvents or abrasive cleaners. This will weaken the
fabric.
If the belts need cleaning, use a mild soap solution
or lukewarm water. Do not remove the belts from
the vehicle to wash them. Dry with a soft cloth.
Sun damage can also weaken the fabric. Replace
the belts if they appear frayed or worn or if the
buckles do not work properly.
WARNING!
Do not use silicon-based protection products to
clean your bedliner. Silicon-based products can
become slippery and may result in personal
injury.
WARNING!
Do not use volatile solvents for cleaning
purposes. Many are potentially flammable, and
if used in closed areas they may cause
respiratory harm.
8
22_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 341
342 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
(Continued)
NOTE:
If the belts retract slowly, inspect the upper turning
loop for soiling. If soiling is present, clean with a
wet soft cloth until all residue is removed.
PLASTIC AND COATED PARTS
Use Mopar® Total Clean to clean vinyl upholstery.
Cleaning Plastic Instrument Cluster
Lenses
The lenses in front of the instruments in this
vehicle are molded in clear plastic. When cleaning
the lenses, care must be taken to avoid scratching
the plastic.
Clean with a wet soft cloth. A mild soap solution
may be used, but do not use high alcohol content
or abrasive cleaners. If soap is used, wipe clean
with a clean damp cloth. Dry with a soft cloth.
LEATHER SURFACES
Mopar® Total Clean is specifically recommended
for leather upholstery.
Your leather upholstery can be best preserved by
regular cleaning with a damp soft cloth. Small
particles of dirt can act as an abrasive and damage
the leather upholstery and should be removed
promptly with a damp cloth. Stubborn soils can be
removed easily with a soft cloth and Mopar® Total
Clean. Care should be taken to avoid soaking your
leather upholstery with any liquid.
Please do not use polishes, oils, cleaning fluids,
solvents, detergents, or ammonia-based cleaners
to clean your leather upholstery.
NOTE:
If equipped with light colored leather, it tends to
show any foreign material, dirt, and fabric dye
transfer more so than darker colors. The leather is
designed for easy cleaning, and the manufacturer
recommends Mopar® total care leather cleaner
applied on a cloth to clean the leather seats as
needed.
GLASS SURFACES
All glass surfaces should be cleaned on a regular
basis with Mopar® Glass Cleaner, or any
commercial household-type glass cleaner. Never
use an abrasive type cleaner. Use caution when
cleaning the inside rear window equipped with
electric defrosters or windows equipped with radio
antennas. Do not use scrapers or other sharp
instruments that may scratch the elements.
When cleaning the rear view mirror, spray cleaner
on the towel or cloth that you are using. Do not
spray cleaner directly on the mirror.
WARNING!
A frayed or torn seat belt could rip apart in a
collision and leave you with no protection.
Inspect the seat belt system periodically,
checking for cuts, frays, or loose parts.
Damaged parts must be replaced immediately.
Do not disassemble or modify the seat belt
system. If your vehicle is involved in a collision,
or if you have questions regarding seat belt or
retractor conditions, take your vehicle to an
authorized FCA dealer or authorized FCA
Certified Collision Care Program facility for
inspection.
CAUTION!
Direct contact of air fresheners, insect repel-
lents, suntan lotions, or hand sanitizers to the
plastic, painted, or decorated surfaces of the
interior may cause permanent damage. Wipe
away immediately.
Damage caused by these type of products
may not be covered by your New Vehicle
Limited Warranty.
CAUTION!
CAUTION!
Do not use Alcohol and Alcohol-based and/or
Ketone based cleaning products to clean leather
seats, as damage to the seat may result.
22_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 342
343
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER (VIN)
The VIN is found on the left front corner of the
instrument panel, visible through the windshield.
Vehicle Identification Number
NOTE:
It is illegal to remove or alter the VIN.
BRAKE SYSTEM
If power assist is lost for any reason (for example,
repeated brake applications with the engine off),
the brakes will still function. However, you will
experience a substantial increase in braking effort
to stop the vehicle.
If either the front or rear hydraulic systems lose
normal braking capability, the remaining system
will still function with some loss of overall braking
effectiveness. This will be evident by increased
pedal travel during application, greater pedal force
required to slow or stop, and activation of the
Brake Warning Light and the Anti-Lock Brake
System (ABS) Warning Light (if equipped) during
brake use.
WHEEL AND TIRE TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS
Proper lug nut/bolt torque is very important to
ensure that the wheel is properly mounted to the
vehicle. Any time a wheel has been removed and
reinstalled on the vehicle, the lug nuts/bolts
should be torqued using a properly calibrated
torque wrench using a six-sided (hex) deep wall
socket.
TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS
**Use only authorized dealer recommended lug
nuts/bolts and clean or remove any dirt or oil
before tightening.
Inspect the wheel mounting surface prior to
mounting the tire and remove any corrosion or
loose particles.
Wheel Mounting Surface
Tighten the lug nuts/bolts in a star pattern until
each nut/bolt has been tightened twice. Ensure
that the socket is fully engaged on the lug nut/bolt
(do not insert it halfway).
Lug Nut/
Bolt
Torque
Lug Nut/
Bolt Type
**Lug
Nut/Bolt
Size
Lug Nut/
Bolt
Socket
Size
130 Ft-Lb
(176 N·m)
Cone
M14 x
1.50
22 mm
9
22_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 343
344 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
After 25 miles (40 km), check the lug nut/bolt
torque to be sure that all the lug nuts/bolts are
properly tightened.
Four And Five Lug Nuts/Bolts Torque Pattern
FUEL REQUIREMENTS
While operating on gasoline with the required
octane number, hearing a light knocking sound
from the engine is not a cause for concern.
However, if the engine is heard making a heavy
knocking sound, see a dealer immediately. Use of
gasoline with a lower than recommended octane
number can cause engine failure and may void or
not be covered by the New Vehicle Limited
Warranty.
Poor quality gasoline can cause problems such as
hard starting, stalling, and hesitations. If you
experience these symptoms, try another brand of
gasoline before considering service for the vehicle.
3.6L ENGINE
Do not use E-85 flex fuel or ethanol blends greater
than 15% in this engine.
This engine is designed to meet all
emission regulations and provide
excellent fuel economy and performance
when using high-quality unleaded regular
gasoline having an octane rating of 87 as specified
by the (R+M)/2 method. The use of higher octane
premium gasoline will not provide any benefit over
regular gasoline in these engines.
5.7L ENGINE
Do not use E-85 flex fuel or ethanol blends greater
than 15% in this engine.
This engine is designed to meet all
emission regulations and provide
satisfactory fuel economy and
performance when using high-quality
unleaded gasoline having an octane range of 87 to
89 as specified by the (R+M)/2 method. The use of
89 octane plus gasoline is recommended for
optimum performance and fuel economy.
REFORMULATED GASOLINE
Many areas of the country require the use of
cleaner-burning gasoline referred to as
“reformulated gasoline”. Reformulated gasoline
contains oxygenates and are specifically blended
to reduce vehicle emissions and improve air
quality.
The use of reformulated gasoline is recommended.
Properly blended reformulated gasoline will
provide improved performance and durability of
engine and fuel system components.
WARNING!
To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the
jack, do not tighten the lug nuts/bolts fully until
the vehicle has been lowered. Failure to follow
this warning may result in personal injury.
22_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 344
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS 345
MATERIALS ADDED TO FUEL
Besides using unleaded gasoline with the proper
octane rating, gasolines that contain detergents,
corrosion and stability additives are
recommended. Using gasolines that have these
additives will help improve fuel economy, reduce
emissions, and maintain vehicle performance.
Designated TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline
contains a higher level of detergents to
further aide in minimizing engine and
fuel system deposits. When available,
the usage of TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline is
recommended. Visit www.toptiergas.com for a list
of TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline retailers.
Indiscriminate use of fuel system cleaning agents
should be avoided. Many of these materials
intended for gum and varnish removal may contain
active solvents or similar ingredients. These can
harm fuel system gasket and diaphragm materials.
GASOLINE /OXYGENATE BLENDS
Some fuel suppliers blend unleaded gasoline with
oxygenates such as ethanol.
Problems that result from using gasoline
containing more than 15% ethanol (E-15) or
gasoline containing Methanol are not the
responsibility of the manufacturer and may void or
not be covered under New Vehicle Limited
Warranty.
DO NOT USE E-85 IN NON-FLEX FUEL
V
EHICLES
Non-Flex Fuel Vehicles (FFV) are compatible with
gasoline containing up to 15% ethanol (E-15). Use
of gasoline with higher ethanol content may void
the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
If a Non-FFV vehicle is inadvertently fueled with
E-85 fuel, the engine will have some or all of these
symptoms:
Operate in a lean mode
OBD II Malfunction Indicator Light on
Poor engine performance
Poor cold start and cold drivability
Increased risk for fuel system component
corrosion
CAUTION!
DO NOT use E-85, gasoline containing Methanol,
or gasoline containing more than 15% Ethanol
(E-15). Use of these blends may result in starting
and drivability problems, damage critical fuel
system components, cause emissions to exceed
the applicable standard, and/or cause the
Malfunction Indicator Light to illuminate. Please
observe pump labels as they should clearly
communicate if a fuel contains greater than
15% Ethanol (E-15).
9
22_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 345
346 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
(Continued)
CNG AND LP FUEL SYSTEM
M
ODIFICATIONS
Modifications that allow the engine to run on
Compressed Natural Gas (CNG) or Liquid Propane
(LP) may result in damage to the engine,
emissions, and fuel system components. Problems
that result from running CNG or LP are not the
responsibility of the manufacturer and may void or
not be covered under the New Vehicle Limited
Warranty.
METHYLCYCLOPENTADIENYL
M
ANGANESE TRICARBONYL (MMT) IN
G
ASOLINE
MMT is a manganese-containing metallic additive
that is blended into some gasoline to increase
octane. Gasoline blended with MMT provides no
performance advantage beyond gasoline of the
same octane number without MMT. Gasoline
blended with MMT reduces spark plug life and
reduces emissions system performance in some
vehicles.
The manufacturer recommends that gasoline
without MMT be used in your vehicle. The MMT
content of gasoline may not be indicated on the
gasoline pump; therefore, you should ask your
gasoline retailer whether the gasoline contains
MMT. MMT is prohibited in Federal and California
reformulated gasoline.
FUEL SYSTEM CAUTIONS
NOTE:
Intentional tampering with the emission control
system can result in civil penalties being assessed
against you.
CAUTION!
Follow these guidelines to maintain your
vehicle’s performance:
The use of leaded gasoline is prohibited by
Federal law. Using leaded gasoline can impair
engine performance and damage the emis-
sion control system.
An out-of-tune engine or certain fuel or ignition
malfunctions can cause the catalytic
converter to overheat. If you notice a pungent
burning odor or some light smoke, your engine
may be out of tune or malfunctioning and may
require immediate service. Contact an autho-
rized dealer for service assistance.
The use of fuel additives, which are now being
sold as octane enhancers, is not recom-
mended. Most of these products contain high
concentrations of Methanol. Fuel system
damage or vehicle performance problems
resulting from the use of such fuels or addi-
tives is not the responsibility of the manufac-
turer and may void or not be covered under
the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
CAUTION!
22_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 346
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS 347
FLUID CAPACITIES
ENGINE FLUIDS AND LUBRICANTS
US Metric
Fuel (Approximate)
Regular Cab Shortbed/Crew Quad Cab Models 26 Gallons 98 Liters
Regular Cab Longbed/Crew Quad Cab Models (Optional) 32 Gallons 121 Liters
Engine Oil With Filter
3.6L Engine 6 Quarts 5.6 Liters
5.7L Engine 7 Quarts 6.6 Liters
Cooling System
3.6L Engine 13.7 Quarts 13 Liters
5.7L Engine 18.3 Quarts 17.3 Liters
Component Fluid, Lubricant, or Genuine Part
Engine Coolant
We recommend using Mopar® Antifreeze/Coolant 10 Year/150,000 Mile
(240,000 km) Formula OAT (Organic Additive Technology).
Engine Oil – 3.6L Engine
We recommend using Mopar® SAE 5W-20 Full Synthetic Engine Oil which
meets the requirements of the manufacturer Material Standard MS-6395.
Equivalent full synthetic SAE 5W-20 engine oil can be used but must have the
API Starburst trademark Ú page 294.
Mopar® SAE 5W-30 engine oil approved to the manufacturer Material
Standard MS-6395 may be used when SAE 5W-20 engine oil meeting
MS-6395 is not available.
9
22_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 347
348 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
Engine Oil – 5.7L Engine
We recommend using Mopar® SAE 0W-20 Full Synthetic Engine Oil which
meets the requirements of the manufacturer Material Standard MS-6395.
Equivalent full synthetic SAE 0W-20 engine oil can be used but must have the
API Starburst trademark Ú page 294.
Engine Oil Filter
We recommend using a Mopar® Engine Oil Filter. If a Mopar® Engine Oil Filter
is unavailable only use filters that meet or exceed SAE/USCAR-36 Filter
Performance Requirements.
Fuel Selection – 3.6L Engine 87 Octane (R+M)/2 Method, 0-15% Ethanol.
Fuel Selection – 5.7L Engine
89 Octane Recommended - 87 Octane Acceptable (R+M)/2 Method, 0-15%
Ethanol.
Component Fluid, Lubricant, or Genuine Part
CAUTION!
Mixing of engine coolant (antifreeze) other than specified Organic Additive Technology (OAT) engine coolant (antifreeze), may result in engine damage and
may decrease corrosion protection. Organic Additive Technology (OAT) engine coolant is different and should not be mixed with Hybrid Organic Additive Tech-
nology (HOAT) engine coolant (antifreeze) or any “globally compatible” coolant (antifreeze). If a non-OAT engine coolant (antifreeze) is introduced into the
cooling system in an emergency, the cooling system will need to be drained, flushed, and refilled with fresh OAT coolant (conforming to MS.90032), by an
authorized dealer as soon as possible.
Do not use water alone or alcohol-based engine coolant (antifreeze) products. Do not use additional rust inhibitors or anti-rust products, as they may not
be compatible with the radiator engine coolant (antifreeze) and may plug the radiator.
This vehicle has not been designed for use with propylene glycol-based engine coolant (antifreeze). Use of propylene glycol-based engine coolant (antifreeze)
is not recommended.
22_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 348
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS 349
CHASSIS FLUIDS AND LUBRICANTS
Component Fluid, Lubricant, or Genuine Part
Automatic Transmission
Use only Mopar® ZF 8 & 9 Speed ATF Automatic Transmission Fluid, or
equivalent. Failure to use the correct fluid may affect the function or
performance of your transmission.
Transfer Case We recommend using Mobil LT.
Front Axle We recommend using Mopar® GL-5 Synthetic Axle Lubricant SAE 75W-85.
Rear Axle (3.21/3.55)
We recommend using Mopar® Synthetic Gear Lubricant SAE 75W-90
(MS-A0160). Limited-Slip Rear Axles require the addition of 5 oz. (148 ml)
Mopar® Limited Slip Additive (MS-10111).
Rear Axle (3.92)
We recommend using Mopar® Synthetic Gear Lubricant SAE 75W-140
(MS-8985). Limited-Slip Rear Axles require the addition of 5 oz. (148 ml)
Mopar® Limited Slip Additive (MS-10111).
Brake Master Cylinder We recommend using Mopar® DOT 3.
9
22_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 349
350
CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE
SUGGESTIONS FOR OBTAINING SERVICE
FOR YOUR VEHICLE
PREPARE FOR THE APPOINTMENT
All work to be performed may not be covered by the
warranty. Discuss additional charges with the
service manager. Keep a maintenance log of your
vehicle's service history. This can often provide a
clue to the current problem.
PREPARE A LIST
Make a written list of your vehicle's problems or the
specific work you want done. If you've had an
accident or work done that is not on your
maintenance log, let the service advisor know.
BE REASONABLE WITH REQUESTS
If you list a number of items and you must have
your vehicle by the end of the day, discuss the
situation with the service advisor and list the items
in order of priority. At many authorized dealers, you
may obtain a rental vehicle (additional charges
may apply). If you need a rental, it is advisable to
make these arrangements when you call for an
appointment.
IF YOU NEED ASSISTANCE
FCA US LLC and its authorized dealers are vitally
interested in your satisfaction. We want you to be
happy with our products and services.
Warranty service must be done by an authorized
dealer. We strongly recommend that you take the
vehicle to an authorized dealer. They know your
vehicle the best, and are most concerned that you
get prompt and high quality service. FCA US LLC’s
authorized dealers have the facilities,
factory-trained technicians, special tools, and the
latest information to ensure the vehicle is fixed
correctly and in a timely manner.
This is why you should always talk to an authorized
dealer’s service manager first. If for some reason
you are still not satisfied, talk to the general
manager or owner of the authorized dealer. They
want to know if you need assistance. If an
authorized dealer is unable to resolve the concern,
you may contact FCA US LLC's Customer
Assistance center.
Any communication to FCA US LLC's customer
center should include the following information:
Owner's name and address
Owner's telephone number (home, mobile, and
office)
Authorized dealer name
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
Vehicle delivery date and mileage
FCA US LLC C USTOMER CENTER
P.O. Box 21–8004
Auburn Hills, MI 48321–8004
Phone: (866) 726-4636
FCA C ANADA INC. CUSTOMER CENTER
P.O. Box 1621
Windsor, Ontario N9A 4H6
Phone: (800) 465-2001 English /
(800) 387-9983 French
22_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 350
CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE 351
MEXICO
Av. Prolongacion Paseo de la Reforma, 1240
Sante Fe C.P. 05109
Mexico, D. F.
In Mexico City: 800-505-1300
Outside Mexico City: +(52)55 50817568
PUERTO RICO AND US VIRGIN ISLANDS
FCA Caribbean LLC
P.O. Box 191857
San Juan 00919-1857
Phone: (866) 726-4636
Fax: (787) 782-3345
CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE FOR THE
H
EARING OR SPEECH IMPAIRED
(TDD/TTY)
To assist customers who have hearing difficulties,
the manufacturer has installed special
Telecommunication Devices for the Deaf (TDD)
equipment at its customer center. Any hearing or
speech impaired customer, who has access to a
TDD or a conventional teletypewriter (TTY) in the
United States, can communicate with FCA US LLC
by dialing 1-800-380-2479.
Canadian residents with hearing difficulties that
require assistance can use the special needs relay
service offered by Bell Canada. For TTY
teletypewriter users, dial 711 and for Voice callers,
dial 1-800-855-0511 to connect with a Bell Relay
Service operator.
SERVICE CONTRACT
You may have purchased a service contract for a
vehicle to help protect you from the high cost of
unexpected repairs after FCA US LLC's New Vehicle
Limited Warranty expires. The Mopar® Vehicle
Protection plans are the ONLY vehicle extended
protection plans authorized, endorsed and backed
by FCA US LLC to provide additional protection
beyond your vehicle’s warranty. If you purchased a
Mopar® Vehicle Protection Plan, you will receive
Plan Provisions and an Owner Identification Card in
the mail within three weeks of the vehicle delivery
date. If you have any questions about the service
contract, call the manufacturer's Service Contract
National Customer Hotline at 1-800-521-9922
(Canadian residents, call (800) 465-2001
English / (800) 387-9983 French).
FCA US LLC is not responsible for any service
contract you may have purchased from another
manufacturer. If you require service after the
FCA US LLC New Vehicle Limited Warranty expires,
please refer to the contract documents, and
contact the person listed in those documents.
We appreciate that you have made a major
investment when you purchased the vehicle. An
authorized dealer has also made a major
investment in facilities, tools, and training to
assure that you are absolutely delighted with the
ownership experience.
WARNING!
Engine exhaust (internal combustion engines
only), some of its constituents, and certain
vehicle components contain, or emit, chemicals
known to the State of California to cause cancer
and birth defects, or other reproductive harm. In
addition, certain fluids contained in vehicles and
certain products of component wear contain, or
emit, chemicals known to the State of California
to cause cancer and birth defects, or other
reproductive harm.
10
22_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 351
352 CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE
WARRANTY INFORMATION
See the Warranty Information for the terms and
provisions of FCA US LLC warranties applicable to
this vehicle and market. Refer to www.mopar.com/
om for further information.
See the Warranty Information for the terms and
provisions of FCA Canada Inc. warranties
applicable to this vehicle and market. Refer to
www.owners.mopar.ca/en for further information.
For French, refer to www.owners.mopar.ca/fr for
further information.
Use this QR code to access your
digital experience.
MOPAR® PARTS
Mopar® original equipment parts
& accessories and factory filled
fluids are available from an
authorized dealer. They are
recommended for your vehicle to keep it operating
at its best and maintain its original condition.
REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS
IN THE 50 UNITED STATES AND
W
ASHINGTON , D.C.
If you believe that your vehicle has a
defect that could cause a crash or cause
injury or death, you should immediately
inform the National Highway Traffic
Safety Administration (NHTSA) in
addition to notifying FCA US LLC.
If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it
may open an investigation, and if it finds
that a safety defect exists in a group of
vehicles, it may order a recall and
remedy campaign. However, NHTSA
cannot become involved in individual
problems between you, an authorized
dealer or FCA US LLC.
To contact NHTSA, you may call the
Vehicle Safety Hotline toll free at
1-888-327-4236 (TTY:
1-800-424-9153); or go to
http://
www.safercar.gov; or write to: Administrator,
NHTSA, 1200 New Jersey Avenue, SE.,
West Building, Washington, D.C. 20590.
You can also obtain other information
about motor vehicle safety from http://
www.safercar.gov.
IN CANADA
If you believe that your vehicle has a
safety defect, you should contact the
Customer Service Department
immediately. Canadian customers who
wish to report a safety defect to the
Canadian government should contact
Transport Canada, Motor Vehicle Defect
Investigations and Recalls at
1-800-333-0510 or go to
wwwapps.tc.gc.ca/Saf-Sec-Sur/7/
PCDB-BDPP.
22_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 352
CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE 353
PUBLICATION ORDER FORMS
To order the following manuals, you may use either
the website or the phone numbers listed below.
Service Manuals
These comprehensive Service Manuals provide a
complete working knowledge of the vehicle,
system, and/or components and is written in
straightforward language with illustrations,
diagrams, and charts.
Diagnostic Procedure Manuals
Diagnostic Procedure Manuals are filled with
diagrams, charts and detailed illustrations. These
manuals make it easy to find and fix problems on
computer-controlled vehicle systems and features.
They show exactly how to find and correct
problems, using step-by-step troubleshooting and
drivability procedures, proven diagnostic tests and
a complete list of all tools and equipment.
To order a hard copy of your Service or Diagnostic
Procedure manuals, visit:
www.techauthority.com (US and Canada).
Owner's Manuals
These Owner's Manuals have been prepared with
the assistance of service and engineering
specialists to acquaint you with specific FCA
vehicles.
To access your Owner's Information online, visit
www.mopar.com/om (US) or
www.owners.mopar.ca (Canada).
Or
Call Tech Authority toll free at:
1-800-890-4038 (US)
Owner's Manuals, Radio Manuals and Warranty
Information Books can be ordered through
Archway at:
1-800-387-1143 (Canada)
GENERAL INFORMATION
The following regulatory statement applies to all
Radio Frequency (RF) devices equipped in this
vehicle:
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules
and with Innovation, Science and Economic
Development Canada license-exempt RSS
standard(s). Operation is subject to the following
two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful
interference, and
2. This device must accept any interference
received, including interference that may
cause undesired operation.
Le présent appareil est conforme aux CNR
d`Innovation, Science and Economic Development
applicables aux appareils radio exempts de
licence. L'exploitation est autorisée aux deux
conditions suivantes:
1. l'appareil ne doit pas produire de brouillage,
et
2. l'utilisateur de l'appareil doit accepter tout
brouillage radioélectrique subi, même si le
brouillage est susceptible d'en compromettre
le fonctionnement.
La operación de este equipo está sujeta a las
siguientes dos condiciones:
1. es posible que este equipo o dispositivo no
cause interferencia perjudicial y
2. este equipo o dispositivo debe aceptar
cualquier interferencia, incluyendo la que
pueda causar su operación no deseada.
NOTE:
Changes or modifications not expressly approved
by the party responsible for compliance could void
the user’s authority to operate the equipment.
10
22_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 353
354
INDEX
A
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)
(Cruise Control)
..............................................123
Adding Engine Coolant (Antifreeze) ...............303
Adding Fuel ....................................................131
Additives, Fuel ...............................................345
Adjust
Down
...........................................................33
Forward ....................................................... 33
Rearward..................................................... 33
Up................................................................ 33
Adjustable Pedals ............................................ 37
Advance Phone Connectivity .........................190
Air Bag
Air Bag Operation
......................................235
Air Bag Warning Light ................................233
Enhanced Accident Response ......... 239, 284
Event Data Recorder (EDR) .......................284
If Deployment Occurs ................................239
Knee Impact Bolsters ................................236
Maintaining Your Air Bag System ..............240
Maintenance .............................................240
Transporting Pets ......................................260
Air Bag Light ............................... 102 , 233, 261
Air Cleaner, Engine
(Engine Air Cleaner Filter) ............................. 294
Air Conditioner Maintenance ........................ 295
Air Conditioner Refrigerant .................. 295 , 296
Air Conditioner System ................................. 295
Air Conditioning Filter ..............................61 , 296
Air Conditioning, Operating Tips .......................61
Air Filter ........................................................ 294
Air Pressure
Tires
......................................................... 328
Alarm
Security Alarm ....................................24 , 103
Alterations/Modifications
Vehicle.........................................................11
Antifreeze (Engine Coolant) ................. 302 , 347
Disposal ................................................... 304
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) ...................... 214
Anti-Lock Warning Light ................................ 107
Assist, Hill Start ............................................. 219
Audio Settings ............................................... 178
Audio Systems (Radio) .................................. 149
Auto Down Power Windows .............................70
Automatic Door Locks ......................................28
Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) .............60
Automatic Transmission ....................... 116 , 306
Adding Fluid .............................................. 306
Fluid And Filter Change ............................. 306
Fluid Change ............................................. 306
Fluid Level Check ...................................... 306
Fluid Type ........................................306 , 349
Special Additives ...................................... 306
Automatic Transmission Limp Home Mode ... 118
AutoPark ....................................................... 111
Aux Cord...........................................................66
Axle Fluid..............................................307 , 349
Axle Lubrication ............................................ 307
B
Battery
.................................................103 , 292
Charging System Light .............................. 103
Keyless Key Fob Replacement ....................17
Belts, Seat .................................................... 261
Bluetooth
Connecting To A Particular Mobile
Phone Or Audio Device After Pairing
..... 186
Body Builders Guide ...........................................9
Body Mechanism Lubrication ........................ 299
B-Pillar Location ............................................ 325
Brake Assist System ..................................... 215
Brake Control System ................................... 215
22_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 354
355
Brake Fluid
.......................................... 305 , 349
Brake System ...................................... 305 , 343
Fluid Check ...............................................305
Master Cylinder .........................................305
Parking ......................................................114
Warning Light ............................................102
Brake/Transmission Interlock .......................116
Bulb Replacement .........................................315
Bulbs, Light .......................................... 262 , 315
C
Camera
..........................................................130
Camera, Rear ................................................130
Capacities, Fluid ............................................347
Caps, Filler
Oil (Engine) ................................................290
Radiator (Coolant Pressure) ......................303
Car Washes ...................................................339
Carbon Monoxide Warning ............................263
Cargo Light ...................................................... 50
CD..................................................................180
Cellular Phone ...............................................213
Center High Mounted Stop Light ...................320
Center Seat Storage Compartment ................. 62
Chart, Tire Sizing ............................................322
Check Engine Light
(Malfunction Indicator Light)
.........................110
Checking Your Vehicle For Safety ..................260
Checks, Safety ...............................................260
Child Restraint ...............................................242
Child Restraints
Booster Seats ........................................... 245
Child Seat Installation ..................... 254 , 255
How To Stow An unused ALR Seat Belt .... 253
Infant And Child Restraints ....................... 243
Locating The LATCH Anchorages .............. 250
Lower Anchors And Tethers
For Children
......................................... 247
Older Children And Child Restraints ......... 244
Seating Positions ...................................... 246
Clean Air Gasoline ......................................... 344
Cleaning
Wheels
..................................................... 334
Climate Control ................................................54
Manual ........................................................57
Cold Weather Operation ............................... 113
Compact Spare Tire ...................................... 333
Connected Services ...................................... 192
Connected Services FAQ ............................... 207
Connected Services Features ....................... 196
Connected Services, Getting Started ............ 194
Connected Services, Introduction ................. 193
Contract, Service .......................................... 351
Controls ........................................................ 173
Cooling Pressure Cap (Radiator Cap) ............ 303
Cooling System ............................................. 302
Adding Coolant (Antifreeze) ...................... 303
Coolant Level ................................... 302 , 304
Cooling Capacity ....................................... 347
Disposal Of Used Coolant ......................... 304
Drain, Flush, And Refill ............................. 302
Inspection ................................................. 304
Points To Remember ................................ 304
Pressure Cap ............................................ 303
Radiator Cap ............................................. 303
Selection Of Coolant (Antifreeze) .....302, 347
Corrosion Protection ..................................... 339
Cruise Control (Speed Control) ...................... 123
Cruise Light .......................................... 108 , 109
Customer Assistance .................................... 350
Cybersecurity ................................................ 149
D
Daytime Running Lights ...................................47
Defroster, Rear Window ...................................57
Defroster, Windshield ................................... 261
Deleting A Phone ........................................... 186
Diagnostic System, Onboard ......................... 109
Differential, Limited Slip ................................ 122
Dipsticks
Oil (Engine) ............................................... 292
Disable Vehicle Towing ................................. 282
Disc Drive ...................................................... 180
Disconnecting ............................................... 186
Disposal
Antifreeze (Engine Coolant) ...................... 304
Disturb .......................................................... 189
Door Ajar ....................................................... 104
Door Ajar Light .............................................. 104
11
22_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 355
356
Door Locks
Automatic
.................................................... 28
Doors ............................................................... 25
Driver Memory Presets ..................................178
Driver’s Seat Back Tilt ..................................... 31
Driving
Through Flowing, Rising, Or Shallow
Standing Water
.....................................146
E
Electric Brake Control System
.......................215
Anti-Lock Brake System .............................214
Electronic Roll Mitigation ................. 216 , 220
Electrical Power Outlets ................................... 67
Electronic Range Select (ERS) .......................119
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) ...................216
Electronic Throttle Control Warning Light ......104
Electronically Shifted Transfer Case ..............120
Emergency Braking ........................................114
Emergency, In Case Of
Jump Starting ............................................276
Emission Control System Maintenance .........110
Engine ...........................................................290
Air Cleaner.................................................294
Block Heater .............................................114
Break-In Recommendations ......................114
Checking Oil Level .....................................292
Compartment .................................. 290 , 291
Compartment Identification ............ 290 , 291
Coolant (Antifreeze) .................................. 347
Exhaust Gas Caution ................................ 263
Fails To Start ............................................ 113
Flooded, Starting ...................................... 113
Fuel Requirements .......................... 344 , 347
Jump Starting ........................................... 276
Oil .................................................... 293 , 347
Oil Filler Cap ............................................. 290
Oil Filter .................................................... 294
Oil Reset ......................................................95
Oil Selection .................................... 293 , 347
Oil Synthetic ............................................. 294
Overheating .............................................. 279
Enhanced Accident Response
Feature
................................................ 239 , 284
Entry System, Illuminated ................................52
Ethanol ......................................................... 345
Exhaust Gas Cautions ................................... 263
Exhaust System ................................... 263 , 301
Exterior Lights .........................................46 , 262
F
Family Alerts ................................................. 206
Filters
Air Cleaner
................................................ 294
Air Conditioning ..................................61 , 296
Engine Oil ........................................ 294 , 347
Engine Oil Disposal ................................... 294
Flashers
Hazard Warning
........................................ 264
Turn Signals .............................. 50 , 108, 262
Flash-To-Pass ...................................................48
Flat Tire Stowage .......................................... 274
Fluid Capacities ............................................ 347
Fluid Leaks.................................................... 262
Fluid Level Checks
Brake ........................................................ 305
Engine Oil ................................................. 292
Fluid, Brake ................................................... 349
Fog Lights .............................................. 49 , 318
Fold Flat Load Floor .........................................64
Fold-Flat Seats .................................................31
Four Wheel Drive ........................................... 120
Freeing A Stuck Vehicle ................................. 281
Front Axle (Differential) ................................. 307
Fuel ............................................................... 344
Adding ...................................................... 131
Additives ................................................... 345
Clean Air ................................................... 344
Ethanol ..................................................... 345
Filler Cap (Gas Cap) .................................. 132
Gasoline ................................................... 344
Light.......................................................... 107
Materials Added ....................................... 345
Methanol .................................................. 345
Octane Rating .................................. 344 , 347
Requirements .................................. 344 , 347
Tank Capacity ........................................... 347
Fuses ............................................................ 307
22_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 356
357
G
Garage Door Opener (HomeLink)
.................... 41
Gas Cap (Fuel Filler Cap) ...............................132
Gasoline, Clean Air ........................................344
Gasoline, Reformulated .................................344
Glass Cleaning ...............................................342
Grocery Bag Retainer ....................................... 35
Gross Axle Weight Rating ...............................134
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating ..........................133
Guide
Body Builders
................................................ 9
GVWR ............................................................132
H
Hazard
Driving Through Flowing, Rising,
Or Shallow Standing Water
...................146
Hazard Warning Flashers ..............................264
Head Restraints ...............................................35
Headlights .....................................................317
Automatic .................................................... 48
Automatic High Beam .................................. 48
Cleaning ....................................................339
High Beam ..................................................48
Passing........................................................ 48
Switch ......................................................... 46
Heated Mirrors ................................................ 41
Heater, Engine Block .....................................114
Hill Start Assist ..............................................219
Hitches
Trailer Towing ........................................... 136
HomeLink (Garage Door Opener) .....................41
Hood Prop ........................................................73
Hood Release ..................................................73
I
Ignition
.............................................................19
Switch..........................................................19
Illuminated Entry ..............................................52
In Case Of Emergency ................................... 264
Inside Rearview Mirror .....................37 , 38, 264
Instrument Cluster ....................................90 , 92
Audio ...........................................................96
Descriptions ................................91 , 93, 108
Display.........................................................94
Display Controls ...........................................94
Engine Oil Reset ..........................................95
Fuel Economy ..............................................96
Menu Items ........................................96 , 101
Messages ....................................................96
Screen Setup ...............................................97
Settings .......................................................97
Speedometer ...............................................96
Trailer Tow ...................................................96
Vehicle Info ..................................................96
Instrument Cluster Display
Trip ..............................................................96
Instrument Panel Lens Cleaning ................... 342
Integrated Trailer Brake Control ................... 138
Interior Appearance Care .............................. 341
Interior Lights ...................................................51
Inverter
Power...........................................................69
iPod/USB/MP3 Control ....................................66
J
Jack Location
................................................ 268
Jack Operation .............................................. 268
Jump Starting ................................................ 276
K
Key Fob
Programming Additional Key Fobs
...............18
Key Fob Battery Service
(Remote Keyless Entry) ....................................17
Key Fob Programming
(Remote Keyless Entry) ....................................18
Keyless Enter 'n Go™ .......................................26
Passive Entry ...............................................26
Passive Entry Programming .........................26
Keys .................................................................15
L
Lane Change And Turn Signals
........................50
Lane Change Assist ..........................................50
Latches ......................................................... 262
Hood ............................................................73
Lead Free Gasoline ....................................... 344
Leaks, Fluid ................................................... 262
11
22_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 357
358
Life Of Tires
...................................................330
Light Bulbs........................................... 262 , 315
Lights......................................................52 , 262
Air Bag.................................... 102 , 233, 261
Automatic Headlights .................................. 48
Automatic High Beam .................................. 48
Brake Assist Warning ................................218
Brake Warning ..........................................102
Bulb Replacement .....................................315
Cargo..................................................50 , 107
Center Mounted Stop ................................320
Courtesy/Reading ....................................... 51
Cruise .............................................. 108 , 109
Daytime Running .........................................47
Electric Power Steering .............................104
Electronic Stability Control ........................105
Engine Temperature Warning ....................103
Exterior ......................................................262
Fog ............................................49 , 108, 318
Four Wheel Drive Indicator ........................108
Hazard Warning Flasher ............................264
Headlights ................................................... 46
High Beam .........................................48 , 109
Interior ........................................................51
Loose Fuel Filler Cap ................................ 106
Low Coolant .............................................. 106
Low Fuel ................................................... 107
Malfunction Indicator (Check Engine) ....... 104
Oil Temp Warning ..................................... 104
Park .......................................................... 108
Passing ........................................................48
Seat Belt Reminder .................................. 102
Security Alarm .......................................... 103
Service ............................................ 107 , 315
Stop/Start ................................................ 108
Tire Pressure Monitoring (TPMS) .............. 221
Tow Haul................................................... 107
Traction Control ........................................ 218
Trailer Brake Disconnected ...................... 104
Turn Signals ...........50, 108, 262, 317, 319
Warning Instrument Cluster
Descriptions
................................ 103 , 108
Washer Fluid ............................................ 105
Limited-Slip Differential ....................... 122 , 307
Load Shed Battery Saver Mode .................... 101
Load Shed Battery Saver On ......................... 101
Load Shed Electrical Load Reduction ........... 101
Load Shed Intelligent Battery Sensor ............ 101
Loading Vehicle ............................................. 132
Tires.......................................................... 325
Locks
Automatic Door ............................................28
Child Protection ...........................................28
Power Door ..................................................26
Low Tire Pressure System ............................. 221
Lubrication, Body .......................................... 299
Lug Nuts........................................................ 343
M
Maintenance Free Battery
............................ 292
Maintenance Schedule ................................. 285
Malfunction Indicator Light
(Check Engine)
.............................................. 104
Manual
Park Release
............................................ 279
Service...................................................... 353
Media Hub .......................................................66
Media Mode .................................................. 180
Methanol....................................................... 345
Mirrors .............................................................37
Electric Powered ..........................................40
Heated .........................................................41
Outside ........................................................39
Rearview ..................................... 37 , 38, 264
Trailer Towing ..............................................41
22_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 358
359
Mobile App
....................................................194
Modifications/Alterations
Vehicle
........................................................11
Monitor, Tire Pressure System .......................221
Mopar Parts ...................................................352
MP3 Control .................................................... 66
Multi-Function Control Lever ............................ 47
N
New Vehicle Break-In Period ..........................114
O
Occupant Restraints ......................................224
Octane Rating, Gasoline (Fuel) ......................344
Off-Pavement Driving (Off-Road) ....................147
Off-Road Driving (Off-Pavement) ....................147
Oil Filter, Change ...........................................294
Oil Filter, Selection .........................................294
Oil Pressure Light ..........................................104
Oil Reset .......................................................... 95
Oil, Engine ........................................... 293 , 347
Capacity ....................................................347
Checking ...................................................292
Dipstick .....................................................292
Disposal ....................................................294
Filter ................................................ 294 , 347
Filter Disposal ........................................... 294
Identification Logo .................................... 294
Materials Added To .................................. 294
Pressure Warning Light ............................ 104
Recommendation ............................ 293 , 347
Synthetic .................................................. 294
Viscosity ................................................... 347
Onboard Diagnostic System .......................... 109
Operating Precautions .................................. 109
Operator Manual
Owner's Manual
........................................ 353
Outside Rearview Mirrors ................................39
Overheating, Engine ...................................... 279
P
Paint Care ..................................................... 339
Pair (Link) Uconnect Phone To A
Mobile Phone
b
........................................ 185
Parking Brake ............................................... 114
ParkSense System, Rear .............................. 125
Passive Entry ...................................................26
Pedals, Adjustable ...........................................37
Pets .............................................................. 260
Phone Mode ................................................. 182
Pickup Box ................................................76 , 78
Placard, Tire And Loading Information .......... 325
Power
Distribution Center (Fuses) ....................... 308
Door Locks...................................................26
Inverter ........................................................69
Mirrors .........................................................40
Outlet (Auxiliary Electrical Outlet) .................67
Seats ...........................................................33
Sliding Rear Window ....................................71
Steering .................................................... 122
Sunroof ........................................................72
Windows ......................................................69
Power Seats
Down
...........................................................33
Forward .......................................................33
Rearward .....................................................33
Recline.........................................................33
Tilt................................................................33
Up ................................................................33
Power Steering Fluid ..................................... 349
Pregnant Women And Seat Belts .................. 231
Presets .......................................................... 178
Pretensioners
Seat Belts
................................................. 231
Profile Settings .............................................. 151
11
22_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 359
360
R
Radial Ply Tires
..............................................329
Radiator Cap
(Coolant Pressure Cap) ........................ 302 , 303
Radio
Presets
......................................................178
Radio Controls ...............................................173
Radio Mode ...................................................173
Radio Operation .................................. 173 , 213
Radio Remote Controls ..................................172
Rain Sensitive Wiper System ........................... 54
Rear Axle (Differential) ...................................307
Rear Camera .................................................130
Rear Cargo Area Utility Rails ............................ 77
Rear ParkSense System ................................125
Reclining Rear Seats ....................................... 32
Recreational Towing ......................................143
Shifting Into Transfer Case Neutral (N) .....144
Shifting Out Of Transfer Case
Neutral (N)
............................................145
Reformulated Gasoline ..................................344
Refrigerant ....................................................296
Registering SiriusXM Guardian ......................194
Release, Hood ................................................. 73
Reminder, Seat Belt ......................................225
Remote Features, Door Lock/Unlock .. 200, 207
Remote Features, Horn And Lights ............... 201
Remote Features, Starting ................... 200 , 209
Remote Keyless Entry ......................................16
Programming Additional Key Fobs ...............18
Remote Sound System (Radio) Control ......... 172
Remote Starting
Exit Remote Start Mode ..............................22
Uconnect Customer Programmable
Features ............................................... 164
Uconnect Settings .................................... 164
Replacement Bulbs ...................................... 315
Replacement Tires ........................................ 331
Reporting Safety Defects .............................. 352
Restraints, Child ........................................... 242
Restraints, Head ..............................................35
Roadside Assistance ............................ 201 , 208
Rotation, Tires .............................................. 337
S
Safety
........................................................... 171
Safety Checks Inside Vehicle ........................ 261
Safety Checks Outside Vehicle ..................... 262
Safety Defects, Reporting ............................. 352
Safety Features ............................................. 171
Safety Information, Tire ................................ 320
Safety Tips .................................................... 260
Safety, Exhaust Gas ...................................... 263
Satellite Radio ............................................... 174
Saved Radio Stations .................................... 178
Schedule, Maintenance ................................ 285
Seat Belt Reminder ....................................... 102
Seat Belts ............................................ 225 , 261
Adjustable Shoulder Belt .......................... 228
Adjustable Upper Shoulder Anchorage ..... 228
Adjustable Upper Shoulder Belt
Anchorage
............................................ 228
Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) ........... 232
Child Restraints ........................................ 242
Energy Management Feature ................... 231
Extender ................................................... 231
Front Seat ........................................225 , 227
Inspection ................................................. 261
Lap/Shoulder Belt Operation .................... 227
Lap/Shoulder Belt Untwisting ................... 228
Operating Instructions .............................. 227
Pregnant Women ...................................... 231
Pretensioners ........................................... 231
Reminder .................................................. 225
Seat Belt Extender .................................... 231
Seat Belt Pretensioner .............................. 231
Untwisting Procedure ................................ 228
22_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 360
361
Seat Belts Maintenance
................................341
Seats ................................................. 31 , 32, 33
Adjustment ........................................... 31 , 33
Folding Floor ............................................... 64
Power .......................................................... 33
Rear Folding ................................................ 31
Reclining Rear ............................................. 32
Tilting .......................................................... 31
Security Alarm ........................................24 , 103
Selection Of Coolant (Antifreeze) ...................347
Send & Go ........................................... 202 , 208
Sentry Key (Immobilizer) .................................. 18
Service Assistance .........................................350
Service Contract ............................................351
Service Manuals ............................................353
Settings, Audio ..............................................178
Shifting ..........................................................115
Automatic Transmission ............................116
Transfer Case, Shifting Into Transfer
Case Neutral (N)
...................................144
Transfer Case, Shifting Out Of Transfer
Case Neutral (N) ...................................145
Signals, Turn ..................................50 , 108, 262
Sirius Satellite Radio .....................................174
Favorites ...................................................177
Replay .......................................................176
SiriusXM Satellite Radio
Browse in SXM ......................................... 177
Favorites................................................... 177
Replay ...................................................... 176
Sliding Rear Window, Power ............................71
Smart Watch ................................................. 207
Snow Chains (Tire Chains) ............................ 336
Snow Plow .................................................... 142
Snow Tires .................................................... 332
SOS Call ............................................... 196 , 207
Spare Tires .................................332 , 333, 334
Speed Control
Accel/Decel
.............................................. 124
Cancel ...................................................... 124
Resume .................................................... 124
Speed Control (Cruise Control) ..................... 123
Starting ......................................................... 111
Automatic Transmission ........................... 111
Button .........................................................19
Cold Weather ............................................ 113
Engine Fails To Start ................................. 113
Starting Procedures (Gas Engines) ............... 111
Steering
Power ....................................................... 122
Tilt Column ..................................................29
Wheel, Heated .............................................29
Wheel, Tilt....................................................29
Steering Wheel Audio Controls ...................... 172
Steering Wheel Mounted Sound System ....... 172
Stolen Vehicle Assistance ....................204 , 209
Storage Compartment, Center Seat .................62
Storage, Vehicle ..................................... 61 , 338
Store Radio Presets ...................................... 178
Storing Your Vehicle ...................................... 338
Stuck, Freeing ............................................... 281
Sun Roof ..........................................................72
Sway Control, Trailer ..................................... 220
Synthetic Engine Oil ...................................... 294
T
Telescoping Steering Column ...........................29
Temperature Control, Automatic (ATC) .............60
Tilt
Down
...........................................................33
Up ................................................................33
Tilt Steering Column .........................................29
Tip Start ........................................................ 111
Tire And Loading Information Placard ........... 325
Tire Markings ................................................ 321
Tire Safety Information .................................. 320
11
22_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 361
362
Tires
..........................262 , 328, 332, 333, 337
Aging (Life Of Tires) ...................................330
Air Pressure ...............................................328
Chains .......................................................336
Compact Spare .........................................333
General Information ............... 328, 332, 333
High Speed ................................................329
Inflation Pressure ......................................328
Life Of Tires ...............................................330
Load Capacity ............................................325
Pressure Monitoring System
(TPMS) ........................................ 106 , 221
Quality Grading ..........................................337
Radial ........................................................329
Replacement .............................................331
Rotation ....................................................337
Safety .............................................. 320 , 328
Sizes..........................................................322
Snow Tires .................................................332
Spare Tires ............................. 332 , 333, 334
Spinning ....................................................330
Trailer Towing ............................................138
Tread Wear Indicators ...............................330
Wheel Nut Torque .....................................343
To Open Hood ..................................................73
Tongue Weight/Trailer Weight .......................136
Tonneau Cover .......................................83 , 339
Tonneau Cover Cleaning ................................339
Torque Specifications ................................... 343
Towing .......................................................... 133
Disabled Vehicle ....................................... 282
Guide........................................................ 136
Recreational ............................................. 143
Weight ...................................................... 136
Towing Behind A Motorhome ........................ 143
Traction......................................................... 146
Traction Control ............................................ 220
Trailer Sway Control (TSC) ............................. 220
Trailer Towing ............................................... 133
Hitches ..................................................... 136
Minimum Requirements ........................... 137
Mirrors .........................................................41
Tips........................................................... 141
Trailer And Tongue Weight ........................ 136
Wiring ....................................................... 140
Trailer Towing Guide ..................................... 136
Trailer Weight ................................................ 136
Transfer Case ............................................... 307
Electronically Shifted ................................ 120
Fluid ......................................................... 349
Transmission ................................................ 116
Automatic ........................................ 116 , 306
Fluid ......................................................... 349
Maintenance ............................................ 306
Shifting ..................................................... 115
Transporting Pets .......................................... 260
Tread Wear Indicators ................................... 330
Turn Signals .........................50 , 108, 317, 319
U
Uconnect
Phone Call Features
................................. 188
Things You Should Know About Your
Uconnect Phone ................................... 190
Uconnect Settings .................................... 164
Uconnect Phone ...................................184 , 185
Answer Or Ignore An Incoming Call —
Call Currently In Progress
..................... 189
Answer Or Ignore An Incoming Call —
No Call Currently In Progress
................ 189
Bluetooth Communication Link ................ 192
Call Continuation ...................................... 190
Call Controls ............................................. 188
Call Termination ....................................... 190
Cancel Command ..................................... 184
Connecting To A Particular Mobile
Phone Or Audio Device After Pairing
..... 186
Help Command ......................................... 184
Join Calls .................................................. 190
Making A Phone Or Audio Device
A Favorite ............................................. 187
22_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 362
363
Making A Second Call While Current
Call Is In Progress
.................................190
Managing Your Favorites ...........................187
Natural Speech .........................................184
Operation ..................................................183
Overview....................................................182
Pair (Link) Uconnect Phone To A
Mobile Phone
........................................185
Phonebook Download ...............................187
Place/Retrieve A Call From Hold ...............189
Power-Up ...................................................192
Recent Calls ..............................................188
Redial ........................................................190
To Remove A Favorite ...............................187
Toggling Between Calls .............................190
Touch-Tone Number Entry .........................188
Transfer Call To And From
Mobile Phone
........................................190
Voice Command ........................................190
Uconnect Settings
Customer Programmable Features
....26, 164
Passive Entry Programming ......................... 26
Uconnect System ...........................................169
Uniform Tire Quality Grades ...........................337
Universal Garage Door Opener
(Homelink®) — If Equipped
b
......................41
Unleaded Gasoline ....................................... 344
Untwisting Procedure, Seat Belt ................... 228
USB..................................................................66
Utility Rails, Rear Cargo Area ...........................77
V
Vehicle Finder ...................................... 203 , 208
Vehicle Health Alert ...................................... 205
Vehicle Health Report ................................... 204
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) .............. 343
Vehicle Loading ................................... 132 , 325
Vehicle Maintenance .................................... 293
Vehicle Modifications/Alterations ....................11
Vehicle Notifications ..................................... 205
Vehicle Storage .......................................61 , 338
Voice Command ...............................................30
Voice Recognition System (VR) ........................30
W
Warning Lights
(Instrument Cluster Descriptions)
................. 105
Warranty Information .................................... 352
Washers, Windshield .................................... 292
Washing Vehicle ............................................ 339
Water
Driving Through
........................................ 146
Wheel And Wheel Tire Care ........................... 334
Wheel And Wheel Tire Trim ........................... 334
Wi-Fi .............................................................. 203
Wind Buffeting .................................................71
Window Fogging ...............................................61
Windows ..........................................................69
Power...........................................................69
Reset Auto-Up ..............................................70
Windshield Defroster .................................... 261
Windshield Washers .............................. 53 , 292
Fluid................................................... 53 , 292
Windshield Wiper Blades .............................. 299
Windshield Wipers ...........................................53
Wipers Blade Replacement ........................... 299
Wipers, Rain Sensitive .....................................54
11
22_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 363
The driver’s primary responsibility is the safe operation of the vehicle. Driving while distracted can result in loss of vehicle control, resulting in
an accident and personal injury. FCA US LLC strongly recommends that the driver use extreme caution when using any device or feature that
may take their attention off the road. Use of any electrical devices, such as cellular telephones, computers, portable radios, vehicle navigation
or other devices, by the driver while the vehicle is moving is dangerous and could lead to a serious accident. Texting while driving is also
dangerous and should never be done while the vehicle is moving. If you find yourself unable to devote your full attention to vehicle operation, pull
off the road to a safe location and stop your vehicle. Some states or provinces prohibit the use of cellular telephones or texting while driving. It
is always the driver’s responsibility to comply with all local laws.
This Owner’s Manual has been prepared to help you get acquainted with your new Ram brand vehicle and to provide a convenient reference
for common questions.
Not all features shown in this manual may apply to your vehicle. For additional information on accessories to help personalize your vehicle,
visit mopar.com/om (U.S.), owners.mopar.ca (Canada) or your local Ram brand dealer.
DRIVING AND ALCOHOL
Drunk driving is one of the most frequent causes of accidents. Your driving ability can be seriously impaired with blood alcohol levels far
below the legal minimum. If you are drinking, don’t drive. Ride with a designated non-drinking driver, call a cab, a friend or use public
transportation.
WARNING
Driving after drinking can lead to an accident. Your perceptions are less sharp, your reflexes are slower and your judgment is impaired when
you have been drinking. Never drink and then drive.
WARNING: Operating, servicing and maintaining a passenger vehicle or off-highway motor
vehicle can expose you to chemicals including engine exhaust, carbon monoxide, phthalates, and
lead, which are known to the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects or other reproductive
harm. To minimize exposure, avoid breathing exhaust, do not idle the engine except as necessary,
service your vehicle in a well-ventilated area and wear gloves or wash your hands frequently when
servicing your vehicle. For more information go to www.P65Warnings.ca.gov/passenger-vehicle.
This Owner’s Manual illustrates and describes the operation of features and equipment that are either standard or optional on this vehicle.
This manual may also include a description of features and equipment that are no longer available or were not ordered on this vehicle.
Please disregard any features and equipment described in this manual that are not on this vehicle. FCA US LLC reserves the right to make
changes in design and specifications, and/or make additions to or improvements to its products without imposing any obligation upon itself
to install them on products previously manufactured.
With respect to any vehicles sold in Canada, the name FCA US LLC shall be deemed to be deleted and the name FCA Canada Inc. used in
substitution therefore.
This Owner’s Manual is intended to familiarize you with the important features of your vehicle. Your most up-to-date Owner’s Manual,
Navigation/Uconnect manuals and Warranty Booklet can be found by visiting the website on the back cover.
U.S. Residents: If you are the first registered retail owner of your vehicle, you may obtain a complimentary printed copy of the Warranty
Booklet by calling 1-866-726-4636 or by contacting your dealer. Replacement kits can be purchased by visiting www.techauthority.com.
Canadian Residents: If you are the first registered retail owner of your vehicle, you may obtain a complimentary printed copy of the
Warranty Booklet or purchase a replacement kit by calling 1-800-387-1143 or by contacting your dealer.
FIRST EDITION V1
22_DS_OM_EN_USC
©2021 FCA US LLC. All Rights Reserved. Tous droits réservés. Ram is a registered trademark of FCA US LLC.
Ram est une marque déposée de FCA US LLC. App Store is a registered trademark of Apple Inc. Google Play Store is a registered trademark of Google.
2022 RAM 1500 CLASSIC
OWNER’S MANUAL
2022 RAM 1500 CLASSIC
Whether it is providing information about specific product features, taking a tour through your vehicle’s heritage, knowing
what steps to take following an accident or scheduling your next appointment, we know you will find the app an important
extension of your Ram vehicle. Simply download the app, select your make and model and enjoy the ride. To get this app, go
directly to the App Store
®
or Google Play
®
Store and enter the search keyword “ram toolbox” (U.S. residents only).
DOWNLOAD THE MOST UP-TO-DATE OWNER’S MANUAL,
RADIO AND WARRANTY BOOKS
OWNERS.MOPAR.CA
CANADA
MOPAR.COM/OM
U.S.
